You are on page 1of 332

Supplementary Material for

A Primer of Biblical Greek


This document contains supplementary material for both students and teachers, formatted for printing and bookmarked for easy navigation.
The resources for students include • cumulative vocabulary lists • the Practice and Review exercises from the Primer set out in worksheet format with adequate blank space for writing answers • • • • quizzes on the material in each lesson five sets of additional periodic exercises several pages summarizing particular aspects of biblical Greek, and several pages of “fun with Greek”

For an overview of the student materials, with links to separate items, click here.

The resources for teachers include • An extensive Teacher’s Guide, designed to supplement the Primer by providing more detailed discussion, references to standard works on grammar, and answers to the “Practice and Review” and “English to Greek” exercises. • Separate answer keys for the additional student exercises included here For an overview of the teacher materials, with links to separate items, click here.

© 2007, 2011 N. Clayton Croy All rights reserved

Published 2007, 2011 in PDF format by Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co. 2140 Oak Industrial Drive N.E., Grand Rapids, Michigan 49505 / P.O. Box 163, Cambridge CB3 9PU U.K.

This PDF document has been prepared as a companion to A Primer of Biblical Greek by N. Clayton Croy © 1999 Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co.

Resources for Students
The tables on these pages show at a glance the student resources included in this document. Each table entry is linked to the relevant page later in the document. You may also navigate through the entire document using the bookmarks.


Cumulative Vocabulary

Practice and Review Worksheets

Helpful Handouts
• A as in Angel • Summary of General Accent

Additional Exercises

Quick Quizzes

Periodic Exercises


• The Alphabet in Large Print • Greek Vowels

QQ 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

CV 2 CV 3 CV 4 CV 5 CV 6 CV 7 CV 8 CV 9 CV 10 CV 11

P&R 2 P&R 3 P&R 4 P&R 5 P&R 6 P&R 7 P&R 8 P&R 9 P&R 10 P&R 11
• Formation of the Future Tense • Special Uses of AÔtËv • Hypo- Words • Uses of the Middle Voice • Augments • Deliver Us from Evil • Neuter Plural Subjects • K}rmen S~n Di©gw

QQ 2 QQ 3 QQ 4 QQ 5 QQ 6 QQ 7 QQ 8 QQ 9 QQ 10 QQ 11  Lessons 1-8


CV 12

P&R 12

• Principal Parts in Greek and

QQ 12

English 13 14 15 16 CV 13 CV 14 CV 15 CV 16 P&R 13 P&R 14 P&R 15 P&R 16
• English Past Tense Forms •  Story Time •  The Perfect Tense

QQ 13 QQ 14 QQ 15 QQ 16  Lessons 9-14

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Lesson 17 18

Cumulative Vocabulary CV 17 CV 18

Practice and Review Worksheets P&R 17 P&R 18

Helpful Handouts
• Flesh and Blood

Additional Exercises

Quick Quizzes QQ 17

Periodic Exercises

• Uses of Present

• Tense and Time • Uses of Aorist

QQ 18


CV 19

P&R 19

• Nuances of Adverbial

QQ 19

20 21 22 23

CV 20 CV 21 CV 22 CV 23

P&R 20 P&R 21 P&R 22 P&R 23
• P‚v in Various Constructions • Liquid Verbs • Uses of the Subjunctive • Characteristics of the


QQ 20 QQ 21 QQ 22 QQ 23

 Lessons 15-20


CV 24

P&R 24

• Uses of the Infinitive

QQ 24

25 26

CV 25 CV 26

P&R 25 P&R 26
• The Interrogative and

QQ 25 QQ 26  Lessons 21-26


CV 27

P&R 27

Indefinite Adjective/Pronoun
• The Relative Pronoun • D¾dwmi

• “Any” and “Who”

QQ 27


CV 28

P&R 28

• Hendiadys • LÖw

QQ 28

29 30

CV 29 CV 30

P&R 29 P&R 30

• T¾jhmi • The Aorist of 3Isthmi • Numbers • Comparisons

QQ 29 QQ 30


CV 31

P&R 31

• Contrary-to-Fact Conditions • “Questions, Positive and

QQ 31

Negative” 32 CV 32 P&R 32 QQ 32 Lessons 27-32

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Miscellaneous Helps and Fun with Greek

FUN WITH GREEK MISCELLANEOUS HELPS Principal Parts of Common Greek Verbs Chart Principal Parts of 50 Greek Verbs List Songs Eight Forms a Word Greek Verb Paradigm More than Time Moveable Nu Participleville Talkin’ T¾v and T¾ Logomania Lessons 1-3 Lessons 4-5 Lessons 6-7 Lessons 8-9 Lessons 10-11 Lessons 12-13 Lessons 14-15 Lessons 16-17 Lessons 18-19 Lessons 20-21 Lessons 22-23 Lessons 24-25 Lessons 26-27 Lessons 28-29 Lessons 30-32 Pointless Quizzes Lessons 1-14 Lessons 15-20 Lessons 21-32 Skits Hans and Franz

Common Biblical Greek Prepositions Greek Words for “See”

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Student Materials for


Clayton Croy.“a” as in ‡ggelov ‡ggelov blasfhm¾a g}ggraina daimËnion ›gã z«lov ¨gemon¾a jeËv !Isra©l kard¾a lËgov m}nna nŸov xÖlon Él¾gov pat©r Ó}bbi s}bbaton tËpov ÕpŸr fwn© qrËnov yuq© âsann} © 2007 N. All Rights Reserved. .

General Possibilities for Accents Antepenult Acute Penult Acute Circumflex Ultima Acute Circumflex Grave 2. by another Greek word. An acute accent on the ultima becomes a grave when the word is followed immediately. Clayton Croy..e. Penult (short penult) Acute (long penult) Circumflex Short Ultima Acute Grave 5. A grave accent is a substitute for an acute. 3. All Rights Reserved. But: {delfÌv ka¿ {delf©. The circumflex is used only over a long syllable. i.Summary of General Accent Rules 1. Possible accents when the ultima is long. Thus: {delfËv. Antepenult Penult Acute Long Ultima Acute Circumflex Grave XXXX Antepenult Acute 4. . without intervening punctuation. © 2007 N. Possible accents when the ultima is short.

s. final v. e. t.Writing the Greek Alphabet The following large font letters show clearly that Greek letters are written with reference to two lines: the line on which the letters sit and the line indicating the height of “normal” sized letters. and q. o. Note the following groups: 1. The letters that go slightly below the line are g. x. k. h. Letters that go both below and above the lines are b. j. 2. The letters that go slightly above the upper line include d. z. 4. u. and y. n. and l. f. i. r. p. . m. abgdez hjiklmn xoprsv tufqyw © 2007 N. Normal sized letters are a. Clayton Croy. and w. 3. All Rights Reserved.

.Greek Vowels Short Vowels Long Vowels a (alpha) a (alpha) e (epsilon) h (eta) i (iota) i (iota) o (omicron) w (omega) u (upsilon) u (upsilon) © 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Clayton Croy. Name the three Greek accent marks. What are the seven Greek vowels? 3. What is the Septuagint? © 2007 N.Quick Quiz — Lesson 1 1. . Write out the Greek alphabet (lower case letters) in the spaces below. 2. 4. All Rights Reserved.

did}skw. oÔq © 2007 N. ginãskw. oÔk. Ðti. gr}fw. Clayton Croy. . pisteÖw Other ka¾. jŸlw. oÔ. blŸpw. lÖw. lŸgw.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-2 Verbs {koÖw. All Rights Reserved.

10. oÔ ginãskw. {koÖw ka¿ blŸpw Ðti {delfª gr}fei.Practice and Review — Lesson 2 1. All Rights Reserved. 6. © 2007 N. oÔ jŸlw lÖein= jŸlw ginãskein Ðti {delfÌv pisteÖei. pisteÖeiv Ðti {delfÌv ka¿ {delfª blŸpousin. ginãskomen Ðti pisteÖete ka¿ jŸlete did}skein. 8. ginãskw Ðti {delfÌv lŸgei ka¿ oÔk {koÖeiv. 2. 4. lÖousi ka¿ oÔ jŸlomen blŸpein. 7. {delfÌv lŸgei Ðti jŸlei gr}fein ka¿ did}skein. Clayton Croy. {delfª did}skei ka¿ jŸlomen {koÖein. 3. 9. . lŸgeiv Ðti {delfÌv lÖei= oÔ pisteÖomen. jŸlei {delfª {koÖein. 5.

jŸlousin 3. Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person 2. Clayton Croy. . All Rights Reserved.Quick Quiz — Lesson 2 1. Translate the following sentences. ginãskete 2. pisteÖein 5. ginãskete Ðti {delfa¿ (sisters) jŸlousin {koÖein ka¿ pisteÖein. Plural blŸpei {delfÌv Ðti oÔ did}skomen ka¿ oÔ gr}fomen. Give the Present Active Indicative of pisteÖw. did}skomen 7. blŸpei 6. gr}fomen © 2007 N. {koÖein 4. 3. Tense Voice Mood/Mode Person Number 1. Parse the verb forms from the above sentences.

dËxa. . oÔk. fwn©. Clayton Croy. oÔ. blŸpw. lÖw. lŸgw. ›kklhs¾a. íra Other ka¾.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-3 Verbs {koÖw. g«. basile¾a. jŸlw. pisteÖw Nouns {delf©. ginãskw. j}lassa. kard¾a. £qw. ¨mŸra. did}skw. zw©. {l©jeia. All Rights Reserved. gr}fw. Ðti. oÔq © 2007 N.

jŸleiv ginãskein zwªn ka¿ blŸpein ¨mŸran dËxhv. . ginãskousin Ðti blŸpei {delfÌv j}lassan. Clayton Croy. £qousin {delfÌv ka¿ {delfª g«n ka¿ jŸlousin £qein basile¾av. 9. © 2007 N. oÔ did}skomen {delfªn lÖein= did}skomen kard¾an pisteÖein. 8. All Rights Reserved. 6. 5. g« ka¿ j}lassa ginãskousin Ðti kard¾ai oÔ pisteÖousin. 4. gr}fw ›kklhs¾ƒ Ðti oÔ ginãskei {l©jeian. 7. 2. 12. £qomen basile¾an dËxhv ka¿ {koÖomen fwnªn {lhje¾av. 11. ›kklhs¾ai {koÖousin. ›kklhs¾a ginãskei íran dËxhv ka¿ ¨mŸran {lhje¾av. lŸgei fwnª Ðti £qomen íran zw«v. {delfa¿ lŸgousin ›kklhs¾aiv Ðti oÔ blŸpousin íran {lhje¾av. 3.Practice and Review — Lesson 3 1. jŸlete lŸgein {l©jeian basile¾ƒ. 10. kard¾a {delf«v oÔ jŸlei pisteÖein Ðti £qete zw©n.

. Singular Nominative Genitive Dative Accusative Vocative 2. 3. gr}feiv ›kklhs¾ƒ Ðti lÖei basile¾a g«n ka¿ j}lassan. kard¾ai 2. {l©jeian 3. dËxan 4. All Rights Reserved. zw«v 5. ›kklhs¾ƒ 7. {delf© 6. Translate the following sentences. Give the declensional forms of ¨mŸra. Give the case and number of these nouns from the above sentences. kard¾ai ginãskousin {l©jeian ka¿ dËxan Ðti £qousin íran zw«v.Quick Quiz — Lesson 3 1. Case 1. basile¾a Number © 2007 N. Clayton Croy. Plural {delf©.

oÔq © 2007 N. doØlov. g«. tŸknon. oÔk. £rgon. ›kklhs¾a. j}lassa. basile¾a. pisteÖw Nouns {delf©. did}skw. gr}fw. . lËgov. Ðti. j}natov. jeËv. {l©jeia. ka¾. zw©. ¨mŸra. lŸgw. £qw. íra Other {ll}. fwn©. ‡njrwpov. dËxa. Clayton Croy.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-4 Verbs {koÖw. {delfËv. All Rights Reserved. u½Ëv. nËmov. blŸpw. jŸlw. ginãskw. oÔ. dŸ. kÖriov. oÅkov. lÖw. oÔranËv. kard¾a.

ginãskw d¡ Ðti jeÌv blŸpei kard¾an {njrãpou. did}skei nËmov jeoØ Ðti oÔranÌv £qei dËxan. 3. lŸgei {delfÌv ›kklhs¾ƒ ka¿ lŸgousin u½o¿ doÖlæ. . 10. u½oØ j}natov lÖei kard¾an {njrãpou. oÔ blŸpomen g«n jan}tou. tŸkna d¡ g«v oÔ blŸpousin oÅkon jeoØ. jŸlomen blŸpein jeoØ £rga. pisteÖomen d¡ Ðti zwªn £qei oÅkov jeoØ. KÖrie. gr}fei ‡njrwpov lËgouv zw«v {delf°. {ll~ ginãskomen ka¿ pisteÖomen Ðti basile¾a jeoØ £qei zw©n. 4. © 2007 N.Practice and Review — Lesson 4 1. 2. 5. 9. tŸkna {delf«v jŸlousi blŸpein oÔranËn. jŸlomen did}skein tŸkna. 7. did}skei kÖriov doÖlouv gr}fein lËgouv ka¿ doØloi did}skousin tŸkna. 6. Clayton Croy. {delfÌv ka¿ {delfª lŸgousin. 8. All Rights Reserved. £qete £rga nËmou. {ll~ oÔ jŸlousi ginãskein {l©jeian.

Plural tŸkna oÔranoØ oÔ did}skousin £rga nËmou {ll~ £rga {lhje¾av. Clayton Croy. kur¾oiv 5. Give the case and number of these nouns from the above sentences. Number . 3. All Rights Reserved. jeoØ 3. Singular Nominative Genitive Dative Accusative Vocative 2. u½o¾ 2. lËgouv 4.Quick Quiz — Lesson 4 1. Give the declensional forms of ‡njrwpov. Case 1. nËmou © 2007 N. Translate the following sentences. £rga 7. oÔ lŸgousin u½o¿ jeoØ lËgouv jan}tou kur¾oiv ka¿ doÖloiv. tŸkna 6.

zw©. lËgov. dËxa. fwn©. basile¾a. lamb}nw. {delfËv. ‰giov. All Rights Reserved. íra Adjectives {gajËv. oÔk. kalËv. kakËv. £qw.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-5 Verbs {koÖw. oÔq © 2007 N. kard¾a. dŸ. kÖriov. nekrËv. ›kklhs¾a. nËmov. oÅkov. ponhrËv. did}skw. . pisteÖw Nouns {delf©. ‡njrwpov. pråtov Other {ll}. £rgon. £sqatov. lÖw. d¾kaiov. doØlov. blŸpw. tŸknon. (Ê. ginãskw. j}natov. lŸgw. u½Ëv. pistËv. tË). Ðti. mikrËv. oÔ. ka¾. ¨. g}r. oÔranËv. g«. jŸlw. Clayton Croy. gr}fw. j}lassa. jeËv. {l©jeia. ¨mŸra.

9. Clayton Croy. ¨ mikr~ {delfª oÔ jŸlei blŸpein tÌ tŸknon tÌ nekrËn. 2. 7. 4. © 2007 N. 10. Ê g~r j}natov oÔ kalËv. 3. . 5. pistª ¨ kard¾a toØ mikroØ doÖlou. {ll~ kak~ t~ £rga toØ kur¾ou toØ oÂkou. o½ {delfo¿ o½ ponhro¿ oÔ lamb}nousi tªn {l©jeian toØ jeoØ. Ê u½Ìv Ê pråtov did}skei t~ mikr~ tŸkna gr}fein. 8. dika¾a ¨ basile¾a ka¿ pisto¿ o½ ‡njrwpoi t«v basile¾av. 6. oÔ g~r blŸpousi t~ {gaj~ t«v zw«v. ¨ ›sq}th basile¾a oÔk £qei nËmouv kakoÖv. a½ ¨mŸrai ponhra¿ {ll~ Ê oÅkov toØ kur¾ou ‰giov. 11. {ll~ ¨ ›kklhs¾a jŸlei {koÖein t«v fwn«v toØ ›sq}tou {njrãpou. d¾kaiov ka¿ ‰giov Ê kÖriov toØ oÔranoØ. 12. lŸgousin Ðti pisteÖousi tê lËgæ toØ jeoØ. o½ nekro¿ oÔk £qousin dËxan. £rga d¡ kal~ oÔk £qousin. Ê pråtov ‡njrwpov lŸgei t° ›kklhs¾ƒ. ¨ g« {gajª Ðti Ê kÖriov t«v g«v £qei doÖlouv {gajoÖv. All Rights Reserved.Practice and Review — Lesson 5 1.

Using the words Ê. Ê jeÌv d¾kaiov ka¿ Ê jeÌv jŸlei t~ mikr~ tŸkna £qein {gajªn zw©n. and kalËv. Greek Attributive #1 Attributive #2 Predicate #1 Predicate #2 English 2. Translate each into English. . Ê nËmov ‰giov. {ll~ tÌ £sqaton £rgon jeoØ lÖein tÌn j}naton.Quick Quiz — Lesson 5 1. Translate the following paragraph. show two constructions with the attributive adjective and two with the predicate adjective. lËgov. ginãskomen Ðti Ê j}natov kakÌv ka¿ ¨ zwª kal©. tÌ pråton £rgon {njrãpwn Ê j}natov. Ê g~r nËmov did}skei Ðti £qousin o½ pisto¿ zw©n. {ll~ lamb}nousin o½ ponhro¿ j}naton ka¿ o½ nekro¿ oÔ blŸpousin oÔranËn.

lamb}nw. g}r. nËmov. lËgov. ÊdËv. ‰giov. ¨. All Rights Reserved. {delf©. pŸmpw. b}llw. ¨mŸra. {l©jeia. basile¾a. u½Ëv. dËxa. lÖw. majht©v. £qw. oÔranËv. ka¾. jeËv. ginãskw. j}lassa. lŸgw. j}natov. did}skw. gr}fw.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-6 Verbs {koÖw. £rhmov. (Ê. kËsmov. tË). Clayton Croy. {delfËv. jŸlw. d¾kaiov. ponhrËv. ‡njrwpov. di}. kalËv. kakËv. íra Adjectives {gajËv. . pistËv. ›kklhs¾a. mŸnw. l¾jov. prof©thv. dŸ. £sqatov. tŸknon. prËv Other {ll}. fwn©. mikrËv. ›n. per¾. oÅkov. Ðti. nekrËv. e¼v. kard¾a. doØlov. kÖriov. g«. blŸpw. (oÔ. zw©. oÔk. £rgon. oÔq) © 2007 N. ›k. met}. pisteÖw Nouns ‡ggelov. pråtov Prepositions {pË.

7. Clayton Croy. 13. 2. . £qeiv kalo×v lËgouv {pÌ jeoØ ka¿ blŸpeiv tªn dËxan t«v basile¾av. 14. 12. ›n t° írƒ t«v dËxhv lŸgei Ê kÖriov prÌv t~v kard¾av tån tŸknwn. di~ toØ {ggŸlou toØ kur¾ou {koÖete per¿ t«v ÊdoØ t«v zw«v. 6. met~ tÌn nËmon ka¿ to×v prof©tav jŸlomen {koÖein toØ lËgou toØ {delfoØ. oÔ ginãskomen t~v Êdo×v toØ jeoØ ›n tê kËsmæ {ll~ pisteÖomen tê jeê. Ê jeÌv mŸnei ›n toÀv oÔranoÀv. 3. oÔk ›x £rgwn toØ nËmou lamb}nei ‡njrwpov zwªn {p’ oÔranoØ. b}llei d¡ to×v ponhro×v {ggŸlouv e¼v tªn g«n. o½ per¿ tÌn prof©thn ‡njrwpoi mŸnousi met~ tån majhtån. 4. ›n t° ›r©mæ did}skei Ê u½Ìv toØ |g¾ou t~v {delf~v per¿ toØ nËmou. 11. © 2007 N. All Rights Reserved. 8. o½ {gajo¿ prof«tai ginãskousi tªn {l©jeian per¿ t«v zw«v ka¿ toØ jan}tou. pŸmpomen to×v {delfo×v to×v kako×v ›k t«v ›kklhs¾av ka¿ e¼v tªn £rhmon. 10. met~ tån tŸknwn a½ {delfa¿ b}llousi l¾jouv e¼v tªn j}lassan. prof«ta. ›n t° ›sq}t¬ ¨mŸrƒ pŸmpei Ê kÖriov to×v {ggŸlouv {p’ oÔranoØ ka¿ o½ ‡ggeloi lamb}nousi to×v pisto×v ›k toØ kËsmou. 5.Practice and Review — Lesson 6 1. di’ {njrãpouv kako×v lŸgomen prÌv tÌn jeËn. 9.

” i. a personification of evil: the devil or Satan. . 2 Corinthians 1:10 (“death”). Evil in that context could refer either to the final. 2 Timothy 3:11 (“persecutions”). “Lead us not into temptation. in which the devil leads an assault on the faithful).g.. The masculine would mean “Rescue us from the Evil One. Chrysostom) construed it as masculine. 5:18.. and perhaps 5:37). e. or to the evil that the one praying might commit. pp. Finally. 2 Timothy 4:18 (“every evil work”). Sources: See especially Gerhard Kittel. Clayton Croy. See. most Greek church fathers (Cyprian. ed. Matt 13:19. Augustine and most Latin church fathers favored the neuter. The parallel petition. Theological Dictionary of the New Testament (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans. An early Christian writing echoes the last petition of the Lord’s Prayer and treats evil as an abstraction (Didache 10:5. temptation. The neuter is supported by many New Testament passages (but see the masculine in 1 John 2:13. 560-61. the object is almost always human or an impersonal force. 1968).” is used.“Deliver Us from Evil” The last petition of the Lord’s Prayer in Matthew 6:13 says: {ll~ ÓØsai ¨m‚v {pÌ toØ ponhroØ..e. eschatological tribulation. in the New Testament when the expression “deliver from .. All Rights Reserved. Matthew 6:13 is a hard call. “But deliver us from evil/the Evil One. but the neuter seems more likely. 38.” i. Vol. © 2007 N. “Deliver the church from all evil”).e. There are also countless references in Jewish prayers to evil as an impulse. and 2 Peter 2:9 (“temptation”). or event.” also seems to favor impersonal evil (although some have seen this as a reference to the final tribulation or time of testing. without necessarily envisioning a personified evil being. The debate is ancient. Origen. the abstract force of evil. .” Is the adjective ponhroØ neuter or masculine? The neuter would mean “Rescue us from evil. 6. .

© 2007 N.) evident. Modern Greek Neuter plural never has a singular verb. Matthew 6:33 ka¿ taØta p}nta prostej©setai ÕmÀn And all these things (pl.) believe (pl. . Clayton Croy. Mark 3:11 t~ pneÖmata t~ {k}jarta Ðtan aÔtÌn ›jŸwroun Whenever the unclean spirits (pl.) will be added (sing. Even the demons (pl.) him .) to you.). All Rights Reserved. Biblical Greek Examples Neuter Plural Subject with a Singular Verb 1 John 3:10 ›n toÖtæ faner} ›stin t~ tŸkna toØ jeoØ In this the children (pl. .Neuter Plural Subjects Attic Greek Neuter plural regularly has a singular verb. Neuter Plural Subject with a Plural Verb James 2:19 ka¿ t~ daimËnia pisteÖousin. Koinē Greek Neuter plural usually has a singular verb.) of God are (sing. .) beheld (pl.

Ê prof©thv pŸmpei to×v l¾jouv ›k t«v g«v ka¿ prÌv tªn £rhmon. Clayton Croy. di~ tÌ £rgon toØ prof©tou mŸnei ¨ dËxa jeoØ per¿ tªn ›kklhs¾an tån majhtån. Ê d¡ d¾kaiov prof©thv blŸpei to×v l¾jouv ›n t° Êdê ka¿ lamb}nei to×v l¾jouv {pÌ t«v ÊdoØ. ‡njrwpov kakÌv b}llei l¾jouv e¼v tªn ÊdÌn tån pistån majhtån. {p! oÔranoØ prÌv g«n di~ t«v jal}sshv met~ tån |g¾wn di~ tªn dËxan toØ jeoØ met~ tªn ›sq}thn íran 2.Quick Quiz — Lesson 6 1. Translate the following prepositional phrases. © 2007 N. Translate the following paragraph. . All Rights Reserved.

e¼m¾. per¾. ploÀon. pŸmpw. All Rights Reserved. -Ë). e¼v. oÅkov. pråtov Prepositions {pË. met}. £rhmov. ginãskw. doØlov. ‡njrwpov. tŸknon. Îqlov. kakËv. lamb}nw. . basile¾a. oÔk. kalËv. ‰giov. ¨mŸra. ÊdËv. zw©. ponhrËv. b}llw. jŸlw. did}skw. j}lassa. £qw. íra Adjectives {gajËv. pistËv. nekrËv. l¾jov. tË). g«. majht©v. j}natov. |mart¾a. Clayton Croy. sézw Nouns {g}ph. ›gã. ‡rtov. sÖ © 2007 N. (Ê. pisteÖw. nËmov. (oÔ. kËsmov. mikrËv. lÖw. oÔranËv. dËxa. £rgon. kard¾a. oÔq) Pronouns (aÔtËv. d¾kaiov. gr}fw. di}. lŸgw. prof©thv. {l©jeia.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-7 Verbs {koÖw. blŸpw. prËv Other {ll}. ›kklhs¾a. -©. yuq©. ›n. dåron. ›k. Ðti. ka¾. dŸ. ›sj¾w. ‡ggelov. ¨. kÖriov. {delf©. u½Ëv. {delfËv. kat}. fwn©. mŸnw. g}r. jeËv. £sqatov. lËgov.

Practice and Review — Lesson 7 1. 5. Ê majhtªv oÔk £qei tªn |mart¾an. ¨ dika¾a {koÖei t«v fwn«v t«v {lhje¾av ka¿ sézei tªn yuqªn aÔt«v ›k jan}tou. ¨ {g}ph toØ jeoØ sézei Õm‚v {pÌ t«v |mart¾av Õmån. . ›sj¾ei Ê Îqlov tÌn ‡rton t«v g«v. did}skei g~r kat~ tÌn nËmon toØ jeoØ. ›gä d¡ pisteÖw Ðti Ê kÖriov jŸlei sézein se. ¨ {g}ph t«v |mart¾av mŸnei ›n so¾. 8. a½ yuqa¿ Õmån £qousin |mart¾an Ðti ›sj¾ete tÌn ‡rton tån tŸknwn. 9. 4. met~ soØ o½ u½o¿ t«v basile¾av e¼s¾n. prof©thv pistÌv oÔ did}skei kat~ toØ nËmou. ¨ {delf© sou ka¿ tÌ tŸknon aÔt«v e¼sin ›n tê plo¾æ {ll’ oÔk £qousin ‡rton. lŸgete lËgon kat~ toØ kur¾ou toØ oÔranoØ. 12. 2. ginãskomen Ðti s× eÅ Ê ‡ggelov t«v zw«v. 6. 7. o½ doØloi ¨mån b}llousi l¾jouv e¼v tÌ ploÀon Ðti aÔtÌ jŸlousi lÖein. 3. {ll’ oÔk £qousi t~ dåra toØ oÔranoØ. oÔ lamb}nomen dåra {pÌ toØ jeoØ kat~ t~ £rga ¨mån {ll~ kat~ tªn {g}phn aÔtoØ. 11. 10.

14. All Rights Reserved.13. . di~ tÌn Îqlon tÌn ponhrÌn pŸmpei Ê jeÌv to×v doÖlouv aÔtoØ e¼v tÌn oÅkon. © 2007 N. Clayton Croy. lŸgeiv Ðti ›gã e¼mi Ê ‰giov. s× d¡ oÔ blŸpeiv tªn basile¾an mou.

blŸpete K}rmen ›n t° Êdê. oÚ. oÔ pŸmpomen K}rmen e¼v to×v oÔranoÖv. pŸmpete K}rmen {pÌ t«v g«v e¼v to×v oÔranoÖv.PoØ ›n tê kËsmæ ›st¿n K}rmen S~n Di©gw. pŸmpousi K}rmen di~ t«v›r©mou ka¿ per¿ tªn g«n ka¿ prÌv tÌn jeÌn toØ oÔranoØ. © 2007 N. oÚ. PoØ ›stin K}rmen S~n Di©gw. K}rmen £qei zwªn met~ tån tŸknwn t«v dËxhv ›n t° ›kklhs¾ƒ. poØ mŸnei K}rmen. oÚ. oÚ. £qei K}rmen zwªn met~ tån profhtån ›n t° ›r©mæ. pisteÖete Ðti K}rmen ›st¿n ›n t° kard¾ƒ t«v jal}sshv. Clayton Croy. mŸnei K}rmen met~ l¾jon. All Rights Reserved. b}llousin ‡njrwpoi kako¿ K}rmen ›k t«v basile¾av. K}rmen ›st¿n met~ tån doÖlwn ›n t° |g¾ƒ g°. oÚ. oÔ blŸpomen K}rmen ›n t° Êdê. oÔ jŸlomen pisteÖein Ðti K}rmen ›st¿n ›n t° kard¾ƒ t«v jal}sshv. .

jŸlomen sézein aÔto×v Ðti £qomen tªn {g}phn toØ jeoØ ›n taÀv kard¾aiv ¨mån. ¨ {g}ph ›st¿n {pÌ toØ jeoØ. jŸlomen pŸmpein tÌn ‡rton prÌv to×v {delfo×v ¨mån.Quick Quiz — Lesson 7 1. gr}fomen lËgouv {lhje¾av ÕmÀn ka¿ toÀv tŸknoiv Õmån. ›gä oÔ lŸgw kat~ toØ u½oØ toØ {njrãpou. Clayton Croy. s× eÅ prof©thv ka¿ t~ £rga soÖ e¼sin ‰gia. . Translate the following paragraph. © 2007 N. Ê ‡rtov t«v g«v ›stin dåron {pÌ toØ oÔranoØ. 2. {ll! ¨meÀv oÔ jŸlomen ›sj¾ein aÔtËn. Translate the following sentences. did}skeiv kat~ tÌn nËmon toØ oÔranoØ. ¨ g~r j}lassa lÖei t~ ploÀa aÔtån ka¿ a½ yuqa¿ aÔtån oÔ ginãskousin {g}phn. All Rights Reserved. Ê Îqlov ›sj¾ei tÌn ‡rton.

u½Ëv. per¾. j}natov. oÅkov. ›n. ÊdËv. oÔk. majht©v. lÖw. ›sj¾w. mikrËv. lamb}nw. Ðti. blŸpw. did}skw. e¼r©nh. -©. pråtov Prepositions {pË.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-8 Verbs {koÖw. gr}fw. ›gã. ‡njrwpov. prof©thv. oÔranËv. ›kklhs¾a. ‡ggelov. mŸnw. £rgon. £qw. ›ge¾rw. g}r. {delf©. sÖ. ka¾. l¾jov. zw©. {delfËv. . kÖriov. d¾kaiov. {postŸllw. -Ë). ‡rtov. prËv Other {ll}. ponhrËv. ‡llov. basile¾a. tŸknon. ›keÀnov © 2007 N. doØlov. prËswpon. pŸmpw. |mart¾a. All Rights Reserved. dŸ. yuq©. b}llw. (Ê. £rhmov. oÜtwv Pronouns (aÔtËv. oÞn. ¨. ‰giov. dåron. met}. fwn©. kard¾a. kakËv. nekrËv. kat}. g«. e¼v. íra Adjectives {gajËv. jeËv. Clayton Croy. ›k. oÔq). di}. kalËv. dËxa. eÕr¾skw. lËgov. ginãskw. £sqatov. kËsmov. pisteÖw. tË). {l©jeia. sézw Nouns {g}ph. Îqlov. ploÀon. e¼m¾. bapt¾zw. j}lassa. ¨mŸra. ›xous¾a. jŸlw. kr¾nw. oßtov. (oÔ. nËmov. laËv. pistËv. lŸgw.

ÕmeÀv d¡ oÔk £qete ›xous¾an kr¾nein ¨m‚v. 6. 9. 5. 2. Clayton Croy. . oÔ blŸpete ¨m‚v prËswpon prÌv prËswpon {ll~ gr}fete to×v lËgouv toÖtouv ¨mÀn. !Ege¾rw ‡ggelon jan}tou di~ to×v kako×v {ll~ pŸmpw zwªn toÀv pistoÀv. Ê jeÌv {postŸllei toØton tÌn prof©thn e¼v tÌn laËn. ›n t° írƒ ›ke¾n¬ Ê kÖriov pŸmpei to×v {ggŸlouv aÔtoØ e¼v tÌn kËsmon eÕr¾skein tªn ‰gian {delf©n. ›n t° ¨mŸrƒ ›ke¾n¬ Ê jeÌv aÔtÌv ›ge¾rei to×v nekro×v ka¿ o½ Îqloi t«v g«v {koÖousi tªn aÔtªn fwn©n. ¨meÀv £qomen ›xous¾an bapt¾zein. 3. t~ tŸkna t«v g«v ›ke¾nhv oÔq eÕr¾skousin tªn e¼r©nhn Ðti ¨ kard¾a toØ laoØ ›sti kak©. © 2007 N. £qomen tªn {g}phn tªn aÔtªn ›n taÀv kard¾aiv ¨mån ka¿ aÔtÌv Ê prof©thv ginãskei toØto. oÜtwv lŸgei Ê kÖriov. 4. 8. 7.Practice and Review — Lesson 8 1. {postŸllw toÖtouv to×v majht~v bapt¾zein t~ tŸkna t~ mikr}. All Rights Reserved.

11. © 2007 N.10. All Rights Reserved. 12. . 14. ¨meÀv d¡ blŸpomen tªn dËxan ‡llou kËsmou ›n toÀv oÔranoÀv. oßtov Ê kËsmov mŸnei ›n |mart¾ƒ. ginãskomen tªn e¼r©nhn toØ jeoØ= ›sj¾omen oÞn tÌn aÔtÌn ‡rton ›n tê aÔtê oÂkæ. oÔ jŸlete {koÖein ¨mån t«v fwn«v= ¨meÀv oÞn lŸgomen toÖtouv to×v lËgouv ‡lloiv. 13. ›keÀnoi d¡ o½ {delfo¿ oÔ mŸnousin ›n t° ›kklhs¾ƒ t«v {l©jeiav. d¾kaiov Ê kÖriov= kr¾nei oÞn tªn basile¾an ›ke¾nhn kat~ tªn {l©jeian. did}skomen ka¿ pisteÖomen t~ aÔt}. Clayton Croy.

2. and there are varieties of activities. . . To write the same [things] to you is not troublesome for me. Not all flesh [is] the same flesh. 2. . Intensive Use — Predicate Position with a Noun — “. For the Holy Spirit will teach you in that very hour (the hour itself). ka¿ Ê aÔtÌv kÖriov= and there are varieties of ministries. for you yourselves have been taught by God. e¼s«ljen . . Intensive Use — With a Pronoun or Implied Subject — “. oÔrano¿ ka¿ ¨ g« tê aÔtê lËgæ tejhsaurismŸnoi e¼s¾n pur¾ (2 Pet 3:7) The heavens and the earth by the same word have been reserved for fire. and the same Lord. And I exhort you. Identical Use — Used without a Noun — “Same” 1. . but the same God. Ê d¡ aÔtÌv jeËv (1 Cor 12:4-6). . . ka¿ diairŸseiv diakoniån e¼sin. t~ aÔt~ gr}fein ÕmÀn ›mo¿ m¡n oÔk ÉknhrËn (Phil 3:1). e¼v aÔtÌn tÌn oÔranËn (Heb 9:24) Christ entered into heaven itself. ka¿ diairŸseiv ›nerghm}twn e¼s¾n. Peter raised him. . but the same Spirit. 3. All Rights Reserved. believe [me]. © 2007 N. parakalå d¡ Õm‚v. . . . oÔ p‚sa s~rx ¨ aÔtª s}rx (1 Cor 15:39). {delfo¾. self/selves” 1. “I myself am also a human being. brothers [and sisters] that you all say the same thing. o½ . . aÔto¿ g~r ÕmeÀv jeod¾dakto¾ ›ste (1 Thess 4:9).” 2. . . saying . QristËv . 3. . Ãna tÌ aÔtÌ lŸghte p}ntev (1 Cor 1:10). You do not have need [for us] to write to you. .Special Uses of aÔtËv — NT Examples Identical Use — Attributive Position with a Noun — “Same” 1. . Clayton Croy. diairŸseiv d¡ qarism}twn e¼s¾n. PŸtrov ±geiren aÔtÌn lŸgwn . . Because of the works themselves. self/selves” 1. tÌ g~r ‰gion pneØma did}xei Õm‚v ›n aÔt° t° írƒ (Luke 12:12). tÌ d¡ aÔtÌ pneØma= There are varieties of gifts. 2. di~ t~ £rga aÔt~ pisteÖete (John 5:36). oÔ qre¾an £qete gr}fein ÕmÀn. ka¿ ›gä aÔtÌv ‡njrwpËv e¼mi (Acts 10:26).

Translate the following phrases and sentences. oÜtwv eÕr¾skomen zwªn ka¿ blŸpomen tÌ prËswpon toØ jeoØ ›n toÀv {delfoÀv ka¿ taÀv {delfaÀv ¨mån. 2. aÔtÌv Ê ‡njrwpov did}skei tÌn aÔtÌn nËmon. jŸlomen bapt¾zein tÌn laËn. ¨ {delfª aÔtª kr¾nei tÌn laËn. All Rights Reserved. Ê aÔtÌv jeÌv pŸmpei e¼r©nhn e¼v ¨m‚v.Quick Quiz — Lesson 8 1. {ll! Ê jeÌv aÔtÌv ›ge¾rei ‡llon kÖrion ka¿ {postŸllei toØton tÌn kÖrion prÌv tªn g«n ¨mån kr¾nein aÔt©n. . ›keÀnov Ê doØlov ka¿ oßtov Ê kÖriov ›n taÖt¬ t° basile¾ƒ ka¿ ›n ›ke¾n¬ t° g° £qousin t~ ploÀa t~ aÔt}. Translate the following paragraph. ›ke¾nh ¨ e¼r©nh ›st¿n oÅkov ‰giov per¿ tÌn laËn. Ê d¡ kÖriov t«v g«v taÖthv lŸgei Ðti oÔk £qomen tªn ›xous¾an bapt¾zein. Clayton Croy. £qete tªn aÔtªn e¼r©nhn. © 2007 N.

oÔ g~r did}skei kat~ tÌn nËmon t«v {g}phv. lŸgete t° {delf° ¨mån Ðti ›xous¾an £qete kr¾nein tªn kard¾an aÔt«v= ginãskomen d¡ Ðti oÔ lŸgete tªn {l©jeian. 8. mŸnei g~r Ê j}natov ›n t° g° ka¿ lÖei t~v yuq~v tån dika¾wn. met~ taØta o½ u½o¿ t«v dËxhv {koÖousin fwn«v ›k tån oÔranån ka¿ pisteÖousin e¼v tÌn kÖrion. oßtoi o½ doØloi jŸlousin ›sj¾ein ‡rton ›n tê oÂkæ. 4. 3. 6. 7. gr}fw to×v aÔto×v lËgouv tê majht° ›ke¾næ. {gaj~ t~ dåra toØ oÔranoØ.Periodic Exercises — Set #1 (emphasizing Lessons 1-8) 1. {ll~ Ê ponhrÌv kÖriov aÔtån b}llei aÔtÌn e¼v tªn j}lassan. 2. 10. All Rights Reserved. jŸlei ›keÀnov Ê prof©thv bapt¾zein t~ tŸkna t~ mikr}. . ›n t° írƒ aÔt° ›ge¾rei Ê jeÌv to×v nekro×v ka¿ {postŸllei to×v {ggŸlouv aÔtoØ lamb}nein to×v |g¾ouv. pŸmpomen tÌn pistÌn {delfÌn di~ t«v ›r©mou lŸgein ÕmÀn tªn {l©jeian ka¿ sézein Õm‚v {pÌ tån |martiån Õmån. 5. ›n taÀv ›sq}taiv ¨mŸraiv o½ ponhro¿ eÕr¾skousin l¾jouv ›n t° ›r©mæ ka¿ b}llousin aÔto×v e¼v tªn ›kklhs¾an. ¨ basile¾a oÔk £qei tªn e¼r©nhn. © 2007 N. kak~ d¡ t~ £rga toØ {njrãpou t«v |mart¾av. Clayton Croy. 9.

{koÖousi t«v fwn«v aÔt«v ka¿ kr¾nousi to×v lËgouv aÔt«v ›n taÀv kard¾aiv aÔtån. © 2007 N. 13. oÜtwv g~r oÔk £stin ¨ ÊdÌv toØ jeoØ.11. 14. . {ll~ mŸnw ›n t° Êdê t«v zw«v ka¿ pisteÖw tê jeê. Ê laÌv oÞn oÔ blŸpei t~ prËswpa aÔtån. 12. 15. t~ tŸkna e¼s¿n ›n tê plo¾æ met~ tån majhtån. o½ pråtoi ›n t° g° oÔ lamb}nousin dËxan ka¿ dåra {pÌ tån |g¾wn. lŸgei per¿ toÖtwn ¨ {delf© sou prÌv to×v Îqlouv. All Rights Reserved. ›n tê kËsmæ toÖtæ oÔ blŸpw £rga pist}. Clayton Croy. {postŸllete ‡llouv doÖlouv did}skein ›keÀna t~ tŸkna.

›xous¾a. tË). mikrËv. ‡rqw. kat}. mŸnw. oÅkov. dŸ. sÖ. blŸpw. g¾nomai. oÜtwv Pronouns (aÔtËv. jeËv. d¾kaiov. ÊdËv. ¨mŸra. prof©thv. dËxa. {delf©. ‡njrwpov. |martwlËv. ‡ggelov. ›xŸrqomai. £sqatov. oÔ. ›sj¾w. £qw. j}lassa. per¾. ponhrËv. e¼sŸrqomai. oÞn. ›k. oÔranËv. {delfËv. kalËv. e¼r©nh. ‡llov. pŸmpw. ginãskw. did}skw. lŸgw. ¨. ›keÀnov © 2007 N. fwn©. íra Adjectives {gajËv. lËgov. di}. ‰giov. jŸlw. dåron. |mart¾a. nËmov. basile¾a. lÖw. {pokr¾nomai. sézw Nouns {g}ph. laËv.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-9 Verbs {koÖw. oßtov. ›n. ›gã. zw©. lamb}nw. kakËv. g«. l¾jov. Ë). dÖnamai. oÔq. oÔdŸ. oÔk. kard¾a. diŸrqomai. b}llw. pisteÖw. sÖn. met}. j}natov. majht©v. £rhmov. ‡rtov. Clayton Croy. kr¾nw. pistËv. ›ge¾rw. All Rights Reserved. ploÀon. gr}fw. £rqomai. e¼v. pråtov Prepositions {pË. ©. (Ê. . prËv. ÕpË Other {ll}. {postŸllw. poreÖomai. nekrËv. u½Ëv. ka¾. g}r. {l©jeia. doØlov. kÖriov. prËswpon. tŸknon. £rgon. bapt¾zw. yuq©. ›kklhs¾a. e¼m¾. Ðti. kËsmov. eÕr¾skw. Îqlov.

5. 3. ‡rqesje pisteÖein ›n taÀv kard¾aiv Õmån. met~ taØta £rqetai Ê ‡ggelov toØ kur¾ou ka¿ o½ nekro¿ ›ge¾rontai. e¼sŸrqontai t~ t¡kna e¼v tÌn oÂkon s×n toÀv majhtaÀv. {ll’ oÔk ›xŸrqesje ›k t«v ÊdoØ t«v |mart¾av. ›n t° ¨mŸrƒ ›ke¾n¬ ploÀa lÖontai ka¿ ¨ j}lassa oÔ dÖnatai eÕr¾skesjai. 6. © 2007 N. 11. ¨ e¼r©nh prÌv tÌn jeËn ›sti dåron. ¨meÀv d¡ didaskËmeja ÕpÌ toØ jeoØ aÔtoØ.Practice and Review — Lesson 9 1. aÔto¿ dÖnantai sézesjai. oÔ jŸlw ‡rqein t«v basile¾av taÖthv= poreÖomai oÞn prÌv ‡llhn g«n. All Rights Reserved. o½ ponhro¿ |martwlo¿ oßtoi ›xŸrqontai e¼v tÌn prof©thn. Clayton Croy. Ê Îqlov g¾netai mikrÌv Ðti kako¿ |martwlo¿ e¼sŸrqontai e¼v tªn ›kklhs¾an. 4. 9. 2. 8. ‡njrwpov oÔ g¾netai d¾kaiov ›x £rgwn. 10. 7. dierqËmeja di~ t«v ›r©mou {ll’ oÔk £qomen ‡rton oÔd¡ blŸpomen tªn j}lassan. ÕmeÀv d¡ oÔk {pokr¾nesje aÔt°. . ¨ {delfª ¨mån jŸlei ginãskein tªn {l©jeian per¿ toØ u½oØ aÔt«v. ÕmeÀv {koÖete t«v fwn«v {ggŸlou.

12. {ll’ oÔ jŸlomen diŸrqesjai taÖthn tªn g«n. poreuËmeja prÌv tªn j}lassan. . Ê {delfÌv Õmån oÔk {pokr¾netai tê laê met’ {g}phv= kr¾netai oÞn ÕpÌ toØ laoØ. 14. Clayton Croy. © 2007 N. All Rights Reserved. s×n t° {delf° sou £rq¬ prÌv tÌn prof©thn bapt¾zesjai Õp’ aÔtoØ. 13.

“cartilage of the breastbone. “under” + qËndrov.English Derivatives from Greek ÕpË Hypoallergenic — having little chance of causing an allergic response Hypodermic — pertaining to injection beneath the skin Hypoglycemia — abnormally low blood sugar level Hypothermia — abnormally low body temperature Hypochondria — morbid concern about one’s health (from Greek ÕpË.) © 2007 N. . the abdomen and its organs. All Rights Reserved. Clayton Croy.” Hence.

Uses of the Middle Voice Active: {le¾fw = I anoint Middle: {le¾fomai = I anoint myself (direct reflexive) = I have myself anointed (causative) = I let myself be anointed (permissive) {le¾fomai tªn kefal©n mou = I anoint my head (indirect reflexive) © 2007 N. . All Rights Reserved. Clayton Croy.

£rqetai ¨ ¨mŸra toØ kur¾ou. sézontai 2. English Translation English Translation did}skomai ÕpÌ toØ prof©tou ka¿ poreÖomai kat~ to×v nËmouv aÔtoØ. dÖnasje 6. Clayton Croy. Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person Plural 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person 2. £rqetai 3. did}skomai 4. 3. Translate the following sentences. Translate each form. Tense Voice Mood/Mode Person Number 1. oÔ dÖnasje blŸpein tªn basile¾an toØ jeoØ. Parse these verb forms from the above sentences. . Give the Present Passive Indicative of bapt¾zw. poreÖomai 5. e¼sŸrqesje d¡ e¼v aÔt©n. |martwlo¿ sézontai tê lËgæ t«v zw«v. All Rights Reserved. e¼sŸrqesje © 2007 N.Quick Quiz — Lesson 9 1.

kataba¾nw. ginãskw. {pokte¾nw. Ðti. £sqatov. ‡rtov. jeËv. ‰giov. yuq©. ›keÀnov © 2007 N. b}llw. dËxa. {koÖw. ÕpË Other {ll}. mikrËv. e¼v. pistËv. per¾. majht©v.½erËn. g«. dÖnamai. lamb}nw. eÕr¾skw. kakËv. dŸ. Îqlov.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-10 Verbs ‡gw. {pokr¾nomai. oÞn. {postŸllw. (Ê. fwn©. ›gã. lÖw. £rqomai. ›n. doØlov. sun}gw. diŸrqomai. mŸnw. ‡rqw. {pËstolov. pråtov Prepositions {pË. All Rights Reserved. basile¾a. £rgon. sÖ. ÊdËv. ›xous¾a. j}natov. d¾kaiov. mŸllw. blŸpw. ©. oÔq. {delfËv. ‡llov. ›ge¾rw. tŸknon. {pojn¯skw. íra Adjectives {gajËv. pisteÖw. ›k. {naba¾nw. g}r. tË). u½Ëv. nekrËv.oÔranËv. di}. jŸlw. oÔk. sézw Nouns {g}ph. ¨mŸra. j}lassa. nËmov. {delf©. oßtov. kard¾a. e¼sŸrqomai. prËv. aÂrw. e¼m¾. kÖriov. pŸmpw. ‡njrwpov. ploÀon. zw©. dåron. ›kklhs¾a. Clayton Croy. sÖn. prof©thv. ponhrËv. lŸgw. ›xŸrqomai. ‡ggelov. £rhmov. ka¾. g¾nomai. kr¾nw. £qw. oÔdŸ. Ë). par}. . {l©jeia. {pŸrqomai. oÜtwv Pronouns (aÔtËv. met}. kat}. bapt¾zw. lËgov. did}skw. oÅkov. |martwlËv. kËsmov. ›sj¾w. kalËv. poreÖomai. gr}fw. e¼r©nh. oÔ. l¾jov. ÕpŸr. prËswpon. Éfe¾lw. ¨. |mart¾a. laËv.

¨meÀv {neba¾nomen prÌv tªn kalªn g«n. prÌv j}naton ‡gei ¨ ÊdÌv t«v |mart¾av. ¨ d¡ {delfª toØ {njrãpou ±jele sézein aÔtËn. sun«gon o½ majhta¿ o½ pisto¿ ‡rtouv. 2.Practice and Review — Lesson 10 1. . 3. All Rights Reserved. ›n t° írƒ ›ke¾n¬ ¸rete tªn fwnªn Õmån prÌv tÌn kÖrion zw«v Ðti ›mŸllete {pojn¯skein. Ê {pËstolov μgen t~ tŸkna {pÌ toØ ½eroØ e¼v tªn £rhmon. ¨ dËxa toØ jeoØ {pŸrqetai {pÌ t«v ›kklhs¾av Ðti Ê prof©thv {pojn¯skei. 4. oßtoi o½ |martwlo¾ e¼sin ponhro¾. 7. ±jelen Ê ponhrÌv ‡njrwpov {pokte¾nein tÌn doØlon aÔtoØ. oßtov Ê ‡njrwpov {pŸjn¬sken Õp¡r toØ {delfoØ aÔtoØ ka¿ ›d¾daske tÌn laÌn per¿ {g}phv. 10. 5. {ll’ oÔk Éfe¾lomen {pokte¾nein aÔtoÖv. © 2007 N. ÕmeÀv d¡ kateba¾nete par~ tªn j}lassan. 9. Clayton Croy. 6. ÕmeÀv d¡ §mŸllete poreÖesjai ›n aÔt°. aÂreiv tÌ ploÀon par~ toØ {postËlou Ðti Éfe¾leiv kataba¾nein e¼v tªn j}lassan. 8. o½ d¡ ‡rtoi μsan mikro¿ ka¿ kako¾.

›gä ±mhn ›n tê ½erê. Éfe¾lete d¡ pisteÖein e¼v tÌn jeÌn toØ oÔranoØ. © 2007 N. {pŸrqesje prÌv ‡llouv jeoÖv. 13. ÕmeÀv d¡ μte ›n t° ›r©mæ. Clayton Croy. ›n t° ¨mŸrƒ ›ke¾n¬ {nŸbainev e¼v tÌ ½erÌn met~ dãrwn taÀv ›xous¾aiv. 12. . All Rights Reserved. 14. Ê prof©thv sun}gei tÌn Îqlon e¼v tÌn oÅkon ka¿ lŸgei aÔtoÀv Õp¡r toØ jeoØ.11.

aorist. the augment will usually consist of the lengthening of that vowel or diphthong. If the verb begins with a consonant. If the verb begins with a vowel or diphthong. and pluperfect). Examples: Augmenting Verbs Beginning with a Vowel a e o i u becomes h h w i u {koÖw I hear ›lp¾zw I hope Éfe¾lw I am obligated ¼sqÖw I have power Õgia¾nw I am healthy ±kouon I was hearing ±lpizon I was hoping ëfeilon I was obligated Âsquon I had power Õg¾ainon I was healthy Augmenting Verbs Beginning with a Diphthong ai au oi eu becomes ¬ hu æ hu or eu ei aÂrw I take up aÔx}nw I grow o¼kt¾rw I have compassion eÕr¾skw or I find ei e¼rhneÖw I am at peace ºron I was taking up hÚxanon I was growing õktiron I had compassion hÜriskon eÜriskon I was finding e¼r©neuon I was at peace © 2007 N.Augments An augment is a prefix added to an indicative verb of the secondary tenses (imperfect. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved. . the augment is normally an epsilon (›-).

o½ prof«tai £legon tê {njrãpæ. OÔk Éfe¾leiv aÂrein tªn zwªn ›n tê ½erê.Quick Quiz — Lesson 10 1. o½ prof«tai oÔk ›g¾nwskon English Translation English Translation Ðti Ê kÖriov ±mellen pŸmpein tê {njrãpæ kard¾an t«v {g}phv. Ê g~r kÖriov £luen tªn kard¾an aÔtoØ t«v |mart¾av ka¿ £sæzen tÌn ‡njrwpon ›k toØ jan}tou. © 2007 N. All Rights Reserved. . kakÌv ‡njrwpov {nŸbaine prÌv tÌ ½erÌn {pokte¾nein to×v doÖlouv toØ jeoØ. Clayton Croy. Translate each form. {ll! ›n t° írƒ ›ke¾n¬ katŸbainon pisto¿ prof«tai {pÌ toØ ½eroØ. Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person Plural 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person 2. tÌ g~r ½erÌn ‰gion ka¿ ¨ zwª {gaj©. Give the Imperfect Active Indicative of did}skw. Ê ‡njrwpov ›p¾steuen e¼v tÌn kÖrion ka¿ o½ doØloi toØ jeoØ oÔk {pŸjn¬skon ›n ›ke¾n¬ t° ¨mŸrƒ. Translate the following paragraph.

fwn©. g¾nomai. kakËv. £rqomai. pŸmpw. prof©thv. nËmov. ‡njrwpov. e¼sŸrqomai. ›xous¾a. . lËgov. jeËv. tŸ. oÔq. {postŸllw. ›ge¾rw. kat}. ‡ggelov. di}. £ti. {delfËv. basile¾a. blŸpw. g«. . íra Adjectives {gajËv. {delf©. oÅkov. prËv. e¼m¾. dËxa. Clayton Croy. kard¾a. {pokte¾nw. All Rights Reserved. aÂrw. kËsmov. per¾. mikrËv. poreÖomai. ›k. kr¾nw. ›xŸrqomai. pisteÖw. pistËv. ›gã. ›keÀnov © 2007 N. dÖnamai. laËv. dŸ. yuq©. oÔranËv. ‰giov. ka¾. e¼r©nh. ›kklhs¾a.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-11 Verbs ‡gw. Ë). sÖn. pråtov Prepositions {pË. jŸlw. tËte Pronouns (aÔtËv. nekrËv. tËpov. met}. mŸllw. {pŸrqomai. ›p¾. doØlov. oÜtwv. £rhmov. daimËnion. ½erËn. oÔdŸ. ›n. Ðti. {m©n. ¨mŸra. lŸgw. majht©v. ploÀon. lÖw. {naba¾nw. l¾jov. oßtov. did}skw. {l©jeia. {pojn¯skw. eÕr¾skw. dåron. ÊdËv. . lamb}nw. bapt¾zw. ÕpË Other {ll}. j}lassa. d¾kaiov. u½Ëv. e¼v. par}. gr}fw. dŸqomai. p}lin. sÖ. mŸn . j}natov. ¨. {pokr¾nomai. mŸnw. bibl¾on. Îqlov. (Ê. b}llw. £sqatov. {koÖw. ÕpŸr. |mart¾a. £qw. oÔ. ‡rtov. ponhrËv. ‡llov. kÖriov. tË). |martwlËv. oÔk. prËswpon. jerapeÖw. ›sj¾w. oÚte. tŸknon. ©. diŸrqomai. sézw Nouns {g}ph. £rgon. g}r. ÉfjalmËv. sun}gw. ginãskw. ¼doÖ. Éfe¾lw. zw©. oÞn. dŸ. kalËv. {pËstolov. kataba¾nw. ‡rqw.

aÔto¿ d¡ oÚte ±jelon oÚte ›dŸqonto aÔt}. {mªn d¡ lŸgw soi. {ll’ oÔk §jŸlomen dŸqesjai aÔtoÖv. 2. ›ke¾nh ¨ basile¾a μn ponhr}. ka¿ ›poreÖesje ›n t° Êdê t«v {g}phv ka¿ ›did}skesje tÌn nËmon t«v {g}phv. 3. ÕmeÀv d¡ oÔk ›dÖnasje blŸpein aÔt}. o½ Éfjalmo¿ toØ tŸknou ›jerapeÖonto tê lËgæ toØ prof©tou. s× £legev tËte Ðti jeÌv ›jer}peue to×v ÉfjalmoÖv sou. aÔtÌ d¡ £ti {pŸjn¬sken. 4. 5. © 2007 N. t~ m¡n daimËnia ›x©rqonto {pÌ toØ tŸknou. taØta ›gr}fonto ›n tê bibl¾æ toØ nËmou. JeÌv mŸllei jerapeÖein tªn kard¾an sou. aÔtÌv d¡ ›lÖeto taÀv |mart¾aiv aÔtoØ. ºron ka¿ t~ tŸkna tªn fwnªn aÔtån ka¿ £legon. . ›n tê ½erê §koÖomen toÖtouv to×v lËgouv par~ soØ. 9. Clayton Croy. ›pŸmponto bibl¾a te ka¿ dåra prÌv to×v |martwloÖv. 8.Practice and Review — Lesson 11 1. TÌn aÔtÌn ‡rton Éfe¾lomen ›sj¾ein p}lin. All Rights Reserved. 6. 7. Ê kÖriov ¨mån m¡n μn pråtov ›n t° g°. {ll~ ka¿ prÌv tÌn tËpon ›keÀnon Ê majhtªv {pestŸlleto. 10.

11. kak~ daimËnia di©rqonto tªn g«n, {ll’ oÚte £menon ›n tê tËpæ ›ke¾næ oÚte ±jelon {pokte¾nein tÌn laËn. 12. ¼do× ¨ basile¾a toØ oÔranoØ £rqetai= ¨ dËxa tê jeê ka¿ ¨ e¼r©nh toÀv doÖloiv aÔtoØ. {m©n. 13. ÕmeÀv μte pisto¿ tê kur¾æ £n te tê ½erê ka¿ ›n t° Êdê, {ll’ ›n toÀv oÂkoiv Õmån oÔk ›poreÖesje ›n t° {lhje¾ƒ. 14. jŸlomen blŸpein tÌ prËswpon toØ jeoØ ›p¿ t«v g«v ka¿ p}lin ›n oÔranê.

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Quick Quiz — Lesson 11
1. Give the Imperfect Passive Indicative of did}skw. Translate each form. Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person Plural 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person 2. Translate the following paragraph. ¼do× a½ ¨mŸrai a½ £sqatai ±rqonto ›p¿ tªn g«n. daimËnia ›b}lleto English Translation English Translation

e¼v tªn j}lassan ka¿ a½ kard¾ai a½ ponhra¿ ›jerapeÖonto. bibl¾a

toØ nËmou ›gr}feto ka¿ Ê lËgov toØ kur¾ou §koÖeto ›n t° ›kklhs¾ƒ.

Ê laÌv e¼s©rqonto e¼v tÌ ½erÌn blŸpein tªn dËxan toØ jeoØ. £legon

Ê laËv, 1Erqetai Ê ÕiÌv toØ {njrãpou p}lin; {mªn oÚte blŸpousin

Éfjalmo¿ tÌn tËpon oÚte ginãskousi kard¾ai tªn íran.

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-12
Verbs ‡gw, aÂrw, {koÖw, {naba¾nw, {no¾gw, {pŸrqomai, {pojn¯skw, {pokr¾nomai, {pokte¾nw, {postŸllw, ‡rqw, b}llw, bapt¾zw, blŸpw, g¾nomai (gen©somai), ginãskw (gnãsomai), gr}fw, dŸqomai, did}skw (did}xw), diŸrqomai, dox}zw, dÖnamai, ›ge¾rw, e¼m¾, e¼sŸrqomai, ›xŸrqomai, £rqomai (›leÖsomai), ›sj¾w, eÕr¾skw, £qw, jaum}zw, jŸlw, jerapeÖw, kataba¾nw, khrÖssw, kr¾nw, lamb}nw (l©myomai), lŸgw, lÖw, mŸllw, mŸnw, Éfe¾lw, pŸmpw, pisteÖw, poreÖomai, proseÖqomai, sun}gw, sézw, fŸrw Nouns {g}ph, ‡ggelov, {delf©, {delfËv, {l©jeia, |mart¾a, |martwlËv, ‡njrwpov, {pËstolov, ‡rtov, basile¾a, bibl¾on, g«, daimËnion, did}skalov, dËxa, doØlov, dåron, e¼r©nh, ›kklhs¾a, ›xous¾a, £rgon, £rhmov, zw©, ¨mŸra, j}lassa, j}natov, jeËv, ½erËn, kard¾a, kËsmov, kÖriov, laËv, l¾jov, lËgov, majht©v, nËmov, ÊdËv, oÅkov, oÔranËv, ÉfjalmËv, Îqlov, ploÀon, prËswpon, prof©thv, tŸknon, tËpov, u½Ëv, fwn©, yuq©, íra Adjectives {gajËv, ‰giov, ‡llov, d¾kaiov, £sqatov, kakËv, kalËv, mikrËv, nekrËv, pistËv, ponhrËv, pråtov Prepositions {pË, di}, e¼v, ›k, ›n, ›p¾, kat}, met}, par}, per¾, prËv, sÖn, ÕpŸr, ÕpË Other {ll}, {m©n, g}r, dŸ, e¼, £ti, ¼doÖ, ka¾, mŸn . . . dŸ, nØn, (Ê, ¨, tË), Ðti, oÔ, oÔk, oÔq, oÔdŸ, oÞn, oÚte, oÜtwv, p}lin, tŸ, tËte Pronouns (aÔtËv, ©, Ë), ›gã, sÖ, oßtov, ›keÀnov

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Practice and Review — Lesson 12
1. ›jaum}zomen ›n toÀv £rgoiv toØ didask}lou ¨mån, ka¿ ÕmeÀv d¡ jaum}sesje ›n t° ¨mŸrƒ ›ke¾n¬. 2. tËte m¡n oÔk ›ginãskomen t~v Êdo×v t«v e¼r©nhv, nØn d¡ ›leÖsetai Ê prof©thv ka¿ {no¾xei tªn kard¾an ¨mån. 3. proseÖqontai t~ tŸkna Õp¡r t«v {delf«v aÔtån, {ll’ oÔ pisteÖousin e¼v tÌn kÖrion ka¿ jeo¿ toØ l¾jou oÔk {pokr¾nontai. 4. e¼ dox}zete tÌ £rgon |martwlån, oÔ l©myesje tÌ dåron zw«v ›n taÀv ¨mŸraiv taÀv ›sq}taiv. 5. Ê did}skalov lŸgei tê ponhrê Îqlæ, KhrÖssw ÕmÀn tÌn lËgon t«v {lhje¾av {ll’ oÔ l©myesje aÔtËn. 6. t~v |mart¾av mou oÔk ›dun}mhn fŸrein, Ê d¡ kÖriov oÂsei aÔt~v Õp¡r ›moØ. 7. ¼do× ¨ íra toØ jan}tou ›leÖsetai ka¿ a½ kaka¿ ›xous¾ai toÖtou toØ kËsmou gnãsontai Ðti jeËv ›stin Ê kÖriov. 8. o½ doØloi aÔto¿ gen©sontai majhta¿ toØ {postËlou ka¿ did}xousin ‡llouv.

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

9. {no¾xw tÌ ½erÌn tê laê ka¿ tËte {koÖsousi ka¿ gnãsontai tÌn nËmon toØ oÔranoØ. 10. t~ tŸkna jeoØ £sontai fwnª {lhje¾av ›n tê kËsmæ, did}xousin oÞn ¨m‚v proseÖqesjai. 11. e¼ jeÌv nØn dox}zetai ÕpÌ toØ {delfoØ mou, ka¿ ›gä gen©somai ‡ggelov ka¿ ‡xw tÌn u½Ën mou prÌv dËxan. 12. e¼ khrÖssetai Ðti daimËnia ‡rxetai kr¾nein tÌn kËsmon, oÔ pisteÖsomen toØto oÔd¡ khrÖxomen ‡lloiv. 13. ¨meÀv m¡n ›sËmeja ›n tê oÂkæ ka¿ fagËmeja tÌn ‡rton t«v g«v, ÕmeÀv d¡ £sesje ›n t° ›kklhs¾ƒ ka¿ f}gesje tÌn ‡rton toØ oÔranoØ. 14. Ê u½Ëv mou oÚte pŸmyei {ggŸlouv oÚte gr}yei moi {p’ ‡llhv g«v.

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Classification of Stops (or Mutes)
Voiceless Voiced Aspirate

Palatals Labials Dentals (or Linguals)

k p t

g b d

q f j

Formation of the Future Stem
1. Verbs Ending in a Palatal Stop: k, g, q + s yields x
plŸkw, “I weave” ‡gw, “I lead ‡rqw, “I rule” plŸxw, “I will weave” ‡xw, “I will lead” ‡rxw, “I will rule”

2. Verbs Ending in a Labial Stop: p, b, f + s yields y
pŸmpw, “I send” bl}ptw, (stem = blab-), “I harm” gr}fw, “I write pŸmyw, “I will send” bl}yw, “I will harm” gr}yw, “I will write”

3. Verbs Ending in a Lingual Stop: t, d, j + s yields s
˜dw, “I sing pe¾jw, “I persuade” ˜sw, “I will sing” pe¾sw, “I will persuade”

Note: Verbs whose stems end in zeta (such as -azw or - izw verbs) usually form the future tense by dropping the zeta. Thus: dox}zw, “I glorify” bapt¾zw, “I baptize” dox}sw, “I will glorify” bapt¾sw, “I will baptize”

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Past Participle eaten sung run gone Greek verbs have six principal parts. Present Active walk 2. The second principal part is the FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE lÖsw = I will loosen © 2007 N. Past Participle walked Regular verbs form the 2nd and 3rd principal part by adding the suffix -ed to the 1st principal part. Clayton Croy. Past Active ate sang ran went 3. The principal parts themselves are often irregular. The first principal part is the PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE lÖw = I loosen. . 1. All Rights Reserved. 1. Present Active eat sing run go 2. Past Active walked 3. but the forms derived from them are usually quite regular. But many English verbs are irregular: 1.Principal Parts English verbs have three principal parts. am loosening 2.

Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person 3. Give the Future Active Indicative of lÖw. {koÖsete tÌn lËgon ka¿ gen©sesje majhta¿ toØ kur¾ou ›n t° ¨mŸrƒ ›ke¾n¬. tËte khrÖxei tªn {l©jeian toØ jeoØ ka¿ jaum}somen. Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person 2. gnwsËmeja Ðti Ê prof©thv ›st¿n did}skalov {p! oÔranoØ ka¿ dox}somen tÌn u½Ìn toØ jeoØ. Translate the following paragraph. e¼ l©myesje tªn {l©jeian toØ jeoØ. Give the Future Middle Indicative of lÖw. .Quick Quiz — Lesson 12 1. ka¿ nØn proseuqËmeja Ðti Ê kÖriov oÂsei ÕmÀn tªn e¼r©nhn. ›n t° ›sq}t¬ ¨mŸrƒ ›leusËmeja prÌv tÌn oÅkon toØ prof©tou ka¿ Plural Plural {no¾xei tÌ bibl¾on toØ nËmou.

khrÖssw. ›pistrŸfw. eÕr¾skw. tË). jerapeÖw. ‡ggelov. daimËnion. laËv. Clayton Croy. ›xous¾a. ¼doÖ. e¼. aÂrw. lËgov. ›sj¾w. nËmov. dËxa. |martwlËv. oÚte. . mŸnw. yuq©. e¼v. ploÀon. oÔk.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-13 Verbs ‡gw. j}lassa. oßtov. ½erËn. mŸllw. ±dh. (Ê. Îqlov. kËsmov. blŸpw. |mart¾a. pe¾jw. kakËv. tËte Pronouns (aÔtËv. oÔq. ©. prËswpon. {pokte¾nw. ‰giov. nekrËv. sÖ. deÀ. ¨. . oÔ. oÔdŸ. sÖn. g}r. kr}zw. {l©jeia. £ti. bibl¾on. ginãskw (gnãsomai). kat}. par}. ›ge¾rw. di}. nØn. £rhmov. ÉfjalmËv. . u½Ëv. jaum}zw. jŸlw. Ðti. ÕpŸr. {delf©. fŸrw Nouns {g}ph. ›p¾. dŸ. œtoim}zw. oÅkov. {pŸrqomai. e¼r©nh. {m©n. gr}fw. {polÖw. majht©v. ÕpË Other {ll}. ›n. bapt¾zw. kr¾nw. proseÖqomai. b}llw. tŸ. oÜtwv. prËv. tËpov. met}. £rgon. oÔranËv. íra Adjectives {gajËv. diŸrqomai. did}skalov. ½m}tion. jrËnov. Éfe¾lw. oÞn. ponhrËv. All Rights Reserved. tŸknon. mŸn . e¼m¾. pŸmpw. l¾jov. Ðlov. ›k. per¾. {delfËv. e¼sŸrqomai. Âdiov. kefal©. {no¾gw. pisteÖw. g¾nomai (gen©somai). ka¾. dox}zw. g«. lamb}nw (l©myomai). {koÖw. poreÖomai. dŸqomai. £rqomai (›leÖsomai). ¨mŸra. dikaiosÖnh. {postŸllw. pråtov Prepositions {pË. {pËstolov. mikrËv. zw©. ›keÀ. fwn©. p}lin. dÖnamai. kÖriov. ›kklhs¾a. basile¾a. did}skw (did}xw). ÕpostrŸfw. jeËv. {pojn¯skw. ‡rqw. £sqatov. lÖw. doØlov. dåron. kard¾a. kataba¾nw. ‡llov. prof©thv. lŸgw. ‡njrwpov. sézw. Ë). sun}gw. pistËv. ›gã. j}natov. ›xŸrqomai. £qw. d¾kaiov. ›keÀnov © 2007 N. {pokr¾nomai. dŸ. {naba¾nw. kalËv. ‡rtov. ÊdËv.

±dh d¡ kr}zousin o½ jrËnoi basileiån ponhrån. aÔtª d¡ £peisŸ me poreÖesjai ›n t° Êdê t«v dikaiosÖnhv. Ê ‡ggelov toØ jan}tou £rqetai kr¾nein tÌn kËsmon. aÔtÌv d¡ ±dh ±sjien tÌn Âdion ‡rton. 6. ka¿ nØn œtoim}zei ›n oÔranoÀv tËpon aÔtoÀv. ›gä £krazon ›n t° |mart¾ƒ mou.Practice and Review — Lesson 13 1. All Rights Reserved. 8. 5. 3. tËte Ê did}skalov {pŸluse tÌn Îqlon ka¿ ÕpŸstreyen e¼v tÌn oÅkon aÔtoØ. 7. ›pŸmyate t~ tŸkna e¼v tªn £rhmon {pojn¯skein ka¿ oÔk ›sãsate aÔt}= toØto £stai ›p¿ tªn kefalªn Õmån. 2. aÔtª d¡ oÔk ›p¾steusen Ðti deÀ aÔt~ dŸxasjai. ›keÀnoi o½ |martwlo¿ ›pŸstreyan prÌv tÌn kÖrion. ±jelon peÀsai tªn {delf©n mou t~ ½m}tia t~ kal~ dŸxasjai. Clayton Croy. 4. . §koÖsate tÌn lËgon t«v zw«v ka¿ §no¾xate tªn kard¾an Õmån ka¿ ›pestrŸyate ›p¿ tÌn jeËn. © 2007 N. s× ¨to¾masav ‡rton tê {postËlæ.

11. fŸrw d¡ prÌv tÌ ½erÌn kard¾an {g}phv. 10.9. Clayton Croy. oÔk £qei prof©thv dËxan ›n t° ¼d¾ƒ g°. Ê jrËnov toØ jeoØ ›stin ›n tê oÔranê ka¿ a½ yuqa¿ tån |g¾wn ÕpostrŸyousin ›keÀ. deÀ to×v doÖlouv {polØsai ka¿ tÌn jeÌn dox}zein. oÔk £qw tÌ dåron ½mat¾wn kalån. Ê d¡ kËsmov Ðlov lŸgei kat~ t«v fwn«v toØ {ggŸlou toØ jeoØ. aÜth g~r ¨mŸra e¼r©nhv ›n Ðl¬ t° g°. . o½ majhta¿ oÔk ›dÖnanto ›keÀ jerapeØsai t~ tŸkna Ðti oÔk ›p¾steusan o½ Îqloi. 12. © 2007 N. 14. All Rights Reserved. a½ ›xous¾ai a½ kaka¿ ±mellon {pokte¾nein tÌn did}skalon t«v dikaiosÖnhv ka¿ fŸrein tªn kefalªn aÔtoØ e¼v tªn ›kklhs¾an. 13.

weave 4. dive 2. .Formation of the English Past Tense (Some English verbs have more than one form for the past tense.) Present Tense 1. thrive Past Tense dived or dove pleaded or pled weaved or wove shined or shone leaped or leapt dreamed or dreamt strived or strove thrived or throve © 2007 N. dream 7. Cf. Greek 1st and 2nd aorists. shine 5. All Rights Reserved. plead 3. Clayton Croy. strive 8. leap 6.

Pe¾somen 4. £kraxan 3. ›k©russon 2. Pe¾somen Õm‚v. 4. Give the Aorist Middle Indicative of lÖw. Give the Aorist Active Indicative of lÖw. ›b}ptisan 5. ›dŸxanto Voice Mood/Mode Person Number Plural Plural . ka¿ o½ {delfo¿ ka¿ a½ {delfa¿ ¨to¾masan aÔtoÀv ½m}tia ‰gia. Parse these verb forms from the above sentences. Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person 3. Translate the following paragraph. Tense 1. £kraxan oÞn o½ {pËstoloi. Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person 2.Quick Quiz — Lesson 13 1. met~ taØta Ê laÌv ÕpŸstreyan prÌv tÌn kÖrion. o½ {pËstoloi ›b}ptisan aÔto×v ka¿ ›dŸxanto aÔto×v e¼v tªn ›kklhs¾an. o½ {pËstoloi ›k©russon tÌn lËgon ›n t° kak° basile¾ƒ. Ê d¡ laÌv ›keÀ oÔk ±jelon {koØsai aÔtån.

Clayton Croy. .© 2007 N. All Rights Reserved.

£rqomai (›leÖsomai. sun}gw. ‡ggelov. kÖriov. ÕpŸr. oÚte. ½erËn. bapt¾zw. mŸnw. |martwlËv. kr}zw. œtoim}zw. sÖ. deÀ. ponhrËv. ‡llov. Ë). j}lassa. kard¾a. pråtov Prepositions {pË. pe¾jw. kr¾nw. sézw. g¾nomai (gen©somai). mŸllw. nËmov. oÞn. oÔdŸ. jerapeÖw. ‡njrwpov. All Rights Reserved. Ðlov. pistËv. ›kklhs¾a. ¼doÖ. jeËv. lŸgw (eÅpon). khrÖssw. £sqatov. {no¾gw. {delfËv. íra Adjectives {gajËv. e¼r©nh. ›gã. kefal©. sÖn. lÖw. tË). laËv. £fugon) Nouns {g}ph. ‡rtov. jaum}zw. tŸ. e¼v. {koÖw. {l©jeia. . {pokr¾nomai. majht©v. ›k. ›xous¾a. {m©n. {naba¾nw. ÕpË Other {ll}. dikaiosÖnh. ©. ÉfjalmËv. aÂrw. oÔranËv. gr}fw. £rhmov. £pion). daimËnion. £fagon). fwn©. g}r. ›xŸrqomai. ka¾. Ðti. kataba¾nw. basile¾a. eÅdon). oÔ. p¾ptw (£peson). {pËstolov. e¼m¾. oÅnov. fŸrw (±negka). dÖnamai. (Ê. ÕpostrŸfw. ¨mŸra. {pŸrqomai. ginãskw (gnãsomai). bibl¾on. ›n. did}skalov. jrËnov. ¨. lËgov. . ±dh. p}lin. prosfŸrw. Âdiov. Clayton Croy. di}. {postŸllw. nØn. {delf©. ›keÀnov © 2007 N. g«. dox}zw. diŸrqomai. ÊdËv. zw©. mikrËv. did}skw (did}xw). e¼. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. Îqlov. feÖgw (feÖxomai. met}. j}natov. u½Ëv. tËpov. £ti. per¾. shmeÀon. yuq©. dŸqomai. eÕr¾skw. . ›p¾. kakËv. kËsmov. ›pistrŸfw. dŸ. ploÀon. pŸmpw.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-14 Verbs ‡gw. {pokte¾nw. pisteÖw. l¾jov. b}llw. d¾kaiov. prof©thv. tËte Pronouns (aÔtËv. dËxa. lamb}nw (l©myomai). dåron. oÔq. prËv. £qw. prosŸrqomai. μljon). oßtov. ‰giov. |mart¾a. oÔk. ‡rqw. jŸlw. e¼sŸrqomai. p¾nw (p¾omai. Éfe¾lw. doØlov. ›ge¾rw. par}. mŸn . dŸ. {pojn¯skw. tŸknon. poreÖomai. oÅkov. blŸpw (Îyomai. prËswpon. nekrËv. £rgon. {polÖw. ½m}tion. ›keÀ. kat}. kalËv. proseÖqomai. oÜtwv.

a½ {delfa¿ pros«ljon tê didask}læ ka¿ pros©negkan t~ dåra aÔtån. © 2007 N. 3. ka¿ ÕmeÀv d¡ Îyesje t~ shmeÀa t~ aÔt}. . 7. 4. eÂdomen Ðti Ê {pËstolov ›jer}peuen ›keÀna t~ tŸkna. All Rights Reserved. 2. {ll~ ÕmeÀv ›fÖgete e¼v tªn £rhmon ka¿ proshÖxasje. 5. {ll~ Ê laÌv oÔk ›p¾steusan oÔd¡ sun©gagon t~ tŸkna e¼v to×v oÂkouv. 8. oÔ fagËmeja ›n tê oÂkæ tån |martwlån. Clayton Croy. ‡rton d¡ ka¿ oÅnon ›n tê tËpæ tån dika¾wn ›l}bomen. eÅpen d¡ Ê ‡njrwpov. ›n ›ke¾n¬ t° ¨mŸrƒ ¨meÀv ›p¾omen oÅnon ka¿ ›f}gomen ‡rton. o½ majhta¿ eÅdon t~ shmeÀa toØ oÔranoØ ka¿ £pesan ›p¿ prËswpon aÔtån. L¾joi {p’ oÔranoØ £peson.Practice and Review — Lesson 14 1. 6. eßrev tªn ÊdÌn {lhje¾av ›n tê ½erê ka¿ ›gŸnou doØlov dikaiosÖnhv. o½ Éfjalmo¿ toØ kur¾ou Îyontai ka¿ t~ £rga sou ka¿ tªn kard¾an sou. Ê prof©thv eÅden tÌn kÖrion ›p¿ toØ jrËnou ka¿ eÅpen prÌv aÔtÌn per¿ t«v basile¾av toØ jeoØ. 9. ›gä d¡ oÔk ±jelon {koØsai.

14.10. 12. ›gä aÔtÌv ±gagon t~ tŸkna ›k t«v ›kklhs¾av. Clayton Croy. s× g~r oÔk £sqev tªn ›xous¾an did}skein aÔt}. 15. μljen Ê u½Ìv Õmån prËv me ka¿ ±negke t~ bibl¾a toØ nËmou. . ±jele g~r aÔtÌn prosfŸrein ›n tê ½erê. Ê {delfÌv ¨mån oÔk £pien tÌn oÅnon. {pelÖsamen tÌn ponhrÌn Îqlon. nØn d¡ feÖgomen {pÌ t«v |mart¾av. © 2007 N. proshrqËmeja g~r tê jrËnæ t«v dËxhv. ›n ›ke¾n¬ t° írƒ ›fÖgomen {pÌ toØ prosãpou toØ {ggŸlou toØ jeoØ. 13. t~ daimËnia £labon t~ ½m}tia tån {ggŸlwn ka¿ £balon aÔt~ e¼v tªn j}lassan. 11. All Rights Reserved.

All Rights Reserved.tËte d¡ Ê did}skalov t«v dikaiosÖnhv μljen ka¿ £grayen toÖtouv to×v lËgouv e¼v tªn g«n. ka¿ ÕpŸstreyen Ê did}skalov e¼v tÌn oÅkon aÔtoØ. © 2007 N. tÌ g~r ½erÌn ‰giËn ›stin ka¿ tŸkna Éfe¾lousin e¼sŸrqesjai e¼v aÔtÌ ›n e¼r©n¬. eÅdon d¡ o½ ½ereÀv aÔt~ ka¿ £kraxan. ¨ dËxa toØ jeoØ oÔ dÖnatai lÖesjai l¾joiv. Clayton Croy. .Greek Story Time tŸkna ponhr~ £balon l¾jouv e¼v tÌ ½erÌn ka¿ £labon t~ ½m}tia tån ½erŸwn. DeÀ taØta t~ tŸkna {pojaneÀn. ka¿ oÜtwv oÔk {pŸjanon t~ tŸkna ›n t° ¨mŸrƒ ›ke¾n¬. tËte Ê kÖriov t«v {g}phv ±rxato ›pistrŸyai t~v kard¾av tån ½erŸwn ›p¿ tªn {l©jeian ka¿ ›gŸnonto majhta¿ toØ didask}lou.

Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person Plural 3. Translate the following paragraph. ›fÖgete 5. ›p¾ete oÅnon Ðlhn tªn ¨mŸran. ›fÖgete {pÌ t«v {lhje¾av. Give the 2nd Aorist Middle Indicative of lamb}nw. Parse these verb forms from the above paragraph. §koÖsate 4. Îyesje Voice Mood/Mode Person Number . eÅpen 3. ka¿ nØn jŸlete ¼deÀn shmeÀon. Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person Plural 2. Tense 1. {ll! oÔk ›fÖgete {pÌ tån |martiån Õmån. tËte Îyesje t~ dåra toØ oÔranoØ. {mªn deÀ {no¾gein t~v kard¾av Õmån prÌv tÌn kÖrion. o½ Îqloi μljon e¼v tªn £rhmon {koØsai toØ prof©tou. JŸlete ¼deÀn shmeÀon {pÌ toØ oÔranoØ. μljon 2. 4. ka¿ eÅpen Ê prof©thv aÔtoÀv.Quick Quiz — Lesson 14 1. Give the 2nd Aorist Active Indicative of lamb}nw. ±dh eÂdete ka¿ §koÖsate tÌn did}skalon t«v dikaiosÖnhv ›n tê ½erê ka¿ oÔk ›pisteÖsate e¼v aÔtËn.

jaum}zw Ðti dÖnasje p¾nein oÅnon met~ tån Îqlwn di~ t«v ¨mŸrav Ðlhv ka¿ £ti kataba¾nete prÌv tÌn oÅkon Õmån ka¿ oÔ p¾ptete. Clayton Croy. DeÀ ›xŸrqesjai e¼v tªn £rhmon ka¿ kr}zein tê jeê. 3. Îyetai ka¿ tªn dËxan toØ jeoØ ka¿ tªn ÊdÌn t«v e¼r©nhv. 5. Ê did}skalov t«v dikaiosÖnhv ›st¿n ¨ kefalª t«v ›kklhs¾av. ±jelon g~r peÀsai jeÌn såsai tªn yuqªn aÔtoØ ›k jan}tou.Periodic Exercises — Set #2 (emphasizing Lessons 9-14) 1. proshnŸgkamen dåra prÌv tÌn jrËnon. 9. 6. ÕmeÀv eÂdete ›keÀna t~ shmeÀa {ll! oÔk ›pisteÖsate. {ll! oÔk §dÖnanto eÕreÀn tÌ ploÀon. pros«ljev tê prof©t¬ ›n tê tËpæ ›ke¾næ ka¿ eÅpev. Ê d¡ prof©thv oÔk ±jelen {pokr¾nesja¾ soi. ½m}ti} te ka¿ l¾jouv kaloÖv. ›n t° írƒ ›ke¾n¬ a½ {delfa¿ katŸbainon prÌv tªn j}lassan ka¿ o½ {delfo¿ {nŸbainon e¼v tÌn oÅkon. nØn d¡ did}skontai ›k tån bibl¾wn ›n tê ½erê. 2. 7. ka¿ aÔtÌv khrÖxei tÌ {gajÌn ka¿ œtoim}sei ¨m‚v t° basile¾ƒ toØ oÔranoØ. 4. {pŸjn¬sken Ê pistÌv did}skalov= sun©gagen oÞn to×v ¼d¾ouv ka¿ proshÖxanto. £ballon o½ {pËstoloi t~ daimËnia e¼v tªn j}lassan ka¿ ›jer}peuon t~ mikr~ tŸkna. tËte m¡n o½ |martwlo¿ oÔk ›dÖnanto dŸqesjai tªn {l©jeian. All Rights Reserved. © 2007 N. 8. . e¼ Ê laÌv {no¾gei to×v Éfjalmo×v ka¿ ›pistrŸfei t~v kard¾av ›p¿ tÌn kÖrion. tËte ÕpestrŸyamen e¼v to×v oÂkouv ¨mån ka¿ proshux}meja Õp¡r tån ›xousiån.

{mªn lŸgw ÕmÀn. 12. nØn d¡ {pojn¯skei Ê did}skalov ¨mån ka¿ Éfe¾lomen did}skesjai Õp! ‡llou. aÂrw to×v ÉfjalmoÖv mou ka¿ blŸpw to×v {ggŸlouv jeoØ. ±negka oÞn aÔtÌn prÌv t~v ›xous¾av kr¾nesjai. 17. £fugen Ê doØlov e¼v ‡llhn g«n ka¿ oÔk e¼s«ljen p}lin e¼v tªn basile¾an toØ kur¾ou aÔtoØ. Clayton Croy. tÌ ploÀon ›lÖeto t° jal}ss¬. oÔk Éfe¾lomen g~r {polØsai aÔtËn. 13. TËte gnãsontai tÌn nËmon t«v {g}phv ka¿ gen©sontai majhta¿ toØ |g¾ou. tËte d¡ s×n ¨mÀn f}gesje tÌ dåron toØ jeoØ ka¿ eÕr©sete e¼r©nhn. 11. 15. Ê g~r kÖriov ±rxato dox}zein |mart¾an ka¿ £rga kak}. oßtov Ê kakÌv ‡njrwpov £mellen {pokte¾nein tÌn u½Ìn aÔtoØ. 14. ¼do× diŸrqontai di~ toØ kËsmou khrÖssein toÀv |martwloÀv ka¿ ‡gein aÔto×v prÌv jeËn. 16.10. © 2007 N. ginãskomen oÞn Ðti ka¿ ›keÀ £stai mej! ¨mån. All Rights Reserved. ›leÖsesje e¼v tªn ›kklhs¾an ka¿ l©myesje tÌn ‡rton t«v zw«v. . Ê d¾kaiov ›leÖsetai ka¿ did}xei t~ tŸkna. ±dh Ê kÖriËv ›stin mej! ¨mån ›n t° g° taÖt¬. {ll~ o½ ‡njrwpoi ›n tê plo¾æ ›sézonto ÕpÌ toØ kur¾ou. ›n t° ¨mŸrƒ ›ke¾n¬ ›dex}meja {gaj~ par~ toØ didask}lou ¨mån. o½ oÞn ‡njrwpoi oÚte {pŸjanon oÚte ›kŸkraxan. nØn d¡ deÀ {pŸrqesjai e¼v ‡llon tËpon.

Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-15
Verbs ‡gw, aÂrw, {koÖw ({k©koa), {naba¾nw, {no¾gw, {pŸrqomai, {pojn¯skw, {pokr¾nomai, {pokte¾nw, {polÖw, {postŸllw, ‡rqw, b}llw, bapt¾zw, blŸpw (Îyomai, eÅdon, œãraka), g¾nomai (gen©somai, gŸgona), ginãskw (gnãsomai, £gnwka), gr}fw, deÀ, dŸqomai, did}skw (did}xw), diŸrqomai, dox}zw, dÖnamai, ›gg¾zw, ›ge¾rw (›g©germai), e¼m¾, e¼sŸrqomai, ›xŸrqomai, ›pistrŸfw, £rqomai (›leÖsomai, μljon, ›l©luja), ›sj¾w (f}gomai, £fagon), œtoim}zw, eÕr¾skw, £qw, jaum}zw, jŸlw, jerapeÖw, jn¯skw (tŸjnhka), kataba¾nw, khrÖssw, kr}zw, kr¾nw, lamb}nw (l©myomai), lŸgw (eÅpon, eÂrhka), lÖw, mŸllw, mŸnw, Éfe¾lw, pe¾jw (pŸpoija), pŸmpw, p¾nw (p¾omai, £pion), p¾ptw (£peson), pisteÖw, poreÖomai, prosŸrqomai, proseÖqomai, prosfŸrw, sun}gw, sézw, ÕpostrŸfw, fŸrw (±negka), feÖgw (feÖxomai, £fugon) Nouns {g}ph, ‡ggelov, {delf©, {delfËv, {l©jeia, |mart¾a, |martwlËv, ‡njrwpov, {pËstolov, ‡rtov, basile¾a, bibl¾on, g«, daimËnion, did}skalov, dikaiosÖnh, dËxa, doØlov, dåron, e¼r©nh, ›kklhs¾a, ›xous¾a, £rgon, £rhmov, zw©, ¨mŸra, j}lassa, j}natov, jeËv, jrËnov, ½erËn, ½m}tion, kard¾a, kefal©, kËsmov, kÖriov, laËv, l¾jov, lËgov, majht©v, nËmov, ÊdËv, oÅkov, oÅnov, oÔranËv, ÉfjalmËv, Îqlov, ploÀon, prËswpon, prof©thv, shmeÀon, tŸknon, tËpov, u½Ëv, fwn©, yuq©, íra Adjectives {gajËv, ‰giov, ‡llov, d¾kaiov, £sqatov, ¥terov, Âdiov, kakËv, kalËv, mikrËv, nekrËv, Ðlov, pistËv, ponhrËv, pråtov Prepositions {pË, di}, e¼v, ›k, ›n, ›p¾, kat}, met}, par}, per¾, prËv, sÖn, ÕpŸr, ÕpË Other {ll}, {m©n, g}r, dŸ, e¼, ›keÀ, £ti, ±dh, ¼doÖ, ka¾, mŸn . . . dŸ, nØn, (Ê, ¨, tË), Ðti, oÔ, oÔk, oÔq, oÔdŸ, oÞn, oÚpw, oÚte, oÜtwv, p}lin, poll}kiv, påv, tŸ, tËte Pronouns (aÔtËv, ©, Ë), ›gã, sÖ, oßtov, ›keÀnov

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Practice and Review — Lesson 15
1. ›n taÀv ¨mŸraiv ›ke¾naiv μn Ê u½Ìv aÔt«v mikrËv, nØn d¡ gŸgonen ‡njrwpov ka¿ £qei aÔtÌv u½Ën. 2. {khkËate toØ prof©tou; Ê laÌv lŸgei Ðti ›l©lujen {pÌ toØ oÔranoØ aÔtoØ. 3. poll}kiv £peson ›n tê oÂkæ mou, nØn d¡ pŸptwka ka¿ oÔ dÖnamai ›ge¾resjai. 4. a½ ›xous¾ai eÂrhkan ka¿ o½ doØloi {polŸluntai, aÔto¿ g~r oÔk £labon t~ ½m}tia oÔd¡ tÌn oÅnon. 5. ponhro¿ ‡njrwpoi lŸlukan tÌ ½erËn, ka¿ nØn Éfe¾lomen sunagageÀn kalo×v l¾jouv ka¿ œtoim}sai ¥teron oÅkon tê jeê ¨mån. 6. e¼ oÚpw ›gnãkate tªn {g}phn toØ jeoØ, oÔd¡ œwr}kate t~ shmeÀa toØ oÔranoØ, oÔ dÖnasje khrÖxai toÀv Îqloiv. 7. Ê doØlov t«v {delf«v ¨mån eÂlhfen tÌn ‡rton. oÔ dun}meja ›sj¾ein. 8. o½ Éfjalmo¿ toØ |martwloØ tejer}peuntai ÕpÌ toØ kur¾ou, ka¿ nØn pŸpeismai Ðti gen©setai majht©v. 9. Ê did}skalov t«v dikaiosÖnhv ›g©gertai ›k tån nekrån; ¨ íra t«v basile¾av ±ggiken;

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

10. tŸjnhken Ê {delfËv sou. proseuxËmeja Õp¡r aÔtoØ, ¨ g~r yuqª aÔtoØ ›xel©lujen {pÌ toÖtou toØ kËsmou; 11. Ê Îqlov ›jaÖmasen ka¿ eÅpen, #Ewr}kamen tÌn ‡ggelon toØ kur¾ou ka¿ {khkËamen t«v fwn«v aÔtoØ. 12. tŸknon μljen e¼v tªn ›kklhs¾an ka¿ £kraxen, EÜrhka ‡njrwpon nekrÌn ›n t° jal}ss¬. 13. Ê jeÌv aÔtÌv eÂrhken, OÔk {peleÖsomai {pÌ soØ, ka¿ pepe¾smeja Ðti Ê jeÌv ¨mån pistËv. 14. poll}kiv ›xhrqËmeja kat~ œtŸrwn laån ka¿ {pekte¾nomen, nØn d¡ ±ggiken ¨ ¨mŸra t«v e¼r©nhv.

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Additional Exercises on the Perfect Tense
1. ›n taÀv ¨mŸraiv ›ke¾naiv μn Ê u½Ëv mou mikrËv, nØn d¡ gŸgonen ‡njrwpov ka¿ £qei aÔtÌv u½Ën.

2. a½ kaka¿ {delfa¿ e¼l©fasi ka¿ t~ bibl¾a ka¿ tÌn oÅnon ¨mån ka¿ oÔ dun}meja eÕreÀn aÔt}.

3. {khkËate toØ prof©tou; Ê laÌv lŸgei Ðti ›l©lujen {pÌ jeoØ ka¿ eÂrhken prÌv {ggŸlouv.

4. e¼ oÚpw ›gnãkate tªn {g}phn toØ kur¾ou, dÖnasje khrÖxai aÔtªn toÀv |martwloÀv;

5. ponhro¿ lŸlukan tÌ ½erËn= oÜtwv deÀ sunagageÀn l¾jouv ka¿ œtoim}sai oÅkon tê jeê ¨mån.

6. tÌ tŸknon μljen e¼v tªn ›kklhs¾an ka¿ £kraxen, !IdoØ eÜrhka ‡njrwpon nekrÌn ›n t° Êdê.

7. eÂrhkan a½ ›xous¾ai ka¿ o½ doØloi {polŸluntai, aÔto¿ g~r oÔk £labon t~ kal~ ½m}tia.

8. DËxa jeê, eÅpen Ê {delfËv mou, œãraka g~r tÌ shmeÀon ka¿ ¨ kard¾a mou tejer}peutai.

9. pŸpeismai Ðti pŸptwkan t~ daimËnia toÖtou toØ kËsmou ka¿ ±ggiken ¨ basile¾a toØ jeoØ.

10. poll}kiv katŸbainev prÌv tªn j}lassan ka¿ ±kouev toØ didask}lou t«v dikaiosÖnhv,

nØn d¡ tŸjnhken Ê did}skalov ka¿ ¥terov oÚpw ›l©lujen labeÀn tÌn tËpon aÔtoØ.

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Quick Quiz — Lesson 15
1. Give the Perfect Active Indicative of lÖw.
Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person Plural

2. Give the Perfect Middle Indicative of lÖw.
Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person Plural

3. Translate the following paragraph.
‡njrwpov eÅqen daimËnion, Ê d¡ {pËstolov ›jer}peusen aÔtËn. o½ Îqloi eÅdon tÌ £rgon ka¿ e¼s«ljon e¼v tÌ ½erÌn ka¿ £kraxan, !El©lujen ¨ basile¾a toØ jeoØ ka¿ ±ggiken ¨ ›sq}th íra. œwr}kamen tÌn ‡ggelon toØ kur¾ou ›n t° g° ¨mån. nØn pŸptwken Ê ponhrÌv ka¿ eÜrhkan o½ d¾kaioi tªn e¼r©nhn. oÜtwv gŸgraptai ›n tê bibl¾æ toØ nËmou.

4. Parse these verb forms from the above paragraph.
Tense 1. eÅqen 2. ›jer}peusen 3. ±ggiken 4. œwr}kamen 5. gŸgraptai Voice Mood/Mode Person Number

Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-16
Verbs ‡gw (±qjhn), aÂrw, {koÖw ({k©koa), {naba¾nw, {no¾gw, {pŸrqomai, {pojn¯skw, {pokr¾nomai, {pokte¾nw, {polÖw, {postŸllw ({pest}lhn), ‡rqw, b}llw (›bl©jhn), bapt¾zw, blŸpw (Îyomai, eÅdon, œãraka, ëfjhn), g¾nomai (gen©somai, gŸgona, ›gen©jhn), ginãskw (gnãsomai, £gnwka, ›gnãsjhn), gr}fw (›gr}fhn), deÀ, dŸqomai, did}skw (did}xw), diŸrqomai, dox}zw, dÖnamai, ›gg¾zw, ›ge¾rw (›g©germai, §gŸrjhn), e¼m¾, e¼sŸrqomai, ›kb}llw, ›xŸrqomai, ›pistrŸfw, £rqomai (›leÖsomai, μljon, ›l©luja), ›sj¾w (f}gomai, £fagon), œtoim}zw, eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn), £qw, jaum}zw, jŸlw, jerapeÖw, jn¯skw (tŸjnhka), kataba¾nw, khrÖssw, kr}zw, kr¾nw, lamb}nw (l©myomai, ›l©mfjhn), lŸgw (eÅpon, eÂrhka), lÖw, mŸllw, mŸnw, Éfe¾lw, pe¾jw (pŸpoija), pŸmpw, p¾nw (p¾omai, £pion), p¾ptw (£peson), pisteÖw, poreÖomai, prosŸrqomai, proseÖqomai, prosfŸrw, sun}gw, sézw, ÕpostrŸfw, fŸrw (±negka, §nŸqjhn), feÖgw (feÖxomai, £fugon) Nouns {g}ph, ‡ggelov, {delf©, {delfËv, {l©jeia, |mart¾a, |martwlËv, ‡njrwpov, {pËstolov, ‡rtov, basile¾a, bibl¾on, g«, daimËnion, did}skalov, dikaiosÖnh, dËxa, doØlov, dåron, e¼r©nh, ›kklhs¾a, ›xous¾a, £rgon, £rhmov, zw©, ¨mŸra, j}lassa, j}natov, jeËv, jrËnov, ½erËn, ½m}tion, kard¾a, kefal©, kËsmov, kÖriov, laËv, l¾jov, lËgov, majht©v, nËmov, ÊdËv, oÅkov, oÅnov, oÔranËv, ÉfjalmËv, Îqlov, ploÀon, prËswpon, prof©thv, shmeÀon, tŸknon, tËpov, u½Ëv, fwn©, yuq©, íra Adjectives {gajËv, ‰giov, ‡llov, d¾kaiov, £sqatov, ¥terov, Âdiov, kakËv, kalËv, mikrËv, nekrËv, Ðlov, pistËv, ponhrËv, pråtov Prepositions {pË, di}, e¼v, ›k, ›n, ›p¾, kat}, met}, par}, per¾, prËv, sÖn, ÕpŸr, ÕpË Other {ll}, {m©n, g}r, dŸ, e¼, ›keÀ, £ti, ±dh, ¼doÖ, ka¾, mŸn . . . dŸ, nØn, (Ê, ¨, tË), Ðti, oÔ, oÔk, oÔq, oÔdŸ, oÞn, oÚpw, oÚte, oÜtwv, p}lin, poll}kiv, påv, tŸ, tËte Pronouns (aÔtËv, ©, Ë), ›gã, sÖ, oßtov, ›keÀnov

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

›n tê ½erê tËpov oÔq eÕrŸjh toÀv tŸknoiv. påv ›gerj©sontai o½ nekro¿ ka¿ påv ›kblhj©setai t~ daimËnia ›k t«v g«v taÖthv. All Rights Reserved. ! pest}lhn prËv se ÕpÌ toØ kur¾ou mou. ±qjhmen e¼v tªn £rhmon fwn° ›k tån oÔranån ka¿ ›keÀ ëfjh ¨mÀn ‡ggelov jeoØ. 4. 2. . Ê doØlov {pekr¾jh tê {njrãpæ. kal~ dåra proshnŸqjhsan tê prof©t¬. ¨ {delfª Õmån ›poreÖjh prÌv tÌn laÌn khrÖxai tªn {l©jeian ka¿ o½ lËgoi aÔt«v ›gr}fhsan ›n bibl¾æ. 7. {ll’ A oÔk ›l©mfjhn e¼v tÌn oÅkËn sou. oÔk ›gnãsjh Ê kakÌv tê prosãpæ taÀv ›xous¾aiv. {ll’ ±jelen aÔt~ pemfj«nai toÀv tŸknoiv. Clayton Croy. oÜtwv §dun©jh p}lin {poluj«nai. 3. © 2007 N.Practice and Review — Lesson 16 1. 5. 6. ›neqj©sontai oÞn e¼v tÌn oÅkon toØ didask}lou.

¨ {delfª ¨mån ›kr¾jh ÕpÌ tån ›xousiån ka¿ eÕrŸjh pistª ›n Ðlæ tê oÂkæ aÔt«v. . Clayton Croy. l¾joi ›bl©jhsan e¼v t~ ploÀa. ›bapt¾sjhte ›n t° jal}ss¬ ka¿ ›did}qjhte tªn ÊdËn. 14. ka¿ t~ £rga aÔtån kat~ toØ nËmou gnwsj©sontai. ›n t° írƒ ›ke¾n¬ o½ Éfjalmo¿ toØ u½oØ ¨mån ›jerapeÖjhsan ka¿ ›poreÖjh e¼v tªn ›kklhs¾an dox}sai tÌn jeËn. © 2007 N. ‡rtov ka¿ oÅnov ¨toim}sjhsan tê {postËlæ. oÜtwv d¡ ›gen©jhte pisto¿ majhta¾.8. 11. {ll~ ¼do× oÚte £fagen oÚte £pien. ka¿ o½ Îqloi ›jaÖmasan Ðti aÔt~ oÔk ›lÖjh. 13. påv swj©sontai a½ basileÀai toØ kËsmou toÖtou ›n t° ›sq}t¬ ¨mŸrƒ. 12. All Rights Reserved. 10. 9. o½ |martwlo¿ {qj©sontai prÌv tÌn jrËnon t«v dikaiosÖnhv.

Quick Quiz — Lesson 16 1. Påv §nŸqjhv prÌv tÌn tËpon toØton. Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person Plural 2. ëfjh ‡ggelov ka¿ eÅpen. Give the Future Passive Indicative of lÖw. ±ggisa 2. 4. eÅpen ¨ {delf© sou. Parse these verb forms from the above paragraph. ›sãjhn d¡ ÕpÌ tån doÖlwn ka¿ ›jerapeÖjhn ÕpÌ toØ kur¾ou. ëfjh 4. Give the Aorist Passive Indicative of lÖw. ›jerapeÖjhn 3. tËte ›poreÖjhn e¼v tªn ›kklhs¾an ka¿ ›dËxasa tÌn jeËn. §nŸqjhv 5. {pekr¾jhn ka¿ eÅpon. Tense 1. ›l©mfjhn Voice Mood/Mode Person Number . Translate the following paragraph. Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person Plural 3. 1Epeson {pÌ toØ plo¾ou mou e¼v tªn j}lassan ka¿ ±ggisa tê jan}tæ. !El©mfjhn ›k t«v kard¾av t«v jal}sshv t° ›xous¾ƒ toØ jeoØ ka¿ ±qjhn prÌv tªn ›kklhs¾an.

. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.© 2007 N.

l¾jov. kËsmov. ¨. |martwlËv. sÖn. ›gen©jhn). ¨mŸra. . par}. oÞn. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). {l©jeia. u½Ëv. Ë). Clayton Croy. œtoim}zw. kefal©. oÜtwv. ‡njrwpov. . did}skw (did}xw). £rhmov. ¥wv. g¾nomai (gen©somai. {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). dikaiosÖnh. ÕpË Other {ll}. p¾ptw (£peson). Ðlov. aÂrw. Ðti. ‡llov. gun©. £pion). kard¾a. ‰giov. ›keÀ. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. prosŸrqomai. aÆma. blŸpw (Îyomai. oÚpw. gŸgona. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. ›keÀnov © 2007 N. bapt¾zw. feÖgw (feÖxomai. dÖnamai. ›k. dŸ. ½erËn. tË). ëfjhn). ‡rtov. oÔk. zw©. d¾kaiov. μljon. £fugon) Nouns {g}ph. {n©r. ›l©mfjhn). {pokr¾nomai. j}natov. oÔq. jaum}zw. ›gnãsjhn). kÖriov. ›l©luja). oÅkov. dŸ. ‡ggelov. basile¾a. oÚte. ½m}tion. ÕpŸr. £qw. {pŸrqomai. e¼m¾. fwn©. tŸ. ›kklhs¾a. ÕpostrŸfw. fŸrw (±negka. eÂrhka). £sqatov. sun}gw. {delfËv. oßtov. œãraka. pisteÖw. jeËv. doØlov. deÀ. per¾. All Rights Reserved. . Âdiov. {m©n. ¥terov. {delf©. b}llw (›bl©jhn). daimËnion. stËma. lŸgw (eÅpon. pŸmpw. {pËstolov. Ó«ma. dåron. {pokte¾nw. ÉfjalmËv. ›n. poreÖomai. jŸlhma. jrËnov. Îqlov. prËv. £rqomai (›leÖsomai. mŸnw. ›xŸrqomai. nØn. dox}zw. bibl¾on. mikrËv. Éfe¾lw. {naba¾nw. eÅdon. {no¾gw. nÖx. a¼ãn. £fagon). jŸlw. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). prof©thv. £rgon. e¼sŸrqomai. p}lin. dŸqomai. {koÖw ({k©koa). e¼v. majht©v. £ti. ›gã. ›p¾. ›gg¾zw. kataba¾nw. met}. §nŸqjhn). ‡rqwn. oÔdŸ. {pojn¯skw. kalËv. ‡rqw. nekrËv. s}rx. oÔ. jerapeÖw. ›pistrŸfw. ploÀon. £gnwka. diŸrqomai. ©. gr}fw (›gr}fhn). lamb}nw (l©myomai. ginãskw (gnãsomai. påv. |mart¾a. íra Adjectives {gajËv. dËxa. tŸknon. did}skalov. ponhrËv. mŸllw. Înoma. p¾nw (p¾omai. kat}. oÔranËv. di}. pistËv. yuq©. oÅnov. {polÖw. nËmov. lËgov. tËte Pronouns (aÔtËv. spŸrma. e¼. ka¾. ›kb}llw. prËswpon. pråtov Prepositions {pË. tËpov. g«. j}lassa. g}r. §gŸrjhn). prosfŸrw. mŸn . pneØma. ¼doÖ. ›xous¾a. sÖ. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). såma. ±dh.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-17 Verbs ‡gw (±qjhn). khrÖssw. kr}zw. ÊdËv. (Ê. shmeÀon. poll}kiv. laËv. proseÖqomai. sézw. kakËv. lÖw. e¼r©nh. kr¾nw.

6. 2. t~ £rga t«v sarkÌv oÔ doxasj©setai oÔd¡ Ó©mata daimon¾ou {kousj©setai ›n t° ›kklhs¾ƒ. n×x oÔk £stai ›n t° basile¾ƒ dËxhv ka¿ sunaqjhsËmeja per¿ tÌn jrËnon toØ jeoØ e¼v to×v a¼ånav tån a¼ãnwn. 7. 5. © 2007 N. All Rights Reserved. 3. ›k toØ stËmatov toØ didask}lou ¨mån ›xŸrqontai taØta t~ Ó©mata t«v zw«v. {qj©setai Ê laÌv tê pneÖmati.Practice and Review — Lesson 17 1. deÀ khrÖssein tÌ jŸlhma toØ jeoØ ›n toÖtæ tê ponhrê a¼åni. ›n ›ke¾n¬ t° nukt¿ gnãsesje Ðti s~rx ka¿ aÆma oÔ dÖnatai såsai ‡njrwpon {f’ |mart¾av. 4. ›n tê ÉnËmati toØ {ndrÌv t«v e¼r©nhv §jŸlomen ›ge¾rein l¾jon par~ tªn ÊdËn. oÔ ginãskomen tÌ Înoma toØ {ndrÌv ›ke¾nou. 8. . ¥wv tÌ pneØma £rqetai {p’ oÔranoØ. Clayton Croy. Ê pistÌv ‡rqwn t«v g«v ›ke¾nhv mŸllei {pojn¯skein ka¿ oÔk £qei spŸrma. ¨ d¡ gunª aÔtoØ mŸllei lŸgein Õp¡r aÔtoØ toÀv ‡rqousin.

œwr}kamen tÌ shmeÀon toØ pneÖmatov ka¿ ›gnãkamen tÌ Înoma toØ |g¾ou toØ jeoØ. ¨ g~r {l©jeia oÔk μn ›n tê stËmati aÔtoØ {ll~ oÅnov. 11. T~ sãmata ¨mån ±ggisan ¥wv jan}tou. © 2007 N. 12. aÆma eÕrŸjh ›n tê stËmati toØ {ndrËv. ka¿ ¨ basile¾a t«v dikaiosÖnhv Éfj©setai. {pekr¾jhsan a½ gunaÀkev. 10. Clayton Croy. eÅpen d¡ ¨ gunª aÔtoØ toÀv ‡rqousin Ðti aÔtÌv {pŸjanen ›n t° nukt¿ ka¿ aÔtª oÔk μn ›keÀ. oÔk ›pisteÖsamen toÀv Ó©masi toØ {ggŸlou. tÌ aÆma toØ dika¾ou prof©tou £stai spŸrma. . £pesen Ê doØlov ›k toØ plo¾ou e¼v tÌ stËma t«v jal}sshv ka¿ oÔ p}lin ëfjh tÌ såma aÔtoØ. 14. {ll~ μn tÌ jŸlhma toØ kur¾ou jerapeØsai ¨m‚v. 13. All Rights Reserved.9.

1 Cor 15:50. In those five instances. . Only two times is the expression s}rx ka¿ aÆma the subject of a verb. Gal 1:16). In both cases the order is “flesh” then “blood.“Flesh and Blood” in the Greek NT These words occur together seven times in the NT.” John 6:54. aÆma is first twice (Eph 6:12. All Rights Reserved. Twice the terms are objects of separate verbs. Heb 2:14). s}rx is first three times (Matt 16:27. Both of these times the verb is singular. separated only by ka¾. 56. Clayton Croy. Matt 16:17 with singular verb 1 Cor 15:50 with singular verb © 2007 N. Five times they occur in a couplet.

jŸlhma 4. Singular Nominative Genitive Dative Accusative Vocative 2. Translate the following paragraph. stËmati 7. tÌ d¡ pneØma ka¿ tÌ Înoma aÔtoØ ¥xei zwªn e¼v to×v a¼ånav tån a¼ãnwn. aÆma Case Number . 3.Quick Quiz — Lesson 17 1. a¼ånav 9. a¼ãnwn 10. ¨ g~r s~rx aÔtoØ mŸllei mŸnein ›n tê stËmati t«v g«v. ›n t° nukt¿ ›ke¾n¬ ¨to¾masan tÌ såma. ‡njrwpov ponhrÌv {pŸkteinen aÔtËn. All Rights Reserved. tËte ¨ gunª aÔtoØ eÅpen tÌ Ó«ma toØto. pneØma 8. nukt¿ 3. tÌ aÆma aÔtoØ £stai ›p¿ ›keÀnon tÌn ‡njrwpon. s~rx © 2007 N. nØn d¡ tÌ spŸrma aÔtoØ Éfe¾lei £qein tÌn jrËnon. Clayton Croy. Give the declensional forms of ‡rqwn. TÌ jŸlhma toØ {ndrËv mou μn ‡rqein ¥wv toØ a¼ånov. {ndrËv 5. Plural Number 6. ‡rqwn 2. {pŸjanen Ê ‡rqwn ka¿ o½ doØloi aÔtoØ μljon ‹rai tÌ nŸkron såma toØ {ndrËv. Identify case and number of these nouns from the above paragraph. Case 1.

© 2007 N. . All Rights Reserved. Clayton Croy.

½erËn. {pËstolov. oÅnov. ÕpË Other {ll}. oÞn. kËsmov. s}rx. lËgov. {m©n. jrËnov. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. di}. ‡rqwn. ›k. {polÖw. eÔaggel¾zomai. prËv. £gnwka. yuq©. ›xous¾a. met}. basile¾a. ›rg}zomai. prosfŸrw. ¨. nekrËv. jerapeÖw. e¼m¾ (ën). £pion). dËxa. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. ¥terov. poreÖomai. dÖnamai. tŸ. boÖlomai. §nŸqjhn). m©. ploÀon. ±dh. |martwlËv. §gŸrjhn). mikrËv. ÉfjalmËv. aÂrw. eÅdon. gr}fw (›gr}fhn). ka¾. sézw. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). œtoim}zw. ›gnãsjhn). poll}kiv. b}llw (›bl©jhn). £rgon. oÔk. dox}zw. jaum}zw. kataba¾nw. pneØma. tŸknon. Âdiov. shmeÀon. oÚte. μljon. sÖ. {koÖw ({k©koa). oÔdŸ. ›kklhs¾a. . pŸmpw. {n©r. Ðlov. {l©jeia. sun}gw. {no¾gw. prosŸrqomai. kefal©. par}. {naba¾nw. jŸlhma. zw©. Ë). ›gen©jhn). œãraka. kr}zw. g}r. {delfËv. d¾kaiov. oÔranËv. kÖriov. dikaiosÖnh. e¼. mŸnw. oÔ. ‰giov. e¼sŸrqomai. lamb}nw (l©myomai. bibl¾on. doØlov. nØn. ›p¾. nËmov. ›keÀnov © 2007 N. såma. £ti. (Ê. stËma. ›l©mfjhn). daimËnion. did}skw (did}xw). kakËv. íra Adjectives {gajËv. deÀ. spŸrma. ›gg¾zw. ¼doÖ. ¨mŸra. Înoma. ponhrËv. ›n. oÜtwv. tËpov. ›gã. j}natov. oÚpw. |mart}nw. a¼ãn.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-18 Verbs ‡gw (±qjhn). prof©thv. ‡ggelov. l¾jov. ½m}tion. Clayton Croy. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). jŸlw. lÖw. laËv. g«. {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). ginãskw (gnãsomai. u½Ëv. k}jhmai. e¼r©nh. khrÖssw. g¾nomai (gen©somai. mŸllw. pråtov Prepositions {pË. majht©v. p¾nw (p¾omai. Éfe¾lw. jeËv. {delf©. ‡rqw. log¾zomai. {pŸrqomai. ÕpostrŸfw. {pojn¯skw. proseÖqomai. £sqatov. tË). |mart¾a. ©. e¼v. diãkw. gun©. j}lassa. . Ðti. diŸrqomai. gŸgona. {pokte¾nw. ›kb}llw. nÖx. aÆma. £rqomai (›leÖsomai. {pokr¾nomai. påv. £qw. sÖn. blŸpw (Îyomai. £fugon) Nouns {g}ph. Îqlov. dŸ. pisteÖw. ›keÀ. ›l©luja). oßtov. £rhmov. fŸrw (±negka. pistËv. £fagon). did}skalov. . ‡njrwpov. dåron. feÖgw (feÖxomai. dŸ. ¥wv. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). kr¾nw. prËswpon. ‡llov. oÅkov. dŸqomai. oÔq. ‡rtov. ›pistrŸfw. kard¾a. bapt¾zw. p¾ptw (£peson). per¾. All Rights Reserved. eÂrhka). mŸn . ëfjhn). kat}. ›xŸrqomai. tËte Pronouns (aÔtËv. fwn©. p}lin. ÕpŸr. Ó«ma. lŸgw (eÅpon. kalËv. ÊdËv.

t~ Õp}rqont} sou oÔk £stin ¨ zw© sou. 4. pistÌv majhtªv ìn oÔk |mart}nw e¼v tÌn kÖrion oÔd¡ diãkw to×v dika¾ouv. poll}kiv §no¾gete tÌ bibl¾on toØ nËmou. {pojn¯skousa ›n t° ›r©mæ ¨ gunª £kraxe tê jeê tê blŸponti ka¿ jerapeÖonti t~ tŸkna aÔtoØ.Practice and Review — Lesson 18 1. All Rights Reserved. mª lŸgontev Ó©mata t«v {lhje¾av. Ê kaj©menov ›p¿ toØ jrËnou ginãskei t~v kard¾av tån |martwlån ka¿ log¾zetai t~v |mart¾av aÔtoÀv. kaj©menoi ›p¿ l¾jæ par~ tÌn oÅkon Õmån. © 2007 N. 7. 5. 6. oÔ dunhsËmeja ›gg¾sai e¼v tÌn jrËnon t«v zw«v. 8. tËte o½ {pËstoloi di©rqonto di~ t«v g«v khrÖssontev ka¿ eÔaggelizËmenoi tê laê. . Clayton Croy. 3. 2. e¼ lŸgomen Ðti oÔq ¨mart©kamen. oÔ deÀ oÞn £qein oÂkouv kalo×v ka¿ ½m}tia ka¿ dåra. Ê pisteÖwn jeê ka¿ ›rgazËmenov dikaiosÖnhn {qj©setai e¼v tÌn oÔranËn.

10. All Rights Reserved. påv {gajËn ›stin {koØsai to×v lËgouv tån eÔaggelizomŸnwn profhtån. ‡ggeloi ±negkan ‡rton prÌv t~v diwkomŸnav {delf~v ÕpÌ tån ›xousiån. Clayton Croy. Õp}rqontev ‡njrwpoi toØ pneÖmatov ›logizËmeja Ðti ka¿ ›k nekrån ›ge¾rein dÖnatai Ê jeÌv ¨m‚v. Ê jeÌv oÔ pŸmyei {gaj~ ÕmÀn. 14. 13. e¼ ÕmeÀv ponhro¿ Întev boÖlesje pŸmyai {gaj~ toÀv tŸknoiv Õmån.9. . © 2007 N. 12. o½ boulËmenoi eÕr¾skein tªn e¼r©nhn Éfe¾lousi dŸqesjai e¼v to×v oÂkouv aÔtån to×v poreuomŸnouv di~ t«v g«v. Ê kÖriov t«v dËxhv oÔk ›gg¾sei tê ›rgazomŸnæ £rga toØ nËmou {ll~ tê pisteÖonti e¼v tÌn jeÌn tÌn sézonta |martwloÖv. 11.

œwr}kate t~v œtoimazoÖsav ‡rton ka¿ oÅnon toÀv {postËloiv. o½ ponhro¿ {delfo¿ £lusan tÌn oÅkon ¨mån. ›fÖgete e¼v tªn £rhmon ka¿ proshÖxasje. generally with the article. kr}zontev ka¿ b}llontev l¾jouv. 2. {no¾gontov toØ stËmatov t«v g«v. lacking the article. o½ mª ›rgazËmenoi t° basile¾ƒ jŸlousi tªn dËxan toØ kËsmou toØtou. Ê |martwlÌv Ê {koÖwn tÌn lËgon toØ jeoØ eÕr©sei zwªn ›n t° ›sq}t¬ ¨mŸrƒ. Adverbial Participles — Predicate position. 3. e¼serqËmenov e¼v tÌ ½erÌn ka¿ aÂrwn to×v ÉfjalmoÖv mou eÅdon ‡ggelon. Adjectival (substantive) — Used as a Noun. Adjectival (attributive) — Used with a Noun. .Present Tense Participles 1. ¨ {postellomŸnh gunª £qei tªn ›xous¾an did}skein to×v nËmouv toØ kur¾ou. o½ diãkontev to×v majht~v ›l©lujan e¼v tÌ ½erÌn eÕr¾skein tÌn did}skalon. tÌ pneØma tÌ kataba¾non {pÌ toØ jrËnou toØ oÔranoØ khrÖssei tªn {l©jeian. generally with the article.

Quick Quiz — Lesson 18 1. Întev {gajo¿ ka¿ d¾kaioi. ka¿ nØn ¨ gunª ‡rqei ›n tê tËpæ aÔtoØ. or adverbial. Tense 1. ›rgazomŸnouv 5. lŸgwn taØta ›n tê ½erê Ê pistÌv majhtªv eÅden ‡ggelon toØ jeoØ. Sun}xw to×v doÖlouv to×v ›rgazomŸnouv ›n tê oÂkæ mou. All Rights Reserved. tËte ‡xomen e¼v tªn £rhmon taÖthn tªn gunaÀka tªn |mart}nousan e¼v ›mŸ. Translate the following sentences and identify the use of the underlined participles as attributive. BoÖlomai £qein tªn ›xous¾an ›n taÖt¬ t° g°. substantive. 3. {koÖwn taØta. Ê majhtªv Ê proseuqËmenov taØta eÅden ‡ggelon toØ jeoØ ›n tê ½erê. Ê g~r {n©r mou ›st¿n ponhrÌv ka¿ diãkei to×v mª dox}zontav aÔtËn. kaj©menov 2. {ll! o½ doØloi. legoÖshv 3. Clayton Croy. Ê ‡rqwn ›log¾zeto. Voice Mode Participle Participle Participle Participle Participle Case Number Gender . kaj©menov ›p¿ tÌn jrËnon Ê ‡rqwn ±kousen t«v fwn«v t«v gunaÀkov aÔtoØ legoÖshv. o½ pisteÖontev e¼v tÌn kÖrion Îyontai to×v |g¾ouv {ggŸlouv ›n tê oÔranê. oÔk ±jelon sézein tÌn ‡rqonta. Parse these verb forms from the above paragraph. 2. dox}zontav 4. Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms below. Întev © 2007 N. £pemyan aÔtÌn mŸta tån ÕparqËntwn aÔtoØ prÌv ‡llhn g«n.

£fagon). dËxa. £sqatov. {no¾gw. tŸ. {l©jeia. gun©. tËte Pronouns (aÔtËv. ›l©luja). £pion). {pŸrqomai. dŸqomai. . paralamb}nw. dox}zw. |mart}nw. mŸnw. {polÖw. ›xŸrqomai. jeËv. All Rights Reserved. ±dh. {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). kard¾a. majht©v. parag¾nomai. mŸn . œtoim}zw. m©. {pokr¾nomai. kat}. ¼doÖ. spŸrma. ÕpË Other {ll}. nekrËv. yuq©. bibl¾on. oÜtwv. aÆma. p}lin. eÂrhka). met}. kr}zw. oÔq. g}r. poÖv. ›xous¾a. ¨mŸra. oßtov. påv. oÔdŸ. oÅnov. jaum}zw. di}. prosŸrqomai. jŸlhma. ‡rtov. ‡ggelov. lamb}nw (l©myomai. kataba¾nw. p¾nw (p¾omai. |mart¾a. ¥wv. lÖw. Ðlov. poreÖomai. oÔ. ½erËn. sézw. (Ê. prosfŸrw. nÖx. ¥terov. oÅkov. lŸgw (eÅpon. diŸrqomai. p¾ptw (£peson). log¾zomai. ›gã. e¼sŸrqomai. lËgov. dŸ. bapt¾zw. Clayton Croy. sunagwg©. e¼m¾ (ën). tŸknon. j}natov. {pËstolov. ¨. ÉfjalmËv. £fugon) Nouns {g}ph. gŸgona. ‡rqwn. §nŸqjhn). pat©r. kalËv. kËsmov. ‡rqw. zw©. {m©n. {naba¾nw. gr}fw (›gr}fhn). j}lassa. £rqomai (›leÖsomai. {koÖw ({k©koa). {n©r. ›kklhs¾a. ›p¾. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. μljon. sun}gw. ›gg¾zw. œãraka. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). u½Ëv. jŸlw. ›k. prËswpon. daimËnion. . . basile¾a. Ë). kefal©. aÂrw. ›gnãsjhn). laËv. s}bbaton. doØlov. £rgon. ‰giov. ponhrËv. ÕpostrŸfw. Éfe¾lw. poll}kiv. fwn©. oÔk. pŸmpw. sÖn. Ðti. mikrËv. boÖlomai. dŸ. Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). eÔaggel¾zomai. ÕpŸr. £gnwka. ›gen©jhn). oÚpw. par}. mht©r. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). shmeÀon. kr¾nw. khrÖssw. nËmov. oÞn. |martwlËv. dåron. såma. Ó«ma. ›n. kaj¾zw. §gŸrjhn). b}llw (›bl©jhn). Înoma. Îqlov. ›pistrŸfw. did}skw (did}xw). e¼.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-19 Verbs ‡gw (±qjhn). ›sj¾w (f}gomai. qe¾r. £rhmov. oÔranËv. pneØma. l¾jov. deÀ. feÖgw (feÖxomai. ½m}tion. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). {pokte¾nw. eÅdon. £ti. {delfËv. g¾nomai (gen©somai. mŸllw. pråtov Prepositions {pË. d¾kaiov. e¼r©nh. íra Adjectives {gajËv. ›l©mfjhn). ëfjhn). ‡llov. tË). fŸrw (±negka. pisteÖw. tËpov. £qw. Âdiov. proseÖqomai. dÖnamai. prËv. {pojn¯skw. oÚte. {delf©. ›kb}llw. sÖ. ›keÀnov © 2007 N. ka¾. ploÀon. ›keÀ. jrËnov. ‡njrwpov. {sp}zomai. ©. a¼ãn. e¼v. pistËv. kakËv. ginãskw (gnãsomai. ÊdËv. per¾. nØn. dikaiosÖnh. diãkw. jerapeÖw. blŸpw (Îyomai. prof©thv. ›rg}zomai. g«. stËma. s}rx. k}jhmai. kÖriov. did}skalov.

3. 10. . © 2007 N. ¨ yuqª ¨ kr}xasa ›n t° sunagwg° gnãsetai tªn e¼r©nhn toØ jeoØ. paralabän tªn mhtŸra aÔtoØ Ê {nªr ›poreÖjh e¼v tªn £rhmon proseÖxasjai. o½ mª logis}menoi tªn jeoØ {g}phn eÅpon ÕmÀn. 5. Clayton Croy. 9. OÔk Éfe¾lete jerapeØsai ›n tê sabb}tæ. JŸlomen aÂrein t~v qeÀrav ¨mån ka¿ dox}zein tÌn kÖrion. kaj¾santov toØ didask}lou ›p¿ l¾jon Ê Îqlov Ê p¾nwn oÅnon ±rxato {koØsai aÔtoØ. ka¿ o½ mª £qontev pËdav ka¿ qeÀrav dÖnantai ›rg}sasjai £rga dikaiosÖnhv. {p«ljon o½ {pËstoloi e¼v œtŸran g«n.Practice and Review — Lesson 19 1. ›ljËntov toØ prof©tou e¼v tªn sunagwgªn a½ gunaÀkev a½ kaj¾zousai ›n ›ke¾næ tê tËpæ eÅpon. {spas}menoi to×v {delfo×v ka¿ t~v {delf}v. paragenËmenov d¡ ka¿ sunagagän t~ tŸkna Ê patªr pros©negke t~ dåra. 4. 2. 8. All Rights Reserved. 7. ›f}gomen ka¿ ›p¾omen met~ toØ patrËv sou {spasamŸnou to×v doÖlouv ka¿ lÖsantov tÌ ½m}tion aÔtoØ. 6. t«v mhtrËv mou £ti œtoimazoÖshv ‡rton paregŸnonto o½ ‡ggeloi.

toØ pneÖmatov {gagËntov to×v |martwlo×v e¼v tªn ›kklhs¾an. 13. . genomŸnou sabb}tou Ê {naba¾nwn prÌv tÌ ½erÌn £pesen prÌv to×v pËdav toØ didask}lou. 12.11. Ê ‡njrwpov Ê paralabän basile¾an ka¿ boulËmenov ginãskein per¿ aÔt«v £pemye doÖlouv blŸpein aÔt©n. §no¾xamen tÌ stËma ¨mån ka¿ eÔhggelis}meja. 14. Ê khrÖxav ÕmÀn tÌn lËgon t«v {lhje¾av œãrake tÌ bibl¾on t«v zw«v ka¿ £gnwke t~ mŸllonta.

Present Participle/Present Verb lamb}nwn tÌ pneØma Ê prof©thv lŸgei tÌn lËgon. the prophet spoke the word. © 2007 N. This means that a present participle doesn’t necessarily denote action in present time. While he is receiving the Spirit. (Remember also that adverbial participles can serve a variety of functions. the prophet speaks the word. nor does an aorist participle necessarily denote action in past time. not tense. Present Participle/Past Verb lamb}nwn tÌ pneØma Ê prof©thv eÅpen tÌn lËgon.Tense and Time in the Participle Greek participles are fundamentally nontemporal. Clayton Croy. not just the temporal one.) The following chart shows the tendency for each tense. Participle’s Time Relative to the Main Verb Antecedent Simultaneous Subsequent Present Participle Sometimes Usually Sometimes Aorist Participle Usually Sometimes Rarely Perfect Participle Usually Rarely Rarely Translation Possibilities 1. participles had certain tendencies. is ultimately what determines the time of the participle’s action. Present participles usually denoted action simultaneous with that of the main verb. While he was receiving the Spirit. and aorist participles usually denoted action prior to the main verb. In practice. . But context. however. 2. All Rights Reserved.

the prophet speaks the word. the prophet spoke the word. © 2007 N. . 4.3. Aorist Participle/Past Verb labän tÌ pneØma Ê prof©thv eÅpen tÌn lËgon. All Rights Reserved. Clayton Croy. When/after he had received the Spirit. Aorist Participle/Present Verb labän tÌ pneØma Ê prof©thv lŸgei tÌn lËgon. When/after he has received the Spirit.

gr}yasa Ó©mata t«v {g}phv. generally with the article. 1. 8. . o½ diãxantev ¨m‚v ‡njrwpoi oÔq eÕr©sontai e¼r©nhn ›n t° kard¾ƒ aÔtån. 4. 2. 9. sãsav to×v |martwlo×v tê jan}tæ aÔtoØ. © 2007 N. lacking the article. o½ doØloi ±negkan tÌn oÅnon ka¿ tÌn ‡rton. Clayton Croy. 5. Ê kÖriov ÕpŸstreyen e¼v oÔranËn. ¨ gunª ›d¾daxen aÔt~ tÌn laËn. toØ didask}lou paragenomŸnou. ¨ {delfª ¨ proseuxamŸnh tê kur¾æ gnãsetai tÌ jŸlhma toØ jeoØ. 7. tÌ tŸknon tÌ balÌn l¾jouv e¼v tªn ›kklhs¾an oÔk Îyetai tÌ prËswpon toØ jeoØ. Adverbial Participles — Predicate position. ginãskete t~v e¼seljoÖsav tªn sunagwgªn ka¿ krax}sav. All Rights Reserved.Aorist Participles Adjectival (attributive) — Used with a Noun. 3. pisteÖomen e¼v tÌn prof©thn t«v {lhje¾av ka¿ to×v pŸmyantav aÔtËn. 6. Adjectival (substantive) — Used as a Noun. generally with the article. o½ ›pistrŸyantev prÌv tÌn jeÌn {naba¾nousin e¼v tÌ ½erËn.

the Lord returned to heaven. All Rights Reserved. 7. © 2007 N. 3. Having saved [the] sinners by his death. 2. 8. 5. The child who threw stones into the church will not see the face of God. Do you know the [women] who entered the synagogue and cried out? 6. The teacher having arrived. 9. . the woman taught them to the people. The sister who prayed to the Lord will know the will of God. We believe in the prophet of truth and the ones who sent him. 4. [After] having written words of love. the slaves brought the wine and the bread. The [men/people] who have turned to God are going up to the temple. Clayton Croy.1. The men/persons who persecuted us will not find peace in their heart[s].

{ll! ›xŸbalen aÔtoÖv. ¨ m©thr mou §sp}sato to×v doÖlouv to×v paragenomŸnouv prÌv aÔt©n. Clayton Croy. kaj¾sav ›n tê oÂkæ Ê did}skalov eÅpen. Tense 1. . All Rights Reserved. labän tÌn ‡rton aÔtån £pemyen aÔtÌn prÌv ‡llhn g«n. labän 4. o½ paralabËntev tÌn lËgon μran t~v qeÀrav dox}zein tÌn jeÌn toØ oÔranoØ. oÔk ›dŸxato to×v ›ljËntav prÌv aÔtËn. a½ qeÀrev a½ mª {spas}mena¾ me ka¿ t~ stËmata t~ mª jaum}sant} me mŸllousin lÖesjai. {spas}menoi to×v {delfo×v ka¿ t~v {delf~v e¼s©ljomen e¼v tªn sunagwg©n. eÅpen Ê ‡rqwn. or adverbial. 2. LÖsw toÖtouv ÕpÌ to×v pËdav mou. {gagän Voice Mode Participle Participle Participle Participle Participle Case Number Gender © 2007 N. Translate the following sentences and identify the use of the underlined participles as attributive. 3. LÖsw toØton tÌn ‡rqonta ÕpÌ to×v pËdav mou. Parse these verb forms from the above paragraph. Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms below.Quick Quiz — Lesson 19 1. ¼dän oÞn tªn sunagwgªn aÔtån £balle l¾jouv e¼v aÔt©n. substantive. KakÌv ‡rqwn ±jelen diãkein to×v {koÖsantav ka¿ pisteÖsantav tÌn lËgon t«v {lhje¾av. {koÖsantav 3. ›ljËntav 5. kaj¾sav 2. Ê d¡ kÖriov Ê {gagän tÌn laÌn aÔtoØ ›k t«v ›r©mou eÅpen.

(Ê. kalËv. μljon. majht©v. did}skw (did}xw). Clayton Croy. p}lin. eÔaggŸlion. {pojn¯skw. pråtov Prepositions {pË. ›k. poll}kiv. kefal©. eÔaggel¾zomai. . jŸlhma. tŸknon. sÖ. pat©r. £gnwka. gun©. ‰giov. . ›l©mfjhn). e¼v. {pokr¾nomai. ›n. oÔq.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-20 Verbs |gi}zw. eÂrhka). prËswpon. pistËv. tËpov. prosŸrqomai. £pion). ›gã. j}natov. ÕpË Other {ll}. oÜtwv. tŸ. kataba¾nw. ½m}tion. såma. ¼doÖ. Ðti. kËsmov. zw©. dox}zw. {m©n. |martwlËv. påv. £fugon). §gŸrjhn). oÔdŸ. dŸ. dåron. basile¾a. j}lassa. ploÀon. ›kb}llw. sunagwg©. lamb}nw (l©myomai. pŸmpw. £rgon. ›gen©jhn). dËxa. jerapeÖw. lËgov. {pŸrqomai. u½Ëv. Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). {naba¾nw. dŸ. ‡ggelov. ‡rtov. £qw. kard¾a. sun}gw. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). oÚte. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). ›gg¾zw. khrÖssw. boÖlomai. p¾nw (p¾omai. q}riv. parag¾nomai. ›gnãsjhn). ›l©luja). a¼ãn. proseÖqomai. Ðlov. ›rg}zomai. ginãskw (gnãsomai. e¼sŸrqomai. prosfŸrw. jÖra. nÖx. £ti. ›kklhs¾a. g¾nomai (gen©somai. sézw. m©. p¾ptw (£peson). íra Adjectives {gajËv. doØlov. jeËv. s}rx. ‡rqwn. yuq©. kr}zw. fulak©. shmeÀon. Éfe¾lw. e¼. gnwr¾zw. jŸlw. mht©r. poreÖomai. mŸn . sÖn. |mart}nw. tuflËv. ëfjhn). mŸllw. ‡njrwpov. . par}. dÖnamai. Âdiov. {delfËv. oÞn. oÚpw. k}jhmai. oÔ. oÔk. lÖw. dŸqomai. jrËnov. stËma. {no¾gw. prof©thv. paralamb}nw. {koÖw ({k©koa). daimËnion. aÆma. kakËv. kt¾zw. feÖgw (feÖxomai. di}. ‡llov. g}r. ¥terov. spŸrma. kÖriov. ka¾. oÅnov. pneØma. ¥wv. ›p¾. nØn. ‡gw (±qjhn). lŸgw (eÅpon. ÕpŸr. deÀ. ›xous¾a. Ë). fwn©. qe¾r. {l©jeia. {n©r. £rhmov. aÂrw. mŸnw. prËv. d¾kaiov. œãraka. s}bbaton. per¾. laËv. mikrËv. ›keÀ. ©. £rqomai (›leÖsomai. tË). gr}fw (›gr}fhn). Îqlov. oßtov. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). nekrËv. diŸrqomai. |mart¾a. ›keÀnov © 2007 N. poÖv. ÉfjalmËv. {polÖw. ›pistrŸfw. kat}. {sp}zomai. kr¾nw. Înoma. pisteÖw. {pokte¾nw. qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph. e¼m¾ (ën). log¾zomai. oÅkov. gŸgona. met}. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). tËte Pronouns (aÔtËv. ¨. blŸpw (Îyomai. kaj¾zw. diãkw. All Rights Reserved. {delf©. ÊdËv. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. bapt¾zw. ›xŸrqomai. œtoim}zw. eÅdon. ponhrËv. ‡rqw. ¨mŸra. jaum}zw. £fagon). {pËstolov. ÕpostrŸfw. fŸrw (±negka. bibl¾on. §nŸqjhn). b}llw (›bl©jhn). nËmov. ±dh. oÔranËv. ½erËn. dikaiosÖnh. l¾jov. did}skalov. g«. £sqatov. e¼r©nh. Ó«ma.

3. © 2007 N. {pokrije¿v tê patr¾ mou eÅpon. {ll~ ›n ›ke¾n¬ t° ¨mŸrƒ jeÌv qar¾setai Éfjalmo×v aÔtoÀv blŸpein. poll}kiv |mart}nontev e¼v tÌn nËmon påv lhmyËmeja tªn ¨toimasmŸnhn ¨mÀn zwªn ›n oÔranoÀv. ÕmeÀv aÔto¿ {koÖsantev t~ Ó©mata tån tejerapeumŸnwn oÚpw pisteÖete toÖtoiv toÀv shme¾oiv. ka¿ ginãskomen tªn q}rin toØ jeoØ ka¿ gnwr¾zomen ‡lloiv aÔt©n. μsan kaj©menoi ›n t° fulak° ka¿ jŸlontev {koØsai tÌ eÔaggŸlion. blŸpontev to×v kalo×v oÔrano×v ka¿ tªn {gajªn g«n pepisteÖkamen Ðti Ê kËsmov ›kt¾sjh ÕpÌ toØ jeoØ. All Rights Reserved. Clayton Croy. ›mo¿ g~r ›qar¾sato Ê kÖriov t~v |mart¾av. Gnwr¾sw tÌ eÔaggŸlion tê laê. 7. 5. 4. nØn o½ tuflo¿ oÔ dÖnantai ¼deÀn t~ ktisjŸnta ÕpÌ jeoØ. 8. didaqjŸntev ÕpÌ toØ didask}lou.Practice and Review — Lesson 20 1. ›dex}mhn t~ dåra t~ |giasjŸnta ka¿ ±negka aÔt~ di~ tån jÖrwn toØ ½eroØ. 6. . 2.

11. œwr}kamen tÌ aÆma tån dediwgmŸnwn tŸknwn sou. ¼dËntev {neægmŸnav t~v jÖrav t«v fulak«v ›jaum}samen ›p¿ t° q}riti toØ jeoØ. 13. poreujŸntev e¼v tªn sunagwgªn proshÖxasje lŸgontev. oßtoi o½ majhta¾ e¼sin ¨giasmŸnoi ›n tê pneÖmati tê |g¾æ ka¿ aÔtån t~ ÉnËmat} ›sti gegrammŸna ›n oÔranê. © 2007 N. t~ d¡ gegrammŸna ›n t° kard¾ƒ sou gnwr¾zei tªn q}rin jeoØ.9. t~ tŸkna t~ ›kblhjŸnta ›k toØ oÂkou ÕpostrŸyei. 10. All Rights Reserved. Clayton Croy. . t«v mhtrÌv aÔtån jeloÖshv. KÖrie. oÔk £qeiv bibl¾a. 14. kr}zousa ›n t° nukt¿ ¨ gunª ›gnãrisen Ðti ‡njrwpov ponhrÌv e¼s«ljen e¼v tÌn oÅkon aÔt«v ka¿ labän ‡rton £fugen. 12.

Ê Îqlov ›x«ljen ›k t«v sunagwg«v. Function 7. Function © 2007 N. ›rgazËmenoi di~ t«v nuktÌv Ðlhv ¨toim}sate ‡rtouv taÀv gunaÀkev ka¿ toÀv tŸknoiv. but to describe some circumstance or action related to the action of another verb (usually the main verb) in the sentence. All Rights Reserved. Clayton Croy. £ti taØta lŸgontov toØ didask}lou. Ê {pËstolov ›d¾dasken ›n tê ½erê doxazËmenov ÕpÌ ka¿ tån majhtån ka¿ tån {rqËntwn. Some of the possibilities (and words used to translate them) are the following: temporal (while.Nuances of the Adverbial Participle Adverbial participles modify verbs. purpose (in order to). manner (translate with an English participle or some adverbial expression). Function 4. . when.”) Translate the following sentences and try to categorize the function of the participles. Their chief purpose is not to give information about their subject (the attributive participle does that). instrumental (by). after). mŸllwn {pojaneÀn Ê pistÌv doØlov oÔk £krazen taÀv ›xous¾aiv {poluj«nai. Function 8. since). Ðte ¨ {delfª ¨mån §gŸrjh ›k tån nekrån ›x©ljomen ›k t«v sunagwg«v jaum}zontev. To translate a circumstantial participle. The precise relationship between the participle and the (main) verb can only be determined from the context. (Circumstantial participles express action loosely related to the main verb. although). and circumstantial. Function 3. 1. Întev ›n fulak° oÔ dun}meja ›ljeÀn ka¿ {sp}zesjai to×v {delfo×v ¨mån. either use an English participle or translate as a finite verb and supply the conjunction “and. conditional (if). påv did}xomen t~ mikr~ tŸkna mª ginãskontev tÌn nËmon ka¿ to×v prof©tav. concessive (though. causal (because. Function 6. Function 5. Function 2. ›lhlÖjamen prÌv tÌ ½erÌn prosfŸrontev dåra tê kur¾æ toØ oÔranoØ ka¿ t«v g«v.

ktisjŸntev © 2007 N. or adverbial. All Rights Reserved. Tense 1. 2. ginãskousin tªn {g}phn toØ jeoØ. Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms below.Quick Quiz — Lesson 20 1. tån Éfjalmån aÔtoØ tejerapeumŸnwn eÅpen Ê {n©r. oÔq ÕpŸstreyen t~ daimËnia t~ ›kblhjŸnta ÕpÌ toØ didask}lou t«v dikaiosÖnhv. jŸlontev 2. substantive. {polelumŸnoi 5. ›keÀ eÔaggelisjŸntev ka¿ baptisjŸntev o½ |martwlo¿ ›gen©jhsan majhta¾. {polelumŸnoi {pÌ tån |martiån aÔtån ka¿ ktisjŸntev p}lin ›n dikaiosÖn¬. o½ ¨giasmŸnoi tê q}riti jeoØ ›x«ljon e¼v tÌn kËsmon khrÖssein tÌ eÔaggŸlion. oÜtwv ¨giasmŸnoi ka¿ {pestalmŸnoi ÕpÌ toØ |g¾ou pneÖmatov e¼s©ljomen tªn fulak©n. ¨giasmŸnoi 3. jŸlontev gnwr¾zein tÌ eÔaggŸlion ›poreÖjhmen e¼v tªn fulak©n. TuflÌv ën. nØn blŸpw. Clayton Croy. Parse these verb forms from the above paragraph. Voice Mode Participle Participle Participle Participle Participle Case Number Gender . pŸmpwn ¨m‚v khrÖssein aÔtoÀv tªn q}rin aÔtoØ. Translate the following sentences and identify the use of the underlined participles as attributive. 3. baptisjŸntev 4. nØn ginãskomen Ðti Ê jeÌv dÖnatai jerapeØsai tuflo×v ka¿ qar¾sasjai |martwloÖv. ±noixen g~r Ê kÖriov jÖran |martwloÀv.

eÂdomen g~r shmeÀa di~ tån qeirån aÔtoØ ginËmena. 9. 6. tËte deÀ kaj«sjai ›n tê ¼d¾æ oÂkæ ¥wv {no¾gei tÌ stËma t«v g«v ka¿ {naba¾nei t~ ktisjŸnta. paragenËmenoi ka¿ sunagagËntev tªn ›kklhs¾an ›k©ruxan o½ {pËstoloi © 2007 N. eÅpon d¡ o½ Îqloi. 7. 5. . All Rights Reserved.Periodic Exercises — Set #3 (emphasizing Lessons 15-20) 1. 2. eÅdon g~r tÌ s}bbaton ›gg¾zon. 4. £fugon o½ doØloi e¼v tËpon ‡llon. 8. Clayton Croy. oÔk ±jelon a½ pista¿ gunaÀkev kataba¾nein prÌv tªn j}lassan ka¿ œtoim}zein tÌ ploÀon. oÔ boulËmeja |mart}nein e¼v tÌn oÔranËn. μsan kaj©menoi o½ did}skaloi toØ nËmou ›n tê ½erê logizËmenoi ›n taÀv kard¾aiv Ðti aÆma ka¿ s~rx oÔq œãraken tªn basile¾an toØ oÔranoØ. ka¿ kaj¾santev ±rxanto gnwr¾zein Ê patªr ka¿ ¨ m©thr Õmån Ñti ›qar¾sjh tÌ pneØma tÌ ‰gion toÀv blhjeÀsin {delfoÀv e¼v fulak©n. o½ ›rgazËmenoi tªn g«n Éfe¾lousin baleÀn spŸrma. {ll! Întev ponhro¿ oÔ dun}meja feÖgein t~v |mart¾av ¨mån ka¿ diãkein dikaiosÖnhn. 3. DÖnatai oßtov Ê ‡njrwpov ›ge¾rein to×v nekroÖv. o½ ‡rqontev £gnwkan tÌ jŸlhma jeoØ ›gg¾zontev t° sunagwg° ka¿ {koÖontev t~ Ó©mata toØ prof©tou toØ tufloØ. ›gg¾santov toØ kakoØ {ndrÌv t° jÖrƒ toØ oÂkou.

ka¿ nØn pŸpeismai Ðti oÔk ›st¿n {gajÌn poreÖesjai di~ g«v l¾jwn. ›l©mfjh g~r ÕpÌ toØ u½oØ Õmån ka¿ §nŸqjh e¼v tªn sunagwg©n. 14. {ll~ d¾kaiov prof©thv {pest}lh ÕpÌ toØ jeoØ såsai ¨m‚v. oÔd¡ eÂdete t~ ‡lla Õp}rqonta. 17. ¨gi}sjhmen g~r ÕpÌ toØ Õp¡r ¨mån {pojanËntov. All Rights Reserved. {ll! oÔk ›pisteÖsamen toÀv lËgoiv aÔtoØ. nØn {khkËate tån lËgwn ¨mån. eÔhggelis}meja ÕmÀn per¿ t«v ÊdoØ t«v zw«v. 16. ka¿ o½ ‡ggeloi ›leÖsontai ka¿ l©myontai aÔto×v prÌv oÔranËn. t~ bibl¾a Õmån oÔq eÕrŸjh ›n tê oÂkæ. {pokrijeÀsa d¡ eÅpen ¨ gunª taÀv ›xous¾aiv. . 11. ›n ›ke¾n¬ t° nukt¿ proshux}mhn jeê ka¿ o½ pËdev mou ›jerapeÖjhsan. ›k©ruxen ›keÀnov Ê {nªr ¨mÀn ¥teron eÔaggŸlion. Clayton Croy. © 2007 N. ka¿ oÜtwv £sontai s×n tê kur¾æ e¼v to×v a¼ånav tån a¼ãnwn. t~ daimËnia t~ ›kblhjŸnta ›k t«v {delf«v ¨mån ÕpŸstreyen p}lin prÌv tÌn oÅkon ¨mån.tÌ eÔaggŸlion t«v q}ritov toØ jeoØ dox}zontev tÌ Înoma toØ kur¾ou. 13. 15. o½ {pojanËntev ›n tê kur¾æ £qousin zw©n. 12. tÌ pneØma g~r eÂrhkŸ moi per¿ tån mellËntwn. o½ mª paralabËntev tÌn lËgon t«v {lhje¾av ka¿ mª genËmenoi majhta¿ Éfe¾lousin {pokrij«nai tê jeê tê kajhmŸnæ ›p¿ tê jrËnæ. 10. {ll! oÚpw pisteÖete e¼v tÌn jeÌn tÌn ›ge¾ronta to×v nekroÖv. Gnwr¾sw ÕmÀn påv o½ nekro¿ ›gerj©sontai.

Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-21
Verbs {gap}w, |gi}zw, ‡gw (±qjhn), aÂrw, a¼tŸw, {koloujŸw, {koÖw ({k©koa), |mart}nw, {naba¾nw, {no¾gw, {pŸrqomai, {pojn¯skw, {pokr¾nomai, {pokte¾nw, {polÖw, {postŸllw ({pest}lhn), ‡rqw, {sp}zomai, b}llw (›bl©jhn), bapt¾zw, blŸpw, boÖlomai, genn}w, g¾nomai (gen©somai, gŸgona, ›gen©jhn), ginãskw (gnãsomai, £gnwka, ›gnãsjhn), gnwr¾zw, gr}fw (›gr}fhn), deÀ, dŸqomai, did}skw (did}xw), diŸrqomai, diãkw, dox}zw, dÖnamai, ›gg¾zw, ›ge¾rw (›g©germai, §gŸrjhn), e¼m¾ (ën), e¼sŸrqomai, ›kb}llw, ›xŸrqomai, ›pistrŸfw, ›rg}zomai, £rqomai (›leÖsomai, μljon, ›l©luja), ›sj¾w (f}gomai, £fagon), œtoim}zw, eÔaggel¾zomai, eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn), £qw, z}w, zhtŸw, jaum}zw, jŸlw, jerapeÖw, jn¯skw (tŸjnhka), kalŸw, k}jhmai, kaj¾zw, kataba¾nw, khrÖssw, kr}zw, kr¾nw, kt¾zw, lalŸw, lamb}nw (l©myomai, ›l©mfjhn), lŸgw (eÅpon, eÂrhka), log¾zomai, lÖw, mŸllw, mŸnw, Êr}w (Îyomai, eÅdon, œãraka, ëfjhn), Éfe¾lw, parag¾nomai, parakalŸw, paralamb}nw, pe¾jw (pŸpoija), pŸmpw, peripatŸw, p¾nw (p¾omai, £pion), p¾ptw (£peson), pisteÖw, plhrËw, poiŸw, poreÖomai, prosŸrqomai, proseÖqomai, prosfŸrw, staurËw, sun}gw, sézw, Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta), ÕpostrŸfw, fŸrw (±negka, §nŸqjhn), feÖgw (feÖxomai, £fugon), fobŸomai, qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph, ‡ggelov, {delf©, {delfËv, aÆma, a¼ãn, {l©jeia, |mart¾a, |martwlËv, {n©r, ‡njrwpov, {pËstolov, ‡rtov, ‡rqwn, basile¾a, bibl¾on, g«, gun©, daimËnion, did}skalov, dikaiosÖnh, dËxa, doØlov, dåron, e¼r©nh, ›kklhs¾a, ›xous¾a, £rgon, £rhmov, eÔaggŸlion, zw©, ¨mŸra, j}lassa, j}natov, jŸlhma, jeËv, jrËnov, jÖra, ½erËn, ½m}tion, kard¾a, kefal©, kËsmov, kÖriov, laËv, l¾jov, lËgov, majht©v, mht©r, nËmov, nÖx, ÊdËv, oÅkov, oÅnov, Înoma, oÔranËv, ÉfjalmËv, Îqlov, pat©r, ploÀon, pneØma, poÖv, prËswpon, prof©thv, Ó«ma, s}bbaton, s}rx, shmeÀon, spŸrma, stËma, sunagwg©, såma, tŸknon, tËpov, tuflËv, u½Ëv, fulak©, fwn©, q}riv, qe¾r, yuq©, íra Adjectives {gajËv, ‰giov, ‡llov, d¾kaiov, £sqatov, ¥terov, Âdiov, kakËv, kalËv, mikrËv, nekrËv, Ðlov, p‚v, pistËv, ponhrËv, pråtov Prepositions {pË, di}, e¼v, ›k, ›n, ›p¾, kat}, met}, par}, per¾, prËv, sÖn, ÕpŸr, ÕpË Other {ll}, {m©n, g}r, dŸ, e¼, ›keÀ, £ti, ¥wv, ±dh, ¼doÖ, ka¾, mŸn . . . dŸ, m©, nØn, (Ê, ¨, tË), Ðti, oÔ, oÔk, oÔq, oÔdŸ, oÞn, oÚpw, oÚte, oÜtwv, p}lin, poll}kiv, påv, tŸ, tËte Pronouns (aÔtËv, ©, Ë), ›gã, sÖ, œautoØ, ›keÀnov, ›mautoØ, oßtov, seautoØ
© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Practice and Review — Lesson 21
1. {gapåmen d¡ p}ntav to×v {delfo×v ¨mån ka¿ p}sav t~v {delf~v ¨mån ka¿ parakaloØmen z«n mª œautoÀv {ll~ tê kur¾æ. 2. fobeÀsje to×v ‡rqontav to×v stauroØntav to×v |g¾ouv prof©tav ka¿ diãkontav to×v pistoÖv; 3. t~ tŸkna ›k}lesan tªn mhtŸra aÔtån ka¿ ¸thsan ‡rton par’ aÔt«v, aÔtª d¡ oÔk §dÖnato œtoim}sai aÔtËn. 4. Ê did}skalËv mou ›l}lei toÀv |martwloÀv toÖtoiv, {ll’ oÔk ±jelon {koloujeÀn aÔtê oÔd¡ peripateÀn ›n t° Êdê toØ pneÖmatov. 5. o½ tuflo¿ oÔq Êråsi t~ ktisjŸnta ÕpÌ jeoØ, o½ d¡ Éfjalmo¿ t«v kard¾av aÔtån blŸpousi tªn basile¾an toØ oÔranoØ. 6. p‚sai a½ gunaÀkev ›po¾hsan œautaÀv kal~ ½m}tia, {ll~ ponhro¿ ‡njrwpoi £balon aÔt~ e¼v tªn j}lassan. 7. e¼ zhtå dox}zein ›mautËn, oÚte plhrãsw tÌn lËgon toØ jeoØ oÚte poi©sw tÌ £rgon pneÖmatov.

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

8. Ê {nªr ›keÀnov ›l}lei per¿ œautoØ ka¿ oÔ per¿ t«v q}ritov jeoØ. s× oÞn oÔk ±kousav aÔtoØ oÔd¡ §koloÖjhsav. 9. ›gä oÚpw log¾zomai ›mautÌn peplhrwkŸnai tÌn p}nta nËmon, zhtå d¡ {gap‚n p}ntav to×v diãkont}v me. 10. Ê m¡n ‡njrwpov ›keÀnov ›gŸnnhsŸn me ka¿ tªn {delf©n mou, ¨meÀv d¡ oÔ zåmen ›n tê oÂkæ aÔtoØ oÔd¡ peripatoØmen ›n taÀv ÊdoÀv aÔtoØ. 11. ›d¾daxav ‡llouv fobeÀsjai tÌn kÖrion= ›d¾daxav d¡ seautÌn tÌ aÔtÌ poieÀn; 12. Êr† Ê doØlov {pÌ t«v g«v ploÀon ›p¿ t«v jal}sshv ka¿ kaleÀ toÀv ›rgazomŸnoiv ›n aÔtê. 13. ¨ m©thr mou parek}lei me ka¿ tªn gunaÀk} mou genn«sai tŸkna, ¨meÀv d¡ £ti ¨toim}zomen œautoÖv. 14. poiån seautê jrËnon ›boÖlou ‡rqein t«v g«v, Ê d¡ ‡ggelov toØ jan}tou eÅpen, !En taÖt¬ t° nukt¿ tªn yuq©n sou a¼t©sw {pÌ soØ. 15. staurwjŸntov toØ kur¾ou ÕpÌ tån ›xousiån ka¿ {pojanËntov, −t©santo p}ntev o½ {koloujoØntev aÔtê tÌ såma aÔtoØ.

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

P‚v in Various Constructions
1. In the Predicate Position (very common) Phil 4:22 {sp}zontai Õm‚v p}ntev o½ ‰gioi “All the saints greet you.” Matt 7:21 OÔ p‚v Ê lŸgwn moi, KÖrie kÖrie, e¼seleÖsetai e¼v tªn basile¾an. . . . “Not everyone who says to me, “Lord, Lord,” will enter into the kingdom. . . .” 2. In the Attributive Position (relatively rare) Gal 5:14 Ê g~r p‚v nËmov ›n ›n¿ lËgæ pepl©rwtai “For the entire law is fulfilled in one saying. . . .” Acts 19:7 μsan d¡ o½ p}ntev ‡ndrev âse¿ dãdeka “Altogether there were about twelve men.” (See also Acts 27:37.) 3. Without the Article John 2:10 P‚v ‡njrwpov pråton tÌn kalÌn oÅnon t¾jhsin. “Every person first sets out the good wine.” Rom 5:12 ka¿ oÜtwv e¼v p}ntav {njrãpouv Ê j}natov di«ljen “And so death came to all human beings.” 4. With Personal Pronouns, Demonstratives, and Participles Gal 3:28 p}ntev g~r ÕmeÀv eÆv ›ste ›n Qristê !IhsoØ. “For you are all one in Christ Jesus.” John 15:21 {ll~ taØta p}nta poi©sousin e¼v Õm‚v di~ tÌ Înom} mou. “But all these things they will do to you because of my name.” Matt 26:52 p}ntev g~r o½ labËntev m}qairan ›n maqa¾r¬ {poloØntai. “For all who draw the sword will perish by the sword.” 5. Used as a Substantive, with or without the Article Matt 21:26 p}ntev g~r âv prof©thn £qousin tÌn !Iw}nnhn. “For all hold that John is a prophet.” Col 1:16 ›n aÔtê ›kt¾sjh t~ p}nta ›n toÀv oÔranoÀv ka¿ ›p¿ t«v g«v. “In him all things were created in heaven and on earth.”

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Quick Quiz — Lesson 21
1. Translate the following sentences. p}ntev o½ {gapåntev tÌn nËmon ka¿ poioØntev tÌ d¾kaion z©sousin. p‚v Ê foboÖmenov daimËnia Éfe¾lei genŸsjai majhtªv ka¿ fobeÀsjai tÌn kÖrion. peripatoØmen ›n t° {lhje¾ƒ, gegenn©meja g~r ›k toØ pneÖmatov toØ |g¾ou. 2. Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms below. Ê prof©thv ›l}lhsen tê laê ka¿ ót©sato aÔto×v {kolouj«sai aÔtê. eÅpen g}r,

OÔ dox}zw ›mautËn, {ll~ dox}zw tÌn ›staurwmŸnon u½Ìn toØ jeoØ. parakalå oÞn

Õm‚v zhteÀn tªn ÊdÌn toØ u½oØ. oÔ dÖnasje did}skein œautoÖv. didaqj©sesje ÕpÌ

toØ kaloØntov jeoØ {pÌ oÔranoØ, ka¿ ›gã e¼mi Ê doØlov aÔtoØ. Ê jeÌv toØ oÔranoØ

œãraken t~ mŸllonta ka¿ plhrãsei p}nta.

3. Parse these verb forms from the above paragraph. Tense 1. ›l}lhsen 2. ót©sato 3. parakalå 4. œãraken 5. plhrãsei Voice Mood Person Number

© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-22
Verbs {gap}w, |gi}zw, ‡gw (±qjhn), aÂrw, a¼tŸw, {koloujŸw, {koÖw ({k©koa), |mart}nw, {naba¾nw, {no¾gw, {paggŸllw, {pŸrqomai, {pojn¯skw, {pokr¾nomai, {pokte¾nw, {polÖw, {postŸllw ({pest}lhn), ‡rqw, {sp}zomai, b}llw (›bl©jhn), bapt¾zw, blŸpw, boÖlomai, genn}w, g¾nomai (gen©somai, gŸgona, ›gen©jhn), ginãskw (gnãsomai, £gnwka, ›gnãsjhn), gnwr¾zw, gr}fw (›gr}fhn), deÀ, dŸqomai, did}skw (did}xw), diŸrqomai, diãkw, dokŸw, dox}zw, dÖnamai, ›gg¾zw, ›ge¾rw (›g©germai, §gŸrjhn), e¼m¾ (ën), e¼sŸrqomai, ›kb}llw, ›xŸrqomai, ›pistrŸfw, ›rg}zomai, £rqomai (›leÖsomai, μljon, ›l©luja), ›sj¾w (f}gomai, £fagon), œtoim}zw, eÔaggel¾zomai, eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn), £qw, z}w, zhtŸw, jaum}zw, jŸlw, jerapeÖw, jn¯skw (tŸjnhka), kalŸw, k}jhmai, kaj¾zw, kataba¾nw, khrÖssw, kr}zw, kr¾nw, kt¾zw, lalŸw, lamb}nw (l©myomai, ›l©mfjhn), lŸgw (eÅpon, eÂrhka), log¾zomai, lÖw, mŸllw, mŸnw, Êr}w (Îyomai, eÅdon, œãraka, ëfjhn), Éfe¾lw, parag¾nomai, parakalŸw, paralamb}nw, pe¾jw (pŸpoija), pŸmpw, peripatŸw, p¾nw (p¾omai, £pion), p¾ptw (pesoØmai, £peson), pisteÖw, plhrËw, poiŸw, poreÖomai, prosŸrqomai, proseÖqomai, proskunŸw, prosfŸrw, spe¾rw, staurËw, sun}gw, sézw, thrŸw, Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta), ÕpostrŸfw, fŸrw (±negka, §nŸqjhn), feÖgw (feÖxomai, £fugon), fobŸomai, qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph, ‡ggelov, {delf©, {delfËv, aÆma, a¼ãn, {l©jeia, |mart¾a, |martwlËv, {n©r, ‡njrwpov, {pËstolov, ‡rtov, ‡rqwn, basile¾a, bibl¾on, g«, gun©, daimËnion, did}skalov, dikaiosÖnh, dËxa, doØlov, dåron, e¼r©nh, ›kklhs¾a, ›ntol©, ›xous¾a, £rgon, £rhmov, eÔaggŸlion, zw©, ¨mŸra, j}lassa, j}natov, jŸlhma, jeËv, jrËnov, jÖra, ½erËn, ½m}tion, kard¾a, kefal©, kËsmov, kÖriov, laËv, l¾jov, lËgov, majht©v, mht©r, nËmov, nÖx, ÊdËv, oÅkov, oÅnov, Înoma, oÔranËv, ÉfjalmËv, Îqlov, pat©r, ploÀon, pneØma, poÖv, prËswpon, prof©thv, pØr, Ó«ma, s}bbaton, s}rx, shmeÀon, spŸrma, stËma, sunagwg©, såma, tŸknon, tËpov, tuflËv, Üdwr, u½Ëv, fulak©, fwn©, fåv, q}riv, qe¾r, yuq©, íra Adjectives {gajËv, ‰giov, ‡llov, d¾kaiov, ¥kastov, ›mËv, £sqatov, ¥terov, ¨mŸterov, Âdiov, kakËv, kalËv, mikrËv, nekrËv, Ðlov, p‚v, pistËv, ponhrËv, pråtov, sËv, ÕmŸterov Prepositions {pË, di}, e¼v, ›k, ›n, ›p¾, kat}, met}, par}, per¾, prËv, sÖn, ÕpŸr, ÕpË Other {ll}, {m©n, g}r, dŸ, e¼, ›keÀ, £ti, ¥wv, ±dh, ¼doÖ, ka¾, mŸn . . . dŸ, m©, nØn, (Ê, ¨, tË), Ðpou, Ðti, oÔ, oÔk, oÔq, oÔdŸ, oÞn, oÚpw, oÚte, oÜtwv, p}lin, poll}kiv, påv, tŸ, tËte Pronouns {ll©lwn, (aÔtËv, ©, Ë), ›gã, sÖ, œautoØ, ›keÀnov, ›mautoØ, oßtov, seautoØ
© 2007 N. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

¨meÀv g~r oÔk ›thr©samen t~v ›ntol~v toØ jeoØ. Éfe¾lomen oÞn poll}kiv parakaleÀn {ll©louv. eÕr©somen ›keÀnon tÌn ‡njrwpon ka¿ krinoØmen aÔtÌn kat~ tÌn ¨mŸteron nËmon= aÔtÌv g~r £labe t~ s~ bibl¾a ka¿ £fugen. Ê spe¾rwn baleÀ tÌ spŸrma ›p¿ tªn g«n. ginãskomen Ðti {pojanoÖmeja. 6. ›reÀte to×v ›mo×v lËgouv toÀv Îqloiv ka¿ {posteleÀte to×v ÕmetŸrouv doÖlouv sunagageÀn t~ tŸkna e¼v tÌ ½erËn.Practice and Review — Lesson 22 1. Clayton Croy. 7. . ›n ›ke¾n¬ t° ¨mŸrƒ pØr peseÀtai {pÌ toØ oÔranoØ ka¿ Ê ‡ggelov toØ fwtÌv {paggeleÀ tÌn lËgon sark¿ p}s¬. ÕmeÀv m¡n proskuneÀte daimon¾oiv. 5. © 2007 N. 3. All Rights Reserved. {ll~ dokoØmen Ðti Ê ponhrÌv ›leÖsetai ka¿ {reÀ aÔtË. 4. 2. ¨meÀv d¡ proskunoØmen tê jeê tê poi©santi tÌ Üdwr ka¿ tªn g«n ka¿ p}nta ›n aÔtoÀv. krineÀ Ê jeÌv ¥kaston ¨mån ›n t° ¨mŸrƒ t° ›sq}t¬. {ll’ oÔ ginãskomen Ðpou ›leusËmeja.

10. {ll’ £meinen ›keÀ ka¿ {p©ggeilen tÌ p‚n jŸlhma toØ jeoØ. 14. Ê jeÌv g~r {pŸsteilen tÌn ‰gion prof©thn aÔtoØ {paggŸllonta taØta. Ê kÖriov {pŸsteilen tªn ›mªn {delfªn Ðpou oÔk ±jelen ›ljeÀn. . {ll~ meneÀ tÌ £rgon tÌ ¨mŸteron. ka¿ Ê kÖriov aÔtÌv ›gereÀ ¨m‚v z«n ›n tê fwt¿ met’ {ll©lwn. ›n tê sê ÉnËmati. © 2007 N. kÖrie. o½ |martwlo¿ ›keÀnoi dokoØsin Ðti throØntev t~v {njrãpwn ›ntol~v eÕr©sousi q}rin met~ jeoØ. 12. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved. ›spe¾ramen spŸrmata t«v e¼r©nhv. baleÀte tÌn ÕmŸteron ‡rton ›p¿ tÌ Üdwr ka¿ proskun©sete tê u½ê t«v dikaiosÖnhv ›n toÖtæ tê tËpæ. tÌ £rgon œk}stou krij©setai ›n pur¾.8. 13. menoØmen ›n t° {lhje¾ƒ. o½ dokoØntev £qein tÌ pØr toØ pneÖmatov μran t~v qeÀrav ka¿ proshÖxanto tê jeê. 9. 11.

menoØmai 2. Future Active of mŸnw Singular 1. meneÀtai Plural menoÖmeja meneÀsje menoØntai Note: Some forms of the future active and middle of contract verbs differ from the corresponding present tense forms only by accent. All Rights Reserved. Future of Liquid Verbs — Add an epsilon to the stem. . m. — They do not accept the direct attachment of the -sa of the first aorist. they will remain Future Middle of mŸnw Singular 1. — Epsilon contracts with the connecting vowel of the person/number endings. and r — They do not accept the direct attachment of the -s of the future tense. menå. Clayton Croy. . he/she will remain Plural menoØmen. we will remain meneÀte.Liquid Verbs — Stems ending in l. you will remain menoØsi(n). men° 3. mŸnw = “I remain” but menå = “I will remain” © 2007 N. meneÀ. n. I will remain 2. — Result looks like the present tense of a contract verb in -ew. meneÀv. Thus . . you will remain 3.

First Aorist of Liquid Verbs First Aorist Active of mŸnw Singular 1. All Rights Reserved. you remained £meinan. £meinav. they remained First Aorist Middle of mŸnw (see §345 in appendix) Singular 1. £meine(n). you remained 3. ›me¾nw 3. . we remained ›me¾nate. ›me¾nato Plural ›mein}meja ›me¾nasje ›me¾nanto © 2007 N. I remained 2. he/she remained Plural ›me¾namen. £meina. ›mein}mhn 2. Clayton Croy.

Give the Future Active Indicative of mŸnw. ›spe¾ramen spŸrmata t«v e¼r©nhv ›n t° ¨metŸr¬ g° ka¿ parekalŸsamen {ll©louv threÀn t~v ›ntol~v toØ jeoØ. {pojaneÀsje ›n t° |mart¾ƒ Õmån ka¿ oÔk Îyesje tÌ fåv toØ oÔranoØ. All Rights Reserved. Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person 2. dokeÀte g~r Ðti œk}sth ¨mŸra ›st¿n dåron {pÌ daimon¾wn ka¿ Üdwr zån £rqetai {p! aÔtån. nØn {paggelå ÕmÀn. Clayton Croy. krineÀ 4. ›spe¾ramen 2.Quick Quiz — Lesson 22 1. Give the Aorist Active Indicative of mŸnw. {pojaneÀsje © 2007 N. {paggelå 3. {ll~ prosekun©sate daimon¾oiv ka¿ ›pŸmyate t~ tŸkna t~ ÕmŸtera e¼v tÌ pØr. ›gereÀ 5. Singular 1st Person 2nd Person 3rd Person Plural Plural 3. Tense 1. #O kÖriov krineÀ Õm‚v di~ tªn ÕmetŸran |mart¾an ka¿ oÔk ›gereÀ Õm‚v ›n t° ›sq}t¬ ¨mŸrƒ. Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms. Voice Mood Person Number .

‡rtov. {koÖw ({k©koa). {pojn¯skw. pØr. q}riv. ÕpostrŸfw. ›mËv. lÖw. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. ›n. ¥terov. (aÔtËv. ½m}tion. ÊdËv. poreÖomai. sÖn. ponhrËv. §nŸqjhn). aÂrw. oÚpw. e¼v. £ti. ›xous¾a. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). kefal©.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-23 Verbs {gap}w. £fugon). ›mautoØ. Ðti. dikaiosÖnh. ploÀon. yuq©. aÆma. gr}fw (›gr}fhn). p¾nw (p¾omai. ‡rqwn. diãkw. e¼r©nh. kalŸw. ›gg¾zw. oÔkŸti. jrËnov. dåron. Ðte. staurËw. k}jhmai. ÕmŸterov Prepositions {pË. oÅnov. g«. qe¾r. nØn. g¾nomai (gen©somai. |martwlËv. spe¾rw. ›p¾. ‡gw (±qjhn). gnwr¾zw. kaj¾zw. z}w. tË). jÖra. £rqomai (›leÖsomai. ›gnãsjhn). oÔranËv. dŸ. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). a¼tŸw. {naba¾nw. ëfjhn). {l©jeia. spŸrma. μljon. mhkŸti. ‰giov. ¥wv. poll}kiv. eÔaggel¾zomai. e¼sŸrqomai. deÀ. eÅdon. proskunŸw. ›keÀnov. jŸlw. sun}gw. ginãskw (gnãsomai. Üdwr. pistËv. fåv. prosŸrqomai. b}llw (›bl©jhn). bapt¾zw. såma. shmeÀon. blŸpw. |mart¾a. kr¾nw. ‡ggelov. ‡llov. §gŸrjhn). tuflËv. Éfe¾lw. boÖlomai. proseÖqomai. pat©r. ›gã. dokŸw. ‡njrwpov. (Ê. fwn©. kÖriov. {pokte¾nw. nÖx. kËsmov. kat}. doØlov. Ðtan. s}rx. ¨mŸterov. ›l©mfjhn). Ðpou. a¼ãn. prof©thv. ›kklhs¾a. kalËv. lalŸw. {pokr¾nomai. {sp}zomai. oÔk. d¾kaiov. met}. ±dh. pisteÖw. dÖnamai. Ó«ma. ›}n. u½Ëv. tŸ. par}. âv Pronouns {ll©lwn. fobŸomai. ÕpË Other {ll}. kakËv. {delf©. thrŸw. £sqatov. jaum}zw. p¾ptw (pesoØmai. gun©. genn}w. ©. dox}zw. khrÖssw. £rgon. feÖgw (feÖxomai. nekrËv. ›kb}llw. påv. {polÖw. prËv. did}skw (did}xw). kataba¾nw. m©. {delfËv. oßtov. sézw. j}natov. jŸlhma. l¾jov. p}lin. ¥kastov. Âdiov. gŸgona. ›k. mŸn . zhtŸw. j}lassa. bibl¾on. œtoim}zw. kr}zw. {pËstolov. ¨. g}r. (oÔ. ›l©luja). {koloujŸw. oÜtwv. zw©. kwm©. œautoØ. |mart}nw. ¨mŸra. sÖ. parag¾nomai. £peson). mŸnw. poiŸw. mhdŸ. ›pistrŸfw. mŸllw. mikrËv. plhrËw. poÖv. {paggŸllw. ›rg}zomai. lamb}nw (l©myomai. paralamb}nw. £fagon). oÞn. pneØma. Îqlov. e¼m¾ (ën). . ÕpŸr. oÚte. dŸqomai. {n©r. lŸgw (eÅpon. e¼. prËswpon. sËv. Ðpwv. ‡rqw. ka¾. fŸrw (±negka. tŸknon. Clayton Croy. parakalŸw. |gi}zw. {m©n. £rhmov. jeËv. graf©. eÔaggŸlion. £qw. lËgov. Ë). ›gen©jhn). íra Adjectives {gajËv. sunagwg©. {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). dËxa. ‡n. ¼doÖ. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. ›keÀ. nËmov. ›ntol©. majht©v. ÉfjalmËv. Ðlov. kard¾a. did}skalov. laËv. All Rights Reserved. log¾zomai. £pion). peripatŸw. di}. pŸmpw. . {pŸrqomai. fulak©. Ãna. dŸ. ›xŸrqomai. {gor}zw. per¾. s}bbaton. daimËnion. kt¾zw. ½erËn. jerapeÖw. Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). stËma. oÅkov. p‚v. £gnwka. tËte. diŸrqomai. seautoØ © 2007 N. {no¾gw. qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph. œãraka. oÔdŸ. Înoma. eÂrhka). . pråtov. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). oÔq). basile¾a. tËpov. mht©r. Êr}w (Îyomai. prosfŸrw.

¨ m©thr t«v gunaikËv mou oÔ p}lin ÕpostrŸyei e¼v tÌn oÅkon ¨mån. gnãsesje Ðti ¨ dËxa toØ jeoØ mŸnei ›n ›ke¾næ tê tËpæ. 4. påv z©swmen ›n tê kËsmæ toØtæ Ðpwv Ê laÌv Âd¬ tÌ fåv toØ eÔaggel¾ou. ›~n mª {sp}swmai aÔtªn prÌv tªn jÖran mhd¡ prosenŸgkw Üdwr p¾nein. oÔ plhroØmen tÌ toØ pneÖmatov jŸlhma. Clayton Croy. 8. 5. 6. © 2007 N. Ê did}skalov t«v dikaiosÖnhv {pŸlusen to×v Îqlouv Ãna {peljËntev e¼v t~v kãmav {gor}swsin œautoÀv ‡rton. Ðpou ˆn e¼sŸljhte e¼v oÅkon.Practice and Review — Lesson 23 1. All Rights Reserved. mhkŸti oÞn {ll©louv kr¾nwmen. sunag}gwmen tÌn laÌn e¼v tÌ ½erÌn Ãna di~ tån grafån paraklhjåmen. . påv proskun©shte aÔtê e¼v tÌn a¼åna. 3. Ðte g~r kr¾nomen to×v {delfo×v ka¿ t~v {delf~v ¨mån. 2. ›~n mª |gi}shte tÌn kÖrion ›n taÀv kard¾aiv Õmån. ›~n eÜrhte ›keÀ tÌ bibl¾on toØ nËmou. tÌn ›rqËmenon prÌv ›m¡ oÔ mª ›kb}lw ka¿ tÌn zhtoØnta e¼r©nhn oÔ mª {poste¾lw e¼v tªn £rhmon. 7.

p}ntev o½ g~r fagËntev aÔtÌn oÔkŸti zåsin. 14. Ðpwv o½ ‡njrwpoi Âdwsin aÔtoÖv. a½ grafa¿ tån profhtån plhrwj©sontai. p¾nwmen oÅnon ¥wv ˆn mª dunãmeja peripateÀn mhd¡ laleÀn. 11. Ðtan d¡ £lj¬ Ê u½Ìv toØ {njrãpou. 13. 12. . 10. Clayton Croy. oÔkŸti g}r ›smen doØloi t«v sarkËv. © 2007 N. Ðtan proseÖqhsje oÔk £sesje âv o½ {gapåntev ›n taÀv ÊdoÀv proseÖqesjai.9. Ðte ±mhn mej’ Õmån £legon. mhkŸti |mart}nwmen e¼v tÌn oÔranÌn {ll’ ›rgazãmeja tÌ {gajÌn Ãna îmen tŸkna t«v basile¾av toØ jeoØ. oÔ mª p}lin {gor}swsin ‡rton ›n taÖt¬ t° kãm¬. All Rights Reserved. Mª fobãmeja |mart¾an mhd¡ j}naton.

5. the teacher will still teach me. Should you trust the ones who do not follow your teacher? 3. Hortatory Subjunctive {gap©swmen tÌn did}skalon ¨mån ka¿ fŸrwmen aÔtê dåra.Uses of the Subjunctive I. You will never do harm to the teacher! II. Emphatic Negation oÔ mª ›rg}zhsje kakÌn tê didask}læ. Let us love our teacher and let us bring gifts to him. Even the evil brothers are going to the teacher in order that they may hear the words of life. DEPENDENT USES (In a subordinate clause) 4. . © 2007 N. Ê did}skalov £ti did}xei me. All Rights Reserved. Deliberative Subjunctive pisteÖshte toÀv mª {koloujoÖsi tê didask}læ Õmån. Purpose ka¿ o½ ponhro¿ {delfo¿ poreÖontai prÌv tÌn did}skalon Ãna {koÖswsin t~ Ó©mata t«v zw«v. Future or Present General Conditions ›~n b}lw tÌ bibl¾on e¼v tÌ pØr. INDEPENDENT USES (Subjunctive is the main verb) 1. 2. Clayton Croy. If I should throw the book into the fire.

eÂphte 7. ka¿ ›~n ›rgazãmeja tÌ £rgon toØ jeoØ. £kraxen 2. ›sj¾wmen 5. All Rights Reserved. tËte eÅpen Ê pat©r. Ðtan g~r ›sj¾wmen ‡rton dun}meja ›rg}zesjai tÌ £rgon toØ jeoØ. OÔk £qomen ‡rton ›sj¾ein. boulËmeja ›sj¾ein. ›n t° kãm¬ eßren ‡rton ka¿ ÕpŸstreyen e¼v tÌn oÅkon aÔtoØ. Tense 1. Dox}swmen tÌn jeÌn tÌn pŸmponta ‡rton toÀv tŸknoiv t«v g«v. Clayton Croy. proseÖqwmeja 8. £kraxen t~ tŸkna. e¼s«ljen oÞn Ê patªr aÔtån e¼v tªn kãmhn Ãna {gor}s¬ ‡rton. Voice Mood Person Number . eÂrhkav © 2007 N. {gor}s¬ 3. eÂrhkav tªn {l©jeian. ›rgazãmeja 6. tËte £kraxen t~ tŸkna.Quick Quiz — Lesson 23 Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms. P}ter. {ll~ nØn oÔ jŸlomen {koØsai t«v fwn«v sou. ka¿ oÔ mª eÂphte Ðti Ê jeÌv oÔk {koÖsei ¨mån Ðtan proseuqãmeja ka¿ a¼t©swmen ‡rton. oÔkŸti ›sËmeja basile¾a {njrãpwn ponhrån. Dox}swmen 4.

plhrËw. paid¾on. ›gg¾zw. p‚v. μljon. nekrËv. ›l©luja). mŸllw. ›k. jŸlw. |mart}nw. {pËstolov. e¼sŸrqomai. dox}zw. d¾kaiov. Ó«ma. sunagwg©. lÖw. shmeÀon. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). Êr}w (Îyomai. dËxa. boÖlomai. s}bbaton. lËgov. eÅdon. ‡ggelov. basile¾a. prof©thv. prËswpon. ÊdËv. daimËnion. pØr. œãraka. ›n. poiŸw. dikaiosÖnh. Ðlov. gŸgona. ¨mŸra. oÅnov. ‡rtov. ›xŸrqomai. ‡llov. fŸrw (±negka. {paggŸllw. §nŸqjhn). £xestin. aÆma. ‰giov. dåron. oÅkov. qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph. {gor}zw. kwm©. mŸnw. parabol©. lamb}nw (l©myomai. sézw. {rq©. fåv. pŸmpw. |gi}zw. {koÖw ({k©koa). sun}gw. Üdwr. k}jhmai. e¼m¾ (ën. kt¾zw. {naba¾nw. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). fwn©. {pŸrqomai. ›kb}llw. jewrŸw. marturŸw. jeËv. ¨mŸterov. jÖra. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. Clayton Croy. qe¾r. jŸlhma. ‡gw (±qjhn). gnwr¾zw. {delf©. {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). diŸrqomai. kalŸw. pråtov. kefal©. sof¾a. kËsmov. e¼r©nh. eÅnai). {gaphtËv. ‡rqwn. graf©. ›rg}zomai. di}. feÖgw (feÖxomai. |martwlËv. parag¾nomai. staurËw. ploÀon. kr}zw. Âdiov. thrŸw. ›pistrŸfw. Îqlov. ponhrËv. proseÖqomai. ½m}tion. peripatŸw. yuq©. £rqomai (›leÖsomai. ›xous¾a. did}skw (did}xw). jerapeÖw. nËmov. did}skalov. ÕpË © 2007 N. gun©. ginãskw (gnãsomai. ›gnãsjhn). majht©v. œtoim}zw. poÖv. paralamb}nw. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). log¾zomai. Éfe¾lw. p¾ptw (pesoØmai. doØlov. ‡njrwpov. bapt¾zw. mht©r. u½Ëv. proskunŸw. pat©r. par}. |mart¾a. sÖn. ›gen©jhn). pistËv. ½erËn. såma. stËma. mikrËv. kalËv. oÔranËv. £fagon). £fugon). {no¾gw. prËv. pisteÖw. ‡rqw. a¼ãn. ÉfjalmËv. £gnwka. {pokr¾nomai. j}natov. {sp}zomai. prosfŸrw. kaj¾zw. eÂrhka).Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-24 Verbs {gap}w. genn}w. lalŸw. ›l©mfjhn). p¾nw (p¾omai. zhtŸw. spŸrma. spe¾rw. tuflËv. ›kklhs¾a. s}rx. {pokte¾nw. jaum}zw. e¼v. kr¾nw. ›ntol©. £pion). bibl¾on. . ÕpŸr. keleÖw. ›p¾. ¥kastov. tŸknon. nÖx. eÔaggel¾zomai. kÖriov. diãkw. glåssa. {delfËv. l¾jov. prosŸrqomai. £peson). g¾nomai (gen©somai. £rgon. {polÖw. dŸqomai. ÕmŸterov Prepositions {pË. laËv. ›mËv. kakËv. blŸpw. kataba¾nw. khrÖssw. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. £qw. poreÖomai. zw©. {pojn¯skw. kard¾a. kat}. met}. gr}fw (›gr}fhn). §gŸrjhn). ¥terov. j}lassa. parakalŸw. jrËnov. z}w. Înoma. íra Adjectives {gajËv. per¾. prË. dokŸw. lŸgw (eÅpon. fulak©. fobŸomai. pneØma. q}riv. Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). g«. ëfjhn). a¼tŸw. eÔaggŸlion. £rhmov. b}llw (›bl©jhn). dÖnamai. {l©jeia. {koloujŸw. sËv. tËpov. All Rights Reserved. deÀ. £sqatov. aÂrw. {n©r. ÕpostrŸfw.

›keÀ. (aÔtËv. oÔk. oÜtwv.Other {ll}. ›gã. tË). mhdŸ. dŸ. oßtov. œautoØ. oÚte. sÖ. oÔq). m©. ¼doÖ. påv. oÞn. ©. mhkŸti. ¥wv. oÔkŸti. oÔdŸ. seautoØ © 2007 N. Ðpou. £ti. Ãna. Ðtan. ›keÀnov. dŸ. íste Pronouns {ll©lwn. ‡n. . ›mautoØ. mŸn . ›}n. (oÔ. poll}kiv. âv. nØn. . ±dh. . oÚpw. tËte. Ë). Ðpwv. (Ê. tŸ. p}lin. g}r. ¨. e¼. Ðte. {m©n. ka¾. All Rights Reserved. Ðti. Clayton Croy.

. 9. ›n tê {pojn¯skein tÌn did}skalon. 3. di~ tÌ mª lelukŸnai tÌn kÖrion tªn glåssan toØ {ndrËv. ¨ {rqª t«v sof¾av ›st¿n tÌ fobeÀsjai tÌn kÖrion ka¿ proskun«sai aÔtê. kakËn ›stin labeÀn paid¾on {pÌ toØ oÂkou t«v mhtrÌv aÔtoØ. 2. 8. oÔk ›dÖnato martureÀn per¿ q}ritov toØ jeoØ. All Rights Reserved. 5. 4. Ê ‡rqwn ›kŸleuse tÌn doØlon tÌn {gaphtÌn dŸxasjai t~ kal~ ½m}tia âv dåra. Clayton Croy.Practice and Review — Lesson 24 1. met~ tÌ {koØsai tªn parabolªn o½ |martwlo¿ −t©santo to×v majht~v {peljeÀn {pÌ t«v kãmhv aÔtån. ›l}lhse parabolªn kat’ aÔtån íste ‹rai aÔto×v l¾jouv baleÀn ›p’ aÔtËn. 6. © 2007 N. eÅpen Ê u½Ìv aÔtoØ Ðti £qei tªn sof¾an toØ patrÌv aÔtoØ ka¿ did}xei ›n tê tËpæ aÔtoØ. s× m¡n lŸgeiv. prÌ toØ jewreÀn tªn dËxan toØ oÔranoØ deÀ peripateÀn ‡njrwpon ›n {lhje¾ƒ ›n toÖtæ tê kËsmæ. 7. OÔk £xestin ›rg}zesjai ›n sabb}tæ oÔd¡ jerapeØsai. ¨meÀv d¡ jŸlomen {noÀxai to×v Éfjalmo×v tån tuflån.

11. ›ginãskete tÌn prof©thn mª eÅnai pistËn= eÂpete oÞn Ðti oÔk {kolouj©sete aÔtê e¼v tªn £rhmon. 15. © 2007 N. 14. e¼ ¨ glåssa boÖletai ‡rqein Ðlou toØ sãmatov. 12. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved. ›lhlÖjamen ¼deÀn tªn {rqªn tån ›sq}twn ¨merån prÌ toØ Éfj«nai tÌn toØ jan}tou ‡ggelon. ¨ kefalª Éfe¾lei keleÖein tÌ stËma mª {noÀxai. 13. {ll~ feÖxesje {p’ aÔtoØ. ›n tê jewreÀn Õm‚v tÌ paid¾on tÌ {gaphtÌn paregŸnonto p‚sai a½ ‰giai gunaÀkev lŸgousai. DeÀ baptisj«nai aÔt©n. £xestin oÜtwv kr}zein ›n tê ½erê íste luj«nai tªn e¼r©nhn ka¿ mª dÖnasjai tÌn laÌn {koØsai t~v graf}v.10. . kako¿ ‡njrwpoi ›martÖrhsan kat~ toØ {postËlou e¼v tÌ krij«nai aÔtÌn ka¿ ›kblhj«nai ›k t«v sunagwg«v.

Characteristics of the Greek Infinitive The Greek infinitive is a verbal noun. middle. aorist. . Verbal Qualities Has tense (present. Clayton Croy. but article may reveal case May have a direct object or indirect object May take the definite article May have adverbial modifiers May be the object of a preposition Verbal Functions May express purpose Noun-like Functions Subject of a sentence May express result Direct object of a verb May express time May express cause © 2007 N. passive. All Rights Reserved. perfect) Noun-like Qualities Has gender (always regarded as neuter) Has voice (active. deponent) Has number (always regarded as singular) May have a subject (accusative of respect) Is indeclinable.

2. Direct Object of a Verb (may include some complementary infinitives) eÅpen ¨ gun©. I want to speak. ›n tê khrÖssein me £pesen tÌ pneØma tÌ ‰gion. Temporal Relationships (three types) prÌ toØ laleÀn se ginãskomen to×v lËgouv sou. The woman said. The man was dying because [he] did not have water. met~ tÌ ›gerj«na¾ me ›leÖsomai prÌv Õm‚v. Before you speak. I will come to you. the Holy Spirit fell. we know your words. Purpose ›lhlÖjamen e¼v tÌ blŸpein tÌn prof©thn. Verb-related Functions of the Greek Infinitive 1. To believe in the Lord is a good thing. You took the wine with the result that you were thrown into prison. Ê kÖriov £pemyŸ me bapt¾zein ›n pneÖmati.” Ê ‡rqwn oÔk £qei tÌ jŸlein Õp¡r t«v e¼r©nhv. Result ¨ g« ¨mån ›lÖjh íste mª eÅnai ‡rton. {gajËn ›stin tÌ pisteÖein e¼v tÌn kÖrion. © 2007 N.Noun-related Functions of the Greek Infinitive 1. . boÖlomai laleÀn. “Lord. All Rights Reserved. After I have been raised. Subject of a Sentence taØta gr}fein ÕmÀn oÔk £stin £rgon mikrËn. While I was preaching. Our land was destroyed such that there is no bread. We have come in order to see the prophet. Clayton Croy. The Lord sent me to baptize in [the] Spirit. 3. The ruler does not have the desire for peace. To write these things to you is not a small task. Cause {pŸjn¬sken Ê {nªr di~ tÌ mª £qein Üdwr. £labev tÌn oÅnon toØ blhj«na¾ se e¼v fulak©n. 4. KÖrie. 2.

›gerj«nai © 2007 N. {noÀxai 6. Voice Mood Person Number . íste tªn basile¾an eÅnai aÔtoÀv âv pØr. Ê {gaphtÌv majhtªv μljen prÌv tªn kãmhn ¨mån fŸrein tªn sof¾an tån grafån. Îyontai 8. {koØsai 4. μljen 2. Clayton Croy. Tense 1. ka¿ ›n tê ›ljeÀn aÔtÌn Îyontai aÔtÌn ka¿ p¾ontai tÌn lËgon toØ jeoØ âv Üdwr.Quick Quiz — Lesson 24 Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms. prÌ toØ lŸgein ›kŸleusen ¨m‚v kaj¾sai ka¿ {noÀxai t~v kard¾av ¨mån prÌv tÌn kÖrion. tËte ›l}lhsen parabol©n. Ê g~r jeÌv krineÀ aÔto×v met~ tÌ ›gerj«nai to×v nekroÖv. p}ntev o½ ‰gioi sun©gagon t~ paid¾a aÔtån e¼v tÌ {koØsai toØ majhtoØ. oÜtwv ›martÖrhsen Ê {gaphtÌv majht©v. o½ d¡ kako¿ jŸlousin eÅnai pråtoi ka¿ £qein p‚san ›xous¾an. ›kŸleusen 5. o½ pisto¿ jŸlousin jewreÀn tÌn kÖrion. All Rights Reserved. jewreÀn 7. #H basile¾a toØ jeoØ ›stin âv pØr ka¿ Üdwr. Note: These categories may not always apply. fŸrein 3.

pat©r. diŸrqomai. ›xous¾a. {pokr¾nomai. eÔaggŸlion. £rqomai (›leÖsomai. ½ereÖv. {sjen©v. {sp}zomai. kÖriov. j}lassa. £fugon). ponhrËv. Ðlov. met}. grammateÖv. {pokte¾nw. tuflËv. ›gg¾zw. par}. {lhj©v. {paggŸllw. ½erËn. gnwr¾zw. såma. tŸknon. íra Adjectives {gajËv. zw©. spŸrma. . kat}. jerapeÖw. ¥kastov. thrŸw. ÉfjalmËv. {n©r. z}w. |mart}nw. gŸnov. did}skalov. e¼r©nh. per¾. mŸnw. ÕpostrŸfw. jeËv. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). ›l©luja). oÔranËv. e¼v. kwm©. gun©. prosfŸrw. gr}fw (›gr}fhn). p¾stiv. {l©jeia. Îrov. ‡rtov. fwn©. prËv. {naba¾nw. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. sËv. ‡njrwpov. ›kklhs¾a. ½m}tion. eÅnai). |mart¾a. e¼m¾ (ën. fåv. Ó«ma. proskunŸw. ginãskw (gnãsomai. ‡rqw. {gor}zw. {pËstolov. ‡rqwn. |gi}zw. sézw. {koloujŸw. dåron. gŸgona. ¨mŸra. sÖn. ›n. {delfËv. Îqlov. p¾ptw (pesoØmai. All Rights Reserved. {no¾gw. qe¾r. parag¾nomai. parabol©. lÖw. p¾nw (p¾omai. zhtŸw. pistËv. glåssa. ÕpË © 2007 N. £peson). k}jhmai. dŸqomai. l¾jov. œtoim}zw. lamb}nw (l©myomai. ›ntol©. fulak©. pl©rhv. ›xŸrqomai. poiŸw. dËxa. £jnov. kr¾siv. dÖnamai. lŸgw (eÅpon. {delf©. jŸlw. basileÖv. j}natov. jŸlhma. {koÖw ({k©koa). ‰giov. diãkw. eÔaggel¾zomai. boÖlomai. e¼sŸrqomai. Éfe¾lw. di}. £rgon. kËsmov. mikrËv. £gnwka. lalŸw. {gaphtËv. £xestin. nÖx. jaum}zw. dokŸw. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). g¾nomai (gen©somai. dÖnamiv. daimËnion. oÅkov. marturŸw. eÅdon. ‡gw (±qjhn). ›rg}zomai. aÂrw. peripatŸw. prosŸrqomai. ‡llov. proseÖqomai. deÀ. {rq©. poreÖomai. nËmov. ÕpŸr. {polÖw. μljon. ÕmŸterov Prepositions {pË. £sqatov. {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). §nŸqjhn). yuq©. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). blŸpw. pŸmpw. s}bbaton. pØr. kakËv. graf©. {rqiereÖv. aÆma. Üdwr. pråtov. ÊdËv. poÖv. §gŸrjhn). laËv. ›mËv. ›gen©jhn). stËma. p‚v. kard¾a. |martwlËv. kataba¾nw. £pion). kt¾zw. £fagon). ›k. paralamb}nw. ¨mŸterov. fŸrw (±negka. kalŸw. kefal©. paid¾on. prof©thv. jrËnov. œãraka. dikaiosÖnh. nekrËv. plhrËw. jewrŸw. fobŸomai. q}riv. u½Ëv. ¥terov. pisteÖw. ›pistrŸfw. prË.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-25 Verbs {gap}w. a¼ãn. ‡ggelov. Clayton Croy. sof¾a. {pojn¯skw. £rhmov. d¾kaiov. ›l©mfjhn). staurËw. pËliv. tËpov. majht©v. ›gnãsjhn). ›kb}llw. {pŸrqomai. feÖgw (feÖxomai. a¼tŸw. mht©r. tŸlov. basile¾a. khrÖssw. lËgov. £qw. qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph. bapt¾zw. sunagwg©. Înoma. did}skw (did}xw). sun}gw. kr¾nw. doØlov. Êr}w (Îyomai. jÖra. g«. b}llw (›bl©jhn). parakalŸw. shmeÀon. kalËv. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. kr}zw. prËswpon. dox}zw. ›p¾. log¾zomai. s}rx. Âdiov. ploÀon. spe¾rw. ëfjhn). genn}w. oÅnov. mŸllw. eÂrhka). Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). kaj¾zw. pneØma. keleÖw. bibl¾on.

›}n. tË). m©. (oÔ. ‡n. oßtov. Ãna. (Ê. dŸ. oÞn. Ðpou. mhkŸti. âv. ©. oÔkŸti. tŸ. oÚte. oÔk. . ›keÀ. Ðtan. oÜtwv.Other {ll}. {m©n. ±dh. e¼. g}r. Ðte. ›gã. œautoØ. Clayton Croy. ›mautoØ. seautoØ. Ë). nØn. (aÔtËv. oÔdŸ. mŸn . p}lin. oÚpw. ka¾. ¥wv. påv. dŸ. ¨. sÖ © 2007 N. Ðpwv. All Rights Reserved. íste Pronouns {ll©lwn. Ðti. mhdŸ. oÔq). £ti. ›keÀnov. ¼doÖ. tËte. . . poll}kiv.

8.Practice and Review — Lesson 25 1. 3. oÞsai plhreÀv p¾stewv ka¿ dun}mewv a½ {delfa¿ Õmån oÔk ›foboØnto tÌn basilŸa. e¼ t~ khruqjŸnta ÕpÌ tån majhtån {lhj« ›stin. 2. ¨ kr¾siv toØ jeoØ mŸllei peseÀn ›p¿ tªn pËlin ¨mån. All Rights Reserved. Clayton Croy. ‡njrwpoi ponhro¿ e¼s«ljon e¼v tÌ ½erÌn labeÀn tÌ bibl¾on toØ nËmou. {sjenªv ±mhn ka¿ ›n fulak° {ll’ oÔk ±ljete ¼deÀn me oÔd¡ proshÖxasje Õp¡r ›moØ. ›keÀnoi o½ ‡ndrev μsan ›k gŸnouv {rqierŸwn= prosŸferon oÞn dåra Õp¡r |martiån toØ £jnouv. {nabainËntwn e¼v tÌ Îrov tån ½erŸwn. . 7. Ê mŸnwn e¼v tÌ tŸlov swj©setai ka¿ gnãsetai tªn {g}phn toØ kur¾ou. 6. 5. Ê pŸmyav me {lhj©v ›stin= ›leÖsomai oÞn ka¿ {paggelå tªn {l©jeian aÔtoØ e¼v t~ £jnh. 4. tÌ £rgon toØ grammatŸwv ›st¿n gr}yai t~ Ó©mata toØ jeoØ e¼v bibl¾on ka¿ did}skein aÔt~ tê laê. © 2007 N.

10. eÅpen Ê basile×v Ðti ¨ p‚sa pËliv ›st¿n pl©rhv aÃmatov ka¿ Ê ‡ggelov t«v kr¾sewv ›p’ aÔtªn ›leÖsetai. ìn {sjenªv ›n sãmati ka¿ pneÖmati £ti jŸlei Ê tuflÌv ›xeljeÀn {pÌ t«v pËlewv jerapeuj«nai ÕpÌ toØ didask}lou ›p¿ tÌ Îrov. 11. £qwmen p¾stin e¼v jeÌn Ãna Ðtan Ê u½Ìv toØ {njrãpou ÕpostrŸy¬ eÕrejåmen pisto¿ ›n ¨mŸrƒ kr¾sewv. 13. 14. Clayton Croy. jewroØntev shmeÀa te ka¿ dun}meiv ginomŸnav di~ tån qeirån toØ prof©tou. tÌ m¡n tŸlov ›ke¾nou toØ dika¾ou doÖlou £stai {lhjªv dËxa. tÌ d¡ tŸlov toÖtou toØ kakoØ ½erŸwv £stai kr¾siv purËv. All Rights Reserved. © 2007 N.9. o½ {rqiereÀv ka¿ o½ grammateÀv ›jaÖmasan ka¿ ›dËxasan tÌn basilŸa toØ oÔranoØ. . 12. gŸnov oÞn Õp}rqontev toØ jeoØ oÔk Éfe¾lomen dokeÀn tÌn jeÌn eÅnai l¾jon.

Îrei 8. Ê d¡ {rqiere×v eÅpen. {lhj©v 9. dÖnamin 7. p¾stewv 10. eÅpen d¡ Ê prof©thv. S× eÅ pl©rhv p¾stewv ka¿ pneÖmatov |g¾ou. Ê d¡ basile×v oÔk ›dÖnato såsai aÔtoÖv. tŸlov Case Number . OÔk £qomen tªn dÖnamin såsai Õm‚v. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved. tËte £kraxan tê prof©t¬ ›n tê |g¾æ Îrei lŸgontev.grammateØsin 5. {rqiereÖv © 2007 N. dÖnasai {pokr¾nesjai ¨mÀn. 2. oÔk ›dÖnanto blŸpein toÀv ÉfjalmoÀv oÔd¡ ›rg}zesjai taÀv qŸrsin oÔd¡ peripateÀn toÀv pos¾n. ›n g~r taÖt¬ t° nukt¿ ›leÖsontai o½ ‡ggeloi toØ jeoØ {p! oÔranoØ ka¿ jerapeÖsousin tªn pËlin. Identify the case and number of these underlined words from the above paragraph. {sjen©v 3. ±ggiken tÌ tŸlov toØ £jnouv ka¿ toØ gŸnouv ¨mån. Translate the following paragraph. £kraxan oÞn tê basileÀ lŸgontev. Ê laÌv ›n t° pËlei ›g¾nonto {sjen©v. Number 6. £kraxan oÞn toÀv ½ereØsin ka¿ toÀv grammateØsin. basileÀ 4.Quick Quiz — Lesson 25 1. l©myetai Ê j}natov ¨m‚v p}ntav. Case 1. AÜth ¨ kr¾siv oÔ fŸrei tÌn j}naton p‚sin. Såson ¨m‚v. pËlei 2. {pojn¯skomen g~r ›n taÀv ÊdoÀv. S× eÅ Ê {lhjªv prof©thv toØ jeoØ.

jaum}zw. staurËw. {pokr¾nomai. sËv. pisteÖw. kÖriov. ¥kastov. ›xous¾a. fulak©. poiŸw. ÕpostrŸfw. £jnov. gun©. spe¾rw. íra Adjectives {gajËv. pistËv. {delf©. basile¾a. £fagon). . lamb}nw (l©myomai. doØlov. Clayton Croy. §nŸqjhn). sof¾a. sun}gw. e¼r©nh. Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). ‡ggelov. såma. ÕpË © 2007 N. tuflËv. kËsmov. a¼ãniov. eÂrhka). eÅnai). £qw. {pŸrqomai. prosfŸrw. ›kb}llw. pËliv. eÔaggel¾zomai. ›n. bapt¾zw. kaj¾zw. £fugon). nËmov. glåssa. p¾nw (p¾omai. All Rights Reserved. zhtŸw. grammateÖv. j}natov. fåv. p‚v. Üdwr. thrŸw. tŸlov. poreÖomai. aÂrw. |gi}zw. q}riv. ‰giov. Ó«ma. ginãskw (gnãsomai. £gnwka. dÖnamai. spŸrma. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). jŸlhma. Õp}gw. di}. dokŸw. £xestin. œtoim}zw. l¾jov. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. ¨mŸterov. ›kklhs¾a. {lhj©v. pØr. z}w. laËv. boÖlomai. qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph. ÕpŸr. ›perwt}w. gŸnov. kalËv. ploÀon. sunagwg©. ‡njrwpov. kratŸw. ›l©mfjhn). ½ereÖv. tŸknon. kwm©. Âdiov.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-26 Verbs {gap}w. g¾nomai (gen©somai. {pokte¾nw. gnwr¾zw. stËma. ›gnãsjhn). a¼ãn. j}lassa. {polÖw. parabol©. kr¾siv. pŸmpw. ›pistrŸfw. Îqlov. g«. mikrËv. {l©jeia. ÊdËv. kefal©. ÕmŸterov Prepositions {pË. u½Ëv. ‡rtov. b}llw (›bl©jhn). kt¾zw. dåron. {n©r. pat©r. fobŸomai. majht©v. |martwlËv. ›gg¾zw. ‡rqwn. deÀ. ›mËv. diŸrqomai. dikaiosÖnh. nÖx. mŸllw. {koÖw ({k©koa). kr¾nw. jeËv. paid¾on. pneØma. ›ntol©. log¾zomai. zw©. proskunŸw. |mart}nw. peripatŸw. lÖw. £sqatov. {rq©. poÖv. par}. p¾stiv. {rqiereÖv. s}bbaton. ›xŸrqomai. eÔaggŸlion. ëfjhn). mht©r. shmeÀon. lËgov. kr}zw. kakËv. {paggŸllw. ½m}tion. oÅnov. dÖnamiv. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). ¥terov. prof©thv. Éfe¾lw. ÉfjalmËv. a¼tŸw. ½erËn. per¾. prËv. s}rx. ponhrËv. bibl¾on. met}. {pojn¯skw. £pion). £rhmov. ›gen©jhn). eÅdon. paralamb}nw. plhrËw. jrËnov. e¼v. Ðlov. kataba¾nw. £peson). proseÖqomai. diãkw. pl©rhv. ¨mŸra. sézw. dËxa. jŸlw. Êr}w (Îyomai. {sjen©v. dox}zw. lalŸw. £rqomai (›leÖsomai. {pËstolov. jewrŸw. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). tËpov. ‡llov. {koloujŸw. ›rg}zomai. Înoma. Îrov. pråtov. e¼m¾ (ën. qa¾rw. ›l©luja). did}skw (did}xw). khrÖssw. ›rwt}w. genn}w. mŸnw. {gaphtËv. fŸrw (±negka. §gŸrjhn). ‡gw (±qjhn). jerapeÖw. £rgon. kard¾a. gr}fw (›gr}fhn). dŸqomai. marturŸw. prË. aÆma. karpËv. feÖgw (feÖxomai. metanoŸw. ‡rqw. parag¾nomai. oÅkov. qe¾r. ›p¾. ›leŸw. fwn©. kat}. prËswpon. ›k. jÖra. d¾kaiov. basileÖv. lŸgw (eÅpon. {naba¾nw. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. {grËv. {delfËv. œãraka. daimËnion. oÔranËv. blŸpw. nekrËv. |mart¾a. μljon. prosŸrqomai. e¼sŸrqomai. k}jhmai. did}skalov. yuq©. oÞv. gŸgona. graf©. kalŸw. {no¾gw. keleÖw. {gor}zw. {sp}zomai. p¾ptw (pesoØmai. parakalŸw. sÖn.

e¼. tË). ›mautoØ. Ãna. . oÚpw. £ti. ïde. oÔq). oÞn. oÜtwv. ¼doÖ. (Ê. oÚte.Other {ll}. tËte. m©. dŸ. ›gã. ±dh. mŸn . . sÖ © 2007 N. mhdŸ. œautoØ. oÔdŸ. poll}kiv. nØn. íste Pronouns {ll©lwn. (oÔ. seautoØ. dŸ. Clayton Croy. ka¾. Ðpou. oÔkŸti. ¥wv. ›keÀ. Ðti. påv. Ðpwv. All Rights Reserved. . mhkŸti. Ðte. tŸ. ›keÀnov. ¨. ‡n. p}lin. ©. {m©n. g}r. (aÔtËv. ›}n. oßtov. Ë). âv. oÔk. Ðtan.

4. o½ |martwlo¿ £kraxan. 7. 3. Üpage e¼v tÌn sÌn oÅkon ›n tê {grê. oÔ ginãskomen påv Ê prof©thv mª £qwn ploÀon di~ t«v jal}sshv di«ljen= ›perãthson aÔtËn. KÖrie. 2. eÅpen ¨ gun©. Clayton Croy. mª p¾nete oÅnon ›n t° kãm¬ ¥wv ‡n pŸshte ›p¿ prËswpon Õmån. mª ›rwt©shte påv dÖnantai o½ nekro¿ ›gerj«nai= pisteÖsate ka¿ qa¾rete ›n t° dun}mei toØ jeoØ. eÅpen Ê ponhrÌv basileÖv. ›lj¡ p}lin prÌv tªn pËlin Ðtan £q¬v dåra prosenŸgkai moi. ›lŸhson ¨m‚v ka¿ mª pŸmy¬v ¨m‚v e¼v kr¾sin a¼ãnion. 5. aÔtÌv g~r £laben karpÌn ›k tån stom}twn tån paid¾wn mou.Practice and Review — Lesson 26 1. tËte ›lj¡ ïde ka¿ e¼p¡ ¨mÀn. Kr}thson ›keÀnon tÌn ‡njrwpon. metanËhson {pÌ tån £rgwn tån kakån ka¿ b}le to×v lËgouv toØ pneÖmatov e¼v t~ ît} sou. . 6. © 2007 N. All Rights Reserved. {ll~ plhroØsje ›n pneÖmati.

10. 13. {ll’ ›rãthson tÌn kÖrion did}skein se sof¾an. 12. metano©sate. mª qa¾rete ›p¿ taÀv basile¾aiv toØ kËsmou toÖtou. gŸgraptai g}r. 9. ka¿ Õp}gete ›n e¼r©n¬.8. o½ ½ereÀv t«v g«v £stwsan pisto¿ ka¿ Ê ‡rqwn ›p¿ toØ jrËnou £stw d¾kaiov. 14. poreÖjhti e¼v tÌn {grÌn ka¿ ›perãthson to×v doÖlouv to×v ›rgazomŸnouv ›keÀ e¼ tÌ tŸlov toØ £rgou ›gg¾zei. poi©sate tÌn karpÌn dikaiosÖnhv ka¿ ›le©somen Õm‚v. ! pÌ A tån karpån aÔtån gnãsesje aÔtoÖv. ›~n ¨ kard¾a Õmån º pl©rhv |mart¾av. {ll~ dŸxasje tÌ fåv toØ oÔranoØ ka¿ krat©sate tªn a¼ãnion {l©jeian. ›keÀnai a½ gunaÀkev ›ljŸtwsan ïde ka¿ baptisj©twsan ÕpÌ toØ didask}lou. All Rights Reserved. © 2007 N. Clayton Croy. mª {no¾x¬v t~ ît} sou toÀv Ó©masin tån daimon¾wn. proseÖxasje tê jeê. . 11.

tËte eÅpon a½ {delfa¾. pepoi©kate 3. metano©sate ka¿ bapt¾sjhte. £ljete 6. ka¿ eÅpon. a½ ‰giai {delfa¿ ›k©russon tÌ eÔaggŸlion tÌ a¼ãnion e¼v to×v £qontav doÖlouv ka¿ {groÖv. NØn Õp}gete ›n e¼r©n¬ ka¿ qa¾rete ›n tê kur¾æ. bapt¾sjhte 5. krat©shte 7. ka¿ Ðte ›po¾hsan taØta. Tense 1. ka¿ Ê kÖriov ›le©sei Õm‚v. Õp}gete © 2007 N. Clayton Croy. mª ›perwt©shte. All Rights Reserved. Dun}meja {gor}sai tªn {g}phn toØ kur¾ou. mª krat©shte t~ Õp}rqonta Õmån.Quick Quiz — Lesson 26 Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms. £ljete oÞn ïde ka¿ {no¾xate t~ îta Õmån {koØsai tÌn lËgon t«v {lhje¾av. {ll! pepoi©kate tÌn karpÌn t«v dikaiosÖnhv. metano©sate 4. ›k©russon 2. #Htoim}kate tÌn karpÌn toØ {groØ. {ll~ pŸmyate dåra toÀv ›n fulak° {njrãpoiv ka¿ ›rwt©sate tÌn kÖrion qar¾sasjai ÕmÀn. pŸmyate 8. Ê g~r kÖriov {gap† to×v |martwlo×v to×v mª {gapåntav aÔtÌn ka¿ mª £qontav Õp}rqonta. Voice Mood Person Number .

›~n t~ îta toØtou toØ grammatŸwv mª jerapeuj°. 7. §rãthsen Ê {pËstolov. katabainŸtw Ê kaj©menov ›p¿ tÌ Îrov ka¿ {paggeil}tw ›n t° pËlei tªn a¼ãnion sof¾an tªn |gi}zousan p}nta. ›l©lujan o½ pisto¿ majhta¿ e¼v tÌ martur«sai per¿ toØ nËmou= Éfe¾lousin g~r o½ {gapåntev tÌn kÖrion {koloujeÀn toÀv gegrammŸnoiv ›n aÔtê. 5. prosfŸrwmen dåra toÀv {rqiereØsin. zhtåmen dÖnamin ka¿ ›xous¾an. 8. {gor}swmen karpËn te ka¿ ‡rton Ãna mª îmen {sjeneÀv= deÀ g~r ›sj¾ein {gaj~ e¼v tÌ ›rg}zesjai ›n tê {grê. . 4. Påv proskun©swmen tê basileÀ toØ oÔranoØ. oÔ dun©setai poieÀn tÌ £rgon aÔtoØ. oÜtwv g~r oÔ peseÀsje ÕpÌ kr¾sin.Periodic Exercises — Set #4 (emphasizing Lessons 21-26) 1. All Rights Reserved. 9. oÔk ›le©sei {ll~ staurãsei ¨m‚v. 3. deÀ g~r grammateÀv {koØsai p}nta t~ Ó©mata t~ lalhjŸnta aÔtoÀv. 6. PeripateÀte ›n tê fwt¿ ka¿ laleÀte t~ {lhj« {ll©loiv. ›~n fÖghte {pÌ t«v kãmhv di~ tÌ pØr tÌ lÖon to×v ÕmetŸrouv oÂkouv. parek}lesen Ê ½ere×v t~ paid¾a p}nta lŸgwn. dokeÀte tÌn basilŸa £qein ›xous¾an ›p¿ p}ntwn. ›gä d¡ lŸgw ÕmÀn Ðti p‚v Ê thrån t~v ›ntol~v jeoØ £qei ›xous¾an ›p¿ |mart¾av ka¿ jan}tou. 2. ›~n ¨ mhtªr ¨mån ÕpostrŸy¬ ka¿ Âd¬ påv p¾nontev oÅnon lelÖkamen tÌn oÅkon. Ðpou feÖxesje Ðtan ¨ kr¾siv £lj¬ ›p¿ p}nta t~ £jnh. Clayton Croy. © 2007 N.

{ll~ mª krat©swmen tªn gªn ‡llwn mhd¡ l}bwmen t~ Õp}rqonta aÔtån. o½ majhta¿ ›k©ruxan toÀv Îqloiv ›n parabolaÀv íste aÔto×v dÖnasjai {koØsai tÌ eÔaggŸlion ka¿ {noÀxai t~v kard¾av aÔtån tê jeê. ‡ndrev te ka¿ gunaÀkev toØ {groØ oÔ dÖnantai kaj«sjai ›n tê oÂkæ ka¿ p¾nein oÅnon. 14. ¨ ‡rqh p¾steãv ›stin tÌ baptisj«nai ›n Üdati= tÌ tŸlov p¾steãv ›stin jewreÀn tÌ prËswpon toØ ¨metŸrou kur¾ou ka¿ plhrwj«nai ›n pneÖmati. Clayton Croy. 18. ka¿ ±rxanto laleÀn œtŸraiv glãssaiv Ðtan tÌ pneØma ›keleÖs¬ aÔt~v martureÀn. ›phrãthsan o½ ½ereÀv {ll©louv e¼ £xestin tê basileÀ £qein tªn gunaÀka toØ {delfoØ œautoØ ka¿ genn«sai tŸkna ›x aÔt«v. Ê jeÌv g}r ›stin pl©rhv q}ritov ka¿ jŸlei p}nta t~ tŸkna aÔtoØ £qein e¼r©nhn. tËte qarhsËmeja s×n aÔtoÀv ka¿ kalŸsomen aÔto×v {delfoÖv. © 2007 N. Õp}gete ka¿ Âdete tÌn prof©thn ka¿ ›reÀ ÕmÀn Ðti oÔk £qete di~ tÌ mª a¼teÀsjai Õm‚v. All Rights Reserved.10. 11. di~ tË ginãskein tÌn prof©thn p}nta. îmen pisto¿ tê gŸnei tê {gaphtê ¨mån. 13. 15. 12. ka¿ p‚sai a½ {delfa¿ ›plhrãjhsan pneÖmatov |g¾ou. prÌ g~r toØ spe¾rein spŸrmata deÀ œtoim}zein tªn g«n. 17. ›~n g~r shmeÀa mª Âdhte oÔ mª pisteÖshte. 16. . metanohs}twsan o½ ‡rqontev {pÌ t«v |mart¾av aÔtån ka¿ ›pistrey}twsan ›p¿ tÌn jeËn. ginãskei Ðti oÔ fobeÀsje tÌn kÖrion.

MeneÀte ÕpÌ kr¾sin ¥wv ˆn £ljw ›n dËx¬. tÌ pneØma g~r oÔkŸti meneÀ ›n tê sê oÂkæ ›~n taØta poi°v. All Rights Reserved. mª krat©s¬v dÖnamin seautê ka¿ mhkŸti l}mbane tÌn ‡rton tån {sjenån. 20. eÅpon d¡ aÔtoÀv.19. Clayton Croy. tËte ¥kastov tån ½erŸwn ›boÖleto eÅnai majhtªv ›mËv. . © 2007 N. Ðte ±geira ›mautÌn ›k tån nekrån.

{postŸllw ({pest}lhn). {koÖw ({k©koa). sunagwg©. fŸrw (±negka. kr}zw. Õp}gw. ›perwt}w. e¼m¾ (ën. plhrËw. ›gg¾zw. tuflËv. {delfËv. fåv. basileÖv. khrÖssw. œãraka. k}jhmai. poreÖomai. kat}. ‡ggelov. boÖlomai. fobŸomai. ›mËv. a¼ãniov. proseÖqomai. stËma. £rqomai (›leÖsomai. di}. ÕpË © 2007 N. Âdiov. spŸrma. §nŸqjhn). ¨mŸterov. tŸlov. lŸgw (eÅpon. §gŸrjhn). pråtov. g«. jug}thr. aÂrw. diŸrqomai. {lhj©v. ›rwt}w. e¼v. diãkw. g¾nomai (gen©somai. dox}zw. ÊdËv. prË. peripatŸw. tŸknon. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). ›xous¾a. graf©. £rgon. par}.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-27 Verbs {gap}w. b}llw (›bl©jhn). eÔaggel¾zomai. ëfjhn). lËgov. tËpov. ‡gw (±qjhn). Ó«ma. poÖv. mikrËv. oÅnov. lÖw. shmeÀon. kataba¾nw. e¼r©nh. Îqlov. basile¾a. {grËv. lalŸw. dŸqomai. gnwr¾zw. qa¾rw. deÀ. μljon. gŸnov. dÖnamai. karpËv. metanoŸw. ›gnãsjhn). pisteÖw. j}lassa. {polÖw. nËmov. u½Ëv. {koloujŸw. q}riv. {delf©. såma. Clayton Croy. pl©rhv. p‚v. |martwlËv. lamb}nw (l©myomai. ¨mŸra. pistËv. £sqatov. p¾stiv. did}skw (did}xw). £qw. ¥terov. kratŸw. ›n. oÞv. {pokte¾nw. ›rg}zomai. {gor}zw. kwm©. eÅnai). ›lp¾v. prËv. ‡llov. majht©v. parag¾nomai. {sjen©v. Êr}w (Îyomai. kaj¾zw. kr¾siv. bibl¾on. Üdwr. jÖra. glåssa. £rhmov. eÅdon. oÅda. sof¾a. ÕmŸterov Prepositions {pË. ›kklhs¾a. log¾zomai. jŸlhma. ginãskw (gnãsomai. paid¾on. Éfe¾lw. ÕpŸr. kard¾a. dËxa. met}. yuq©. gr}fw (›gr}fhn). parabol©. ‡rtov. ‰giov. p¾ptw (pesoØmai. kËsmov. poiŸw. ‡rqwn. jeËv. sÖn. kr¾nw. {paggŸllw. ›l©luja). ploÀon. kÖriov. dåron. œtoim}zw. oÅkov. jerapeÖw. dokŸw. ›xŸrqomai. fulak©. prof©thv. {rq©. z}w. kakËv. kalËv. prËswpon. ½m}tion. pËliv. s}bbaton. £peson). ÕpostrŸfw. ›pistrŸfw. prosfŸrw. mht©r. j}natov. pat©r. gun©. jrËnov. feÖgw (feÖxomai. ‡rqw. ponhrËv. eÔaggŸlion. All Rights Reserved. {no¾gw. paralamb}nw. £xestin. ›kb}llw. dikaiosÖnh. |mart¾a. blŸpw. d¾kaiov. kt¾zw. ›ntol©. per¾. {naba¾nw. {pojn¯skw. ¥kastov. pneØma. a¼tŸw. ›k. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). e¼sŸrqomai. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). thrŸw. ›leŸw. laËv. proskunŸw. {rqiereÖv. daimËnion. prosŸrqomai. Ðlov. qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph. sézw. {sp}zomai. |gi}zw. qe¾r. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. sun}gw. ‡njrwpov. £pion). jŸlw. doØlov. kefal©. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. kalŸw. parakalŸw. keleÖw. staurËw. mŸllw. . l¾jov. nÖx. jewrŸw. {pŸrqomai. p¾nw (p¾omai. gŸgona. £fagon). eÂrhka). did}skalov. zhtŸw. {pokr¾nomai. |mart}nw. {gaphtËv. fwn©. spe¾rw. £gnwka. grammateÖv. £jnov. mŸnw. jaum}zw. aÆma. ›l©mfjhn). dÖnamiv. bapt¾zw. genn}w. ÉfjalmËv. ›gen©jhn). ½ereÖv. a¼ãn. pØr. Înoma. zw©. {pËstolov. s}rx. nekrËv. oÔranËv. {n©r. ›p¾. Îrov. Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). {l©jeia. £fugon). sËv. ½erËn. marturŸw. íra Adjectives {gajËv. pŸmpw.

¥wv. œautoØ. mhdŸ. ›mautoØ. íste Pronouns {ll©lwn. oÔdŸ. ¨. oÔkŸti. (Ê. mhkŸti. dŸ. Ë). Ðpou. oÔk. tËte. poØ. m©. dŸ. ka¾. tiv © 2007 N. oÜtwv. (oÔ. påv. p}lin. ›gã. seautoØ. Ðv. ›keÀnov. Ðsov. oÞn. ïde. oÚpw. ‡n. Ðpwv. kajãv. Ðtan. £ti. {m©n. Ðstiv. tŸ. oßtov. ±dh. ›keÀ. ¼doÖ. . ›}n. sÖ. Ðte. poll}kiv. g}r. t¾v. All Rights Reserved. oÚte. £xw. nØn.Other {ll}. Ðti. tË). . Ãna. e¼. ©. oÔq). Clayton Croy. âv. mŸn . (aÔtËv. .

Clayton Croy. ¼do× ÕmeÀv ›ste ¨ dËxa ¨mån ka¿ ¨ ›lp¾v. . PoØ Õp}geiv. 4. © 2007 N. PoØ ›stin Ê u½Ìv toØ basilŸwv ka¿ t¾ ›stin tÌ Înoma aÔtoØ. 3. 7. t¾v oÞn £stai ¨mån ¨ ›lp¿v ka¿ ¨ dËxa ›n t° ¨mŸrƒ t«v kr¾sewv. did}skale. Ê ‡ggelov t«v e¼r©nhv ›leÖsetai ka¿ lÖsei Õm‚v ›k t«v fulak«v ›n írƒ » oÔ ginãskete.Practice and Review — Lesson 27 1. khrÖssomen tÌ eÔaggŸlion ›n toÖtæ tê kËsmæ Ãna e¼d«te t¾v ›stin ¨ ›lp¿v ¨mån. oÂdamen Ðti Ðstiv lamb}nei tÌn sÌn oÅnon ka¿ p¾nei aÔtÌn blhj©setai e¼v tªn fulak©n. {n©r tiv e¼s«ljen e¼v tªn pËlin ka¿ §rãthsen. gunª ³tiv μn ›n tê Îqlæ parek}lese tªn jugatŸra aÔt«v martur«sai per¿ t«v p¾stewv. 2. ¼dËntev t~ shmeÀa taØta Éfe¾lomen {paggeÀlai Š ›jewr©samen ka¿ §koÖsamen. 8. All Rights Reserved. 6. t¾ did}skeiv ka¿ t¾v {koloujeÀ soi ›n t° Êdê t«v {lhje¾av. 5.

e tiv jŸlei pråtov eÅnai £stw âv paid¾on ka¿ poie¾tw £rga dikaiosÖnhv ‡lloiv. ¨ jug}thr sou ´n Ê pistÌv prof©thv ±geiren ›k tån nekrån oÅde tªn dÖnamin toØ jeoØ. 12. All Rights Reserved. 13. Clayton Croy. 11. © 2007 N. . {naba¾nontev {pÌ t«v jal}sshv periepat©samen e¼v tªn kãmhn Ãna {gor}swmen par~ tån {njrãpwn ploÀa Ðsa eÅqon. o½ tuflo¿ oÝv ›jer}peusen Ê {pËstolov ›n tê ½erê ›n sabb}tæ ›xebl©jhsan £xw ÕpÌ tån ›xousiån. {ll~ Ðsa lŸgousi ka¿ Ðsa did}skousi mª pisteÖshte. 14.9. kajäv gŸgraptai ›n tê bibl¾æ toØ nËmou. Ñv ›~n jŸl¬ tªn zwªn eÕreÀn ›ggis}tw tê jrËnæ t«v q}ritov ka¿ krazŸtw tê poi©santi oÔranÌn ka¿ g«n. t~ g~r Ó©mata aÔtån oÔk £stin {lhj«. tin¡v ‡ndrev ›l©lujan e¼v tªn sunagwgªn laloØntev ponhr}. 10.

t¾ me diãkeiv. Clayton Croy. “Saul. He went out and said to them. If someone wants to be first… James 1:7 l©myeta¾ ti par~ toØ kur¾ou He/she will receive something from the Lord. He heard a voice saying to him. . and who are my brothers? John 18:4 ›x«ljen ka¿ lŸgei aÔtoÀv. All Rights Reserved. . why do you persecute me?” Memory Device: Accent in first spot — questions Who? Which? What? Accent last or none — means A Certain One.The Interrogative Adjective/Pronoun t¾v t¾nov t¾ni t¾na t¾ t¾nov t¾ni t¾ t¾nev t¾nwn t¾si(n) t¾nav t¾na t¾nwn t¾si(n) t¾na Matt 12:48 t¾v ›stin ¨ m©thr mou. ka¿ t¾nev e¼s¿n o½ {delfo¾ mou. Who is my mother. © 2007 N. . “Whom do you seek?” Acts 9:4 ±kousen fwnªn lŸgousan aÔtê. Sao×l . Mark 9:35 e tiv jŸlei pråtov eÅnai.. A certain man had two sons. T¾na zhteÀte.. The Indefinite Adjective/Pronoun tiv tinËv tin¾ tin} ti tinËv tin¾ ti tinŸv tinån tis¾(n) tin}v tin} tinån tis¾(n) tin} Luke 15:11 ‡njrwpËv tiv eÅqen dÖo u½oÖv.

.The Relative Pronoun (In the following sentences note how the case of the relative pronoun is determined by the syntax of its own clause. Ê doØlov ñ ›gg¾zomen did}xei t~ tŸkna.) 1. not by the antecedent. © 2007 N. All Rights Reserved. 4. 2. The slave whose master has children will teach them. Ê doØlov oß Ê kÖriov £qei tŸkna did}xei aÔt}. The slave whom you saw in the house will teach the children. The slave who works in the house will teach the children. Ê doØlov Ñn eÂdete ›n tê oÂkæ did}xei t~ tŸkna. 3. Clayton Croy. The slave to whom we are drawing near will teach the children. Ê doØlov Ñv ›rg}zetai ›n tê oÂkæ did}xei t~ tŸkna.

›p¿ t¾ Îrov kaj¾zousin o½ jeo¿ tån ›jnån. 6. OÔq œtoim}somen t~ bibl¾a. ginãskomen ka¿ blŸpomen t¾v eÅ sÖ. t¾v khrÖssei tÌn lËgon toÀv |martwloÀv. Give special attention to indefinite (“anyone. © 2007 N. É jeÌv dox}sjhsetai ›n oÔranê. t¾ poieÀte taØta t~ £rga ›n tê sabb}tæ. 16. 9. tin¡v grammatŸwn £legon. Ê ‰giov toØ jeoØ. t¾nwn lËgwn {koÖeiv {pÌ toØ didask}lou toØ ›n tê ½erê. 5. {ll! oÔk £qousin p¾stin oÔd¡ {g}phn. oÔk ›dun}mhn eÕreÀn tin~v doÖlouv ›n tê {grê. t¾na ›jer}peusen Ê pistÌv prof©thv. 17. majht©v tiv μn ›n t° pËlei toØ basilŸwv ›ke¾nou. e tiv poieÀ kal~ £rga ›p¿ g«v. 7. swj©setai ›n taÀv ›sq}taiv ¨mŸraiv. 4. 13. 2. All Rights Reserved. t¾ |mart}nousin a½ ponhra¿ {delfa¿ kat~ toØ kur¾ou. tin¡v eÔaggel¾zontai. . 11. e¼ dŸ tiv £qei p¾stin. 14. 12. 1.” “someone”) and interrogative (“who?”) pronouns. 10. 15. t¾nov e¼s¿n t~ kal~ ploÀa taØta. 8. t¾ni prosfŸrete taØta t~ dåra ‡rtou te ka¿ oÂnou.“Any/who” Exercises Translate the following sentences. ka¿ μn tiv gunª ›n t° ›kklhs¾ƒ kr}zousa. Clayton Croy. DËxa jeê. 3. oÔk eÂdomen tin~ ›n t° sunagwg° oÔd¡ ›n t° pËlei.

oÜtwv ›qar¾sato aÔt° tªn ›xous¾an did}skein ›n t° sunagwg°. Clayton Croy. . ›qar¾sato 6. Tense 1. dexãmeja 4. {m©n. ›rg}zetai ¨ jug}thr ¨mån £xw t«v sunagwg«v did}skousa tŸkna ›n t° kãm¬ ka¿ |martwlo×v ›n t° fulak°. oÅden 2. dexãmeja tÌn lËgon. oÂdamen g~r tÌn kÖrion Ðv ›staurãjh Õp¡r ¨mån ka¿ qa¾romen ›n t° ›lp¾di t«v a¼wn¾ou zw«v. tÌ pneØma ‡gei aÔtªn did}skein ›n t° sunagwg°. ›rg}zetai 7. t¾v oÞn dÖnatai lŸgein Ðti oÞsa gunª oÔk £qei tªn ›xous¾an did}skein ›n t° sunagwg°. ¨ jug}thr ¨mån oÅden t~v graf}v. poØ ‡gei tÌ pneØma aÔt©n. All Rights Reserved. e tiv £qei tÌ dåron toØ pneÖmatov.Quick Quiz — Lesson 27 Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms. ›staurãjh 5. kajäv Ê kÖriov ›qar¾sato zwªn a¼ãnion t° jugatr¿ ¨mån. dÖnatai 3. ›leÖsontai Voice Mood Person Number © 2007 N. Ðstiv £qei tÌ pneØma oÅden toØto ka¿ Ðsoi {gapåsin {koØsai tªn {l©jeian ›leÖsontai prÌv tªn sunagwgªn {koØsai aÔt«v. {gapåsin 8.

d¾kaiov. shmeÀon. oÅkov. ›pistrŸfw. jewrŸw. p‚v. Êr}w (Îyomai. e¼sŸrqomai. khrÖssw. pËliv. s}rx. œãraka. prosŸrqomai. prosfŸrw. dox}zw. genn}w. {pojn¯skw. ›kklhs¾a. fulak©. ‡njrwpov. j}lassa. jeËv. fŸrw (±negka. {delfËv. d¾dwmi. eÅdon. ‡gw (±qjhn). lÖw. sËv. {rq©. ›xous¾a. §nŸqjhn). ponhrËv. parabol©. lËgov. såma. mht©r. parag¾nomai. £fugon). ›kb}llw. qa¾rw. kakËv. nekrËv. sunagwg©. qar}. {naba¾nw. ‡rqwn. l¾jov. kt¾zw. sézw. keleÖw. £pion). jÖra. £rqomai (›leÖsomai. §gŸrjhn). poreÖomai. ½ereÖv. Ðlov. oÞv. oÔranËv. {pŸrqomai. paid¾on. glåssa. dŸqomai. pistËv. jŸlw. ½m}tion. jŸlhma. Õp}gw. pl©rhv. mŸnw. £peson). kaj¾zw. kÖriov. Înoma. did}skw (did}xw). {koÖw ({k©koa). proseÖqomai. {sp}zomai. |mart¾a. log¾zomai. ‡rtov. z}w. pisteÖw. tËpov. kr¾siv. s}bbaton. aÆma. jrËnov. ›perwt}w. boÖlomai. majht©v. grammateÖv. zw©. |mart}nw. dåron. {delf©. qe¾r. £fagon). dËxa. ‡rqw. {gaphtËv. poÖv. gŸgona. All Rights Reserved. ¨mŸra. ploÀon. {n©r. kalŸw. mikrËv. {no¾gw. nÖx. gr}fw (›gr}fhn). {paggŸllw. zhtŸw. lŸgw (eÅpon. fobŸomai. Îqlov. {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). paralamb}nw. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). pneØma. £tov. Âdiov. {pokr¾nomai. g¾nomai (gen©somai. p¾stiv. ¥kastov. dÖnamai. ›ntol©. oÅnov. qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph. tuflËv. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). Éfe¾lw. . eÔaggŸlion. fwn©. ëfjhn). fåv. presbÖterov. laËv. kratŸw. aÂrw. £rhmov. spe¾rw. tŸknon. ÊdËv. k}jhmai. œtoim}zw. μljon. pråtov. kr}zw. eÅnai). ›leŸw. pat©r. qrËnov. Üdwr. ‡ggelov. parakalŸw. bapt¾zw. g«. ›gen©jhn). prËswpon. |martwlËv. ‰giov. ›gg¾zw. e¼r©nh. kard¾a. £qw. ‡llov. dikaiosÖnh. ›rg}zomai. ›gnãsjhn). yuq©. lalŸw. peripatŸw. ginãskw (gnãsomai. {polÖw. £gnwka. {l©jeia. {lhj©v. sun}gw. a¼tŸw. ¥terov. daimËnion. proskunŸw. gŸnov. kr¾nw. a¼ãniov. deÀ. ›mËv. blŸpw. spŸrma. ¨mŸterov. did}skalov. £jnov. karpËv. dokŸw. gun©. polÖv. metanoŸw. p¾ptw (pesoØmai. {pod¾dwmi. pŸmpw. marturŸw. diãkw. feÖgw (feÖxomai. poiŸw. Ó«ma. {grËv. tŸlov. lamb}nw (l©myomai. {koloujŸw. prof©thv. thrŸw. {sjen©v. sof¾a. eÂrhka). parad¾dwmi. {gor}zw. dÖnamiv. ÉfjalmËv. b}llw (›bl©jhn). ›xŸrqomai. {pokte¾nw. ›lp¾v. pØr. |gi}zw. ›l©luja). jaum}zw. basileÖv. ÕpostrŸfw. kËsmov. diŸrqomai. jerapeÖw. kalËv. ÕmŸterov © 2007 N. stËma. plhrËw. staurËw. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). kefal©. £rgon. £sqatov. Îrov. ›l©mfjhn). mŸllw. kataba¾nw. gnwr¾zw. nËmov. Clayton Croy. basile¾a. graf©. £xestin. a¼ãn. {rqiereÖv. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. {pËstolov. j}natov. kwm©. eÔaggel¾zomai. mŸgav. íra Adjectives {gajËv. e¼m¾ (ën. oÅda. jug}thr. ›rwt}w. p¾nw (p¾omai. q}riv. u½Ëv.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-28 Verbs {gap}w. doØlov. ½erËn. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. bibl¾on.

tËte. sÖ. íste Pronouns {ll©lwn. eÔjÖv. par}. oÔdŸ. e¼v. . oÜtwv. nØn. ¥wv. {m©n. dŸ. Ðti. ›}n. seautoØ. œautoØ. ›n. ›keÀnov. oÔq). £ti. poll}kiv.Prepositions {pË. oÚte. âv. prË. kat}. e¼. prËv. påv. (oÔ. ïde. Ðte. oÔkŸti. Ë). ©. oßtov. Ãna. Ðstiv. t¾v. ÕpË Other {ll}. mhkŸti. ›keÀ. ¼doÖ. ›p¾. p}lin. . ›k. tŸ. ±dh. ›mautoØ. £xw. (Ê. Ðtan. Clayton Croy. mhdŸ. dŸ. per¾. ‡n. ¨. tiv © 2007 N. tË). ÕpŸr. (aÔtËv. oÔk. Ðpwv. sÖn. Ðsov. poØ. Ðpou. All Rights Reserved. ›gã. kajãv. . di}. oÞn. mŸn . m©. met}. g}r. Ðv. oÚpw. ka¾.

oÔ p‚v Ê dido×v meg}la dåra tê ½erê e¼seleÖsetai e¼v tªn basile¾an tån oÔranån. 5. . 4. 7. ›n t° ›sq}t¬ ¨mŸrƒ {podãsei Ê kÖriov p‚sin {njrãpoiv meg}loiv ka¿ mikroÀv kat~ t~ £rga aÔtån. Clayton Croy. 6. Ê basile×v ›kŸleuse tÌ såma toØ prof©tou toØ staurwjŸntov {podoj«nai eÔj×v toÀv majhtaÀv aÔtoØ.Practice and Review — Lesson 28 1. o½ doØloi toØ {groØ eÅpon. All Rights Reserved. 3. {ll’ Ê dido×v ka¿ ¼d¾an kard¾an ka¿ Õp}rqonta tê jeê. ›n ›ke¾næ tê £tei {delfÌv parŸdwken {delfªn e¼v j}naton ka¿ jug}thr parŸdwken patŸra e¼v fulak©n. 2. met~ d¡ pol×n qrËnon a½ pista¿ {delfa¿ sun©gagon to×v presbutŸrouv t«v ›kklhs¾av proseÖqesjai. μn d¡ Ê u½ov Ê presbÖterov ›n tê {grê= ka¿ âv ±ggisen tê oÂkæ ±kouse t«v fwn«v qar‚v meg}lhv. ToØto tÌ £tov ›rgazãmeja tªn g«n ka¿ ÉyËmeja ›n tê ›rqomŸnæ £tei e¼ d¾dwsi karpËn. © 2007 N.

Ê jeÌv dŸdwken |martwloÀv qrËnon Ãna metano©swsin. . ›ke¾nh ¨ gunª oÜtwv §g}phsen tÌ £jnov aÔt«v íste £dwke tªn yuqªn aÔt«v Ãna mª paradê to×v ½ereÀv tê kakê basileÀ. All Rights Reserved. ›gŸneto d¡ pollª qar~ ›n ›ke¾n¬ t° pËlei. jŸlw ›ljeÀn prÌv Õm‚v ka¿ qrËnon tin~ meÀnai ›n t° kãm¬ Õmån= Ê g~r kÖriov {nŸæge tê eÔaggel¾æ meg}lhn jÖran. 13. o½ g~r lÖsantev tÌn oÅkon toØ {rqierŸwv paredËjhsan toÀv presbutŸroiv toØ laoØ. p}ntwn o½ Éfjalmo¿ ›n t° sunagwg° ›jeãroun aÔtÌn ka¿ p}ntwn t~ îta ±kouon. 10. P‚n tÌ Ó«ma ›k toØ stËmatov aÔtoØ {lhjŸv ›stin ka¿ ›dËjh aÔtê ÕpÌ jeoØ. tÌ pneØma £dwken ¨mÀn ›xous¾an tŸkna jeoØ genŸsjai ka¿ ¨meÀv d¾domen tªn aÔtªn ›xous¾an ‡lloiv. 11. {podãsousin g~r eÔj×v tÌ bibl¾on b}llontev aÔtÌ ›p¿ tªn g«n. © 2007 N. 14. Clayton Croy. mª dåte mŸga bibl¾on toÀv mª boulomŸnoiv poi«sai pol× £rgon. ka¿ p}ntev o½ pisteÖontev £kraxan lŸgontev. {ll} tinev oÔ jŸlousi metano«sai ›k t«v |mart¾av aÔtån.8. 12. 9.

All Rights Reserved. £doto £donto 4. dãsomai dwsËmeja 2. dŸdwkav dŸdwkate 3. ›d¾douv ›d¾dote 3. dojå dojåmen 2. -kËv Perfect Act. dåtai dåntai Aorist Act. d¾dosai d¾dosje 3. då dåmen 2. dŸdomai dedËmeja 2. Subjunctive 1. ›d¾doso ›d¾dosje 3. dê dåsi(n) Aorist Mid. -h. d¾dwv d¾dote 3. Subjunctive 1. dŸdwka dedãkamen 2. d¾dwmi d¾domen 2. ›dËjhn ›dËjhmen 2.Conjugation of d¾dwmi 1. -on Perfect Active Infinitive dedwkŸnai Perfect Act. ›dËjh ›dËjhsan Pluperfect Active Indic. doj©setai doj©sontai Pluperfect Active or M/P forms may have an augment in addition to reduplication. ›didËmhn ›didËmeja 2. dêv dåte 3. dŸdotai dŸdontai 6. dËsjw dËsjwsan Aorist Infinitives Active doØnai Middle dËsjai Aorist Participles Act. dojeÀsa. ›dËmhn ›dËmeja 2. didå didåmen 2. didoÖv didoØsa didËn M/P didËmenov. £dwka ›dãkamen 2. 1. d¾dwmi Present Active Indicative 1. Subjunctive 1. dãseiv dãsete 3. -h. Imperative 2. dåmai dãmeja 2. ›d¾doto ›d¾donto Present Act. dê dåsje 3. dedãkeiv dedãkeite 3. £dou £dosje 3. -kuÀa. Subjunctive Very Rare Perfect M/P Subjunctive Very Rare Aorist Pass. dŸdwka Perfect Active Indicative 1. didê didåsi(n) Present M/P Subjunctive 1. doj©somai dojhsËmeja 2. didêv didåte 3. £dwkav ›dãkate 3. d¾dou d¾dote 3. . dËjhti dËjhte 3. -h. doj©s¬v doj©sesje 3. d¾dotai d¾dontai Imperfect Act. -on Aorist Pass. dãsw Future Active Indicative 1. d¾doso d¾dosje 3. Perfect Act. didåmai didãmeja 2. Indicative 1. d¾dwsi(n) didËasi(n) Present M/P Indicative 1. doÖv doØsa dËn Middle dËmenov. dedãkei dedãkeisan Pluperfect M/P Indicative 1. dãs¬ dãsesje 3. Clayton Croy. Participle doje¾v. dedãkein dedãkeimen 2. Imperative 2. Imperative 2. dedãkeiso dedãkeisje 3. dãsw dãsomen 2. dãsetai dãsontai 3. Infinitive doj«nai Aorist Pass. didåtai didåntai Present Act. dojŸn 2. didËsjw didËsjwsan Present Infinitives Active didËnai M/P d¾dosjai Present Participles Act. ›dËjhv ›dËjhte 3. dŸdwke(n) dŸdwkan 5. dedãkeito dedãkeinto Future Passive Indic. Subjunctive 1. £dwka Aorist Active Indicative 1. didê didåsje 3. dŸdosai dŸdosje 3. ›dËjhn Aorist Passive Indicative 1. doj©tw doj©twsan Aorist Pass. doØ dËsje 3. 1. dËtw dËtwsan Aorist Mid. Participle dedwkãv. dedwke¾mhn dedwke¾meja 2. ›d¾dou ›d¾dosan Imperfect M/P Indicative 1. d¾domai didËmeja 2. dãsei dãsousi(n) Future Middle Indicative 1. Imperative Very Rare Perfect M/P Imperative Very Rare Perfect M/P Infinitive dedËsjai Perfect M/P Participle dedomŸnov. -on Aorist Act. ›d¾doun ›d¾domen 2. Imperative 2. doj° dojåsi(n) © 2007 N. dŸdomai Perfect M/P Indicative 1. £dwke(n) £dwkan Aorist Middle Indicative 1. doj°v doj«te 3. dËv dËte 3. didËtw didËtwsan Present M/P Imperative 2.

New Testament Examples Acts 23:6: “I am on trial concerning hope and the resurrection of the dead” (= “concerning the hope of the resurrection of the dead”) Luke 2:47: “they were amazed at his intelligence and his answers” (= “his intelligent answers”) Other Examples “good and mad” (= “very mad”) “good and ready” (= “quite ready”) “grace and favor” (= “gracious favor”) “He came despite the rain and weather” (= “rainy weather”). hen dia dyoin. one of which is logically dependent on the other. . the grammatical coordination of two ideas. “one through two” Definition: the expression of an idea by two independent words connected by “and” (as “nice and warm”) instead of the usual combination of a word and its modifier (as “nicely warm”). Clayton Croy. “I was moved by her distinction and presence” (= “distinctive presence”). All Rights Reserved.“Hendiadys” Etymology: From Greek: ¦n di~ duoÀn. © 2007 N.

›lÖeto ›lÖonto Pres. luŸtw luŸtwsan Present M/P Imperative 2. ›lus}mhn ›lus}meja 2. lujå lujåmen 2. lØsai lÖsasje 3. lÖhtai lÖwntai Present Act. lÖsw lÖswmen 2. Clayton Croy. -on Aorist Pass. Indicative 1. lÖomai luËmeja 2. £luse(n) £lusan Aorist Middle Indicative 1. -h. lÖs¬ lÖswsi(n) Aorist Mid. lÖwn lÖousa lØon M/P luËmenov. Subjunctive 1. lÖjhti lÖjhte 3. Perfect Act. Indicative 1. ›lŸluso ›lŸlusje 3. Imperative 2. lÖshtai lÖswntai Aorist Act. £lusav ›lÖsate 3. ›lÖsato ›lÖsanto 4. lÖseiv lÖsete 3. . lÖetai lÖontai Imperfect Act. lŸlutai lŸluntai 6. Imperative 2. luj©tw luj©twsan Aorist Pass. lÖw Present Act. £luev ›lÖete 3. Participle lelukãv. lujŸn 2. lus}sjw lus}sjwsan Aorist Infinitives Active lØsai Middle lÖsasjai Aorist Participles Act. -h. ›lÖjhv ›lÖjhte 3. Imperative 2. lus}menov. ›lelÖkein ›lelÖkeimen 2. lØson lÖsate 3. lÖeiv lÖete 3. lŸluka lelÖkamen 2. lŸluka Perfect Active Indicative 1. lŸlukav lelÖkate 3. Indicative 1. lÖs¬v lÖshte 3. ›lelÖmhn ›lelÖmeja 2. lujeÀsa. -h. ›lelÖkeiv ›lelÖkeite 3. luj©setai luj©sontai Perfect M/P Subjunctive Very Rare Aorist Pass. lÖsw Future Act. Subjunctive Very Rare Pluperfect M/P Indicative 1. lÖsetai lÖsontai 3. ›lÖou ›lÖesje 3. -kuÀa. lÖwmai luãmeja 2. ›lÖsw ›lÖsasje 3. lÖs¬ lÖsesje 3. Imperative Very Rare Perfect M/P Imperative Very Rare Perfect M/P Infinitive lelÖsjai Perfect M/P Participle lelumŸnov. -on Perfect Active Infinitive lelukŸnai Perfect Act. £lue(n) £luon Imperfect M/P Indicative 1. ›luËmhn ›luËmeja 2. lusËmenov. lus}tw lus}twsan Aorist Mid. ›lÖjhn Aorist Passive Indicative 1. lÖei lÖousi(n) Present M/P Indicative 1. lÖsw lÖsomen 2. £luon ›lÖomen 2. luj°v luj«te 3. luj©s¬ luj©sesje 3. £lusa ›lÖsamen 2. £lusa Aorist Active Indicative 1. All Rights Reserved. lÖsomai lusËmeja 2. Subjunctive 1. lÖ¬ lÖhsje 3. ›lÖjhn ›lÖjhmen 2. lŸlumai Perfect M/P Indicative 1. M/P Subjunctive 1. lÖw lÖwmen 2. and M/P forms do not always have an augment in addition to reduplication. lÖw lÖomen 2. Infinitive luj«nai Aorist Pass. luŸsjw luŸsjwsan Present Infinitives Active lÖein M/P lÖesjai Present Participles Act. Act. lÖswmai lusãmeja 2. -on Future Infinitives (rare) Active lÖsein Middle lÖsesjai Future Participles (rare) Act. lÖswn. lÖ¬ lÖwsi(n) Pres. lÖsav lÖsasa lØsan Mid. lŸlusai lŸlusje 3. -kËv Perfect Act. lÖou lÖesje 3. lÖsei lÖsousi(n) Future Mid. ›lelÖkei ›lelÖkeisan Pluperfect Act. lÖ¬ lÖesje 3. lŸluke(n) lŸlukasi(n) or lŸlukan 5. -on Aorist Act. luj©somai lujhsËmeja 2.Conjugation of the Regular Verb lÖw 1. Subjunctive 1. Indicative 1. lÖs¬ lÖshsje 3. lØe lÖete 3. Indicative 1. Participle luje¾v. Subjunctive 1. -h. Imperative 2. luj° lujåsi(n) © 2007 N. -on Mid. -ousa. ›lŸluto ›lŸlunto Future Passive Indicative 1. ›lÖjh ›lÖjhsan Pluperfect Act. lŸlumai lelÖmeja 2. lÖ¬v lÖhte 3.

Quick Quiz — Lesson 28 Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms. Ðte taØta ›gen©jh. All Rights Reserved. ›pistrŸywmen 8. ka¿ Ê did}skalov t«v dikaiosÖnhv paredËjh e¼v t~v qeÀrav tån ›xousiån. ka¿ μn pol× aÆma ›n t° g°. ›t©roun 3. qrËnov kr¾sewv meg}lhv £pesen ›f! ¨m‚v ka¿ qar~ £fugen {pÌ t«v g«v. ka¿ dãsei ¨mÀn qrËnon Ãna metano©swmen {pÌ tån kakån £rgwn ¨mån. metano©swmen 7. paredËjh 4. £fugen 5. {ll! Ê kÖriov ›n oÔranê ›le©sei. Ðtan ›pistrŸywmen prÌv tÌn jeÌn. o½ presbÖteroi oÔk ›po¾oun {lhj« kr¾sin. dãsei 6. {pŸdwken 2. ›n toÀv £tesin toØ ponhroØ basilŸwv oÔk {pŸdwken ¨ g« tÌn karpÌn aÔt«v. paradãsei Voice Mood Person Number © 2007 N. Ê g~r laÌv oÔk ›t©roun tÌn nËmon. eÔj×v Ê u½Ìv toØ {njrãpou ›leÖsetai ka¿ paradãsei tªn basile¾an tê patr¾. Clayton Croy. Tense 1. .

Ó«ma. proskunŸw. Ðlov. £gnwka. log¾zomai. e¼r©nh. fobŸomai. zw©. {f¾hmi. ›gnãsjhn). {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). ›xŸrqomai. Üdwr. £xestin. lÖw. jŸlw. sézw. khrÖssw. oÅkov. {rqiereÖv. staurËw. ›xous¾a. Õp}gw. fåv. All Rights Reserved. {naba¾nw. §gŸrjhn). ‡rtov. grammateÖv. {n©r. spŸrma. kÖriov. íra Adjectives {gajËv. diŸrqomai. ›kklhs¾a. dÖnamiv. {l©jeia. d¾dwmi. {gaphtËv. |gi}zw. poÖv. poreÖomai. £tov. bapt¾zw. ›rwt}w. £sqatov. £qw. pl©rhv. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). prost¾jhmi. glåssa. eÂrhka). gun©. diãkw. shmeÀon. kalŸw. {pŸrqomai. nËmov. ‡llov. g«. ÉfjalmËv. jrËnov. pneØma. p¾nw (p¾omai. kard¾a. a¼ãn. tŸknon. ›pit¾jhmi. £pion). karpËv. ›l©mfjhn). s}bbaton. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). keleÖw. |mart}nw. qa¾rw. ½m}tion. jug}thr. basileÖv. genn}w. jaum}zw. nekrËv. kwm©. kaj¾zw. ‰giov. parag¾nomai. doØlov. dikaiosÖnh. eÅnai). kr¾nw. dÖnamai. eÔaggŸlion. ÕmŸterov © 2007 N. q}riv. mŸgav. £jnov. b}llw (›bl©jhn). {lhj©v. pråtov. parakalŸw. {pokte¾nw. {grËv. {sjen©v. did}skw (did}xw). ‡rqwn. {polÖw. fwn©. £fagon). {pojn¯skw. p¾ptw (pesoØmai. qrËnov. l¾jov. ponhrËv. deÀ. kr¾siv. presbÖterov. loipËv. kalËv. ëfjhn). e¼m¾ (ën. proseÖqomai. mikrËv. laËv. oÅnov.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-29 Verbs {gap}w. såma. kakËv. bibl¾on. ¨mŸterov. ginãskw (gnãsomai. dox}zw. £rgon. Îqlov. basile¾a. {pod¾dwmi. gr}fw (›gr}fhn). £rqomai (›leÖsomai. Îrov. prof©thv. stËma. {paggŸllw. lalŸw. qar}. z}w. ‡njrwpov. gŸnov. nÖx. prosŸrqomai. majht©v. £fugon). ›kb}llw. £peson). tËpov. jŸlhma. marturŸw. dokŸw. œtoim}zw. dËxa. gnwr¾zw. k}jhmai. j}natov. §nŸqjhn). pØr. mht©r. sËv. Éfe¾lw. daimËnion. sof¾a. jewrŸw. aÆma. ›pistrŸfw. ›gg¾zw. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). paralamb}nw. dåron. {delfËv. ›rg}zomai. kataba¾nw. kt¾zw. kËsmov. ‡gw (±qjhn). did}skalov. μljon. fulak©. gŸgona. yuq©. {no¾gw. oÅda. jÖra. fŸrw (±negka. kratŸw. qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph. {rq©. . s}rx. u½Ëv. {pËllumi ({pollÖw). p¾stiv. œãraka. pat©r. Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). oÞv. kefal©. prËswpon. ›lp¾v. boÖlomai. pistËv. qe¾r. de¾knumi (deiknÖw). a¼tŸw. a¼ãniov. pisteÖw. oÔranËv. ›l©luja). lŸgw (eÅpon. {koÖw ({k©koa). dŸqomai. ½ereÖv. feÖgw (feÖxomai. g¾nomai (gen©somai. p‚v. ½erËn. sun}gw. mŸnw. {sp}zomai. pËliv. plhrËw. metanoŸw. {koloujŸw. zhtŸw. parabol©. {pokr¾nomai. |martwlËv. {delf©. e¼sŸrqomai. prosfŸrw. pŸmpw. ‡rqw. ¥kastov. ploÀon. spe¾rw. ›ntol©. mŸllw. ¥terov. tŸlov. ‡ggelov. polÖv. ›gen©jhn). |mart¾a. eÔaggel¾zomai. lamb}nw (l©myomai. jerapeÖw. {pËstolov. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. £rhmov. thrŸw. ¨mŸra. Clayton Croy. ›mËv. eÅdon. Âdiov. d¾kaiov. t¾jhmi. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. j}lassa. {gor}zw. ÕpostrŸfw. Êr}w (Îyomai. ›leŸw. graf©. ›perwt}w. Înoma. peripatŸw. poiŸw. parad¾dwmi. kr}zw. ÊdËv. jeËv. lËgov. tuflËv. blŸpw. sunagwg©. aÂrw. paid¾on.

oÞn. ka¾. sÖn. dŸ. Ðstiv. ©. prËv. oßtov. kat}. ›keÀ. íste Pronouns {ll©lwn. seautoØ. kajãv. ›keÀnov. ¥wv. All Rights Reserved. tË). oÚte. . eÔjÖv. påv. ‡n. m©. . prË. œautoØ. ¨. t¾v. mhkŸti. Ðpou. di}. oÔde¾v. Ë). oÔq). sÖ. tiv © 2007 N. ›mautoØ. oÚpw. Ãna. mŸn . ›p¾. Clayton Croy. par}. (Ê.Prepositions {pË. e¼v. Ðtan. e¼. per¾. Ðti. ›gã. dŸ. oÔkŸti. poØ. {m©n. âv. . Ðte. ›n. ÕpË Other {ll}. eÆv. £ti. nØn. ¼doÖ. mhde¾v. ›}n. (aÔtËv. Ðpwv. mhdŸ. g}r. ÕpŸr. oÔk. Ðsov. poll}kiv. tËte. ›k. oÜtwv. met}. (oÔ. tŸ. Ðv. oÔdŸ. ±dh. ïde. £xw. p}lin.

© 2007 N. ¨ m©thr oÔ dÖnatai eÕreÀn tÌn tËpon Ðpou ¨ mikr~ jug}thr aÔt«v £jhken tÌ bibl¾on ka¿ ¨ mikr~ jug}thr oÔ jŸlei tªn ÊdÌn deiknÖein aÔt°. 7. 6. jer}peusav tÌn tuflÌn eÅpen aÔtê Ê prof©thv. oÔ dÖnasje prosjeÀnai ¦n £tov t° zw° Õmån= Éfe¾lete oÞn z«n t~ £th t~ loip~ ›n e¼r©n¬ ka¿ ›lp¾di. ›n d¡ t° kard¾ƒ aÔtoØ ±jelen {polŸsai aÔtË. E¼p¡ mhden¾. ¨ gunª oÔk ›boÖleto {fiŸnai t~ tŸkna aÔt«v ›n tê {grê. .Practice and Review — Lesson 29 1. Ê ponhrÌv basile×v eÅpen Ðti jŸlei prosenegkeÀn dåra tê paid¾æ. ! f©sw aÔt}. All Rights Reserved. A 3. 5. 4. oÔde¿v §jŸlhse t~ loip~ ½m}tia= ›pej©kamen oÞn aÔt~ ›p¿ toØ l¾jou ›n tê ½erê Ãna dojåsin {njrãpoiv ›n fulak°. Clayton Croy. poreÖou d¡ ka¿ seautÌn deÀxon tê ½ereÀ. {ll~ Ðte eÅpen Ê doØlov Ðti oÂsei aÔt~ e¼v tªn kãmhn tËte eÅpen. Ê d¾kaiov grammate×v {pŸjanen {ll’ oÔde¿v tån loipån grammatŸwn ›jeãrhse poØ tÌ såma aÔtoØ ›tŸjh ÕpÌ tån ›xousiån. 2.

Ê ‡ggelov toØ kur¾ou £deixen toÀv majhtaÀv toÀv ›n tê plo¾æ Ðti oÔde¿v ›x aÔtån {poleÀtai ›n t° jal}ss¬. 12. 10. ›pij©sw t~v qeÀrav ›p’ aÔtån. {ll’ ›~n lal©s¬v kat~ tån |g¾wn grafån oÔk {fej©seta¾ soi. © 2007 N. nØn {f¾enta¾ sou a½ |mart¾ai. 9. ›k©ruxen Ê {pËstolov ›n dun}mei ka¿ pneÖmati íste polla¿ yuqa¿ ›bapt¾sjhsan ka¿ prosetŸjhsan t° ›kklhs¾ƒ ›n mi† ¨mŸrƒ. 13. 11. All Rights Reserved. {delfo¾ mou ka¿ {delfa¾. qa¾rete ›n tê kur¾æ ka¿ t¾jete ›n taÀv kard¾aiv Õmån {koloujeÀn aÔtê. Ê g~r {pËlesav t~ Ó©mata toØ jeoØ oÔk ›lehj©setai ›n t° kr¾sei.8. TÌ loipËn. mhde¿v jŸtw tÌ bibl¾on toØ nËmou e¼v tÌ pØr mhd¡ e¼v tÌ Üdwr. ›j©kamen ¥na l¾jon mŸgan par~ tªn sunagwgªn ka¿ ›keÀ sun}gomen tÌn laÌn ka¿ ›sj¾omen. TinŸv e¼sin ›n toÖtæ tê tËpæ oÄ oÔk £qousin tÌ pneØma. 14. Clayton Croy. kataba¾nwn {pÌ t«v meg}lhv pËlewv Ê did}skalov §rãthsen. .

tij«tai tijåntai Present Act. tije¾v tijeÀsa tijŸn M/P tijŸmenov. Imperative 2. tijŸsjw tijŸsjwsan Present Infinitives Active tijŸnai M/P t¾jesjai Present Participles Act. tej©s¬v tej©sesje 3. -on Aorist Pass. t¾jhmi t¾jemen 2. jŸv jŸte 3. j©somai jhsËmeja 2. Subjunctive 1. tijåmai tijãmeja 2. Subjunctive Very Rare Extremely Rare Future Passive Indicative 1. t¾jetai t¾jentai Imperfect Act. Indicative 1. tŸjhti tŸjhte 3. tij° tij«sje 3. tij° tijåsi(n) Present M/P Subjunctive 1. -h. jŸsjw jŸsjwsan Aorist Infinitives Active jeÀnai Middle jŸsjai Aorist Participles Act. -h. ›t¾jei ›t¾jesan Imperfect M/P Indicative 1. t¾jhsi(n) tijŸasi(n) Present M/P Indicative 1. Imperative Very Rare Perfect M/P Imperative Very Rare Perfect M/P Infinitive tejeÀsjai Perfect M/P Participle tejeimŸnov. j©sw j©somen 2. All Rights Reserved. t¾jhv t¾jete 3. tijŸtw tijŸtwsan Present M/P Imperative 2. ›jŸmhn ›jŸmeja 2. tŸjeitai tŸjeintai 6. tij°v tij«te 3. tej©somai tejhsËmeja 2.Subjunctive 1. j«tai jåntai Aorist Act. Perfect Act. t¾jhmi Present Active Indicative 1. j©sei j©sousi(n) Future Mid. t¾jemai tijŸmeja 2. tej°v tej«te 3. Imperative 2. £jou £jesje 3. -kuÀa. je¾v jeÀsa jŸn Middle jŸmenov. j©seiv j©sete 3. Indicative 1. jåmai jãmeja 2. Participle teje¾v. j©sw Future Act. ›t¾jeso ›t¾jesje 3. -on Aorist Act. £jhke(n) £jhkan Aorist Mid. tej©setai tej©sontai Perfect M/P Subjunctive Very Rare Aorist Pass. tŸjeimai teje¾meja 2. j° jåsi(n) Aorist Mid. j©setai j©sontai 3. tŸjeikav teje¾kate 3. ›tŸjh ›tŸjhsan Pluperfect Act. £jeto £jento 4. tejeÀsa. ›tŸjhv ›tŸjhte 3. j°v j«te 3. Imperative 2. Indicative 1. -on Perfect Active Infinitive tejeikŸnai Perfect Act. tejŸn 2. ›tŸjhn ›tŸjhmen 2. j° j«sje 3. ›t¾jeiv ›t¾jete 3. jå jåmen 2. ›tŸjhn Aorist Passive Indicative 1. t¾jesai t¾jesje 3. Infinitive tej«nai Aorist Pass. tŸjeika Perfect Active Indicative 1. j©s¬ j©sesje 3. teje¾kein teje¾keimen 2. Indicative 1. Subjunctive 1. Indicative 1. Clayton Croy. . tŸjeika teje¾kamen 2. Subjunctive 1. teje¾keiv teje¾keite 3. ›t¾jeto ›t¾jento Present Act. jŸtw jŸtwsan Aorist Mid. Participle tejeikãv.Conjugation of t¾jhmi 1. tŸjeimai Perfect M/P Indicative 1. ›tijŸmhn ›tijŸmeja 2. t¾jei t¾jete 3. -h. tŸjeike(n) tŸjeikan 5. -kËv Perfect Act. t¾jeso t¾jesje 3. Imperative 2. £jhka ›j©kamen 2. tej° tejåsi(n) © 2007 N. ›t¾jhn ›t¾jemen 2. tej©tw tej©twsan Aorist Pass. £jhkav ›j©kate 3. teje¾kei teje¾keisan Pluperfect M/P Indicative Pluperfect Active forms may have an augment in addition to reduplication. tŸjeisai tŸjeisje 3. £jhka Aorist Active Indicative 1. tijå tijåmen 2. tejå tejåmen 2. joØ jŸsje 3.

Mhde¿v tijŸtw l¾jon prÌ tån £jnwn Ãna mª dŸxwntai tÌn lËgon. ›pijåmen oÞn t~v qeÀrav ›p¿ to×v {postËlouv ka¿ pŸmywmen aÔto×v prÌv t~ £jnh. tijŸtw 6. Ê g~r jeÌv boÖletai {feÀnai t~v |mart¾av aÔtån ka¿ prosjeÀnai aÔto×v t° ›kklhs¾ƒ. eÅpon o½ presbÖteroi ›n t° kãm¬ ¨mån. {pËlluntai 3. . T~ £jnh oÚpw {khkËasin tÌ eÔaggŸlion ka¿ {pËlluntai di~ t~v |mart¾av aÔtån. ›pijåmen 4. tËte o½ loipo¿ {delfo¿ prosŸjhkan tÌ !Am©n toÀv legomŸnoiv. ka¿ t~ £jnh £qousin oÔdŸna deiknÖein aÔtoÀv tªn ÊdËn. Clayton Croy. dŸxwntai 7. {khkËasin 2. oÜtwv {fŸntev t~ tŸkna ka¿ to×v oÂkouv ›poreÖjhsan o½ {pËstoloi fŸrontev tÌ eÔaggŸlion t«v ›lp¾dov.Quick Quiz — Lesson 29 Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms. prosŸjhkan 5. boÖletai 8. lŸgontev. All Rights Reserved. ›poreÖjhsan Voice Mood Person Number © 2007 N. £stin g~r eÆv jeÌv ka¿ m¾a ÊdÌv ka¿ ¦n eÔaggŸlion. Tense 1.

›l©luja). proseÖqomai. q}riv. ¥terov. prosfŸrw. u½Ëv. mŸllw. s}rx. dikaiosÖnh. {pod¾dwmi. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). glåssa. {l©jeia. deÀ. såma. parag¾nomai. ›rg}zomai. ›kb}llw. {sp}zomai. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). tuflËv. a¼tŸw. b}llw (›bl©jhn). laËv. {delf©.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-30 Verbs {gap}w. nÖx. ›gg¾zw. mht©r. £rhmov. oÞv. kÖriov. jaum}zw. £gnwka. Înoma. ›pistrŸfw. pisteÖw. {pokte¾nw. j}lassa. {rqiereÖv. All Rights Reserved. Éfe¾lw. p¾ptw (pesoØmai. prosŸrqomai. gun©. |gi}zw. sun}gw. Ó«ma. kard¾a. {sjen©v. aÂrw. t¾jhmi. {n©r. ÕmŸterov © 2007 N. grammateÖv. majht©v. mikrËv. Üdwr. p¾nw (p¾omai. {naba¾nw. l¾jov. fhm¾. {pËstolov. fobŸomai. loipËv. ¥kastov. |martwlËv. £pion). lalŸw. e¼r©nh. prost¾jhmi. log¾zomai. nekrËv. prËswpon. proskunŸw. {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). karpËv. oÅkov. pråtov. d¾kaiov. diŸrqomai. £jnov. Êr}w (Îyomai. kr¾siv. . ‡rqwn. pat©r. pËliv. £tov. {f¾hmi. kt¾zw. khrÖssw. basile¾a. dokŸw. spe¾rw. boÖlomai. Clayton Croy. aÆma. ½ereÖv. thrŸw. |mart}nw. ›piginãskw. kaj¾zw. ›gen©jhn). gr}fw (›gr}fhn). {lhj©v. g«. dÖnamiv. fŸrw (±negka. £xestin. tŸlov. parad¾dwmi. stËma. ›ntol©. Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). eÔaggŸlion. feÖgw (feÖxomai. ›pit¾jhmi. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. ›xŸrqomai. e¼sŸrqomai. jewrŸw. a¼ãniov. yuq©. jug}thr. mŸgav. spŸrma. presbÖterov. paralamb}nw. poiŸw. ‡rtov. peripatŸw. j}natov. d¾dwmi. staurËw. genn}w. kwm©. {delfËv. plhrËw. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). zhtŸw. a¼ãn. poÖv. Ðlov. {pËllumi ({pollÖw). lËgov. ½erËn. {paggŸllw. doØlov. dåron. did}skw (did}xw). £qw. poreÖomai. kataba¾nw. ponhrËv. {pokr¾nomai. ÉfjalmËv. Õp}gw. ›kklhs¾a. tËpov. dËxa. kratŸw. jŸlhma. {n¾sthmi. §nŸqjhn). |mart¾a. sunagwg©. basileÖv. metanoŸw. dÖnamai. p¾stiv. ‡gw (±qjhn). ginãskw (gnãsomai. kr¾nw. oÔranËv. qe¾r. ›lp¾v. Îqlov. sËv. bapt¾zw. keleÖw. íra Adjectives {gajËv. jerapeÖw. fwn©. de¾knumi (deiknÖw). {pojn¯skw. fåv. {grËv. ëfjhn). qar}. eÂrhka). qrËnov. ‡llov. ‰giov. polÖv. paid¾on. {koloujŸw. kefal©. £sqatov. gŸgona. ‡rqw. oÅda. £rqomai (›leÖsomai. g¾nomai (gen©somai. did}skalov. dox}zw. eÔaggel¾zomai. §gŸrjhn). zw©. mŸnw. jŸlw. ploÀon. lÖw. ¨mŸra. pneØma. œtoim}zw. diãkw. marturŸw. qa¾rw. ½m}tion. k}jhmai. kr}zw. {gor}zw. sof¾a. ÕpostrŸfw. bibl¾on. ›rwt}w. ÊdËv. prof©thv. ›leŸw. qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph. jÖra. ›l©mfjhn). £fugon). graf©. daimËnion. £peson). lamb}nw (l©myomai. pØr. kakËv. {rq©. μljon. sézw. tŸknon. ›xous¾a. ‡njrwpov. kalŸw. ¨mŸterov. jrËnov. {koÖw ({k©koa). ›perwt}w. eÅdon. pl©rhv. ‡ggelov. lŸgw (eÅpon. jeËv. pŸmpw. ›mËv. gnwr¾zw. nËmov. eÅnai). £rgon. {pŸrqomai. Ãsthmi. parakalŸw. s}bbaton. fulak©. ›gnãsjhn). blŸpw. {no¾gw. {polÖw. oÅnov. Âdiov. kËsmov. £fagon). œãraka. parabol©. p‚v. pistËv. kalËv. Îrov. dŸqomai. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. gŸnov. e¼m¾ (ën. {gaphtËv. z}w. shmeÀon.

tŸssarev. ©. g}r. Ðv. oÔq). oÔkŸti. All Rights Reserved. ÕpË Other {ll}. ›p¾. £ti. œpt}. ›n. poll}kiv. Ðpwv. âv. Ãna. oßtov. dÖo. oÚte. oÞn. . ‡n. eÆv. per¾. Ðte. {m©n. mŸn . (aÔtËv. íste Pronouns {ll©lwn. ›keÀ. ka¾. tŸ. sÖ. seautoØ. påv. di}. . e¼. Ðti. ›mautoØ. Ë). Ðstiv. prËv. Ðsov. oÜtwv. ¥wv. mhde¾v. ïde. ÕpŸr. treÀv. tËte. ›}n. nØn. dãdeka. dŸka. ¼doÖ. £xw. Ðpou. mhdŸ. met}. ›k. Ðtan. prË. dŸ. ›keÀnov. t¾v. ¨. eÔjÖv. dŸ. pŸnte. kajãv. p}lin. tiv © 2007 N.Prepositions {pË. kat}. oÔdŸ. oÔde¾v. oÔk. ±dh. oÚpw. Clayton Croy. m©. œautoØ. poØ. tË). mhkŸti. . (Ê. e¼v. ›gã. par}. sÖn. (oÔ.

. {nŸbhsan prÌv tªn pËlin fŸrontev dÖo l¾jouv meg}louv e¼v tªn sunagwg©n. 3. 5. {n}bhji e¼v tÌ Îrov ka¿ e¼p¡ prÌv to×v majht~v to×v proskunoØntav ›keÀ. £fh ¨ gun©. eÔj×v ›pignoØsa Ðti tiv {no¾gei tªn jÖran. Kat}bate nØn e¼v tªn pËlin ka¿ poi©sate £rga dikaiosÖnhv. Gnåji tÌn kÖrion. ›keÀnov Ê prof©thv {gap† œstäv ›n tê ½erê lal«sai per¿ tån œpt~ pneum}twn toØ jeoØ. jeÌn {gap©seiv ka¿ ‡llouv {gap©seiv. {ll~ Ê p‚v nËmov plhroØtai ›n dus¿ lËgoiv. All Rights Reserved. 2. 4. påv staj©setai ¨ basile¾a e¼ treÀv basileÀv jŸlousin tªn dÖnamin krat«sai. a½ dŸka ›ntola¿ ›dËjhsan ¨mÀn Ãna peripat©swmen ›n e¼r©n¬ met’ {ll©lwn. © 2007 N. T¾v ›stin ›keÀ. Gnåji seautËn.Practice and Review — Lesson 30 1. 6. ¨ jug}thr Õmån §rãthsen. t~ £jnh £legon prÌv {ll©louv. DŸka doØloi. 7. Clayton Croy. {ll~ tÌ {gaphtÌn gŸnov ¨mån boÖletai prosjeÀnai.

›ljŸtwsan e¼v tÌn {grËn. TÌ Ó«ma toØ kur¾ou {nast©sei to×v nŸkrouv ›n t° ›sq}t¬ ¨mŸrƒ. ¨ d¡ oÔk £gnw Ðti aÔtÌv ›gg¾zei. ToØto tÌ paid¾on ›pŸgnw t~ dãdeka bibl¾a tån prof©twn. {nast~v Ê ÕiÌv §koloÖjhsen t° mhtr¿ aÔtoØ e¼v tÌn oÅkon. ¨ {delf© sou ›jer}peuse tÌn tuflÌn íste ›pignånai aÔtÌn pollo×v {njrãpouv œståtav ›n t° sunagwg°. © 2007 N. 12. 9. tin¡v tån œsthkËtwn ïde Îyontai to×v tŸssarav {ggŸlouv toØ oÔranoØ kataba¾nontav e¼v tªn g«n. 14. . 13. Ê ½ere×v fhs¾n. Clayton Croy.8. 10. Ðte katŸbh Ê laÌv prÌv tªn j}lassan {nŸsth œpt~ daimËnia ›k toØ Üdatov. {ll~ pollo¿ feÖxontai {pÌ toØ prosãpou toØ kur¾ou. eÜromen pŸnte ‡ndrav œståtav ›n t° kãm¬ zhtoØntav £rgon. 11. labän paid¾on Ê did}skalov £sthsen aÔtÌ prÌ toØ Îqlou ka¿ eÅpen. All Rights Reserved.

All Rights Reserved. I set up. stand firm”) £sthsa £sthsav £sthse(n) ›st©samen ›st©sate £sthsan aorist active indicative £sthn £sthv £sth £sthmen £sthte £sthsan st©sw st©s¬v st©s¬ st©swmen st©shte st©swsi(n) aorist active subjunctive stå st°v st° ståmen st«te ståsi(n) st«son sths}tw st©sate sths}twsan aorist active imperative st«ji st©tw st«te st©twsan st«sai aorist active infinitive st«nai st«sav st©sasa st«san aorist active participle st}v st‚sa st}n © 2007 N. Clayton Croy. place.Aorist Systems of Ãsthmi 1st Aorist Active (Transitive) (Meaning = “I cause to stand. . establish”) 2nd Aorist Active (Intransitive) (Meaning = “I stand.

All Rights Reserved. Thus 666 in Rev 13:18 is written out in some manuscripts. 102-6) In the archaic period Greeks wrote out all ordinal numbers and most cardinal numbers. both cardinal and ordinal. Harvard University Press. For numbers above 9 a quasi-decimal system was used.. See the full system of numerical signs and names. 20. b = 2. © 2007 N. the first nine letters stood for the numbers 1-9: a = 1.). In modern printed texts the numbers 1-999 are indicated by a raised stroke to the right of the number. etc. Thus. and the next nine letters stood for the hundreds (100. the Greeks had to use three archaic letters. and this became the dominant system in the Hellenistic era. ancient texts used dots or blank spaces before and after the number. The textual apparatus reveals. The numbers 1000 and higher are indicated by a subscript stroke to the left of the number. The meaning is q = 600 + x = 60 + ½ = 6. however. stood for the number 6. Greek Grammar. The letter koppa. Smyth. abbreviated in others. . since its place was sixth in the Phoenician alphabet. The letter sampi. written ». etc. 1956. g = 3. Numbers might still be written out in full.). written Ã. 200.C. pp. To do this with a 24 letter alphabet. To distinguish letters used as numbers from regular letters. stood for the number 900. however. stood for the number 90. The raised stroke to the right of the ½ indicates that the letters are to be read as numbers.. p. etc. even in the Hellenistic era. The alphabet was used to represent numbers starting in about the 5th century B. written F or ½. 659) the number is written out: œxakËsioi œx©konta ¥x. on the following page. In the printed text of the Greek NT (Nestle-Aland 27th ed. Clayton Croy. The letter digamma (also known as stigma or vau).Numbers in Ancient Greek (From Herbert W. The tenth through the eighteenth letters stood for the tens (10. that some manuscripts read the following: qx½Ì.

-on e¼kostËv. Ën disqiliostËv © 2007 N. -©. -ai. -ara pŸnte ¥x œpt} Éktã ›nnŸa dŸka eÂkosi(n) tri}konta tessar}konta pent©konta œx©konta œbdom©konta Égdo©konta ›nen©konta œkatËn diakËsioi. -a triakËsioi tetrakËsioi pentakËsioi œxakËsioi œptakËsioi ÉktakËsioi ›nakËsioi q¾lioi. -Ën diakosiostËv triakosiostËv tetrakosiostËv pentakosiostËv œxakosiostËv œptakosiostËv ÉktakosiostËv ›nakosiostËv qiliostËv. m¾a. tr¾a tŸssarev.Numbers in Ancient Greek Arabic Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 2000 Sign and Letter Name aÌ (alpha) bÌ (beta) gÌ (gamma) dÌ (delta) eÌ (epsilon) ½Ì (digamma) zÌ (zeta) hÌ (eta) jÌ (theta) iÌ (iota) kÌ (kappa) lÌ (lambda) mÌ (mu) nÌ (nu) xÌ (xi) oÌ (omicron) pÌ (pi) »Ì (koppa) rÌ (rho) sÌ (sigma) tÌ (tau) uÌ (upsilon) fÌ (phi) qÌ (chi) yÌ (psi) wÌ (omega) ÃÌ (sampi) Ía (alpha) Íb (beta) Greek Cardinal Number eÆv. -©. . -ai. -h. -©. ¥n dÖo treÀv. -h. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved. -Ën triakostËv tessarakostËv penthkostËv œxhkostËv œbdomhkostËv ÉgdohkostËv ›nenhkostËv œkatostËv. -on pŸmptov ¥ktov ¥bdomov Îgdoov £natov dŸkatov. -a disq¾lioi Greek Ordinal Number pråtov deÖterov tr¾tov tŸtartov.

ka¿ Ê prof©thv ›d¾daxen aÔto×v œpt~ ¨mŸrav ka¿ œpt~ nÖktav {pÌ tån |g¾wn bibl¾wn tån dãdeka {postËlwn. ›pŸgnw 3. ›d¾daxen 6. . £fh Ê prof©thv. Clayton Croy. §rg}zonto 4. e¼pän d¡ taØta {nŸbh Ê prof©thv e¼v tÌ ½erÌn Ãna dox}s¬ tÌn kÖrion. Tense 1. st©sete 8. eÔj×v oÞn ›k}lesen Ê prof©thv aÔtoÖv. TreÀv ›x Õmån gen©sontai did}skaloi ka¿ dÖo ›x Õmån gen©sontai ½ereÀv. £fh 7. ›pŸgnw Ðti §rg}zonto dŸka írav ka¿ £sqon oÔdŸn. periep}tei 2. All Rights Reserved. {nŸsthsan 5. ka¿ Ðte tÌ tŸlov tån œpt~ ¨merån ±ggisen.Quick Quiz — Lesson 30 Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms. {ll~ p}ntev ÕmeÀv st©sete tÌn nËmon toØ oÔranoØ ka¿ f}gesje ›n t° basile¾ƒ toØ jeoØ. a¼toÖmenov aÔto×v genŸsjai majht~v t«v ÊdoØ. periep}tei Ê prof©thv Ê pistÌv par~ tªn j}lassan ka¿ eÅden pŸnte {njrãpouv œståtav par~ dus¿n plo¾oiv. tËte {fŸntev t~ ploÀa {nŸsthsan ka¿ §koloÖjoun aÔtê. {nŸbh Voice Mood Person Number © 2007 N.

oÔranËv. gŸnov. kaj¾zw. ploÀon. ›pistrŸfw. boÖlomai. {pokr¾nomai. kataba¾nw. paralamb}nw. sËv. dox}zw. Üdwr. peripatŸw. ‡llov. ›xŸrqomai. |mart¾a. £pion). log¾zomai. {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). ‡rqwn. zhtŸw. nÖx. staurËw. {pŸrqomai. khrÖssw. tŸknon. {n©r. ›ntol©. Âdiov. graf©. mŸgav. ëfjhn). dåron. ‡rtov. doØlov. lÖw. ÊdËv. All Rights Reserved. oÞv. sunagwg©. karpËv. jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). ‰giov. ›piginãskw. ›rwt}w. qar}. tËpov. mËnov. thrŸw. jewrŸw. Õp}gw. Clayton Croy. mikrËv. ginãskw (gnãsomai. dŸqomai. stËma. spŸrma. ‡njrwpov. {paggŸllw. mŸllw. t¾jhmi. {pod¾dwmi. yuq©. £sqatov. ¨mŸterov. {gor}zw. ÕmŸterov © 2007 N. {polÖw. œãraka. dËxa. kr¾siv. d¾dwmi. blŸpw. Înoma. did}skw (did}xw). £gnwka. ›kklhs¾a. {n¾sthmi. {sjen©v. kratŸw. eÅdon. did}skalov. . genn}w. Éfe¾lw. ›gen©jhn). de¾knumi (deiknÖw). loipËv. {l©jeia. {delfËv. pisteÖw. Ðlov. qrËnov. £rgon. ›gnãsjhn). jerapeÖw. lamb}nw (l©myomai. ÕpostrŸfw. §nŸqjhn). grammateÖv. diŸrqomai. pŸmpw. e¼m¾ (ën. d¾kaiov. proseÖqomai. lËgov. j}lassa. parakalŸw. ›perwt}w. proskunŸw. dokŸw. qa¾rw. prËswpon. prost¾jhmi. nekrËv. eÂrhka). qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph. basile¾a. ›pit¾jhmi. g¾nomai (gen©somai. {gaphtËv. ponhrËv. j}natov. {rqiereÖv. íra Adjectives {gajËv. oÅkov. gun©. ¥terov. me¾zwn. keleÖw. dÖnamai. såma. prof©thv. £rqomai (›leÖsomai. ¼squrËv. μljon. lalŸw. kr}zw. œtoim}zw. jŸlw. eÔaggel¾zomai. ›gg¾zw. daimËnion. feÖgw (feÖxomai. metanoŸw. {delf©. ›l©luja). ÉfjalmËv. £qw. jŸlhma. poreÖomai. £rhmov. g«. basileÖv. {naba¾nw. jÖra. |gi}zw. sun}gw. Îrov. fwn©. aÂrw. Ãsthmi. {pËllumi ({pollÖw). Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). £jnov. tŸlov. bibl¾on. {koÖw ({k©koa). {koloujŸw. {rq©. lŸgw (eÅpon. ½erËn. {grËv. Îqlov. marturŸw. a¼ãniov. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). pistËv. gr}fw (›gr}fhn). pneØma. kt¾zw. s}bbaton. kre¾sswn. s}rx. z}w.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-31 Verbs {gap}w. shmeÀon. ‡ggelov. kËsmov. ›mËv. p¾ptw (pesoØmai. pËliv. pat©r. kr¾nw. sof¾a. £xestin. k}jhmai. {f¾hmi. fulak©. jug}thr. {no¾gw. poiŸw. £tov. b}llw (›bl©jhn). polÖv. pråtov. laËv. kÖriov. q}riv. mht©r. parabol©. £peson). kalŸw. £fagon). Ó«ma. eÔaggŸlion. ½m}tion. kakËv. bapt¾zw. tuflËv. prosŸrqomai. presbÖterov. u½Ëv. pl©rhv. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. ›l©mfjhn). ›sj¾w (f}gomai. jeËv. fhm¾. ›rg}zomai. gnwr¾zw. ‡gw (±qjhn). plhrËw. qe¾r. {pokte¾nw. {pojn¯skw. sézw. pØr. e¼sŸrqomai. prosfŸrw. aÆma. ‡rqw. oÅnov. poÖv. ½ereÖv. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). dikaiosÖnh. mŸnw. £fugon). ›xous¾a. zw©. {pËstolov. ›lp¾v. fobŸomai. eÅnai). ›paggel¾a. ›kb}llw. ¨mŸra. gŸgona. glåssa. spe¾rw. |mart}nw. majht©v. e¼r©nh. oÅda. kefal©. {sp}zomai. ¥kastov. kard¾a. jrËnov. mak}riov. p‚v. a¼ãn. p¾nw (p¾omai. diãkw. paid¾on. fŸrw (±negka. p¾stiv. ple¾wn. Êr}w (Îyomai. ›leŸw. kalËv. kwm©. jaum}zw. {lhj©v. nËmov. parad¾dwmi. deÀ. a¼tŸw. dÖnamiv. parag¾nomai. fåv. l¾jov. §gŸrjhn). |martwlËv.

Ãna. oÔde¾v. Ðpou. ›p¾. di}. ›n. ÕpË Other {ll}. £mprosjen. oÞn. dŸ. oÔdŸ. sÖ. œautoØ.Prepositions {pË. seautoØ. ‡n. diË. oÔq¾). (oÔ. Ðv. (Ê. oÔk. ¨. aÔtËv. {m©n. p}lin. . påv. íste Pronouns {ll©lwn. ¼doÖ. prËv. . eÔjÖv. ±. met}. t¾v. e¼v. Ðtan. oßtov. dŸka. oÜtwv. ›k. ÕpŸr. per¾. . oÚpw. dãdeka. Clayton Croy. £ti. tË). dÖo. dŸ. kat}. tŸ. g}r. ›}n. âv. poll}kiv. Ðti. oÔq. tËte. nØn. Ðsov. mhkŸti. £xw. ›gã. ¥wv. oÔkŸti. ›keÀ. ›mautoØ. mhde¾v. eÆv. Ðte. m‚llon. Ðstiv. m©. mŸn . Ðpwv. ïde. prË. tiv © 2007 N. poØ. e¼. pŸnte. ›keÀnov. ›nãpion. œpt}. ka¾. ±dh. treÀv. sÖn. oÚte. mhdŸ. kajãv. All Rights Reserved. tŸssarev. par}.

lŸgeiv Ðti £qeiv ple¾ona paid¾a toØ meg¾stou basilŸwv. mª s× me¾zwn eÅ t«v mhtrÌv ¨mån. oÔq¿ ka¿ o½ |martwlo¿ poioØsin toØto. diË e¼mi ponhrËterov p}ntwn tån {delfån mou. ›~n g~r mËnon {gap©shte to×v {gapåntav Õm‚v. . ¨ pËliv ¨mån ›sti ¨ mikrËtera pasån tån pËlewn ›n t° g°. e¼ Ê doØlov toØ {ndrÌv ›ke¾nou μn mak}riov. 3. 7. © 2007 N.Practice and Review — Lesson 31 1. tŸkna. Ê ÕiÌv £fh. 2. oÔk ˆn {p«ljen Ãna zht©s¬ kre¾ttona zw©n. 5. poØ e¼sin t~ bibl¾a mou. P}lin ³marton e¼v oÔranÌn ka¿ ›nãpiËn sou. mª ›b}lete t~ bibl¾a mou e¼v tªn j}lassan. ³tiv £qei dãdeka paid¾a. kalËn ›stin di~ dikaiosÖnhn diwqj«nai ² martureÀn mhd¡n ka¿ dŸxasjai dåra. 6. {ll’ ›genn©samen ½ereÀv ka¿ prof©tav ple¾onav ² aÔta¾. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved. 8. Ê labän tªn ›paggel¾an toØ pneÖmatov toØ |g¾ou me¾zwn ›st¿n toØ œsthkËtov £mprosjen {rqËntwn. 4. t¾na dËxan dŸxesje.

a½ qeÀrŸv mou {sjenŸsterai ² o½ pËdev mou. 13. §koloujoØmen ‡n soi. e¼ ›po¾eiv shmeÀa ple¾ona ka¿ me¾zona tån shme¾wn toØ didask}lou ¨mån. 14. mËnov oÔk e¼m¾.9. diÌ dÖnamai peripateÀn met~ soØ {ll’ oÔ dÖnamai fŸrein pleÀon ² ¥na l¾jon. mak}rioi o½ ¼squro¿ ›n p¾stei. oÔq¿ sunaqj©sontai £mprosjen toØ kur¾ou ka¿ eÕr©sousi q}rin. proskun©swmen ›nãpion toØ jrËnou toØ jeoØ m‚llon ² toØ jrËnou tån basilŸwn. 12. Clayton Croy. . 10. All Rights Reserved. © 2007 N. oÔk ˆn ›genËmeja majhta¿ toØ khrÖxantov e¼r©nhn. o½ g~r ‡ggeloi toØ patrËv moÖ e¼sin ïde ka¿ £qousi dÖnamin ple¾ona tån ›xousiån toØ kËsmou toÖtou. 11. e¼ £dwkav ¨mÀn ›paggel¾an kre¾ttona ka¿ ›lp¾da ¼squrËteran.

. (i)on -tatov. on -istov. on -(i)wn. . Regular: 2. . Ê profhteÖwn ² Ê lalån glãssaiv The one who prophesies is greater than the one who speaks in tongues (1 Cor 14:5). With the Genitive of Comparison tÌ mwrÌn toØ jeoØ sofãteron tån {njrãpwn ›st¾n The foolishness of God is wiser than human beings (1 Cor 1:25).Degrees of Adjectives Positive high smart awkward fun ¼squrËv ‰giov {gajËv mikrËv mŸgav Comparative higher smarter more awkward more fun (funner?) ¼squrËterov |giãterov kre¾sswn ›l}sswn me¾zwn Superlative highest smartest most awkward most fun (funnest?) ¼squrËtatov |giãtatov kr}tistov ›l}qistov mŸgistov Formation of Comparative and Superlative in Greek 1. on Making a Comparison in Greek 1. With ± and the Same Case in Both Parts me¾zwn . h. Irregular: -terov. 2. a. h.

. There are two general types of contrary-to-fact conditions: present and past.) Examples: Present Contrary-to-Fact Condition e¼ μmen ploÖsioi. however.” Past Contrary-to-Fact Condition e¼ ›pisteÖsate t° {lhje¾ƒ. “If we were rich. p}nta t~ bibl¾a ›n tê kËsmæ ˆn §gor}zomen ka¿ ›d¾domen aÔt~ tê {gaphtê didask}læ ¨mån. we would buy all the books in the world and we would give them to our beloved teacher. Both clauses use past tense indicative verbs. The “then” clause will usually have ‡n. The present type uses the imperfect tense.” © 2007 N. Clayton Croy. (Mixed types do. All Rights Reserved. “If you had believed the truth.Contrary-to-Fact Conditions In this type of condition an unreal act or circumstance is assumed in the protasis (“if” clause). The apodosis (“then” clause) expresses what would have occurred if that action or circumstance had been real. oÔk ˆn {p©ljete {pÌ t«v ÊdoØ toØ {gaphtoØ didask}lou ¨mån. you would not have departed from the way of our beloved teacher. The “if” clause is introduced with the particle e¼. occur. The past type uses the aorist tense.

All Rights Reserved. “You did tell the authorities the truth. we did!” mª £labon o½ ‰gioi {delfo¿ t~ Õp}rqonta toØ ½erŸwv. Questions expecting a negative answer have m©.Questions Expecting a Positive or Negative Answer Sometimes a question anticipates a “yes” response or a “no” response. Examples: oÔk eÂpete tªn {l©jeian taÀv ›xous¾aiv. Questions expecting a positive answer have oÔ (or oÔk. they did not!” (Memory Device: m© expects “Nay!”) © 2007 N. I am not!” Greek does the same thing by adding a negative particle to the question. I am!” “You aren’t going dressed like that. oÔq¾). . aren’t you?” Expected answer = “Yes. Clayton Croy. “The holy brothers did not take the belongings of the priest. did they?” Expected answer = “No. English achieves this by (1) voice intonation and/or (2) appending a short interrogative clause to a declarative statement. didn’t you?” Expected answer = “Yes. oÔq. are you?” Expected answer = “No. Examples: “You are going to the party.

e¼ toØto oÔk μn {lhjŸv. ka¿ g~r o½ ‡ggeloi o½ œsthkËtev £mprosjen toØ jeoØ oÔk £qousin ›paggel¾av kre¾ttonav ² o½ £qontev p¾stin. qa¾rete d¡ m‚llon ›p¿ kur¾æ tê jeê Õmån e¼v Ñn pisteÖete. oÔq¿ ginãskete Ðti ¨ p¾stiv dÖnatai ›kbaleÀn daimËnia ka¿ ›geÀrai to×v nekroÖv. Ê did}skalov katŸbh prÌv tªn j}lassan ka¿ £sth ›nãpion tån Îqlwn. Tense 1. ginãskete 5. tÌ £qein p¾stin kreÀtton ² £qein poll~ Õp}rqonta. . Clayton Croy. {pejn¯skomen ˆn ›n taÀv |mart¾aiv ¨mån.Quick Quiz — Lesson 31 Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms. ›~n kr}xhte tê jeê ka¿ dåte œauto×v aÔtê. ±noixan 3. {m©n. diÌ Ê did}skalov ±rxato laleÀn lŸgwn. dåte 7. All Rights Reserved. ¨ p¾stiv poi©sei ka¿ pleÀon. Mak}rioi o½ ¼squro¿ ›n p¾stei. ±noixan t~ îta aÔtån ›lp¾zontev {koÖein a¼ãnion sof¾an. {pejn¯skomen Voice Mood Person Number © 2007 N. qa¾rete 8. Ê g~r jeÌv mËnov dÖnatai såsai ¨m‚v. katŸbh 2. me¾zonev g}r e¼sin tån basilŸwn t«v g«v. kr}xhte 6. mª qa¾rete oÞn ›p¿ oÂnæ ka¿ oÂkoiv. ±rxato 4.

£tov. eÅdon. plhrËw. jug}thr. p¾ptw (pesoØmai. gr}fw (›gr}fhn). sof¾a. {rq©. {postŸllw ({pest}lhn). tŸknon. §nŸqjhn). £qw. basileÖv. ›pit¾jhmi. |martwlËv. §gŸrjhn). e¼r©nh. ›rg}zomai. |mart}nw. qa¾rw. ‡njrwpov. s}rx. khrÖssw. did}skw (did}xw). swthr¾a. |gi}zw. proskunŸw. tuflËv. {pojn¯skw. {l©jeia. {n¾sthmi. jeËv. jerapeÖw. eÅnai). {grËv. {naba¾nw. {pokte¾nw. ›ge¾rw (›g©germai. b}llw (›bl©jhn). {paggŸllw. Êr}w (Îyomai. ›sj¾w (f}gomai. q}riv. kairËv. tËpov. u½Ëv. kÖriov. paid¾on. prosfŸrw. bibl¾on. ‡rqwn. parakalŸw. eÕr¾skw (eÕrŸjhn). keleÖw. nËmov. kwm©. {pËllumi ({pollÖw). £rqomai (›leÖsomai.Cumulative Vocabulary — Lessons 1-32 Verbs {gap}w. daimËnion. ›kklhs¾a. laËv. All Rights Reserved. kaj¾zw. ploÀon. j}natov. pat©r. Îrov. ëfjhn). œtoim}zw. kefal©. £peson). dåron. ›l©mfjhn). t¾jhmi. dox}zw. {polÖw. oÅkov. ÕpostrŸfw. prof©thv. parabol©. gŸgona. pŸmpw. poreÖomai. qe¾r. oÅda. ‡rtov. ›lp¾v. bapt¾zw. {pod¾dwmi. thrŸw. ‡ggelov. kr¾siv. spe¾rw. {gor}zw. basile¾a. £jnov. poiŸw. ÉfjalmËv. poÖv. dokŸw. {pŸrqomai. kataba¾nw. gŸnov. spŸrma. ›ntol©. £fugon). såma. kard¾a. marturŸw. ›paggel¾a. jrËnov. z}w. dikaiosÖnh. eÂrhka). dÖnamiv. fhm¾. genn}w. ÊdËv. a¼tŸw. lÖw. ‡rqw. qar}. fËbov. paralamb}nw. karpËv. eÔaggel¾zomai. lamb}nw (l©myomai. g¾nomai (gen©somai. œãraka. fobŸomai. boÖlomai. ›xous¾a. sunagwg©. kratŸw. £rhmov. p¾nw (p¾omai. ½erËn. Ó«ma. mŸllw. graf©. kr}zw. . Îqlov. aÆma. pisteÖw. ›xŸrqomai. jŸlw. de¾knumi (deiknÖw). jn¯skw (tŸjnhka). ¨mŸra. pneØma. ›perwt}w. prosŸrqomai. nÖx. tŸlov. dÖnamai. pØr. s}bbaton. eÔaggŸlion. {sp}zomai. |mart¾a. ›l©luja). aÂrw. fwn©. zw©. {koloujŸw. l¾jov. ›gnãsjhn). ›gen©jhn). metanoŸw. diãkw. sun}gw. kËsmov. íra © 2007 N. mŸnw. staurËw. parad¾dwmi. feÖgw (feÖxomai. {koÖw ({k©koa). kt¾zw. ½ereÖv. ‡gw (±qjhn). {delfËv. {rqiereÖv. lËgov. pe¾jw (pŸpoija). {delf©. oÔranËv. a¼ãn. jÖra. prost¾jhmi. e¼m¾ (ën. lŸgw (eÅpon. jaum}zw. dŸqomai. ›rwt}w. grammateÖv. j}lassa. kr¾nw. £rgon. ›piginãskw. stËma. blŸpw. fŸrw (±negka. zhtŸw. fåv. {pokr¾nomai. Éfe¾lw. kalŸw. diŸrqomai. Înoma. g«. proseÖqomai. dËxa. jewrŸw. £pion). Õp}rqw (Õp}rqonta). mht©r. shmeÀon. qar¾zomai Nouns {g}ph. {n©r. sézw. qre¾a. deÀ. jŸlhma. ›leŸw. qrËnov. majht©v. glåssa. Clayton Croy. Üdwr. peripatŸw. yuq©. oÅnov. £gnwka. doØlov. gnwr¾zw. {pËstolov. ›kb}llw. p¾stiv. log¾zomai. oÞv. ½m}tion. k}jhmai. μljon. Ãsthmi. d¾dwmi. ›pistrŸfw. pËliv. £xestin. Õp}gw. fulak©. ginãskw (gnãsomai. parag¾nomai. did}skalov. ›gg¾zw. fanerËw. prËswpon. £fagon). lalŸw. e¼sŸrqomai. {no¾gw. gun©. {f¾hmi.

oÚpw. Ðpou. Ðti. Ðsov. ÕmŸterov Prepositions {pË. kakËv. Ðlov. ponhrËv. mŸgav. diË. tËte. eÆv. ¥terov. (Ê. sÖ. påv. t¾v. ±. £ti. ‰giov. âv. œautoØ. a¼ãniov. d¾kaiov. tŸ. Ðpwv. dŸ. ÕpŸr. ïde. dŸka. {sjen©v. {gaphtËv. ‡llov. £sqatov. Ãna. tiv © 2007 N. {m©n. íste Pronouns {ll©lwn. nØn. mak}riov. ›gã. dÖo.Adjectives {gajËv. prË. ¼doÖ. œpt}. e¼v. ›nãpion. aÔtËv. ¥kastov. (oÔ. All Rights Reserved. dãdeka. per¾. oÔdŸ. polÖv. mhdŸ. Ðmoiov. me¾zwn. oÔk. toioØtov. mŸsov. m‚llon. ¨mŸterov. mhkŸti. ¥wv. par}. . nekrËv. Ðtan. met}. . prËv. oÔkŸti. sËv. poll}kiv. ›mautoØ. m©. £mprosjen. oÔde¾v. ›}n. mhde¾v. dŸ. ÕpË Other {ll}. Ðte. ›n. ‡n. pŸnte. kajãv. oÜtwv. kre¾sswn. kalËv. treÀv. mikrËv. seautoØ. ‡qri. tË). ›mËv. ‡qriv. £xw. Âdiov. ›keÀ. presbÖterov. pråtov. Ðv. kat}. mËnov. ¼squrËv. poØ. g}r. ±dh. loipËv. {lhj©v. ple¾wn. p}lin. di}. oÔq. . oÔq¾). oßtov. e¼. ka¾. oÞn. Ðstiv. ›p¾. ›keÀnov. eÔjÖv. Clayton Croy. ¨. ›k. sÖn. pistËv. dexiËv. oÚte. p‚v. mŸn . tŸssarev. pl©rhv.

{nast~v d¡ Ê prof©thv ›n mŸsæ toØ Îqlou ›jer}peusen aÔt©n. T«v mhtrÌv ¨mån £qomen qre¾an. .Practice and Review — Lesson 32 1. 4. ka¿ μn {nªr ›n t° sunagwg° oß ¨ dexi~ qe¿r μn {sjen©v. © 2007 N. ka¿ t~ tŸkna ›fob©jhsan fËbon mŸgan ka¿ £legon prÌv {ll©louv. ›n ›ke¾næ tê kairê £pesen fËbov mŸgav ›p¿ p}ntav to×v ›n t° pËlei. 7. oÔk ›dun}meja ¼deÀn tªn swthr¾an ¨mån. 3. o½ poi©santev toiaØta oÔk e¼seleÖsontai tªn basile¾an t«v a¼wn¾ou e¼r©nhv oÔd¡ Îyontai tÌ fåv t«v swthr¾av. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved. o½ toØ {postËlou ›pŸjhkan t~v qeÀrav ›f’ ¨m‚v ka¿ ›x©ljomen khrÖssontev ¨mŸrav ka¿ nuktËv. ka¿ eÅpon. ›fÖgomen oÞn e¼v t~ Îrh. !Ido× jewrå to×v oÔrano×v §noigmŸnouv ka¿ tÌn u½Ìn toØ {njrãpou œståta ›k dexiån toØ jeoØ ›n mŸsæ tån |g¾wn {ggŸlwn. 2. 6. 5. ›dex}meja tªn ›lp¾da t«v swthr¾av ka¿ peripatoØmen ›n t° {lhje¾ƒ {pÌ t«v prãthv ¨mŸrav ‡qri toØ nØn.

8. oÔ qre¾an £qete Ãna tiv did}sk¬ Õm‚v. 13. © 2007 N. nØn d¡ ¨ {l©jeia toØ jeoØ pefanŸrwtai ¨mÀn. genãmeja pisto¿ ‡qri jan}tou ka¿ mª £qwmen fËbon tån {pokteinËntwn tÌ såma. Clayton Croy. t° ›sq}t¬ ¨mŸrƒ toØ £touv Ê grammate×v mª dun}menov eÕreÀn t~ bibl¾a aÔtoØ £kraxen t° gunaik¾. o½ majhta¾ mou Éfe¾lousin eÅnai Ðmoioi paid¾oiv. 12. 9. All Rights Reserved. a½ gunaÀkev ›jaÖmazon ka¿ ›phrãtwn {ll©lav t¾v eÂh oßtov Ê tuflËv. 10. 14. o½ ¼squro¿ t° p¾stei did}xousin ›n tê ½erê Ðlon tÌ £tov ka¿ p‚v Ê laÌv ›leÖsetai {koÖein. tån g~r toioÖtwn ›st¿n ¨ basile¾a. . 11. Ê g~r kÖriov aÔtÌv ›fanŸrwsen ÕmÀn p}nta. Mª gŸnoito. μn kairÌv Ðte ›dokoØmen tÌn jeÌn eÅnai Ðmoion {njrãpæ.

¥xomen 6. ka¿ ‡qri t«v ¨mŸrav taÖthv eÔhggel¾zesje. ±jelon 3.Quick Quiz — Lesson 32 Translate the following paragraph and identify the underlined forms. Voice Mood Person Number . doj©setai 8. ginãskomen Ðti ›sËmeja Ðmoioi aÔtê. Ðte g~r t~ £jnh ±jelon {koØsai tÌ eÔaggŸlion. fanerãsei 4. ¨ g~r {g}ph toØ jeoØ ›kb}llei tÌn fËbon. fËbov peseÀtai ›p¿ to×v mª pisteÖontav e¼v tÌn kÖrion. Clayton Croy. toiaÖth ›st¿n ¨ ›lp¿v ¨mån. {ll~ ¨meÀv oÔq ¥xomen fËbon. oÔk oÞn £qomen qre¾an t«v dun}mewv ka¿ t«v dËxhv. All Rights Reserved. peseÀtai 5. gŸnoito oÜtwv e¼v tÌn a¼åna. £dei khrÖssein tÌn lËgon. ›l©lujen 2. ginãskomen 7. nØn d¡ £rqetai Ê u½Ìv t«v dikaiosÖnhv ka¿ fanerãsei p}nta. tËte Ê u½Ìv kaj¾sei ›n dexi† toØ patrÌv ka¿ p‚sa ›xous¾a doj©setai tê ›p¿ toØ jrËnou. e¼ Ê u½Ìv £rqetai mŸshv nuktÌv ² mŸshv ¨mŸrav. Ê kairÌv t«v swthr¾av Õmån ±ggiken ka¿ tÌ tŸlov tån £rgwn Õmån ›l©lujen. Ê g~r u½Ìv plhrãsei p‚san qre¾an ¨mån. Tense 1. gŸnoito © 2007 N.

7. {nast}ntev oÞn kr}zwmen tê pneÖmati ›n mŸsæ t«v ›kklhs¾av. 8. Ê jeÌv mËnov oÅden tÌn ka¾ron Ðte Ê u½Ìv toØ {njrãpou ›leÖsetai p}lin ka¿ fanerwj©setai toÀv ›pt~ {ggŸloiv oÄ œst©kasin ›nãpion toØ jrËnou. oÔk £qomen qre¾an tån ›paggeliån tinov ‡rqontov ›p¿ t«v g«v. ›n qrËnæ meg}lou fËbou ›de¾xamen ÕmÀn tªn ÊdÌn t«v swthr¾av. 4. £fh Ê ½ere×v tê basileÀ. oÔ dÖnamai ›pignånai tÌ prËswpon toØ {ndrÌv toØ labËntov tÌn loipÌn ‡rton {pÌ toØ oÂkou mou. 6. Ê jeÌv g~r toØ oÔranoØ £dwken ¨mÀn ›paggel¾av me¾zonav ka¿ ¼squrotŸrav. ka¿ oÔde¿v eÅqen ›lp¾da toØ sézesjai aÔtËn. ›n tê £tei ›ke¾næ o½ pŸnte presbÖteroi ›pŸjhkan t~v qeÀrav tê pistê didask}læ ¨mån ka¿ paredËjh t° q}riti toØ jeoØ e¼v tÌ £rgon aÔtoØ. {ll! oÔk §koÖsate ¨mån ka¿ oÜtwv {pãlesje. Clayton Croy. {podËtw d¡ eÔj×v tÌn ‡rton ka¿ {f©sw aÔtê. 3. 5. 2. dãdeka ‡ndrev μsan ›n plo¾æ ›n jal}ss¬ dŸka ¨mŸrav ka¿ dŸka nÖktav. t¾v dÖnatai prosjeÀnai yuq~v poll~v t° ›kklhs¾ƒ e¼ mª tÌ pneØma tÌ ‰gion. All Rights Reserved. oÔk μn ‡rtov oÔd¡ Üdwr. oÔk ˆn £fugen {pÌ t«v basile¾av sou zhtoØsa zwªn t«v qar‚v ›n ‡llhn g«n.Periodic Exercises — Set #5 (emphasizing Lessons 27-32) 1. ÕmeÀv ka¿ t~ tŸssara tŸkna Õmån. © 2007 N. . E¼ ¨ jug}thr sou μn makar¾a.

tÌ mikrÌn paid¾on §rãthsen tÌn ½erŸa. m¾a kataba¾nei e¼v j}naton ka¿ m¾a {naba¾nei e¼v zw©n. {ll~ ka¿ ÐmoiËv ›stin mhtr¾. mª zhteÀte t~v basile¾av toØ kËsmou toÖtou. kr¾nei g~r ka¿ ‡rqei. ¨ d¡ ›sq}th diŸrqetai tªn g«n Ðlhn. OÔq¿ Ê nËmov ›st¿n pleÀon ›ntolån ka¿ £rgwn. mhde¿v jŸtw qeÀra ›p¿ tÌn prof©thn toØ jeoØ. {gap† g~r ka¿ genn† tŸkna. ka¿ £fh Ê ½ereÖv. Ðsoi poreÖontai ›n aÔt° £qousin oÚte ›lp¾da oÚte qar}n. 11. Clayton Croy. 13. 15. All Rights Reserved. a½ g~r toiaØtai basileÀai {pËlluntai. 10. NekrËv ›stin Ê nËmov. OÔde¿v dÖnatai ¼deÀn tÌn oÔranËn. kajäv gŸgraptai ›n taÀv grafaÀv. grammate×v d¡ {pekr¾jh. diÌ ›rgazŸsjwsan ka¿ Ê u½Ìv ka¿ ¨ jug}thr ¨mån £xw ›n tê {grê ‡qri toØ tŸlouv t«v ¨mŸrav.9. {ll~ Ðstiv {gap† tÌn kÖrion oÅden Ðti tÌ eÅnai £mprosjen toØ jeoØ eÅnai ›n tê oÔranê. Ê kaj©menov ›p¿ toØ jrËnou ›n oÔranê ÐmoiËv ›stin patr¾. . {ll~ zhteÀte m‚llon tªn {lhj« basile¾an ›n tê oÔranê. dÖo qeÀrŸv e¼sin kre¾ttonev ² m¾a qe¾r. 14. 12. eÅpŸn tiv Ñv oÔk eÅqen sof¾an. Ñv ›~n katab° e¼v tªn pËlin ka¿ {gor}s¬ dåra tê basileÀ oÔ poieÀ tÌ jŸlhma jeoØ. {ll! oÔk £qei tŸlov. PoØ ›stin Ê oÔranËv. Ñv d¡ ›~n {nab° e¼v tÌ Îrov ka¿ proseÖxhtai spe¾rei © 2007 N. 16. e¼s¿n treÀv Êdo¿ ›n toÖtæ tê kËsmæ. o½ g~r prof«tai toØ jeoØ kaj©sontai ›n t° dexi† tån {ggŸlwn.

mª gŸnoito. 17. ›lhlÖjamen prÌv tÌ tŸlov toØ £rgou ¨mån. Clayton Croy. © 2007 N. ›kb}lwmen tªn #Ellhnikªn glåssan ›n taÀv ›rqomŸnaiv ¨mŸraiv. All Rights Reserved.spŸrmata t«v e¼r©nhv ka¿ t«v dikaiosÖnhv. .

be able {pojn¯skw {pokr¾nomai {pËllumi or {pollÖw {postŸllw ‡rqw {f¾hmi ba¾nw b}llw blŸpw g¾nomai ginãskw gr}fw de¾knumi or deiknÖw dŸqomai d¾dwmi diãkw dox}zw dÖnamai {pojanoØmai {pokrinoØmai {polŸsw or {polå {postelå ‡rxw {f©sw b©somai balå blŸyw gen©somai gnãsomai gr}yw de¾xw dŸxomai dãsw diãxw dox}sw dun©somai --{pokŸkrimai {pËlwla {pŸstalka --{feÀka bŸbhka bŸblhka --gŸgona £gnwka gŸgrafa dŸdeiqa --dŸdwka ded¾wka dedËxaka --- © 2007 N. forgive go throw see become. explain receive give pursue. Perfect Active Indicative §g}phka μqa μrka ¸thka {k©koa ¨m}rthka {nŸæga 5. Aorist Active Indicative §g}phsa ±gagon μra ¸thsa ±kousa ¨m}rthsa or ³marton {nŸæxa. or §nŸæxa {pŸjanon {pekrin}mhn {pãlesa or {pwlËmhn {pŸsteila μrxa {f«ka £bhn £balon £bleya ›genËmhn £gnwn £graya £deixa ›dex}mhn £dwka ›d¾wxa ›dËxasa --4. Aorist Passive Indicative §gap©jhn ±qjhn ±rjhn -t©jhn §koÖsjhn --{neéqjhn. Perfect M/P Indicative §g}phmai μgmai μrmai ¸thmai ±kousmai --{nŸægmai. Present Active Indicative {gap}w ‡gw aÂrw a¼tŸw {koÖw |mart}nw {no¾gw 2. or §neéqjhn --{pekr¾jhn --{pest}lhn --{fŸjhn --›bl©jhn --›gen©jhn ›gnãsjhn ›gr}fhn ›de¾qjhn ›dŸqjhn ›dËjhn ›diãqjhn ›dox}sjhn §dun©jhn or §dun}sjhn die answer destroy. Clayton Croy. §nŸægmai. or ±noigmai ------{pŸstalmai μrgmai {feÀmai --bŸblhmai --gegŸnhmai £gnwsmai gŸgrammai dŸdeigmai dŸdegmai dŸdomai ded¾wgmai dedËxasmai dedÖnhmai 6. lift up ask. §no¾qjhn. persecute glorify can. Future Active Indicative {gap©sw ‡xw {rå a¼t©sw {koÖsw |mart©sw {no¾xw 3. .Principal Parts of Common Greek Verbs English Translation love lead take up. be know write show. request hear sin open 1. begin let go. ±noixa. All Rights Reserved. perish send rule.

raise up be turn. live sow save put. walk. . Clayton Croy. return go. destroy see persuade send drink fall believe fill. carry flee ›ge¾rw e¼m¾ ›pistrŸfw £rqomai ›sj¾w eÕr¾skw £qw jŸlw jerapeÖw Ãsthmi k©russw kr¾nw lamb}nw lŸgw lÖw Êr}w pe¾jw pŸmpw p¾nw p¾ptw pisteÖw plhrËw poiŸw poreÖomai spe¾rw sézw t¾jhmi ÕpostrŸfw fŸrw feÖgw ›gerå £somai ›pistrŸyw ›leÖsomai f}gomai eÕr©sw ¥xw jel©sw jerapeÖsw st©sw khrÖxw krinå l©myomai ›rå lÖsw Îyomai pe¾sw pŸmyw p¾omai pesoØmai pisteÖsw plhrãsw poi©sw poreÖsomai sperå sãsw j©sw ÕpostrŸyw oÂsw feÖxomai ±geira --›pŸstreya μljon £fagon eßron £sqon §jŸlhsa ›jer}peusa £sthsa (trans.) £sthn (intrans.Principal Parts of Common Greek Verbs. cause to stand preach. receive say. place return bring. speak. fulfill do.) ›k©ruxa £krina £labon eÅpon £lusa eÅdon £peisa £pemya £pion £peson ›p¾steusa ›pl©rwsa ›po¾hsa ›poreus}mhn £speira £swsa £jhka ÕpŸstreya ±negka £fugon ----›pŸstrofa ›l©luja --eÜrhka £sqhka §jŸlhka or tejŸlhka tejer}peuka ¥sthka kek©ruqa kŸkrika eÂlhfa eÂrhka lŸluka œãraka pŸpoija pŸpomfa pŸpwka pŸptwka pep¾steuka pepl©rwka pepo¾hka ----sŸswka tŸjeika --›n©noqa --›g©germai --›pŸstrammai ----eÜrhmai ----tejer}peumai ¥stamai kek©rugmai kŸkrimai eÂlhmmai eÂrhmai lŸlumai îmmai pŸpemmai pŸpemmai pŸpomai --pep¾steumai pepl©rwmai pepo¾hmai pepËreumai £sparmai sŸswmai tŸjeimai --›n©negmai --§gŸrjhn --›pestr}fhn ----eÕrŸjhn ----›jerapeÖjhn ›st}jhn ›khrÖqjhn ›kr¾jhn ›l©mfjhn ›rrŸjhn ›lÖjhn ëfjhn ›pe¾sjhn ›pŸmfjhn ›pËjhn --›pisteÖjhn ›plhrãjhn ›po¾hjhn ›poreÖjhn ›sp}rhn ›sãjhn ›tŸjhn --¨nŸqjhn --- © 2007 N. come eat find have wish heal stand. make go. All Rights Reserved. proclaim judge take. bear. cont. tell loosen.

I let go. I raise up 24. dox}zw. I take up. I see 14. ›pistrŸfw. ±kousa. be 15. grant 20. ›gen©jhn. persecute 21. I come. {f«ka. ginãskw. I write 17. dŸdeigmai. Clayton Croy. £balon. {koÖw. £bleya. ›d¾wxa. blŸyw. I show 18. --.Principal Parts of 50 Greek Verbs 1. I open 7. £graya. ¸thmai. ¸thsa. £gnwka. lift up 4. ›bl©jhn. aÂrw. . {gap©sw. £gnwsmai. ›dox}sjhn. I know 16. §g}phka. place 13. ded¾wka. gnãsomai. dŸdegmai. a¼t©sw. ›dËxasa. ›gr}fhn. diãxw. §dun©jhn or §dun}sjhn. become. {nŸæga. £gnwn. {fŸjhn. ‡gw. {pekrin}mhn. I can. I go © 2007 N. £rqomai. gŸgrammai. diãkw. ba¾nw. §koÖsjhn. {pokŸkrimai. I hear 6. dŸdomai. bŸblhmai. ±qjhn. dãsw. balå. I ask 5. de¾xw. ›pŸstrofa. £bhn. b}llw. {no¾xw. dox}sw. ›de¾qjhn. ±rjhn. I love 2. de¾knumi and deiknÖw. gŸgona. cast. {pŸsteila. ›dex}mhn. £dwka. {koÖsw. g¾nomai. --. voice) perish 9. --. μqa. ±geira. forgive 11. dŸdeiqa. {gap}w. {pãlesa or {pwlËmhn. --. --. μljon. leave. ±kousmai. gŸgrafa. {feÀmai. μra. --. --. All Rights Reserved. I receive 19. {neéqjhn or §no¾qjhn or §neéqjhn. ¸thka. {pekr¾jhn. blŸpw. ±gagon. ›ge¾rw. ót©jhn. dŸxomai. I glorify 22. {rå. ›pestr}fhn. {pËlwla. (mid. {postŸllw. ded¾wgmai. {nŸægmai or §nŸægmai or ±noigmai. {f¾hmi. μrka. ›leÖsomai. μgmai. --. gr}fw. {feÀka. {pest}lhn. a¼tŸw. I throw. {pŸstalmai. {pËllumi or {pollÖw. I destroy. ›g©germai. --. I give. gr}yw. ›diãqjhn. ›l©luja. ›pistrŸyw. ‡xw. am able 23. ›pŸstreya. £deixa. I go 12. ›genËmhn. ›gnãsjhn. {pokrinoØmai. I lead 3. {pokr¾nomai. {f©sw. ›dŸqjhn. ›gerå. --. b©somai. dŸdwka. §gŸrjhn. {pŸstalka. I pursue. --. dŸqomai. I send 10. §g}phmai. {nŸæxa or ±noixa or §nŸæxa. dedËxasmai. dun©somai. take away. gen©somai. §gap©jhn. μrmai. gegŸnhmai. dedËxaka. --. ›dËjhn. {k©koa. §g}phsa. bŸblhka. dÖnamai. bŸbhka. {polŸsw or {polå. I turn 25. d¾dwmi. ›pŸstrammai. {postelå. I answer 8. {no¾gw.

sŸswmai or sŸswsmai. eÂrhmai. --. spe¾rw. feÖxomai. --. I have 29. destroy 36. pisteÖw. --. pŸpemmai. £fagon. £fugon. sézw. I flee © 2007 N. ›poreus}mhn. pesoØmai. lÖw. £qw. pepo¾hmai. ›pe¾sjhn. ›n©negmai. oÂsw. lŸgw. I preach. ›poreÖjhn. kek©ruqa. £swsa. eÂrhka. pŸmpw. pe¾sw. £peisa. --. lÖsw. Êr}w. I find 28. sperå. f}gomai. pepl©rwka. eÂlhfa. poreÖomai. eÜrhka. t¾jhmi. £lusa. ¥stamai. kŸkrika. --. I heal 30. I bring. £sparmai. make 44. appoint 48.--. jerapeÖsw. eÅdon. I judge 33. p¾ptw. sŸswka. ÕpostrŸfw. poreÖsomai. ›rå. jerapeÖw. st©sw. ëfjhn. All Rights Reserved. --. eÕr©sw. poiŸw.26. pŸpomfa. pep¾steuka. ÕpostrŸyw. --. ›pl©rwsa. eÕrŸjhn. §nŸqjhn. pep¾steumai. I go. £pemya. carry 50. ›plhrãjhn. eÂlhmmai. œãraka. lŸluka. Ãsthmi. I say. I take. ›tŸjhn. . pepo¾hka. bear. ›sp}rhn. tŸjeimai. pŸmyw. £jhka. ›lÖjhn. ›l©mfjhn. --. receive 34. lŸlumai. Clayton Croy. ›pŸmfjhn. khrÖxw. ›kr¾jhn. --. îmmai. pepl©rwmai. ¥sthka. ¥xw. sãsw. lamb}nw. I believe 42. ›po¾hjhn. p¾nw. ±negka. fulfill 43. ›pËjhn. krinå. ›k©ruxa. --. plhrËw. ›pisteÖjhn. eÅpon. ›po¾hsa. I stand. ›jer}peusa. tŸjeika. tell 35. I place. put. I loosen. £sthsa or £sthn. ›khrÖqjhn. ›n©noqa. poi©sw. walk. £labon. cause to stand 31. pŸpomai. speak. pe¾jw. pisteÖsw. eßron. ›p¾steusa. £speira. I fill. £pion. ÕpŸstreya. I see 37. I drink 40. tejer}peumai. pŸpeismai. eÕr¾skw. I do. plhrãsw. £krina. ›st}jhn. j©sw. I fall 41. £sqon. pŸpoija. eÜrhmai. kr¾nw. p¾omai. ›jerapeÖjhn. Îyomai. ›sãjhn. proclaim 32. khrÖssw. I eat 27. live 45. fŸrw. £sqhka. pŸpwka. ›rrŸjhn. feÖgw. I send 39. I persuade 38. I return 49. kŸkrimai. ›sj¾w. £peson. I save 47. l©myomai. pepËreumai. --. tejer}peuka. pŸptwka. kek©rugmai. I sow 46.

out of. below ÕpŸr ÕpË . with on. They are by no means exhaustive. upon. in front of. at near. toward from. to. along. beyond. among. by because of.Common Biblical Greek Prepositions (Note: Prepositions have a wide range of meanings. more than under. near. above on. in accordance with after. toward with. behind by. for the sake of Õp! Õf! by with above. alongside. near against. near at. beyond Meaning with Dative Case Meaning with Accusative Case {pË di} di! e¼v ›k ›n ›p¾ kat} kat! kaj! met} met! mej! par} par! prË sÖn for. toward. with regard to around. for the sake of into. away from in. in the company of from about. at. away from through. in behalf of. among. concerning per¾ before. with ›p! ›f! on.) Preposition Elided form (if any) {p! Aspirated Form (if any) {f! Meaning with Genitive Case from. about. across according to. over. beside. The ones given here are among the more common ones. by. for. by (rare) prËv to. upon.

oÅda Common in LXX and NT with present meaning of “I know. --- (Îpwpa) Not in LXX or NT. See Esth 5:1d. Perfect Mid. blŸyw Simple form rare in LXX and NT. £bleya Simple form rare in LXX and NT. Aorist Passive blŸpw Common in LXX and NT. (bŸblefa) Not in LXX or NT. (›blŸfjhn) Not in LXX or NT. 4:1. See Exod 3:16. e¼d©sw Rare in LXX and NT. Compounds are common. (œwr}jhn) Not in LXX or NT. Future Active 3. and Rev 22:8. Present Active 2. 5. eÅdon Common in LXX and NT. œãramai Once in LXX (Lev 14:35). Not in LXX or NT. All Rights Reserved. Êr}w Occasionally in NT. ëfjhn Common in LXX and NT. Clayton Croy. Îyomai Common in LXX and NT. See Isa 6:9. Acts 3:4./Pass. . especially in imperative. Only Jer 38:34 and Heb 8:11. Matt 13:14. Perfect Active 5. Compounds are common. 6. Not in NT. Aorist Active 4. îmmai Rare in LXX. (eÂdw) Hypothetical present active form. --- --- œãraka or œËraka Common in LXX and NT.Greek Words for “See” 1. and Acts 28:26. (Îptw) Very rare in ancient Greek.” --- --- © 2007 N. Present middle occurs in Classical Greek but not in LXX or NT. Not in NT. (bŸblemmai) Not in LXX or NT.

they give the number and the case! “We” and “I” are subjects.” “Us” and “me” are objects. -oiv. case tells what they do. © 2007 N. Eight forms a word. Harding University. -ou. adjectives do too. -æ. I’ll learn them! Eight forms a word. Can’t ignore the endings. learn them. case provides the key. Clayton Croy. Eight forms a word. -on. the article’s a clue. learn them. learn them. we’re not really done. Can’t ignore the endings. Eight forms a word. -oi. -ouv That’s the next declension. There’s a third declension and vocative to come! Help me. -aiv. Endings. -ai. Eight forms a word. -av That’s the first declension. . Help me. Help me. I’ll learn them! Eight forms a word. Help me. Eight forms a word. don't just learn a few! -h. -¬. -ov. there are plenty. Eight forms a word.Eight Forms a Word (To the tune of “Eight Days a Week”) by Beatles fan and Greek teacher. Number tells how many. -hn. James Bury. 2002 Nouns and pronouns use them. Eight forms a word. It’s easy to confuse them. -wn. -wn. Eight forms a word. so are “he” and “she. learn them. -hv. All Rights Reserved. they give the number and the case! One more thing to mention.

The Greek verb system. I gotta get the endings down and get them down right.” So late in the evening.” “If I don’t learn this paradigm. All Rights Reserved. Tune = “Gangsta’s Paradise” by Coolio) As I walk through the valley of the shadow of Greek. My friendships are dying. So when I do my parsin’ I won’t do it wrong. but you’re never in. Clayton Croy. I’m in the library Beneath a pile of books under which I’ve been buried. my life’s in peril.” I have to say to them. My best companions are my vocab cards. as any fool can see. The way things are goin’ my life is ill-starred. it’s got so many forms. ’Cause I’ve been learnin’ and crammin’ so long. My social life is sufferin’. The Greek tutor and I. (Repeat 4×) © 2007 N. They’re buzzing in my brain. Clayton Croy. “I been in my study carrel. I spend every waking moment with the Koine. “Hey. and there ain’t no other way Than studyin’ from the break of dawn until the end of day. where you been?” “We come by your place. Tell me why of late — is it my fate To do nothing more — than conjugate? I’ve been spending all my time Trying to learn the Greek verb paradigm. I take a look at my life and see it’s rather bleak. But I got one friend with whom I can tarry. I gotta pass the midterm. But I’ve been studyin’ every day and every night. . It’s just reality. like bees in swarms. I’ve been spending all my time Trying to learn the Greek verb paradigm. My nose is in a book.“Greek Verb Paradigm” (Words by N. we’re gonna marry. Don’t have no time to play. (Repeat 4×) My homies come around saying.

Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved. But if I don’t succeed. I’m gonna need a suture. perfect and the future. middle. I’ve been spending all my time Trying to learn the Greek verb paradigm. (Repeat 4×) Tell me why of late — is it my fate To do nothing more — than conjugate? (Repeat 2×) © 2007 N. a breakdown is liable. . My brain’s gonna bust. I gotta learn Greek to understand the Bible. Four different moods and six different tenses. singular and plural — It all spins around in a great big swirl.Present and the aorist. I study so hard I’m takin’ leave of my senses! Active. passive.

It’s one you’ve never heard. . the imperfect never will go wrong. whether short or great. oh. Now we wonder. To stress duration. much more than . “How were we so blind?” Now it’s our passion To denote the kind of action. oh. The aorist tense then Is the one you ought to throw in. . Oh. . For tense in Greek means so much more than time. © 2007 N. German scholars use a special word. If in past time action was prolonged.” You may think it sounds smart. Once we thought that tense meant only time. . oh . . oh. much more than . Clayton Croy. But it’s more than we need know. . 2. It’s the tense of elongation. . oh . Tune: “For the Longest Time” by Billy Joel) Oh. For tense in Greek means so much more than time. If in past time you just want to state Simple action.“So Much More than Time” (Words: N. oh. So much more than time. Clayton Croy. . All Rights Reserved. It may strike you as strange. (2×) 1. . For tense in Greek means so much more than time. So much more than time. (2×) 3. They call aspect “Aktionsart.

oh . For tense in Greek means so much more than time. . Clayton Croy. For kind of action though. . Though it’s completed. For tense in Greek means so much more than time. And that’s not quite the same thing. Its result into the present lasts. They aren’t worth a dime. Verbal tenses are such fun in Greek. . . oh. oh. Its result is not depleted. Perfect action was done in the past. Oh. All Rights Reserved. 5. So much more than time . .4. Now it’s in fashion To denote the kind of action. (fade) © 2007 N. We must use a paraphrase to say The sense of the Koine. much more than . . . English tenses have to do with time. when you know just how you ought to speak.

So . It’s about a language that I once knew. . Clayton Croy. But suddenly they started looking strange.“Moveable Nu” (Words: N. So if you don’t want to parse like I do. I learned the endings and had them down. heh. . The only thing that I failed to do . heh) First person verbs. Tune: “Runaround Sue” by Dion and the Belmonts. 1961) Here’s my story. I thought the endings would never change. . . heh. heh. Be aware of the moveable nu. The dative plural is a problem too. (Heh. All Rights Reserved. Be aware of the moveable nu. That’s where you’re gonna have a problem. heh. Then they changed them all around. was Be aware of the moveable nu. (Heh. for the third person kind. But watch out . heh) (2×) I studied hard from the very start. (Heh. A thousand cards and a great big chart. . homba hehda hehda. heh. heh. homba hehda hehda. it’s true. Trying to figure out how the verb should end. . friend. It’s sad but true. They never seem to take the nu. . homba hehda hehda. Second person verbs are fine. heh) © 2007 N. Clayton Croy.

But 50 different forms are puttin’ me through hell. (Heh. All Rights Reserved. . I tried to learn the endings and to learn them well. And so they . Clayton Croy. . But I’ve learned this so I say to you . add a consonant. Hiatus made them discontent. heh. . . Be aware of the moveable nu.The Greeks couldn’t seem to weather Two vowels buttin’ up together. heh) fade © 2007 N. heh. . homba hehda hehda.

I parsed it as aorist. The teacher said. But I know. All of those endings are startin’ to blur. it’s those principal parts. Some people claim that there’s a teacher to blame. All Rights Reserved. Tune: “Margaritaville” by Jimmy Buffett) Learning the Koine. Searching for my — full color verb charts. Just pass me some aspirin.” Now with participles. The teacher is ramblin’. Wasted away again in Participleville. . Clayton Croy. I sure was embarrassed. Memory’s too dim. Don’t even ask why. “Sorry. A noun or verb? Well. I’m startin’ to drown. (Musical interlude) The teacher is calling And now I am stalling I don’t know the answer. I can’t say for sure. It’s clearly a noun!” © 2007 N. it’s those principal parts. Practicing each day. Wasted away again in Participleville. Can’t read a thing but that little word “kai. my memory’s scramblin’. Clayton Croy. But I know. Searching for my — full color verb charts.“Participleville” (Words: N. my headaches have tripled. Some people claim that there’s a teacher to blame. Don’t know the verb stem.

Wasted away again in Participleville. it’s those principal parts. © 2007 N. But I know. and some people claim that there’s a teacher to blame. Searching for my — full color verb charts. Yes. But I know. Clayton Croy. Some people claim that there’s a teacher to blame. . it’s those principal parts. All Rights Reserved.

the accent’s key—the accent hints that it’s a question. Pour myself a cup of ambition And crack my text. they often show interrogation.) Stanza 1 I tumble out of bed and I stumble to the kitchen.” “what.” “why”—tiv/ti can show interrogation! Or “a certain guy”—also indefinite notation! When the accent’s nigh. then it is probably a question. Talkin’ tiv and ti. All Rights Reserved. means “whom are you seeking?” For questions the accent’s front and never grave.” “eßrËn ti Üdwr” means “they found some water.“Talkin’ t¾v and t¾” (Words: Susan R.” or “why?” Chorus Talkin’ t¾v and t¾. .” When it’s indefinite. trying to ask. Well. Just two sets of endings—it follows third declension! Stanza 2 t¾v did}skei. number and placement of choruses may vary. note: This version fits Dolly Parton’s recording of the song. Garrett. Just two sets of endings—it follows third declension! “Who. also indefinite notation. used by permission. Tune: “Nine to Five.” “what. I flip through the pages and the blood starts pumpin’. In recordings by other artists. wishin’ I had a life. means “who is teaching?” t¾na zhteÀte. “who. I know that the seminary halls are a jumpin’ With folks like me.” by Dolly Parton. Clayton Croy. well the accent’s last or gone! Chorus (2×) © 2007 N. But ‡njrwpËv tiv means “a certain someone.

I have a hunch that my voice will bounce off the canyon wall with a resounding set? . using a . £qw. All Rights Reserved. Are Capricorns or Virgos more likely to spend an hour each day studying their -scope? 6. fwn©. ›kklhs¾a. plastic building blocks part of a 2. No wonder we all said 8. are those colorful. pisteÖw.” “from now on I’m 4. jŸlw.” When she fell off a cruise ship into the . For lack of a better name I call my Lhasa Apso dog. oÔ. you stick out your tongue and say . Clearly he was a Mardi . We had not seen such a beautiful sunset. not here. g«. In every column he would write against it. I want to play Desdemona’s husband. They call it the . I thought that my friend Thea was ordained. kard¾a. 9. If Tammy Faye Baker had a sister named Adele who shared her middle name. did}skw. I realized that I would have to 12. basile¾a.” When I read a selection.” he said. The men in the horse costume couldn’t make a genuine horse sound. gr}fw. .) 1. 15. she would be Baker. Arctic Sea and came out frozen.” and “The Telltale Heart. blŸpw. Ðti. . . {koÖw. “Lhasa. I told Louis Oglethorpe III to loosen up and just use a nickname and his last initial. not elsewhere. lÖw. Clayton Croy. The bomber that unleashed destruction over the land of Japan was called the Enola 10. so they faked it. lŸgw. íra © 2007 N. “Okay. lifeguard was quite a 7. beautiful smile. . 3. ginãskw. dËxa. the title character in Shakespeare’s tragedy O. j}lassa. . Can you tell me.Logomania — Lessons 1-3 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. Now I know the truth: she is 14.” “The Pit and the Pendulum. and chiseled good looks. {delf©. all the ladies thought that the new . I see that you don’t care for the author of “The Raven. The words in italics are clues. 11. The newspaper columnist was an ardent enemy of the New Orleans festival. ka¾. zw©. Because of his six-pack abs. In a remote island kingdom they do the Bossa Nova dance while wearing flowery garlands around their necks. {l©jeia. 5. ¨mŸra. 13.

I don’t know. I had no evil intent when I took a 200-year-old American flag. Beavers may like to gnaw wood. 50-yard pass right into the receiver’s hands. the Greek goddess of dawn. but a blank stare came over the student’s face and he could only say. shop.Logomania — Lessons 4-5 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. 3. g}r. Apollo. Mother Superior said. doØlov. Finally. dŸ. 7. ponhrËv. If the farmer had a soggy ditch running through his property. Ê. The slave gathered early morning moisture from the grass but then misplaced it. 15. You claim to have the answer. £rgon. It was a case of .” 6. d¾kaiov. . I wouldn’t feed clumps of bryophytic plants to beavers. This creature is also called a “needlefish. a primitive nomad came upon the site and said . oÅkov. All Rights Reserved. lËgov. bring all your computer problems to Sister Mary Blogger. Nevertheless. ‰giov. but it’s actually just the Arabic word that Arabicspeaking Christians use for God. nekrËv. When the Yiddish produce dealer saw his house overrun with romaine lettuce. {ll}. the other gods said. and keep her from the other gods. My brother knows the farmer in the dell. 2.) 1. kÖriov. necklace that she calls her 10. After the ancient Sumerian city of Ur was destroyed by the work of Elamite invaders. ‡njrwpov. 9. “My child. ! {gajËv. pråtov. The teacher asked the student to name one of the most common Greek conjunctions. She can solve anything. ? could it be called 13. They’re always talking about pel. mikrËv. oÔranËv. We call her our . j}natov. “Holy cow. The words in italics are clues. I was told that you can’t 5. he exclaimed.” “ 12. the perfect solution. £sqatov. you can’t . Apollo liked to spend time with Eos. nËmov. Although there’s no law against it.” 14. She constantly wears a crucifix on a . Some may think of this name as a foreign deity. tŸknon. lamb}nw. pistËv. 11. “ . Susie wouldn’t be caught dead without wearing religious jewelry. I am skeptical and can only say. “Dialectic” is an important word to Lutherans.” for it has an elongated body and long. 8. Clayton Croy. No amateur threw that ball. the final word. but they don’t normally . to the pawn . narrow jaws. . it was clearly a 4. actually made by Betsy Ross. kalËv. kakËv. {delfËv. The first touchdown of the game was a perfectly spiraling. jeËv. u½Ëv © 2007 N. .

l¾jov. question about it . sÖ. {g}ph. In fencing one must maintain constant awareness concerning one’s opponent while moving around. The words in italics are clues. I took my neighbor. A heavy weight on my back and the sharp point of claws convinced me the bear was probing me with . moves performed according to a strict order is called a 9. sézw. met}. e¼v. “if you’re going to work here. you’ll have to learn to make . kËsmov.” I said. I remain convinced that a trout or a bluegill is much tastier than a 2. ›gã. e¼m¾. When I asked who the Employee of the Month was.” But others immediately declared that the honor belonged to . the new employee in the bakery. choice but to 12. Her negligence endangered my life. Amy was too modest to say “I am. 14. |mart¾a.) 1. di}. aÔtËv. In the 1980’s fans of IBM computers said that DOS was the way to go. After a special event there is always a crowd of people wanting to go out for a drink with Charley. I have my favorite toaster waffle everyday for breakfast. In karate an exercise involving a series of positions and . 8. majht©v. b}llw. He is truly someone who never stranger. kat}. {pË. case of 13. but you won’t succeed in working that me! 3. A quick thrust is important. . 11. per¾. I told Ron. it was an 6. 5. A nasal consonant found almost smack in the middle of the alphabet is the letter . prËv. £rhmov.Logomania — Lessons 6-7 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. The crowd watched Tiger Woods’s drive bounce a few times and then roll straight into the hole. pŸmpw. both body and soul. Huge clumps of bryophyte plants have grown up around my romaine lettuce! It is the world’s worst . yuq© © 2007 N. ÊdËv. My friend and I used a medicine ball and dunked him with . ›n. You might use that fancy boat to lure somebody else out on the ocean. so I had no . dåron. ›k. ‡rtov. Using karate one can defend against an attack. ploÀon. mŸnw. 7. to court. Clayton Croy. I lay still as the bear strolled from the woods into our camping tent. made by the folks at 15. prof©thv. No . . All Rights Reserved. ‡ggelov. that baking was not a gift but a skill that he could learn. . Kay. Îqlov. 10. . and could only scoff and say. The dunking booth was the bread and butter of the school fair. Macintosh devotees came along . . “In fact. ›sj¾w. but always be prepared to . 4. Several tried without success to dunk the principal.

The father replied. 7. ›xous¾a. The saloon owner got fed up with tobacco stains all over the floor. Under a cloud of suspicion. . In order to avoid confusion during the service. 11. bapt¾zw. ›ge¾rw. Kay’s specialty was a peaceful dove. g¾nomai. as in the case of my friend.Logomania — Lessons 8-9 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. so I !” was surprised when someone called for an encore. eÕr¾skw.” Ray’s horse imitation was famous too. Hamor was a sinner and an evil king (see Genesis 34). The words in italics are clues. I said. 10. losing a digit. calling him . . ›xŸrqomai. Mr. 5. My good friend Robert Tidzo asked me to baptize his son. My Pa blamed me for the window that was broken by my brother. “We have less than 20 minutes to go. kr¾nw. Jr. this ritual became known as the . oßtwv. “You’ve got to uphold the !” 15. ›keÀnov. No one could mistake “a Kay coo. Plans A through N failed. “Would a quarrel between two ?” homosexual men be called 6. “Are we there yet?” asked the impatient toddler from the back seat. e¼sŸrqomai. The man himself let out a cry. oßtov. sÖn. ÕpË . You will be with Grandma and Grandpa . Since the bird always makes its characteristic sound before flying off. ‡rqw. I protested. oÔdŸ. the bird clawed the man’s hands with its sharp talons . I find that on rare occasions a man may take his wife’s name. |martwlËv. I used a shortened name for his son. Therefore he put in a spitt. {postŸllw. Ray and Kay were experts at making animal sounds. When he was killed for his evil deeds. A student in the “Human Sexuality” class raised his hand and asked. Because of the flood we have to build another house. Robert. 8. he didn’t know what he was doing. so that year the ritual was called the 12. who married Janet Risko and became 9. “Sing it a14. “Ninety Nine Bottles of Beer on the Wall” can become rather tiring after singing it for two hours. One year at the same owl-ritual just mentioned. laËv. he was struck on the foot. No one could mistake .) 1. oÞn. Hugh Smith. diŸrqomai. Astonished. {pokr¾nomai. before flying away. aÔtËv. But the people in the town insisted. an odd combination of pasta and Jello. Hugh. We’ll just chalk up the old one as 3. The incident became known as the ‡llov. “Why is it that you never blame !” 2. . The cook sends me my favorite dish. e¼r©nh. prËswpon. £rqomai. dÖnamai. The boat that succeeded in rescuing his family from the flood was known as 13. The new sheriff in town. was too timid to confront the lawbreaking gunfighters. They call it . In a strange ritual the natives would gather once a year and throw an owl up in the air. Os Lincoln. . Every day I order food delivered from an Italian restaurant. poreÖomai. When Noah began his boat-building.” 4.

5. © 2007 N. ›p¾. Leon couldn’t read a cooking book. Naturally. 11. kataba¾nw. The priest prayed with all his might. As a baby. tËte. . Sadly. Every few weeks I go up to the little town in the mountains and visit my fair-skinned friend Al Baino and his wife . ½erËn. All Rights Reserved. 13. mŸn . Above all else. but he sure could eat. But on the return trip he dropped it all while fording a stream.” hinges on the similarity of the two letters. tËpov. The apostle was sent to Rome to fetch some linguini. Éfe¾lw. {m©n. If you take a lowercase “q” and simply turn it around. daimËnion. . At single child. Nowadays I teach groups of adults. ziti. jerapeÖw. bibl¾on. mŸllw. “Watch your P’s and Q’s. They called it an Art ‡gw. when our team won. . but I prefer to trees. I have never tasted one before. Even as he voiced the “Amen. he got the nickname . When I learned how bad the pizza tasted. but last year I was a private tutor in the home of a wealthy family. !” 15. Tai party. it was . ¼doÖ. My friend likes to cut down apple trees. {pËstolov. When I got the job at the pizza parlor. so if she marries Jim Naggo. When I sneezed again and again. 10. But I had to depart !” from that job. “ 14. it becomes . I gather that she will become 12.) 1. 8. . sun}gw. {naba¾nw. {pojn¯skw. and angel hair. then I take up the oars and 3. Since he was always eating and was very messy while doing it. 7. “Hip. my friend and I cut down dead fruit trees in behalf of a large orchard company. aÂrw.” his soul struggled . ÉfjalmËv. When I run out of fuel for my outboard motor. Clayton Croy. lemon-lime soft drink Yellow. Sue is very traditional. ÕpŸr . The words in italics are clues. I said. shouting. dŸqomai. 4. I knew there was a high amount of in the air. p}lin. {pŸrqomai. Meriwether Lewis and William Clark were the ones to lead the expedition through the Louisiana Purchase about 200 years . The old saying. Hip. tŸ. we were beside ourselves. {pokte¾nw. but today I am going to drink a can of that funny-named. geometric design style popular in the 1920’s and 30’s while enjoying Tahitian drinks made of rum and fruit juices. £ti. that time I 9. We sat alongside the football field and from a distance watched the action. 6. I once received an invitation to a party where we did nothing but browse books on the sleek. par}. dŸ. oÚte. they said free pizza was one of the perks.Logomania — Lessons 10-11 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. 2. fettuccini.

” she said. œtoim}zw. To fulfill all righteousness. jaum}zw. We didn’t . ›leÖsomai. Dick: “ . 3. ±dh. did}xw. dikaiosÖnh. did}skalov. Julie Meye absolutely refused to learn about sewing. Which is the correct spelling: “skeptic” with a “k. We came to a tollbooth in Tijuana. ½m}tion. e¼. but we wouldn’t open our mouths to criticize him.” 15. was supposed to phone us with details of our next meeting. it was clear that we didn’t want to . So I said. The teacher of our religious commune. When we saw what he did to his own ear. Sue Ney. “Not now. pe¾jw. All Rights Reserved. For our generation. ÕpostrŸfw. As I confessed to my buddy. 11.” 4. I managed to persuade my roommate to make a trip to Mexico. {no¾gw. Master chef Julian Kaye cut the head off the flounder and then expertly sliced and prepared the dish that was named after him: the . Vincent van Gogh was a kooky neighbor. gnãsomai. In the midst of the battle a dazed enemy turned toward us and wandered in our direction. The day after Pearl Harbor President Roosevelt had already declared it a day that would live infamy.” or “sceptic” with a “c”? Over there in Britain they normally spell the word with a “c. ›pistrŸfw. “I will know many subjects. Ram Das. khrÖssw. “ . so it is necessary to work while we have the light of 6. l©myomai.” 7. nØn. So when I returned from an errand. “ ?” 5. In particular. Clayton Croy. 2001 will be remembered as such . Stuck on the bench.” said her friend. we didn’t understand him when he said that the toll was a 12. “Is it time for lunch yet?” asked the impatient worker. but . ›keÀ. unable to walk. 8. If the conditions were right. September 11. jrËnov. but I wonder if Rene Russo’s sister could be . “Not until 2. . Âdiov. since the toll collector had a lisp. “but not this one. “I’m tired of building pyramids. fŸrw © 2007 N. I was surprised to see another player in the same condition. I had borrowed a large sum of money from my friend. kefal©.” 13. gen©somai. {polÖw. dox}zw. 9. kr}zw.) 1. Just call me “ . Ðlov. “ . have handcuffs to detain him so we took the hoop off a barrel and used it to 14. I had to repay my debts. I wouldn’t proclaim it as fact. The Egyptian slave said. but have we ever gotten any thanks from the 10. deÀ. The night is coming soon. proseÖqomai. I will take the rest of the football season off because of my injuries.Logomania — Lessons 12-13 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. a Canadian might end a sentence by saying. Every day we bring huge blocks of stone to the ?” building site. The words in italics are clues.” but Americans use . I asked my companions. ?” .

±negka. shmeÀon. f}gomai. “I will eat at home tonight. “You may take that lowly chess piece. the Chief told me plainly. Looking at the early morning horizon. the Pendulum. ›l©luja. fall prey to a rare disease: 12. p¾ptw. prosŸrqomai. “I’ll go if 10.” so I had to back up again. μljon. eÅdon. I may .” 6. I tried to offer a book of poetry to the ruler of ancient Egypt. 8. Unfortunately he hated poetry. gŸgona. I almost always -naise. Clayton Croy. When he first told me about his position. But when they ask at the deli what I want on my sandwich. and I’ll say it again. I finally did when my date leaned over .” You will be so impressed that you’ll gush 4. {k©koa. œãraka. He cancelled his dinner plans the moment he !” looked out the window and saw the dense London vapor. poll}kiv. The words in italics are clues. 3. are fooled by 7. I like to store small fruit seeds in an old pair of shoes. Some joker switched the last word with “YES. ›g©germai.Logomania — Lessons 14-15 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. orange. eÂrhka. pŸpoija. Paula has the most luscious lips of any girl I know. The movie was so bad that I wanted to flee from the theater. “Such 5. People ran twenty six miles while drinking fermented malt and hops. p¾nw. I said. When he led me to the . oÅnov.” the same name! To avoid confusion I call this new fellow “ 13. Why it’s only . and yellow hues. They called it an . exclaiming. eÅpon. “ 15. but if I then wear those shoes by mistake. I went to the most bizarre athletic event. Often I dream of receiving a . ¥terov. © 2007 N. Îyomai. oÚpw. “Special !” 14. Not yet have you yet seen my personal autographed copies of “The Telltale Heart” and “The Pit and .” said the Prime Minister.) 1. It’s a sign that I’m not serious about dieting when I use high calorie condiments. 2. No one does bird calls as expertly as Billy Wray. All Rights Reserved. 9. tŸjnhka. feÖgw. . ›gg¾zw. prosfŸrw. In New York I knew a guy named Lou Thaw. To teach kids not to drink or use drugs I pinned the words “JUST SAY NO” on the bulletin board. I have come to know Chief Blue Egg as the best Indian guide in the Midwest. I said. Even crows . I had never seen such .” and said. This was the . £gnwka. covert agent for the military. Now I have come to Los Angeles and met someone with . Next week I will see my old high school buddy who is now a highly trained. 11.” Kaw River and I thought it was the Mississippi. I saw glorious red. I have said it before.

I appeared to be unkind to my clumsy friend.” .” © 2007 N. §nŸqjhn. Thane. 7. s}rx. ›kb}llw. we once had to deliver a boxcar full of seed to a remote town. they might have had dreams about an angry god destroying them with . There were more parents at the PTA meeting than I could name. . when he stumbled for the third time. she insists on being called “ aÆma. . and I said. jŸlhma. The ruler of the land of edible ice cream holders said. Any woman who is an ornithologist knows that another word for “albatross” is 3. The word is that ever since mother took up sunbathing. but when night fell. ±qjhn. On Halloween night I became cruel and began to pelt Thane with eggs. . I said.” was called “ 14. ›bl©jhn. såma. {pest}lhn. pneØma. nÖx. If your old ma has a mean spirit about her. then you might want a 11.” 5. Ó«ma. I urged my mother to take needle and thread and fix the body of the coat. “You’ll like the taste of 10. “Take the !” 13. a colorful. eÕrŸjhn. §gŸrjhn. Knowing that we needed to use a track that branched off the mainline. I saw a movie about two courageous. ›gr}fhn. !” “You’re such an 4. “Tomorrow morning I’m going to . {n©r. The words in italics are clues. påv. Înoma. I was led to believe that I got away with the prank. but Thane got back at me by wrestling me to the ground. 6. ›gen©jhn. The ancient Greeks didn’t have Weapons of Mass Destruction.” . looked silly on the father who won it.” !” . ‡rqwn.” . Clayton Croy. In this day and age a lot of people have to rent. I said. The door prize. My mother noticed the blood on my face when I ran inside the house and said. but because of my careful financial planning 8. I’m just .Logomania — Lessons 16-17 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. After a sound thrashing I said. a¼ãn. When the police stopped me and asked what I was doing. “ 9. It and Louise. but it would have looked stunning 15.) 1. When Mom was a railroad engineer. “ 12. stËma. feathery . ¥wv. spŸrma. Every time the love-struck young woman sees her man she feels like she’s walking 2. All Rights Reserved. self-respecting Greek women with the will to be treated fairly. ›gnãsjhn. hat. saying. “Officers. gun©. . ëfjhn. ›l©mfjhn.

Being a very possessive person. Mr. log¾zomai.Logomania — Lessons 18-19 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page.000 pounds. but whether you 4. “Here’s your exam. I bought a dress for my mother. Parko declared confidently. If your father kept a mixture of oxygen and nitrogen in a clay container. what do I 5. {sp}zomai. everything that Jim sees. The cruelly persecuted Jews wept from one Sabbath to the next. . The tiny Native American newborn was just over a foot long. but the fabric is so flimsy I’m afraid that it 2. But when I first came to this land. Sue Naggo. When I go golfing. eÔaggel¾zomai. 9. diãkw. boÖlomai. Someone at the synagogue said that my friend.” The teacher corrected him. My hand was injured at work. . “I can come to the party. “These are my possessions and they exist for my benefit. Know the mathematical improbability. I take along a world-famous rock star who is an alumnus of the “Standard Score Golf School. or my name isn’t . m©. I exclaimed. The words in italics are clues. was a lesbian. I cry out.” I just call him . “ !” 11. he thinks he has to 10.” 13. he might call it . ën. One might say that they were able to 14. parag¾nomai. the question is not whether you can. heh. kaj¾zw. Clayton Croy. You earned a 7. Katherine Mai had to sit and think for a while before deciding to use the shortened name 3. ›rg}zomai. 6. “ 12. . but now I get a few days off so. pat©r. I had never heard this before. but her parents beamed with pride at their new pa. poÖv. All Rights Reserved. k}jhmai. I work in the land of Ur and have become accustomed to their polytheism. When I arrive at the eighteenth hole of the golf course and achieve a standard score for the eighteenth time in a row. m©thr. so I posed a question back to the person: “Are you sure of that? ?” |mart}nw.) 1. Did the teacher persecute the widow of John Lennon when he gave her a marginal grade on the final ”? exam and said. . paralamb}nw. The combined weight of their tears . was 2. sunagwg©. I was startled by their many deities and said. My parents said it was okay. qe¾r. “ !” 8.” “Unless your legs are broken. The student said. ? . s}bbaton. I greeted the snake handlers and found that they were taking bets on how long I could survive with a !” deadly Egyptian cobra. © 2007 N. Õp}rqw. 15.

. Forgive me. . . I use a short version of my first name: 8. fobŸomai. fulak©. I had to make known that as the cousin of the accused. “I refer to myself using my first initial and last name: 7. but recklessness and pride led to his death. Madeline Owtoo said. kt¾zw. -e. jÖra. 14. {koloujŸw. Bob wanted to fix things around the house by himself so he went to the hardware store and bought a number of books. but I was shocked to learn that automobiles had Freudian lower instincts. Jill Teo was my date. every able body. Jill Pateo likes to walk around the neighborhood with her husband. Tourists coming to see the famous door in Wittenberg. 13. “To catch the bank robbers. so naturally I !” blurted out. eÔaggŸlion. whose name is 6. parakalŸw. |gi}zw. That is the moral of the story of I. a¼tŸw. gnwr¾zw. Êr}w. ship. “You have 15. zhtŸw. 11. you might say. poiŸw. I {gap}w. When I sailed to America in the 18th century. “we will deputize all the men in town. the manager yelled at him.” . Everyday a person ought 3.” . “ 9. When the judge told me that I should reveal if I knew any of the defendants in the murder trial of Tony Ridzo. have to take a right turn off the main -fare through town. Germany. so I felt that I should ask the jerk in the bar to leave after he spent 30 minutes straight trying to . lalŸw. qar¾zomai. All Rights Reserved. peripatŸw. genn}w. “I was able to 2. tuflËv. “Suit yourself. At any time I might have . seautoØ. 12. If you deceived your prison cellmate named Kay. z}w. staurËw. When baseball star “Spitball” Rahoe refused to fulfill his contract and get on the field.” That’s right. Spanish .” . © 2007 N. ›mautoØ. we’re going to form a 4. I had to bring a female sheep aboard the large. . The words in italics are clues. p‚v.) 1. of course. Madeline’s brother Seth said. Clayton Croy.” the sheriff said.Logomania — Lessons 20-21 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. I’m not blind to the need for good oral hygiene. It was good news when they told me that I was permitted to have a 10. As the personal assistant to Senator Lou Theo I had to follow him constantly. kalŸw. The son of Daedalus could fly with grace using artificial wings. œautoØ. q}riv. plhrËw. “ !” 5.” to hand him the cell phone and say.

fåv. My cat won’t sow any wild oats now. “Oops! I boo-boo!” 12. the guy who reads the company water meter. but be careful whenever you travel toward the sun because its Venus. When my friend Fay asked me to a seasonal event in New Orleans. one might say. All Rights Reserved. pesoØmai. Ðte. 4. “ 11. her friends said to her. Our village insists on thorough hair grooming. thrŸw. ¨mŸterov. I can’t find a fern. When Eros visited our farm and ran into a stack of alfalfa bales. enters the building by his own special entrance. 14. “Your encounter could be described . ÕmŸterov. Clayton Croy. graf©. Üdwr. Experts say humans need one another. he realized his mistake and said. mhdŸ. In fact. mhkŸti. 3. It’s cold on Mars. {paggŸllw.) 1. “Use that hyphenated name no longer!” Now she’s just . Ðpou. ›ntol©. 13. I took her to that street that has so many veterinary clinics that specialize in neutering that they call it . the sauce on this taco is so spicy it can’t be mine.Logomania — Lessons 22-23 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. When May Ketty-Jones divorced. 8. spe¾rw.” in one Greek word: 10. proskunŸw. ›}n. 9. . Ðtan. There was no light in the room so I called to the shadowy figures. you might use the reddish brown dye that comes from the plant. {ll©lwn. ?” .” {gor}zw. Eros. the rest of the team said. âv. Ðpwv. kãmh. we call it the . everyone is required to hundred strokes. pØr. Before going out in public. My botany project requires a fern or a moss.” 5. My friend. 7. The words in italics are clues. . so I’ll have to use 2. When the Greek student used this negative and not oÔdŸ with an indicative verb. I told them. ›mËv. so it’s best not to be a hermit and live . “Are you friends or . I responded in writing: “I will gladly accompany you to the Mardi . sËv. This must be your 6. dokŸw. 15.” © 2007 N. Hugh. ‡n. Ãna. ¥kastov. “ the race. In order to dye your hair or get a temporary tattoo. Each and every member of a relay team must put forth an effort. One day Hugh ran into the Greek god of Love. So when Heck Ledbetter dogged it and we came in last. oÔkŸti.

{gaphtËv. That radiant young woman lost her glow when her tongue became painfully infected. Thus he acquired the nickname.Logomania — Lessons 24-25 (Using the options given at the bottom of the page. parabol©. As a young child Dionne ate so many fruit-filled tarts that she was nicknamed 13. prË. When she escaped her pen and trampled several villagers. kr¾siv. {rq©. gŸnov. A sport in which you throw a small aquarium fish is stupid and cruel. and critical decisions. {sjen©v. All Rights Reserved. In the beginning of refractive eye surgery doctors performed something called radial keratotomy. íste © 2007 N. {rqiereÖv. basileÖv. he usually asks . . “That’s not . . dÖnamiv. No wonder it is beloved by so few. Perot’s family recognized the clone as a fake and said. 10. block party. keleÖw. . often referred to by its initials: 12. 5. It is by no . Or at least that’s what they . The expert tennis player from the capital of Texas didn’t know what a weak serve was. Clayton Croy. we decided to 14. Nye married. It is no more than . The king had a favorite cow named Bossy. The Daytona 500 is serious business with full stadiums. It is true that Joe Thace never gets less than perfect grades on his report card. So that we might meet more of our neighbors. 15. the . . 11. {lhj©v. . Îrov. He calls it the . When Grampa Toose dictates a letter and needs a scribe. That’s why we all call .) 1. grammateÖv. the incident became known as the disaster. big sponsors. pl©rhv. ½ereÖv. marturŸw. but it has fully healed and again she lot. identify the Greek word from the italicized clues. The powers that be declare that this is the end of the game. but any more than that is simply 2. jewrŸw. his wife took his name because she wanted to be 3. paid¾on. It is lawful to use one or two teabags per cup. he openly and loudly voices his disapproval by making a sibilant sound. eÅnai. Ross Perot was cloned by a mad scientist who lived on a mountain. £xesti. means a 8. pËliv. £jnov. him 7. 9. 4. glåssa.” 6. p¾stiv. Whenever Chris thinks the umpire has made a bad judgment. tŸlov. When Mr. sof¾a.

Eos. My thinking changed recently when I 14. Ðstiv. Õp}gw. he says. metanoŸw. Tia finally said. ïde © 2007 N. . oÞv. jug}thr. As great as that condiment tastes. you may only use these two letters: . I repent of my bias against the Oeo tribe. ?” row of beans. tiv. 4. Exasperated. Now Zeus can boast.) 1. ›leŸw. 11. I worked here in the garden. the Greek goddess of dawn. husky fellow who had the nickname 3. I can’t believe it makes you laugh and so is called . The words in italics are clues.” 15. two cockney blokes. 9. Peering over the fence and seeing a large swine. don’t write outside the lines! And remember.” {grËv. £xw. Whenever he answers a question in the . so she pulled in and . “Where are you. Fortunately there was a service station en route. Ðsov. After crossing the desert sands. poØ. “Go away to the island town of Pago Pago. Ðv. Teo liked to grab bugs and hold them in Tia’s face. was bought by Zeus to be his eternal slave.” 13. wondered what animal their neighbor kept in his field. karpËv. oÅda. Whoever would rob a restaurant might try to take hostage a hostess. a¼ãniov.” affirmative but is also exasperated. tolero. qa¾rw. kratŸw. Christopher Robin and Piglet called out to their friend. Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved. “ ‘e’s got an . I pulled some weeds and I . Would such a hostage hostess be ? called a 12. I know a fellow who is Russian but speaks some Yiddish.” He lived there for a few years and now he has a new nickname: . Randy and Ross. Your pranks are really starting to stick in my .Logomania — Lessons 26-27 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. “ 7. . I told my friend Hugh. t¾v. When you play tic-tac-toe. “ . I rejoice to see the capital of Egypt: 2. ›perwt}w. Randy exclaimed. ›rwt}w. The middle son on the TV show Bonanza was a big. “Stop it. kajãv. ›lp¾v.” 8. The Mexican sheriff said. 6. 5. 10. “My hope is that we can catch the gunman known as “ . Tia and Teo were siblings. My daughter Thoo had a nearly flat tire while driving but still made it home.

If you duplicated yourself. When I saw her today. Clayton Croy. Dake was able to show the judge that he could not serve as a juror in my trial. “That is one big pile of alfalfa! Is that what you call a -tack?” 9. de¾knumi. All Rights Reserved. {pod¾dwmi. but let no one say that during his first year of flying he has . £tov. 13. retired from film and spent her remaining years perfecting a seasoned. Combat pilots must down five enemy planes to achieve the level of “ace. I felt great joy when I finished martial arts school and received a black belt in . parad¾dwmi. . {f¾hmi. The city boy said. In the Mt. 12. smoked beef sandwich that she called the -trami. That fellow was always a great actor. it took much effort and many tugs to get his 2. If your clone decided to betray you by created a second clone. It’s -up. but now his career has taken off and he’s a -tar. My friend Lou Mee is a great lover of nature. If I were to destroy all the trees growing in my yard. Olympus version of “Survivor” the elder gods decided that young Eros should be booted off the mountain. The words in italics are clues. movie star of the 30’s and 40’s. 11. would you give it the name 6. such amazement before. would the two of them together be referred to as a ? 7. loipËv. Amy drove up to the toll booth at the toll bridge. Voting with electronic buttons. 4. 5. presbÖterov. No one’s serve had ever evoked in the history of tennis. “ ’Tis Susie!” She responded in like manner. Myrna Loy. but first you must pay . would certainly 10.” Some have achieved this in two years. oÔde¾v. since as my former college roommate. mŸgav. eÔjÖv. -te. t¾jhmi. it was obvious that .Logomania — Lessons 28-29 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. The attendant said. mhde¾v.) 1. My friend Susie has had a lisp ever since she got braces put on her teeth. eÆv. prost¾jhmi. all they had to do was . When the wolf got caught in the trap. Would it cost less to go to Europe this year or next? I don’t know. qar}. I called out.” 8. polÖv. “ . 15. qrËnov ? © 2007 N. ›pit¾jhmi. {pËllumi. “I will gladly permit you to cross over the bridge. making a perfect clone. Mr. 3. d¾dwmi. Everyone oohed and aahed at the tennis player’s unreturned serve. it . It was the most 14. My name is Amy.

›paggel¾a. fhm¾. assembling it himself on his sewing machine. Ãsthmi. Seymour Cray. ›piginãskw. kre¾sswn.” 15. but the police caught up with her and performed what you might call a -t.” but you probably want a better grade than that. swthr¾a. I had never seen a greater crowd of housekeepers and hotel domestics. fanerËw. it was gone without a . would he be afflicted with -talgia? 14. tŸssarev.Logomania — Lessons 30-32 (Answer the questions using the Greek words at the bottom of the page. mËnov. dexiËv. I would like to hear more music. The Canadian high school teacher told me. toioØtov. moment or two longer. Let the band 11. “I could give you a grade of “B” or “C. My two favorite songwriters are Jeff Barry and Ellie Greenwich. He just didn’t know cards. If famous cellist Yo-Yo Ma could only think wistfully and sentimentally for days gone by. Tess shoplifted four expensive items from the store. entered the 9. ‡qri. But blessed are those who do not 12. how to shuffle a 6. When she reached for it again. new shopping center. I absolutely had to get to the time. kairËv. ¼squrËv. No wonder her friends call her . The words in italics are clues. dÖo. 13. I say. 4. All Rights Reserved. In 1987 Costa Rican President Oscar Arias won the Nobel Peace Prize. Clayton Croy. . 7. “Don’t stop now. singin’ “ diddy diddy dum diddy doo. It is such a dangerous practice to throw real hand grenades when training. inventor of the Cray supercomputer. 5. © 2007 N. fËbov. dãdeka. In this way it’s only a . ›nãpion. We recommend that you use fake.) 1. mak}riov. plastic ones. dŸka. “Your salvation doesn’t depend on your immediate departure. me¾zwn. She played the villain so compellingly that at the climax of the scene the audience stood and . Woe to those who would ridicule this great man of peace.” {n¾sthmi. ple¾wn. Somehow I had apparently . m‚llon. The woman set her purse down in the busy department store and looked away for three seconds. mŸsov. who wrote the lyrics. Amy was a master on the stage. 3. £mprosjen. ±. A scandal will never arise in Amy’s life because Amy has impeccable integrity and always tells the truth. 2. I gave the car more gas. qre¾a. 8. . Ðmoiov. The fingers of the clumsy casino dealer slipped and cards went in ten directions. I would risk a speeding ticket rather than be late to the grand opening of the big. The hostess said. devised a better dustcover for his computer. pŸnte. diË. œpt}. ?” 10. oÔq¾. treÀv. “There she was just a-walkin’ down the street. One might say the dustcover was !” .

“Uncle Demetrios got a chubby belly from eating too much baklava. B. labored breathing C. 7. When a Greek word is to be pronounced with an “h” sound. Active. “Alexander was warming himself by the fire. Which of the following illustrates the Greek middle? A. 3. falsetto. especially with manic-depressive verbs. C. C. Consult the expert: Martha Stewartopoulos. Soprano. “The Athenian referendum was decided by voters who were neither very liberal nor very conservative. Noun accent is recessive or persistent. The mood of a verb A. Basket case C. shrill D.” D. D. A verb may have which of the following voices? A. The hoagie sandwich was tasty. Loud. B. D. Nominative case 5. You need a noun that can function as the subject of a sentence.” B. phonetic emphysema D. Clayton Croy. middle. . or take a wild guess. C. What is the rule for accenting Greek nouns? A. All Rights Reserved. bass B. Greek exasperation E. varies dramatically. Gravelly. The German U-boat was swift and silent.” C. Add highlights to the vowels and leave the consonants subtly understated. as a fact. Which of the following best describes your need? A. tenor. Hopeless case B.g. a possibility. “A gyro sandwich consists of a pita pocket filled with lamb and beef. etc. B. 6. a wish. Head case D.. D. . alto. depends on whether its context is a happy one. e. smoky. a special mark is added known as A. passive 4. . rough breathing 2. 1. tells you how the action is conceived by the speaker. Try using a little parsley or mint garnish. The replacement teacher was enthusiastic. heavy breathing B. tells you when it may be best to leave the verb alone. tells you when the verb is off its medication.” © 2007 N. Which of the following is an example of a “substantive” adjective? A. The wise will perceive the theme in the above choices.Pointless Quiz — Lessons 1-14 Objectionable Questions: Carefully choose the best answer . medium. E. soft C.

lower one end of the noun.” you would A. the fact that the stem is often shorter than the present tense stem. C. 13. easy for students to identify with since students are also imperfect and tense. 14. “Thanks. B. who books all your airline flights. the complex interplay of contingent. human will. who negotiates your professional sports contracts. the aorist once had a meaning but it got lost in translation. .” we mean that A. irrational forces. C. the aorist tense affirms action without describing its nature or duration. D. the aorist suffers from meaning deprivation and is therefore semantically challenged. In Greek if you wanted to say “I am being loosened. the verb’s small cranial capacity. 9. When we say that the aorist tense is “undefined. is the title of a horror movie set in a grammar school. D. 15. © 2007 N. B. who got you a bit part in a movie. Principal parts A. the presence of gills instead of morphemes. To decline a Greek noun you would A. C. say. I have quite enough nouns in my life right now. an all-powerful secretary in the basement of a government building in Athens. B. your cousin Aristotle. 12. C. The Greek imperfect tense is A. D. two teenage computer geeks in Corinth who have hacked into the space-time continuum. at peace with itself since it let go of its perfectionism. are to Greek students what avalanches are to skiers. B. are the basic inflected forms of a verb from which all other forms are derived. B. In Greek a “personal agent” would be A. say lÖomai. 10.” C. D. A second aorist stem often reflects a primitive form of the verb. give its various grammatical case forms in a prescribed order. say. ongoing action. D. Clayton Croy. D.8. B. your uncle Socrates. first tell everyone to stand back at a safe distance. the first volume of our multi-volume dictionary is missing. C. “No thank you.” D. is the subtitle of a financial investment guide entitled “When the Stock Market Goes Bad. the addition of a sigma to a Greek verb stem.” C. All Rights Reserved. 11. The Greek future is formed by A. B. your good friend Kazantzakis. expressed by the preposition ÕpË followed by the genitive case. suppress the urge and remain quiet. and divine providence. B. be sure to re-tighten yourself afterward. a way to depict past. D. the discovery of second aorist forms in ancient cave paintings. but a more substantive person has already invited me to another context. chronically behind and has trouble completing things. C. This is evident in A.

1970’s disco action B. 6. The Greek pluperfect tense A. D. District attorney legal action E. “It is ridden.Pointless Quiz — Lessons 15-20 Objectionable Questions: Carefully choose the best answer . Swiss watch precision action C. . or take a wild guess. 7. . Arnold Schwarzenegger box office action D. A. it always has to be more perfect than everybody else! D. By the lengthening of the vowel or diphthong. By basic cell division or mitosis. “It is wriggling. “It is written. How does a verb beginning with a vowel or diphthong undergo reduplication? A. 5. The Greek word jn¯skw A. . somebody took the iota out of a ka¾. is rare enough that its forms need not be learned by people who have a life. . the word might very well be perfect. . . is known only by people who have a sixth sense about these things. © 2007 N.” 4. the word belonged to your old fraternity — Kappa Alpha. 2.” C. is onomatopoeic and means “I sneeze.” B. Completed action with a continuing effect. better not be on the exam. 3. Clayton Croy. With the assistance of a fertility specialist. 1. refers to what I do on most Greek tests. The sixth principal part of a Greek verb A. B. D. you would immediately know .” C. you were toast because you didn’t recognize it. All Rights Reserved. normally occurs in the compound form {pojn¯skw D. C. E. If you saw a “ka” in a Greek word. The perfect tense in Greek refers to what kind of action? A.” D. With a Xerox machine like any other verb. B. B. normally wasn’t among the words I bothered to learn. B. should chill out. the word at best was mediocre. D. is at least two more than a verb really ought to have. C. C. B. is the aorist passive indicative. should be deleted from the Greek New Testament. is yet to be discovered by archaeologists. C. A. The Greek word gŸgraptai might be translated . “I need Ritalin. .

All Rights Reserved. you could say lujhsËmeja. 11. “This is only a test!” D. when the smart guy/girl sitting next to me has “aorist passive” written over it. C. substantive. E. win. “verbal adjective. Participle-induced tension is a good way to destroy your temporal lobes. entry level and mid-management B. B. What is the relationship between tense and time in the participle? A. 14.” C.” A. Tense does not pertain to time in the participle. 9. B. “Drop/Add Omen. B. they simply didn’t try out for first aorist. they have the word “second” rather than “first” in their name. B. C. C.8. E. “parasitic participles. generally avoided in polite company. when I have guessed every other combination and the teacher is still saying. 15. D. a great name for a folk music ensemble. The Third Declension is A. A brief. “periodontal participles.” © 2007 N. basically unnecessary for a full and meaningful life. and predicative D. E. my customized Ouija Board specially adapted for Greek class. What positions may participles appear in? A. Second aorist passives differ from first aorist passives in that A. place. they lack the j of the jh tense suffix. “Homer’s Revenge. or show. The major indicator of an aorist passive Greek verb is A. It is high time we get rid of tense in the participle.” C. and major drawback C. say “we will be loosened” since your friend doesn’t know Greek.” D. D. B. “Plato’s Payback. Constructions that combine a participle with a form of the verb e¼m¾ are called A. their GPA (Greek Point Average) was below 3. a fearful omen of participial woes to come. Clayton Croy. “paranormal participles. “we will be loosened. We spent too much time talking about tense in the participle.” B.” 13. since participles are nontemporal. 10. If you wanted to say to a friend of yours. be sure your friend knows that you are taking Greek.0.” D. attributive. . C. a varied and complex group of Greek nouns. 12. accurate description of a Greek participle would be A. first assure your friend. the jh tense suffix. “Try again. D. “periphrastic participles. they have lower self-esteem.” E. D. I am much too tense to think about time in the participle. quarterback. B. halfback. you need a life outside Greek class.” C.

A verb giving birth to a morpheme. unlike me. especially for nasal liquids. large. all of the above. A. C. 5. care about such things. C.” which is equally intelligible as “C” to most people. D. “all’s well that ends well. la. .” 4. “all. If you wanted to say “one another” or “each other. 6. B. when they are not small. Clayton Croy. C. when a doctor hits your knee with a little rubber hammer. . When it comes to contraction. when they use daily fiber therapy. C. la. Get real! Only lÖw is regular. . The future of liquid verbs is A. you are kidding yourself. C. and can’t even think about it. .Pointless Quiz — Lessons 21-32 Objectionable Questions: Carefully choose the best answer . D. B.” C. 3. when they come under government regulations. or take a wild guess.” D. clear and smooth. A verb left outside on a cold night in February. All Rights Reserved. {ll©louv. Who’s stopping you? B. . {ll©loiv. in the second through sixth principal parts. 1. say “la. epsilon. A. every. say “{ll©lwn. only when other pronouns are out of stock or no longer in print. or omicron. 2. go ahead and do so. I don’t. “all things to all people.” you would A. “all for one and one for all. when a subject acts upon itself as in “If you think Greek is easy. E. or extra large. Give an example of a Greek verb that would undergo contraction. D. formed like a contract verb by the attachment of an epsilon to the stem. B. la. . Contract verbs are usually regular . la. la. B.” E. A verb whose stem ends in alpha. the object of intense speculation on Wall Street. E. won’t.” B. by people who.” D. D. © 2007 N. known only to God since no human being can see the future. A verb that had double-crossed a mafia crime family. . whole. use just about any other language than Greek. A reflexive pronoun is used A. The Greek adjective “p‚v” means A. .

get back on your medication immediately. C. .” D. D. but you may qualify as Cretan of the Month. in the spirit of the great Greek prohibitionist. “Horton Exhorts a Who. Carrie Nationopoulos. The case of the subject of an infinitive A. If you wanted to express doubt. All of the above. 12. volition.7. A. D. rather low on my list of academic priorities. will be decided later this year by the Supreme Court of Greek Grammar. E. you may NOT have a third helping of baklava!” C. How is a prohibition expressed in Greek? A. “to be” or “not to be. B. probably useful in situations that I will never encounter. is accusative. B. you would go on to the next question. “Oedipus emphatically negated his father. 11. the Dr. using a negative particle. If the teacher had paid me to learn Greek. yabba-deeba-dabba. B. and impressive words. “You will NEVER be a Rhodes scholar. use large. in the sequel. C. I would have been more motivated. you would A. E. E. intention. Mama said. D. Give an example of emphatic negation in Greek. D. Clayton Croy. may be overturned if enough students file appeals. C. Give an example of a condition contrary to fact. firmly. esoteric.” I can’t remember which.” C. B. which is sorta like an electron only bigger. make an appointment with a psychotherapist. 9. loudly. horticulturalists. use the subjunctive mood. pretty much the same group as “C. as far as I’m concerned. The present infinitive of e¼m¾ is A. All Rights Reserved. C.” esp. yabba-dabba-deeba-dabba-doo. and desire. eÅnai. B. C. “No. and preferably with a scowl. people who have lost touch with reality and the indicative mood.” B. by m© and the present imperative or m© and the aorist subjunctive. The hortatory subjunctive is used by A. Any subjunctive verb preceded by the double negative oÔ m©.”) 10. D. D. lie still until the urge went away. If I were a rich man. © 2007 N. 8. was the title of an episode of Perry Mason that was (thankfully) never aired. is a basket case. B. If you had any sense. A. 13. E. Seuss character in “Horton Hears a Who. lying in a heap of words that fell off the edge of my learning curve. If I had studied Greek any harder. people with a strong desire to go about issuing exhortations in the first person plural (in other words. my brain would have exploded.

“ditto. D.14. B. and diapa-wipe. This occurs when too much static electricity builds up in a relative pronoun. Clayton Croy. who was quite a “looker” in her day. and harpo. Most therapists think “attraction of the relative” is abnormal and unhealthy. dŸdwka. B. C. and rama-lama-ding-dong. dead-am-I. 15. The principal parts of d¾dwmi are A. ditty-bop.” E. This occurs when an accusative relative pronoun is attracted to a genitive or dative antecedent. “doo-bop. All Rights Reserved. This refers to your Auntie Cedent. “whoopdi-doo. £dwka. Explain the phenomenon: “attraction of the relative. do-si-do.” © 2007 N. dorko. dãsw. E.” D. and ›dËjhn. . Greek words. and therefore outside the scope of my knowledge. “d¾dwmi.” C. dŸdomai. Beats me! I always thought relative pronouns were rather homely. groucho.” A.

and these same students think that “Danker” refers to something that is “colder and damper” than something else. I am Hans. They think that “Bauer” refers to someone who flexes from the waist (make bowing motion). . . And their theology has no curvature. but there are still some students who are not doing original language exegesis! All they can do is read their sissy boy English translations and flabby devotional commentaries and then they think that they understand the Bible. big brother. . This incredible muscular development comes from years of rigorous exegetical exercises. they don’t know a lexicon from a hexagon. it is hard to believe. They are doing girlie-man exegesis. big brother. . If you asked them to clarify the nuances of the Greek verb tenses or to explain the significance of a textual variant. So we have come here to correct that deficiency.) Franz: Ja. if they want to see some flexing motion. Their exegesis is underdeveloped. . let them see this! (Hans and Franz flex. because . You are seeing us in actual size. Hans: That is right. Hans: Right you are. Franz: Ja. . Hans: Well. and who do they think they are kidding? Their interpretation lacks proper tone and fitness. they would look at you like you were from another planet or something! Franz: Ja. exegetically! Hans: Franz. All Rights Reserved. Franz: And I am Franz. that is right . But not everyone is committed to a strict regimen of exegetical workouts. These flabby exegetes think that they can provide people with spiritual nourishment by recycling wimpy interpretations taken off the Internet! Well. Franz: That is true. In Unison: And we are here to pump (clap) you up . . © 2007 N. Clayton Croy.Hans and Franz Skit Hans: You do not need to adjust your glasses. little brother. Hans: Ja.

but the claim that we don’t know about flexibility is absurd. that it needs to be more flexible! Hans: Ja. Hans. they need an exegetical method with the kind of rigor and discipline that we practice every day! Hans: Precisely! Instead of their sissy boy sermonizing. One of my favorite workouts is to take all ten volumes of Kittel’s Theological Dictionary of the New Testament and strap them together with duct tape. . Hans: Ja. Franz: That is a great tip. Right. but don’t try to do that with the CD-ROM version of Kittel. students! Hear me now and believe me later . All Rights Reserved. Franz: You know. You may want to start using © 2007 N. . .) Franz: Hans. Then I bench press them 50 times every night before going to bed. let them take a look at this! (Hans and Franz flex. some people think that the exegetical method that we teach is too rigid. It improves muscle tone. You do not get the same effect! How about you. Hans. Clayton Croy. Hans: That is a good idea. the oil also makes my chest hair shiny! And my fans like that! By the way. you need to add some serious pumpitude to your Bible study! Franz: That is right.listen up. and makes it easier to slip in and out of the study carrel. they should strive for the strength and firmness of the Hans and Franz method. I always get properly oiled down. Hans. I have been meaning to talk to you about your hair. perhaps you could share with the people here today one of your favorite exegetical workouts. big brother. prevents injury. Hans. Franz? If they want to see some flexibility. Hans: A wonderful tip for the students. Franz! Franz: Ja. before I do any heavy exegetical lifting. Franz? What secret tip can you share with us for maintaining the serious pumpitude that you have? Franz: Well.

that is all for today! Remember. Franz.) Well. I am Hans! Franz: And I am Franz. exegetically! © 2007 N. All Rights Reserved. but if the folks here really want to see some shoulder flex.Head & Shoulders again. In Unison: And we are here to pump (clap) you up . . . . they should see this! (Hans and Franz flex. Hans: Thanks for the tip. Clayton Croy. I can see a few flecks on your shoulders. I think your dandruff problem is coming back.

Clayton Croy. references to standard works on grammar. Answer Keys to Student Exercises Quick Quizzes Periodic Exercises Logomania Additional Exercises: K}rmen S~n Di©gw A Greek Story The Perfect Tense Uses of Present Participles Uses of Aorist Participles Nuances of Adverbial Participles “Any” and “Who” (Lesson 7) (Lesson 14) (Lesson 15) (Lesson 18) (Lesson 19) (Lesson 20) (Lesson 27) © 2007 N.Resources for Teachers Teacher’s Guide The Teacher’s Guide is designed to supplement the Primer by providing more detailed discussion. . and answers to the “Practice and Review” and “English to Greek” exercises. All Rights Reserved.

. U. Eerdmans Publishing Company Grand Rapids.K.Teacher’s Guide to A PRIMER OF BIBLICAL GREEK N. Michigan / Cambridge. CLAYTON CROY William B.

Copyright © 2007.E. Michigan 49505 / P. Box 163.K. 2 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . Clayton Croy All rights reserved Published in PDF format 2007. 2140 Oak Industrial Drive N.O. Grand Rapids. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co. Cambridge CB3 9PU U. B. Wm.. 2011 by Wm. 2011 N.eerdmans. Eerdmans Publishing Co.

Debrunner. Liddell and R. LSJ = H. Greek Grammar. Jones and R. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. A Greek-English Lexicon. Translated and edited by Robert W.) BDAG = Bauer. Smyth = Herbert W. Smyth. McKenzie. 3rd ed. Grand Rapids: Zondervan. Walter. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 3 . 1961. Wallace = Daniel B. it is not intended as a student workbook. G. 9th ed. Abbreviations Used in the Teacher’s Guide (A caveat: Smyth’s Greek Grammar is the most detailed grammar of Classical Greek in This grammar is available online at Perseus. BDF = F. with a supplement. Smyth is a treasure trove of information. Paragraph numbers in the Guide correspond to paragraphs in A Primer of Biblical Greek.Introduction This material is written for the teacher. Oxford: Clarendon. but it must be used with care by students of biblical Greek. Wallace. A Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the Light of Historical Research. A Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature. 1919. that biblical Greek often varies from Classical in its forms and syntax. Revised and edited by Frederick William Danker. references to standard works on grammar. Blass and A. Revised and augmented by H. T. It must be borne in mind. not exhaustive treatment. I have tried to keep the text relatively free of detailed. Funk. Robertson = A. A Greek Grammar of the New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature. however. Scott. 1956. Cambridge: Harvard University under the title A Greek Grammar for Colleges. Greek Grammar beyond the Basics. The 1940 edition is available online in searchable form at Perseus. Robertson. London: Hodder & Stoughton. Although it may be of use to students. 2000. 1968. 3rd ed. S. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. The material in this Teacher’s Guide is designed to supplement the text by providing more detailed discussion.. technical explanations. BDF and Robertson are generally helpful in identifying the differences between Classical and Koine. 1997. and answers to the “Practice and Review” and “English to Greek” exercises. An elementary language text should aim for simplicity and succinctness. ed.

Smyth (§23) has a judicious bit of advice: “Our current pronunciation of Ancient Greek is only in part even approximately correct for the period from the death of Pericles (429 B. etc. See BDAG. five letters that roughly correspond to English “i-n” (Greek obviously lacking “j”). p.Lesson 1 1. as a number. 30-31. See LSJ. z. theta). j. 22:13. and Sturtevant (cited below). The instructor should emphasize convention and approximation rather than strict phonetic and historical accuracy. which seems to be preferred by most teachers of biblical Greek. came after pi.” (4) Short and long iota have qualitatively different pronunciations according to some biblical Greek textbooks.” (3) For theta. six letters corresponding roughly to the English sequence “ou” (Greek lacking “q”). 752. one could use the “sd” in “wisdom.. is not always attainable. p. but others make no such distinction. omega. three rhyming letters (phi. Remarks on Pronunciation On pronunciation. In any case. 1562. See LSJ. The Greek Alphabet In pre-Classical Greek (also later in some dialects) there were more than 24 letters.” Digamma did not survive in Ionic and Attic Greek as a letter or sound. See Smyth §26. But ignorance of the exact pronunciation. 2. (1) Gamma has two possible sounds. note that the “th” sound is not voiced: “thistle. 21:6. In the Hellenistic period. Two other obsolete letters. The logic of the arrangement is as follows: five letters that roughly correspond to the English sequence “a-e” (gamma substituting for “c”).” Dogmatism is thus out of place. The peculiarities of conventional pronunciation are as follows. e.) to that of Demosthenes (322). it is certainly erroneous for that period.e. The vertical arrangement of the alphabet in the textbook is designed to facilitate learning. i. pp. If one opts for the less conventional “zd” pronunciation. as Smyth indicates. The latter are probably correct. See Smyth §24. (2) In the classical period zeta was probably pronounced “zd” rather than the more conventional “dz. the letter “x”.” Several words or expressions with “ds” also illustrate the sound: sudsy. f. 424. LSJ. occurs once in a textual variant (Rev 13:18). if not impossible. q. which.” not “this.C. as well as longestablished usage. San and koppa have no significance for biblical Greek. depending on the following letter. Koine was spoken across such an expanse of time and geography that variations in pronunciation necessarily occurred. comes after “nu. heads up.” a mnemonic device that may help students remember both the letter and its position in the alphabet. and lastly. is illustrated by the English words “kudzu” (a plant) and “gadzooks.g. nods off. which is “new” to English speakers. 61-62. see Rev 1:8. the “d” was gradually lost. eta. p. pp. that short iota differs only quantitatively from long iota. 752. also called stigma or digamma) came after epsilon and was pronounced like “w. san and koppa. leaving only the “z” sound. chi. three rhyming letters (zeta. Allen (cited below). digamma. p. The “dz” sound. Vau (F ½.” although this may have varied according to dialect and period. and in the case of several sounds. but continued to be used for the number six (its position in the alphabet). For the letters alpha and omega. the question is pedantic since vowel length for iota (as well as alpha and upsilon) is revealed only 4 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . must render any reform pedantical. psi).

contains this combination of letters. Whether it is worthwhile to strive for consistency with a distinction that is dubious to begin with. De compositione verborum 54. or diaeresis. see above (§2). Individual teachers can decide how strict to be regarding pronunciation.. . p. is usually written over the iota or upsilon to indicate that it does not form a diphthong with the preceding vowel. certain forms of the optative constitute exceptions to the exception. pp. . Vox Graeca: A Guide to the Pronunciation of Classical Greek (2nd ed. The entire matter of open and closed vowels has been omitted from the textbook. For accent. Another example from biblical Greek would be proÇsthmi. and Breathing Marks Regarding the pronunciation of iota. Not all instructors of biblical Greek insist on trilling rho. They help distinguish Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 5 . rho was trilled in pronunciation (see Dionysius of Halicarnassus. when preceded by another rho (‡ôÓhtov) or by an aspirated consonant (qÓËnov).D. When this is the case.. In the optative. The infrequency of the optative in NT Greek argues against the advisability of introducing this fact. Thus. according to ancient grammarians. To pronounce upsilon. 3. The signs for the accents (and the breathings) were not regularly employed in Mss. it does not occur in biblical Greek. Plato. Still. (6) The sounds of upsilon and chi are new to English speakers. 5. it is ill-advised to ignore them entirely. and tongue during pronunciation. Vowels. may be of interest to linguists.C. Those who wish to include this matter may refer to Smyth §§4a and 7. without the rough breathing. Diphthongs. a double dot. See BDF §§15. lips. I find accents to be the first major bog in which students become mired. Sturtevant. §2). Chicago: Ares. The Pronunciation of Greek and Latin (2nd ed. Sidney Allen. These distinctions.. The name of Moses. but I see no relevance in them for students of biblical Greek. The latter two instances are not indicated with a breathing mark in modern texts and can probably be omitted in the teaching of biblical Greek. Accents “The invention of the marks of accent is attributed to Aristophanes of Byzantium. See Smyth §169. and Edgar H. 1975). 7) suggests “holding the lips rounded (as when pronouncing English oo in goose) and at the same time saying — or attempting to say — the sound of English ee in geese. 1974).” see Smyth §14 and Allen. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Since the optative is more frequent in the LXX. till after 600 A. MwÙs«v.e. Regarding the length of final oi and ai.1-3. librarian at Alexandria about 200 B. i. 50-51 (see above. or a quick check of the lexicon. Cratylus 426E). meter. As for the Classical Greek diphthong wu. final oi and ai are long. the instructor may wish to point out that the juxtaposition of two vowels that could form a diphthong sometimes does not.” (Smyth §161). Eugene Van Ness Goetchius (The Language of the New Testament [New York: Scribner. see W. I leave to the instructor’s discretion. but the vowels here are pronounced separately and do not form a true diphthong (but see BDF §38). On the origin of breathing marks from the old Attic letter “H. 1965]. classes emphasizing the LXX may want to mention this exception. which pertain to the disposition of the mouth. Accents help distinguish forms of the liquid verbs and certain moods and modes of the aorist tense. (5) Rho has rough breathing in initial position and. 37. .” The sound of chi is similar to English “k” but is slightly aspirated. Elsewhere.

This is a good habit for both their private study and class meetings.). Note the following difference: (1) {delfÌv {koÖei (“A brother hears”) vs. “Why Study the Septuagint?” Biblical Archaeologist 49 (1986) 174-81. Thorough discussions of the history of accenting may be found in Allen. 94-105 (see above. ed. Accents are best learned by a combination of deductive and inductive methods: succinct formal presentations of the rules and regular exposure to accented texts. but this is a matter for the instructor’s discretion. 8. 6 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . etc. pp. Exercises Remind students to capitalize on both sight and sound by reading the LXX and NT passages aloud. Fuller introductions along with bibliography can be found in standard reference works: Anchor Bible Dictionary. 7. Punctuation Note that a question in Greek will not have an auxiliary verb form identifying the sentence as interrogative. (2) {delfÌv {koÖei. Peters. H. They also help one identify certain perfect tense forms. 106-24. pp. The International Standard Bible Encyclopedia (rev. see Smyth §§ 149-87. I suggest a gradual introduction that deemphasizes rote memorization. see M.certain forms of the demonstrative from similar forms of the third person pronoun. Interpreter’s Dictionary of the Bible. This makes attention to punctuation essential. 6. For an exhaustive discussion of accent rules. and Sturtevant. (“Does a brother hear?”). I usually don’t require students to accent words on exams. §2). K. A Brief Introduction to the Septuagint (LXX) On the value of the LXX.

8 times in the NT. (These figures include third person plural verbs in the present active and future active as well as some dative plural participles. Characteristics of the Greek Verb Person and number should pose no special difficulty for English-speaking students. Thus the infinitive is a verbal noun. he. as well as {delfËv and {delf©. Present Active Infinitive I do not use the term “finite verb” in the textbook. 1976 times in the LXX. see Smyth §§423-27. a few highly technical terms could also be mentioned. the infinitive is concerned about the action as an entity. 13. see Smyth §§134-35. If you want to introduce this concept. From ka¾ we get “triskaidekaphobia. you. In contrast.” fear of the number 13.) 12. the infinitive denotes the action without the limitation of person and number. with movable nu. 563 times in the NT. she. the critical difference between English and Greek is the latter’s emphasis on the kind of action. 10. Elaborate grammatical explanations can sometimes be a hindrance. but I have tried to introduce some variety by including jŸlw. on movable n. The latter two statistics include many instances when the following word began with a consonant.” or “a looking aside. Biblical Greek often added movable nu even when the rule did not require it. which is reintroduced in §54. Exercises One of the convictions behind A Primer of Biblical Greek is that students learn Greek chiefly by doing exercises and reading biblical passages.” a seventhcentury heresy that Christ had only one will. we. Perhaps the most difficult characteristic of Greek verbs will be mood. 133 times in the LXX. -ousin found these statistics: without movable nu. and Ðti. this Primer Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 7 . limit) by person and number. see Smyth §§46-47. A finite verb is concerned about action that is performed by someone (I.Lesson 2 9. Learning occurs in doing homework and reviewing in class. The Present Active Indicative On hiatus. Accentuation of Greek Verbs On the accent of verbs. 11. Voice in Greek adds the peculiarity of the middle. simply note that the action of a finite verb is “limited” (Latin finis = end. From blŸpw we get “parablepsis. The latter two words are reintroduced in Lessons 3 and 4. 14. This is to some extent unavoidable. Vocabulary A disadvantage of the deductive method in the first few lessons is the severely limited vocabulary and resulting mundane and repetitive exercises. it. Therefore. which is nearly absent from English in terms of unique verbal conjugations. not two (human and divine). A computer check of the endings -ousi vs. From jŸlw we get “monothelitism. particularly the many exceptions to the general rule of recessive accent.” the term for a scribal error resulting from misdirected vision. ka¾. Besides the fairly common English derivatives given in the text. As for tense. they).

artificial sentences that I have composed. This means that the translation of these sentences approximates work with the LXX or NT and a lexicon. passages from the Greek Bible and other ancient texts. Students encounter words and constructions to which they have not been introduced. Moreover. Does a sister wish to hear? I do not know. Except by sheer chance. and English to Greek sentences. These exercises employ a more inductive method. loosening). there are English to Greek sentences. meaning. 2. Annotations are placed at the end of the lesson rather than in the text and eventually use lexical forms rather than the forms in the exercises themselves. loosening). I hear and see that a sister is writing. to be able to read and interpret “real” Greek. As long as practice sentences represent idiomatic Greek similar to that of the biblical era. there is rarely a single correct (or even best) English translation for a Greek sentence (or vice versa). I do not expect that teachers will want to utilize all of them. actively writing a language always improves one’s skill at passive reading. controlled range of vocabulary and syntax. Use your own discretion regarding the emphasis placed on English to Greek exercises. LXX sentences. sentences from the Bible do not provide the focus and repetition that artificial exercises do.) believe and (that) you wish to teach. The translations offered here will serve as a check on the teacher’s translations. The relatively small number of these indicates that I do not regard them as needing major emphasis. Finally. simple vs. We know that you (pl. admittedly.) believe that a brother and a sister see? 8 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . NT sentences. etc. “Practice and Review” provides intensive drills on vocabulary and syntax just introduced in that lesson. and we do not want to see. Even in this second lesson there are possible variations in word order. 7. On the other hand. I tend to assign a few English to Greek sentences in the early lessons and then phase them out by the end of the first term. The LXX and the NT were not written to teach students Greek. 5. Most teachers will give priority either to the LXX or the NT. they can be beneficial.) say that a brother is destroying (or. artificial exercises have the advantage of being unfamiliar to students and requiring them to read carefully. Despite the advantages of artificial sentences. A brother says that he wants to write and teach. 6. There are four types: Practice and Review. linear translations of the present tense. These are. Despite the great importance of doing exercises. 3. They are destroying (or. Note on Answers to Exercises Needless to say. but are by no means the only possible ones. of course. The LXX and NT passages stretch students beyond their comfortable. we do not believe [it]. but I hope that there will be frequent crossing over. Exercises — Practice and Review 1..puts much emphasis on exercises.e. the exercises not assigned as homework may be of use later in the construction of quizzes and tests. You (sing. In any event. Do you (sing. I intentionally provide an abundance of exercises so that you can pick and choose. i. 4. the primary goal is. Few of us have any real need to write in biblical Greek.

pisteÖei Ðti blŸpei. I want to know that a brother believes. {koÖomen Ðti {delfÌv jŸlei pisteÖein.8. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 9 . 4. 10. blŸpei ka¿ pisteÖei {delf©. 9. 3. ginãskete Ðti oÔ gr}fousin. 2.) are not listening. I know that a brother is speaking and you (sing. A sister is teaching and we want to listen. I do not want to destroy. Exercises — English to Greek 1. lŸgw Ðti lÖeiv ka¿ oÔ blŸpeiv.

See John 10:23. The purists will argue (rightly) that function determines case. The English word “echo” has nothing to do with Greek £qw. pp. An omicron before the alpha may also produce a “pure alpha” type. prof©thv) will be introduced in Lesson 6. etc. 999. On this issue. Although this covers the great majority of cases. sto†.g. (Although the vocative often has the same form as the nominative. See Wallace.. Characteristics of Greek Nouns Regarding number.. It derives from §qŸw = “sound. There is a minor debate over how many cases Greek has.” 16. 32-35. ring. not a purist. translate with English “the. Nevertheless. E. translate with English “a. see BDF §199).. On some of the rules and peculiarities of gender. Greek nouns could be made definite in a variety of other ways. 19. The Definite Article At this point in one’s study the rule to learn is: if the Greek definite article is present. peal. comes from {l©jeia.g. and instrumental) and display enormous and intimidating paradigms.g. sto‚v. however. despite the fact that the forms are identical. but be advised of the following. Alethea.” In fact. Vocabulary Most of these words have well-known derivatives. Unless you have a talkative student who knows Sanskrit.) See Wallace. For example. 1535). 1449. pp. see Smyth §§211-27. kÖrie. Acts 3:11. the vocative in {koÖete.Lesson 3 15. but they are better learned as they are encountered. see Smyth §§196-200. Occasionally a Greek textbook will claim there are eight cases (adding ablative. locative. sto}. See Smyth §§195. 10 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . the ablative. 5:12.. 18. The issue centers on whether one defines case as form or function. the visual markers of case. Even in Classical Greek. it is better to say: when the alpha is preceded by a vowel or rho. I am a pragmatist. The First Declension For the full range of first declension forms. It was not common in Classical Greek (except Homer) and is lacking in biblical Greek. it is probably best at this point not even to mention those cases that do not have distinctive endings. 245-54. kÖklæ. or rho. In biblical Greek. e.g. locative. they exist only in a few stereotyped forms that for all practical purposes are adverbs (e. students are usually concerned about forms. and instrumental forms were rather few (see Smyth §§341.” The feminine name.” If the article is absent. 17. î ‡njrwpoi is clearly not the same case as a nominative ‡njrwpoi {koÖousin. but similar-sounding Althea derives from {lja¾nw = “I heal. Masculine nouns of the first declension (e. the dual scarcely deserves mention. it does have distinctive forms that are commonly encountered. Forms of the First Declension Sometimes the condition given for predicting the “pure alpha” type of first declension nouns is: when the alpha is preceded by epsilon. iota. and they will learn soon enough that the genitive and dative cases in particular have multiple functions.

21. 8.20. In LXX #6 and NT #1. 37-38. 3. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 11 . 5. A sister’s heart does not want to believe that you (pl. 4. They know that a brother sees a lake. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. Since the accusative is also possible. 3. See BDAG. Sisters are telling churches that they do not see an hour of truth.) have life. This is the nature of inductive learning. We have a kingdom of glory (glorious kingdom) and we hear a voice of truth (truthful voice). see Smyth §§205-9. ginãskei ›kklhs¾a Ðti kard¾a jŸlei pisteÖein. {delfª blŸpei ¨mŸran dËxhv ka¿ pisteÖei. 2. Do you (sing. Noun Accent For the general rules of noun accent. A brother and a sister have land and desire to have kingdoms. 4. Earth and sea know that hearts do not believe.) 2. 1. jŸlousin {koÖein fwnªn jal}sshv.) want to know life and see a day of glory (glorious day)? 10. Are churches listening? 12. The “Vocabulary for LXX and NT Sentences” will usually enable students to make sense of the exercises even if some things remain unclear. observant students may wonder why {l©jei}n and pisteÖetŸ have two accents. 11. A Note on LXX and NT Exercises The LXX and NT exercises will often have features with which students are unfamiliar. 9. I am writing to a church (assembly) because it does not know truth. it may be accepted as correct. 7. pp. The teacher can decide how much information about enclitic accenting is appropriate at this point! Exercises — English to Greek.) desire to speak truth to a kingdom? 6. We are not teaching a sister to destroy. students are not aware of this possibility at this point. oÔ ginãskei g« íran {lhje¾av ka¿ oÔk £qei basile¾a zw©n. Do you (pl. we are teaching a heart to believe. A church knows an hour of glory and a day of truth. A voice says that we have an hour of life. (Although {koÖw frequently takes a genitive object.

” “galore. See Wallace. see Smyth §§228-39. (2) Neuter nouns of all declensions have abbreviated paradigms since the nominative. 4. but in fact we have several postpositives. This is a response used in some Christian liturgies. but some students may be familiar with the expression Kyrie eleison (“Lord.g. 5. there are a few English words that are so obscure I do not include them in the text. Feminine nouns of the second declension (e.” The preposition “notwithstanding” is sometimes used postpositively. E. Cf. Note also the adjective “proper. 213). have mercy!”). see Smyth §§205-9. A brother is speaking to an assembly.. A “doolie” is a freshman at the US Air Force Academy (equivalent to a “plebe” at the Naval Academy).” 23.” e. “the city proper. especially adjectives. a law of God) teaches that heaven has glory. “aplenty. 26. p. jeËv. “now” or “then” may be used as a translation. Neither are there derivatives from tŸknon. 2. but they do not wish to know truth.” “redivivus. and vocative forms are the same in the singular and in the plural..” Finally. ¨ ÊdËv) will be introduced in Lesson 6.” Students should know that this word is frequently used as a transitional particle without any contrast intended (BDAG. God’s law (or. I know of no English word deriving from kÖriov.” For doØlov. 3. For biblical precedents.. and sons are speaking to a slave. Note that Matt 27:46 is the only NT usage of the distinctive vocative form jeŸ. Forms of the Second Declension Some things to note here include: (1) Although the vocative singular has a distinctive form for masculine nouns of the second declension (e. 56-59. although “tyke” might serve as a mnemonic device.” “redux. a “doula” (Modern Greek) is a sort of midwife. especially the Roman Catholic mass. A temple slave in ancient Greece was called a “hierodule. In such cases. 24.g.” “extraordinaire.” and “wannabe.” when meaning “itself” or “strictly limited to a specific thing. see Ps 122:3 and Matt 17:15. accusative. 20:30-31. The meanings given for dŸ are the standard ones: “but. and. A man writes words of life to a sister. the nominative sometimes stood in its place.g. Vocabulary It is fairly common knowledge that Philadelphia is the “City of Brotherly Love.Lesson 4 22.. The idea of a postpositive may seem new to English speakers.g. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. pp. jeŸ). We wish to teach children. Accent of Second Declension Nouns On the general rules of noun accent. The Second Declension For the full range of second declension forms. We do not see a land of death but we believe that God’s house has life. 25. jeËv for vocative in John 20:28 and Heb 1:8. 12 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek .

the plural may be accepted. A sister’s children want to see heaven. oÔ blŸpousin ‡njrwpoi jeËn. tŸkna {delf«v {koÖousi fwnªn doÖlou. The capitalization of words beginning direct speech is a modern editorial decision. A master is teaching slaves to write words. 8. 10. we wish to see God’s works. A son’s death destroys a person’s heart. A brother and a sister are saying.) 7. blŸpei d¡ kÖriov oÔranoØ £rga {delfoØ. 9. See Matt 10:21. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 13 . u½Ìv lŸgei lËgouv zw«v ›kklhs¾ƒ. 4.) 2. (Note — Students are not yet familiar with the neuter plural subject/singular verb rule. but children of earth do not see God’s house. Exercises — English to Greek 1. but I know that God sees a person’s heart. and slaves are teaching children.) have works of law.” (Be sure students note the vocative. Cf. Matt 7:21 in the UBS3 and NA26. oÔk £qei oÅkov jan}tou nËmouv.6. “Lord. but we know and believe that God’s kingdom has life. You (pl. 3. Since the rule is not absolute and neuter plurals sometimes take a plural verb.

and BDF §§241-46. 206-90. For {koÖw. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. 31. though the latter actually derives from k}llov. e¼v. The dead do not have glory. 6.Lesson 5 27. pp. 7. 11. pp. Robertson. 307. but the assembly desires to hear the voice of the last man. Vocabulary From the root of d¾kaiov we get the term “dicast. 4. 291-314. 10. tË = “beauty” (hence the double “l”). 32. 223-24. but the deeds of the lord of the house are evil. 8. The days are evil. adjective). article. 37-38.” meaning “having shapely buttocks” (pug© = rump. Smyth (§179) identifies ten words as proclitics: the articles Ê. 2. There is a third possible construction for the attributive adjective (anarthrous noun. abstract nouns. buttocks).” referring to a judge/juror in a trial in ancient Athens. pp. and monadic nouns. see Smyth §§272-83. 30. The heart of the little slave is faithful. the particle âv. pp. pp. Forms of First and Second Declension Adjectives For more on this. The first man is speaking to the assembly. 14 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . one might also mention calisthenics and calligraphy. Wallace. Syntax of the Adjective For more on this. The last kingdom does not have bad laws. The kingdom is righteous and the people of the kingdom are faithful. True revellers in esoterica may want to use “callipygian. BDF §§249-76). ¨. but the house of the Lord is holy. Is the first son teaching the small children to write? 5. Forms and Syntax of the Definite Article The best guide to translating the Greek article is simply to use the English definite article unless English idiom seems to require its omission. Cases with Special Verbs The constructions with these verbs are varied. They are saying that they believe in the word of God. The full-blown syntax of the Greek article is quite complex (Smyth §§1099-1189. but they do not have good works. 506-7. BDF §§173 and 416 (1). The land is good because the lord of the land has good servants.816-18. 3. 9. for they do not see the good things of life. For kalËv. a½. The Lord of heaven is righteous and holy. see Smyth §§286-90. the prepositions ›n. Three of the most important differences are mentioned: proper names. The latter are discussed in Smyth §1141 and Wallace. ›k. pp. but this is relatively uncommon and need not be introduced at this point. see BDAG. BDF §§187 (6) and 397 (2). For pisteÖw. Wallace. The evil brothers are not receiving the truth of God. and the negative oÔ. o½. p. see BDAG. 28. See Wallace. the conjunction e¼. 29.

See Tob 12:8. the adjective would take the form of a substantive.12. for death is not beautiful. 2. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 15 .) Exercises — English to Greek 1. (Re: #12 — The last word. but a more likely construction would be the neuter kalËn = “a good thing. The little sister does not wish to see the dead child.e. lamb}nousin o½ ‡njrwpoi o½ ‰gioi t~ {gaj~ t«v g«v.” i. kalËv. ponhr~ d¡ ¨ kard¾a toØ kur¾ou toØ oÂkou. Ê ponhrÌv jŸlei lÖein t~v pist}v. Smyth §1048 and BDF §131.. {gajÌn proseuqª met~ nhste¾av. is in agreement with j}natov. 4. pisteÖousi d¡ tê jeê. 3. o½ nekro¿ oÔ ginãskousi tªn {lhje¾an Ðti oÔk {koÖousin t«v fwn«v toØ jeoØ. kalÌv Ê oÅkov.

34. 1955). and innumerable times in the accusative. A computer search revealed 139 times in the NT when {ll} is followed by a vowel and is not elided. On the inconsistency of elision in the NT. Students should learn the basic meanings given in the text. 1209-11. By far the most significant of these for biblical Greek are £rhmov (31 times NT.. 11:7. 888 times LXX). 38. diarrhea. and tr¾bov = path (70×). 35. apotropaic. The final alpha of {ll} is often elided before vowels. it is always elided. pp. but by no means consistently. rod (121×). some of these have relatively greater importance by virtue of their occurrence in the LXX. Elision and Aspiration On elision. Feminine Nouns of the Second Declension Bruce M. but in the NT it occurs only once with the genitive and six times with the dative as compared to about 690 times with the accusative. 7 (ÕpË). 37. and (3) from pŸmpw — pomp. and BDF §§17 and 486. Vocabulary In addition to the more common derivatives given in the textbook. etc. However. A Concordance to the Septuagint (repr. The statistics in the LXX are proportionally similar: about 20 times in the genitive. see Matt 8:9. 36. Luke 7:24. For example. However.” Prepositions in Greek and English often have both a spatial meaning and a logical meaning. when {ll} is followed (in the LXX or the NT) by the negative oÔ. Mark 1:9. see Smyth §§70-75. £xodov = departure (70×). Ó}bdov = staff. 388 times LXX) and ÊdËv (101 times NT. about 100 times in the dative. 1987). a road may go under a train trestle. See the chart of “Common Biblical Greek Prepositions.. For example: ‡mpelov = vine (70×). Syntax of Prepositions In biblical Greek prËv is used with all three oblique cases. Grand Rapids: Baker. pp. (2) from di} — diaphanous. Metzger gives a list of the NT nouns in this category in his Lexical Aids for Students of New Testament Greek (Princeton: Princeton University Press. Most of the remaining words in Metzger’s list are of low frequency in the NT. oÔk. box (over 222×). 91-92. See Edwin Hatch and Henry A. Masculine Nouns of the First Declension There are two types involved here: nouns ending in -hv (such as majht©v and prof©thv) and those ending in -av (such as nean¾av). Redpath. Acts 10:22. diaspora. 16 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . 26:2. See also Smyth §232. or may be under construction. See Smyth §§222-26.Lesson 6 33. consider the following: (1) from {pË — apothecary. but understand that one needs to be flexible in translating. prepositions are among the most idiomatic words in any language. kibwtËv = ark. occurring fewer than ten times. Special Constructions with Prepositions As the text says.

In the last day the Lord sends the angels from heaven. With the children the sisters are throwing stones into the lake. but the singular verb with the neuter plural subject is still the normal construction in the NT. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. in heaven). We do not know the ways of God in the world. 13. 2.) have good words from God and do you see the glory of the kingdom? 8. we want to hear the brother’s word. 3. you (pl. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 17 . persons) around the prophet are remaining with the disciples. Koine is slightly less consistent. 2. ginãskousin o½ ›n t° ›kklhs¾ƒ ‡njrwpoi Ðti did}skei Ê prof©thv to×v doÖlouv per¿ toØ nomoØ. 7. In the desert the son of the Holy One is teaching the sisters about the law. 40. 4. 14.) are hearing about the way of life. 11. For an interesting contrast. See Smyth §§958-61. Wallace. lŸgeiv kal~ ›k kard¾av {gaj«v. Because of evil men (or. In the hour of glory the Lord speaks to the hearts of the children. pp. but we trust God. 9. see Matt 6:28 and Luke 12:27: in the same saying. Exercises — English to Greek 1. 10. oÔ d¡ ginãskeiv tªn ÊdÌn e¼v tªn zw©n.39. 6. Neuter Plural Subjects with Singular Verbs Attic Greek followed this rule with a rather high degree of consistency. perhaps reflecting a more Classical style. Matthew uses a plural verb with a neuter plural subject. Do the good prophets know the truth concerning life and death? 5. do you (sing. God remains in the heavens (or. and BDF §133. 12. The men (or. 399-400. di~ tªn basile¾an toØ jeoØ mŸnomen ›n tê kËsmæ met~ tån pistån. Prophet. We send the evil brothers out of the church and into the desert. uses a singular verb. but he casts the evil angels to the earth. 3. Through the angel of the Lord. pŸmpei Ê kÖriov t«v dËxhv {ggŸlouv {p! oÔranoØ prÌv t~ tŸkna t«v g«v. and Luke. and the angels take the faithful out of the world. Not by works of the law does a person receive life from heaven. 4. After the law and the prophets. persons) we are speaking to God.

Enclitics Enclitics “lean on” (›gkl¾nw) the preceding word and are pronounced with that word as a phonetic unit. English words of more than five syllables usually have both a primary stress and one or more secondary stresses. Present Indicative of e¼m¾ As this paragraph says. and in Koine it completely supplanted the classical forms. either of which is sometimes seen in the English derivatives. in compound verbs. and it is probably not cost-effective to ask students to master these rules before moving on. “the third person forms. both singular and plural. 1964). Forms of the Personal Pronouns Strictly speaking. Smyth’s distinction between ›sti as a simple linking verb and £sti expressing “existence or possibility” is mistaken. Accent of £sti(n) On this esoteric matter. but rather was the intensive/identical pronoun (functions introduced in Lesson 8). 43. catapult. but the connection to the basic meanings of the Greek preposition is not obvious. The peculiar spelling of sézw originates from the combination of a verb stem ending in omega and a suffix beginning with iota: sw-¾zw. “devour”). see Smyth §§181-87. See the helpful excursus in William S. cataract). The third person singular form (›stin) has the movable nu 1976 times in the LXX. 425-26. 157 in the NT. p. 45. The iota appears as a subscript in the present system and some other forms. i. Kat} originally had a directional sense of “down” (kataba¾nw) or. 896 times in the NT. Many words starting with “cata-” derive from Greek kat} (cataclysm. This form lacks the movable nu 35 times in the LXX and one time in the NT. aÔtËv was not the third person personal pronoun in Classical Greek. The general effect of the special rules of enclitic accent is to break up a series of unaccented syllables. Similarly. See Smyth §§325-28. For more on enclitics. See BDAG. 18 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . pp. Vocabulary English derivatives are scarce for several of the words in this vocabulary list. But in Classical Greek aÔtËv frequently substituted for the third person personal pronoun in the oblique cases. Hippolytus: Edited with Introduction and Commentary (Oxford: Clarendon. The accent of ›sti depends solely on its position in the sentence: it is accented on the penult when it is in initial or quasi-initial position.Lesson 7 41. especially §325d. a general intensifying force (katesj¾w.. 42. may have movable n. English is also loath to permit such strings of unaccented syllables. when the following word begins with a consonant. Barrett.” In biblical Greek this is almost invariably the case. Enclitics complicate accenting significantly. It lacks the movable nu only 8 times in the LXX and zero times in the NT! Obviously these forms often have the nu when it was not strictly required. 982. the third person plural form (e¼sin) occurs with the movable nu 270 times in the LXX. see Smyth §187b. 44.e. often losing their accent in the process.

.46. Syntax of the Personal Pronouns There are exceptions to the rule that “A pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender and number. Exercises — English to Greek 1. there was a feminine form of the word: maj©tria.g. so the sentence could continue with the female pronoun.. The disciple does not have sin. “construction according to sense. A faithful prophet does not teach against the law. Are the sons of the kingdom with you? 12. but they do not have the gifts of heaven.) say that I am the Holy One. The righteous woman hears the voice of truth and saves her soul from death. An instance of the lack of agreement in gender between pronoun and antecedent is the case of neuter diminutives in -ion. We know that you are the angel of life. 4. 9. 10. 47. God is sending his servants into the house. You (sing.) speaking a word against the Lord of heaven? 2. “young woman.” On the other hand. “she teaches. oÔ d¡ jŸlomen aÔtÌn ›sj¾ein. 3. but I believe that the Lord wants to save you. .” A singular collective noun (e. 14. See Acts 9:36. girl. 5. Ê d¡ kÖriov sézei {pÌ t«v |mart¾av. for he teaches according to the law of God. £qomen tÌn ‡rton Õmån. kalÌn ploÀon sézei yuq~v ›n t° jal}ss¬. 2. 11. ›gä blŸpw se. The multitude is eating the bread of the land. We are not receiving gifts from God according to our works but according to his love. but you do not see my kingdom. Cf. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. s× d¡ oÔ blŸpeiv me. Are you (pl. Our slaves are throwing stones into the boat because they wish to destroy it. See Mark 2:13. Cf. Because of the evil crowd. The love of God saves you from your sins. Your sister and her child are in the boat but they do not have bread. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 19 . (“Multitude” (Îqlov) is an example of the constructio ad sensum.” Do not confuse this with the constructio nonsensum sometimes found in students’ compositions. (“Disciple” (majht©v) presumably could refer to a woman. Your souls have sin because you are eating the children’s bread. o½ Îqloi lŸgousi kat~ toØ prof©tou Ðti Ê prof©thv oÔk £qei dåra aÔtoÀv. These words are neuter by form even though they refer to persons. 4.) 8. 7. See BDF §§134. Îqlov) may be the antecedent for plural pronoun. 3.” Such exceptions fall under the rubric of constructio ad sensum. German -chen in Mädchen.) 13. The love of sin remains in you. 5. . 282. Matt 21:8 and John 6:2. kat~ tÌn nËmon ¨ {g}ph ›st¿n ¨ ÊdÌv t«v {lhje¾av. 6.

but you do not have authority to judge us.g. see Smyth §333. pp. therefore. 52. 6. 3. but those brothers do not remain in the assembly of truth. Syntax of the Demonstratives For more on the use of the demonstratives. 10. but I am sending life to the faithful ones. We have the same love in our hearts. 14. 7. 8. The LXX very rarely uses either the intensive or the identical use of aÔtËv. Exercises — English to Greek 1. hence something like “at or beside the eyes. This world remains in sin. 12. The children of that land are not finding peace because the heart of the people is evil. 13. but you are writing these words to us. “I am raising up an angel of death on account of the evil men/persons. we are eating the same bread in the same house.” Note that the word prËswpon combines the preposition prËv and the Greek word ëy (eye. 2. We have authority to baptize. Forms of the Demonstratives For more on the forms of the demonstratives. You (pl. and the multitudes of the earth hear the same voice. 325-35. 2.” 49. In that hour the Lord sends his angels into the world to find the holy sister. In that day God himself raises the dead. Exercises — Practice and Review 1.. see Smyth §§1238-61 and Wallace. Amos 2:7 (see LXX exercise #7) is the only example of the identical use I have been able to find. The derivative meaning usually relates to the intensive use of the pronoun. God is sending this prophet to the people. 5. and the prophet himself knows this. face. 4. Special Uses of aÔtËv There is a handout on the special uses of aÔtËv with numerous examples from the NT. 11. aÔtÌv Ê prof©thv kr¾nei tªn ›kklhs¾an Ðti oÔ mŸnousin ›keÀnoi o½ {delfo¿ ›n e¼r©n¬. e. we are saying these words to others. 50. pp. For more on the special uses of aÔtËv. therefore. 3. in heaven). he judges that kingdom according to the truth. 51. oÔk £qei Ê laÌv ›xous¾an lamb}nein to×v l¾jouv toÖtouv. The Lord is just. 20 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . pŸmpei Ê aÔtÌv kÖriov t~v {delf~v ka¿ to×v {delfo×v bapt¾zein t~ tŸkna ka¿ ›ge¾rein to×v nŸkrouv. I am sending these disciples to baptize the little children. 348-50.Lesson 8 48. You (pl. Thus says the Lord. We know the peace of God. but we see the glory of another world in the heavens (or.) do not want to hear our voice. therefore. 9. Vocabulary Many English words beginning with “auto-” derive from aÔtËv. We teach and believe the same things. countenance).) do not see us face to face (for this idiom see Gen 32:31 and 1 Cor 13:12). see Smyth §§1204-17 and Wallace. “automotive” = “self-propelled.

are likely to be needed. These exercises provide students with additional practice and/or furnish the teacher with material for quizzes and tests. These are planned for strategic points where review. and perhaps relief. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 21 . oÔq eÕr¾skomen tªn dËxan toØ jeoØ ›n t° basile¾ƒ taÖt¬= jŸlomen oÞn oÅkon ›n g° ‡ll¬ £qein. Periodic Exercises There is a set of periodic exercises for this point in the Primer as well as after Lessons 14.4. 26. and 32 (see the Student Resources for each of these lessons). 20.

58. pp. The line between personal agent and impersonal means is sometimes blurred.(e. 57. Because the letter “n” of syn. pp. The idea is approximated by verbs related to personal hygiene: I wash (myself). The quasireflexive notion is present even if the English pronoun is absent.or sym. English derivatives from sÖn may begin with syl. 22 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . See the detailed treatment in Wallace. I bathe (myself). an indirect often assimilated to the letter that follows it. syllable. Present Middle/Passive Infinitive Remind students that the infinitive is a verbal noun and does not have “person. The continuous translation (“I am being loosened”) is preferable at this point in order to avoid confusion with a perfective or resultant sense. see Wallace’s thorough treatment (pp. see Wallace’s thorough treatment (pp. §12 above. 56.and hypo-. symptom. symmetry. 59. Forms of the Present Middle Indicative The shortened ending of the second person singular is explained in Smyth §628. The middle voice in Greek may convey a direct reflexive notion. I groom (myself).g. symbiosis. The Greek word for Spirit (pneØma) is often used in the dative to express means. 431-39).Lesson 9 53. 414-30 or the briefer treatment in Smyth §§1713-34. syllogism. 431-39). Cf. symposium. Several types of constructions and several different prepositions are used to express agency and means. 373-74) for a discussion of this specific term. etc. or permissive notion. Middle and Passive Voices The middle voice is new to English speakers. Impersonal Dative of Means Again. Deponent Verbs See Smyth §356c and Wallace. not perfective action and a resultant state.” The present tense denotes continuous action. I dress (myself). sympathy. Forms of the Present Passive Indicative The shortened ending of the second person singular is explained in Smyth §628. 54. Vocabulary The last two words in the vocabulary list (sÖn and ÕpË) lie behind numerous English words beginning with syn. 60.). “I am loosened” may mean “I have been loosened and am now in a loosened state..” Because of this it may be better to refer to the infinitive as a mode rather than a mood. Personal Agent with ÕpË On this paragraph and the next. See Wallace (pp. 55. symbol. etc. a causative. 428-30 and 441.

) are not answering her. ¨meÀv d¡ oÔ jŸlomen did}skesjai Õf! Õmån. With your (sing. 7. Comments on Certain Verbs in This Lesson Compound verbs are not much of a problem since English has the same phenomenon: downgrade. Your (pl. inbreed. upstage. I do not wish to rule this kingdom. 6. 12. 11. he is being judged by the people.) brother is not answering the people with love.) are hearing an angel’s voice. nor do we see the sea. You (pl. 10. update. DÖnasje g¾nesjai majhta¿ toØ kur¾ou. 4. ÕmeÀv ‡rqesje did}skein ¨m‚v.” e. downplay. Our sister wants to know the truth about her son. 9. Can they (themselves) be saved? 2. 3. See Smyth §§1681-98. 62. Peace with God is a gift. underbid. 2. 5. but we are being taught by God himself. Exercises — English to Greek 1. In that day boats are destroyed and the sea cannot be found.) sister you are going to the prophet to be baptized by him.) are beginning to believe in your hearts. 14. 3. We are going through the desert. overcome. The children are going into the house with the disciples. The crowd becomes small because evil sinners are entering into the assembly. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. 8. but you are not going out of the way of sin.g. Note that the prefixed preposition may modify the verb in a spatial sense or a logical sense. 4. I am going to another land. {pokr¾netai Ê prof©thv toÀv |martwloÀv. especially the sections pertaining to “in Composition. You (pl. ›xŸrqetai tÌ tŸknon e¼v tªn j}lassan ka¿ bapt¾zetai ÕpÌ toØ doÖlou. but we do not have bread. poreÖomeja mej! Õmån ›n t° Êdê t«v e¼r©nhv ka¿ sæzËmeja tê lËgæ t«v zw«v. therefore. etc.61. §1685 (3). but we do not wish to go through this land. therefore. undercoat. 13. We are going to the sea. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 23 .. These evil sinners are going out to the prophet. but you (pl. After these things the angel of the Lord comes and the dead are raised. A person does not become righteous by works.

BDF §§26-27. For aÂrw. but this difference pertains only to phonology and morphology. 1858. paranoia. beside. e. Numerous words beginning with para. and 16 times in the LXX. repeated. See Smyth §§526-27. paramedic. beyond.denotes “above. 6. The faithful disciples were gathering together loaves of bread. Primary and Secondary Tenses For more on this distinction. The apostle was leading the children from the temple into the desert.” An “anabasis” is a “going up. but the most famous anabasis was recounted by the Greek historian Xenophon concerning the retreat of Greek mercenaries under Cyrus (ca. What matters is that an augment of either type identifies a past time tense. The resulting improper diphthong was changed to eta with the iota subscript. It may refer to an advance.” a military expedition upward. 24 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . The prefix hyper.. but the loaves were small and bad. and you were about to walk in it. 65. “I take up the oars and I row. The form ±meja is found in 1 Sam 25:16. Imperfect Indicative of e¼m¾ The alternate form μsja occurs in Mark 14:67.. The peculiar spelling of {pojn¯skw originates from the combination of a verb stem ending in eta and a suffix beginning with iota: {pojnh-¾skw. Vocabulary The English word “agent” (as well as “agenda” and “agency”) derives from Latin ago.and hyperderive from par} and ÕpŸr. The latter is so called because “it usually increases the time required to pronounce the initial syllable” (Smyth §435). BDF §§66-67) distinguish between the “syllabic” augment (the addition of epsilon) and the “temporal” augment (the lengthening of an initial vowel or diphthong). 66. 4. The glory of God is departing from the assembly/church because the prophet is dying. but as a memory device one might visualize a person sitting in a rowboat saying.g. and Eph 2:3. Forms of the Augment Some grammarians (Smyth §§428-38. a katabatic wind forms by the movement of cold dense air down a slope such as a mountain or glacier. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. linear.” e.C.. The way of sin leads to death. 5. Gal 4:3.) action. hypercritical. Baruch 1:19. etc. Matt 23:30. hyperbole.usually denotes “alongside. paranormal. 68. but the sister of the man wanted to save him.g.Lesson 10 63.g. 67. 2. inland from the sea. see Smyth §§360.” e. Perhaps so. 401 B. This man was dying in behalf of his brother and was teaching the people about love. I know of no English derivatives. The prefix para. excessive.). 3. The evil man wanted to kill his slave. Matt 26:69. Imperfect Active Indicative It is important to emphasize that the imperfect tense depicts continuous (durative. 64. As for kataba¾nw. outside of. which is cognate with Greek ‡gw. Students should use such translations in the exercises so that the imperfect and aorist tenses can be distinguished from one another. Acts 27:37.

8. but we must not kill them. but you (pl. The prophet is gathering together the crowd into the house and is speaking to them in God’s behalf. 10.) were lifting up your voice to the Lord of life because you were about to die.) were going up into the temple with gifts for the authorities. 3. oÔ mŸllomen {pokte¾nein to×v doÖlouv to×v ponhroÖv. 13. You (sing. but you ought to believe in the God of heaven.) were in the desert. In that day you (sing.) are taking away the boat from the apostle because you must go down to the sea. 12. {ll! Éfe¾lousin {pŸrqesjai prÌv ‡llhn g«n.) were going down alongside the sea. 2. In that hour you (pl. Exercises — English to Greek 1. but you (pl. I was in the temple. Ê {pËstolov ±mellen sun}gein t~ tŸkna ka¿ ‡gein aÔt~ prÌv tÌn oÅkon. These sinners are evil. 14. 11. 4.7. ¸romen tªn fwnªn ¨mån Õp¡r t«v {delf«v ¨mån ka¿ kateba¾nomen par~ tªn j}lassan eÕr¾skein aÔt©n. Éfe¾lomen {naba¾nein prÌv tÌ ½erÌn ka¿ {pojn¯skein met~ tån prof©twn toØ jeoØ. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 25 . 9.) are going away to other gods. We were going up to the beautiful land. You (pl.

Vocabulary For bibl¾on. For jerapeÖw. As in the case of the present passive (§56 above). but [on the other hand] he/she was still dying. p. 2967-83. of course. The true imperatival form is accented with a circumflex and is much less common. pp. For p}lin. Imperfect Middle/Passive Indicative Again. “Must we eat the same bread again?” 8. You (pl. You (pl. [On the one hand] the demons were going out of the child. 72. 11. but truly I say to you. Behold. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. These things were being written in the book of the law. . but even to that place the disciple was being sent. 468. b. That kingdom was evil. Correlative Constructions See Wallace. 2. and bibliotherapy. but in your houses you were not walking in the truth. 7. See Smyth §2937.) were faithful to the Lord in the temple and in the way. see Smyth §§2881-91. the second person singular is a contracted form. simply the aorist middle imperative second singular from the form eÅdon (accented with an acute or grave when a particle). “heal” in the NT. Amen. Our lord/master was foremost in the land. 667-78. nor. 9. The child’s eyes were being healed by the word of the prophet. oÔdŸ is not truly a correlative construction despite the common translation “neither . Dissertationes 4. pp. Evil demons were going through the land.8.) were saying then that God was healing your eyes. “God is going to heal your heart. but they were neither remaining in that place nor did they wish to kill the people. 26 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . In the temple we were hearing these words from you. but he was being destroyed by his sins. note also palindrome and palinode. 495 2a.) were both walking in the way of love and were being taught the law of love. . Even the children were lifting up their voice and were saying. . besides the obvious (Bible).35.) were not able to see them. bibliophile. . 73. 672 and Smyth §§2877. Books and gifts were being sent to the sinners. oÚte. 6. 4. 3. 12. and BDAG. 2942-50. 13. See Epictetus. 70. Note that oÔd¡ .” The latter is properly expressed by oÚte .” 10. note bibliography. but you (pl. bibliotheca. 5. The Greek word ¼doÖ is. p. . 71. the continuous translation (“I was being loosened”) is preferable to “I was loosened” so as to avoid confusion with a (plu)perfective sense. but we did not want to receive them. BDAG.Lesson 11 69. note that the meaning “serve” dominates in the LXX. but they neither wanted nor received them. . Adverbial ka¾ For more on adverbial ka¾. the kingdom of heaven is coming. Wallace. You (sing. Glory [be] to God and peace [be] to his servants.

O½ ‡ggeloi toØ jeoØ kateba¾non prÌv tÌ ½erËn. 2. We desire to see the face of God on earth and again in heaven. Note for LXX sentence #6: {pŸkteinen is probably aorist in Tob 3:8 although the form is identical to the imperfect (due to the liquid verb. ›p¿ t«v g«v £ti £qomen tÌn j}naton. 4. ka¿ Éfjalmo¿ ka¿ kard¾ai ›jerapeÖonto ›n ›ke¾næ tê |g¾æ tËpæ. {mªn lŸgw soi p}lin. {ll! ¼do× ‡rqetai ¨ zwª ›n tê oÔranê. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 27 . t~ daimËnia ›dŸqonto (or ›dŸqeto) oÚte t~ bibl¾a tån prof©twn oÚte t~ dåra toØ u½oØ.) Exercises — English to Greek 1.14. 3.

thus. its precise character is usually unknown. the future tense emphasizes the time of the action. English has many irregular verb forms. I point out the following irregularities even among irregular forms: ring — rang — rung. 3 Macc 1:15). sing — sang — sung. be correct to say that the future infinitive in the NT is. 79. Future Indicative of e¼m¾ A rare alternate form for the second person singular is £sei. not the kind (or aspect). Principal Parts Principal parts are often challenging to students. Heb 3:18). John 21:25. The form £sesjai occurs six times in the LXX. It occurs only one time in the LXX (2 Sam 5:2) and never in the NT. 876-77.g. Forms of the Future Middle Indicative The future middle infinitive does not occur in the NT. The future infinitive is found only six times in the NT (Acts 11:28. One can describe action that is present or past. The list should be a helpful reference as students work on the exercises. There is a certain logic to this.. Thus. for all practical purposes. sink — sank — sunk. Vocabulary The teacher might want to point out that the conditional particle e¼ differs only in accent from the present indicative second person singular of e¼m¾ (eÅ).Lesson 12 74. 23:30. 2 Chron 28:10. 77. 75. but . The future infinitive in John 21:25 is textually suspect. See BDF §318. the wild irregularity of some future tense forms will challenge students. Since future action has not yet occurred. Forms of the Future Active Indicative Unlike other tenses in Greek. The future may convey either linear or simple action. The one in Heb 3:18 is in a quotation from the LXX. 350. . 2 Macc 9:17. See Robertson. in part because Greek verbs have six of them compared to three in English. limited to e¼m¾ in the book of Acts. bring — brought — brought drink — drank — drunk. pp. but . Formation of the Future Tense For more detailed information. It would. Jdt 13:3. Irregular Futures Needless to say. a future tense in Greek usually does not indicate anything about the kind of action. It is rare in the LXX (e. 78. see Smyth §§532-41. and educated speakers generally use the language competently even without a technical understanding of principal parts. . but also because people with rusty English grammar have forgotten the structure of the English verbal system. . think — thought — thought 76. 28 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . 27:10. All of the instances in Acts are the future infinitive of e¼m¾ — £sesjai. 80. and 356. . 24:15. BDF §§338 (3).

We [on the one hand] will be in the house and will eat the bread of the land. and gods of stone do not answer. but you will not receive it. 2. 5. If it is being preached that demons will begin to judge the world. e¼ khrÖxete per¿ toØ oÔranoØ ka¿ dox}sete jeËn. but the Lord will bear them in my behalf. 13. 3. but they do not believe in the Lord. 5. 12. 3. If God is now being glorified by my brother. nor will we proclaim [it] to others. ›leusËmeja {koÖein Õmån. 9. “I preach to you (pl. we did not know the ways of peace. but you (pl. If you (pl. 8. and the evil authorities of this world will know that the Lord is God. 11. I was not able to bear my sins. therefore. 4. The slaves themselves will become disciples of the apostle and will teach others. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 29 . e¼ dŸxontai tÌ dåron t«v zw«v. Then [on the one hand]. The teacher is saying to the evil crowd. jaum}zw Ðti fŸreiv ploÀa e¼v tÌ ½erÌn ka¿ proseÖxomai ÕpŸr soØ.) [on the other hand] will be in the assembly/church and will eat the bread of heaven. Behold.) the word of truth. I also will become a messenger and will lead my son to glory. {no¾xei Ê kÖriov tÌn oÔranÌn |martwloÀv. 4. they will teach us to pray. the hour of death will come. £somai ‡ggelov t«v {delf«v Õmån ka¿ oßtoi o½ ‡njrwpoi £sontai doØloi aÔt«v. but now the prophet will come and will open our heart. and then they will hear and will know the law of heaven. The children are praying in behalf of their sister. 2. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. we will not believe this. Ê did}skalov did}xei ¨m‚v. We were marveling at the works of our teacher.81. I will open the temple to the people. 7.) are glorifying the work of sinners. The children of God will be a voice of truth in the world. but you (pl. oÔ d¡ genhsËmeja majhta¾. My son will neither send messengers nor will he write to me from another land.) also will marvel in that day. you will not receive the gift of life in the last days. 14. 10. Exercises — English to Greek 1. 6.

The aorist may denote an action that was quite lengthy. shined or shone. how the action is viewed. The adverb ›keÀ meant “there” (“in that place”) in Classical Greek.Lesson 13 82.” Wesleyan Theological Journal 15 (Fall 1980) 70-79. Of special interest to Wesleyan Christians will be the following: Robert W. the first aorist Hellenistic. note that the latter is only used intransitively in early Christian literature. Lyon. see Smyth §§542-45. Neither does the aorist have anything to do with “one time” or “once forever” action.” Journal of Biblical Literature 91 (1972) 222-31. the intervocalic sigma in the ending of the original form (›lÖsaso) dropped out and contraction occurred between alpha and omicron. the imperfect £dei (LXX. The word “punctiliar. see Smyth §§542-45. Vocabulary The verb deÀ is quite common in this particular form (LXX. 31×. NT. only the fact. See Smyth §465b. NT. 77×). the word in early Christian Literature is ›pistrŸfw. 2×. Some English verbs have dual forms for the past tense: dived or dove. The aorist denotes simple or undefined action. From the adjective Ðlov we also get hologram. Forms of the First Aorist Active Indicative For more on the forms of the first aorist active. and C. and the participle dŸon (LXX.e. NT. when a verb has both. Forms of the First Aorist Middle Indicative For more on the forms of the first aorist middle. Smith. R.” sometimes used to describe the aorist. etc. In the simplifying trend of the Koine. ›keÀ takes on both meanings. Significance of the Aorist Tense The aorist tense is sometimes misunderstood even by capable scholars. “Errant Aorist Interpreters. “The Baptism of the Spirit — Continued. “The Abused Aorist. a three-dimensional laser image. i. 30 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek .” The aorist is only punctiliar in terms of the author’s perspective. 102. On the possible distinctions between first and second aorists in Classical Greek. Note the shortened second person singular form. 16×). 2×). so it is important that students learn its proper significance from the start. see Smyth §554e. If you want to turn someone away from something. NT. 83.” Grace Theological Journal 2 (1981) 205-26. when in fact it was the normal tense for past time narration. See Frank Stagg. 86. See also Wallace. p. Other forms include the infinitive deÀn (LXX. The Third Principal Part A verb having both first and second aorist forms is |mart}nw (¨m}rthsa and ³marton). see the chart in Smyth. leaped or leapt. Regarding ›pistrŸfw and ÕpostrŸfw. but it does not stress the duration. Both are well represented in biblical Greek. pleaded or pled. The second aorist is chiefly Classical. 554-57. 3×). 85. dreamed or dreamt. not in terms of the character of the action itself. As usual. 84. 8×. and another word was used for “thither” (“to that place”). is problematic because it may imply “instantaneous” or “point action. For Classical usage.. Much mischief has been made of the aorist. pp. 4×.

but already the thrones of evil kingdoms are crying out. but the whole world speaks against the voice of God’s messenger. but she did not believe that it was (see note below) necessary to receive them. Those sinners turned to the Lord. ÕpŸstreyen Ê kÖriov ka¿ £kraxen Ðti o½ doØloi oÔq ¨to¾masan t~ ½m}tia. 2. Then the teacher dismissed the crowd and returned to his house. The verb eÅpon serves instead. and the souls of the holy ones will return to that place. The disciples were not able to heal the children there because the crowds did not believe. (2) the nonrecessive accent of the aorist active infinitive.” Exercises — English to Greek 1. but I bring to the temple a heart of love. ›pilŸgomai. most importantly.87. 10. 14. 5.) heard the word of life and you opened your heart and turned to God. 3. 13. 88. First Aorist Infinitives Note three things here: (1) the absence of the augment outside the indicative mood. 4. and Rev 22:8. You (pl.) 89. and sullŸgw. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 31 . 9. The first aorist active form £lexa and especially the middle ›lex}mhn do occur. (In 3 Macc 6:29 the form £lexen occurs. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. 11. In such a context deÀ may be translated “it was necessary. A prophet does not have glory in his own land. I was crying out in my sin. this will be upon your head. 2. It is necessary to release the slaves and to glorify God. 8. You (sing. and. Formation of the First Aorist As noted. The angel of death is coming to judge the world. for this is a day of peace in the whole land. ›klŸgomai. The verb lŸgw does not take the aorist form £lexa in biblical Greek. 6. but she persuaded me to walk in the way of righteousness. only with aoristic (undefined) action. The throne of God is in heaven. but it is textually suspect. You (pl. 12. (3) in the infinitive mode the aorist tense has nothing to do with past time. deÀ {polØsai tÌn laÌn ka¿ lÖein tÌn oÅkon Ðlon.) prepared bread for the apostle.) sent the children into the desert to die and you did not save them. dialŸgomai. but he was already eating his own bread. but see the simple form in Esth 5:1. I do not have the gift of beautiful garments. the aorist of blŸpw occurs chiefly in compounds. I wanted to persuade my sister to receive the beautiful garments. in compounds: {nalŸgw. 3. oÔk £stin g~r dikaiosÖnh ›keÀ. Re: #3 above — This sentence involves indirect discourse in past time. The evil authorities were going to kill the teacher of righteousness and bear his head into the assembly. 7. and now he is preparing a place for them in heaven. 4. ¼d¾ƒ ›xous¾ƒ £peisen Ê prof©thv tÌn ‡njrwpon {polØsai to×v doÖlouv aÔtoØ ka¿ pŸmyai aÔto×v prÌv ‡llon tËpon. however. a construction that is not explained until Lesson 24. Tob 11:16. di~ t~v |mart¾av mou oÔk ›dun}mhn ›ge¾rein tªn kefal©n mou blŸpein tÌn jrËnon t«v dox«v.

see the chart entitled “Greek Words for ‘See’ ” in the Miscellaneous Helps section of the Student Resources. 92. 91. English. (2) the irregular accent.” The second and third principal parts of ›sj¾w have the root fag-. monophagy. The formation of the second aorist is more like our verbs that undergo internal changes: sing — sang. see Smyth §§546-53. 93. leaped or leapt. 32 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . from which we get phagocytosis. Strictly speaking. and.Lesson 14 90. Forms of the Second Aorist Active Indicative For more. 337-39. Smyth §542d notes that even Homer used some first aorist forms with the thematic vowel of the second aorist.” A gimmick I use to remember the word p¾ptw (I fall) is the rhyme: “I don’t walk on tiptoe. Some Common Second Aorist Forms On the confusion of first aorist and second aorist endings in the Koine. gone. Vocabulary One of the difficulties in the vocabulary of this lesson is the association of second aorists (and. in the case of Îyomai. etc. On the various possible distinctions between first and second aorists in Classical Greek. For information about these words and the forms that derive from them. coprophagy. The Second Aorist English has various ways of forming the simple past tense. when a verb has both. Second Aorist Infinitives Note (1) the absence of the augment outside the indicative mood. 95. appearance”). §554e. see Smyth §§546-53. Forms of the Second Aorist Middle Indicative For more. (3) in the infinitive mode the aorist tense has nothing to do with past time. The word eÅdon is loosely related to English “kaleidoscope” (via eÅdov = “sight. As mentioned in §83 above. etc. most importantly. deponent futures) with present tense forms to which they are not philologically related. dreamed or dreamt. only with aoristic (undefined) action. It is the aorist form of eÂdw. lest I p¾ptw. a hypothetical form not found in the LXX or the NT. pp. “go.” In Koine the functional paradigm for the meaning “see” actually borrowed forms from four different Greek words. went. It is necessary to explain to students that certain forms functioned as the aorist or future forms of certain verbs whose aorists or futures were obsolete or comparatively rare. 94. see Smyth. see BDF §§80-81 and Robertson. form. The addition of the suffix -ed is perhaps analogous to the Greek first aorist. etc. Cf. several English verbs have dual forms for the past tense: dived or dove. The deponent future form Îyomai is loosely related to “autopsy” and “biopsy. eÅdon is neither the aorist form of Êr}w nor of blŸpw.

2. Extended Passage Suggestion A familiar and interesting story that can be read at this juncture is the story of Joseph and Potiphar’s wife (Gen 39:11-15). for he wanted to offer it in the temple.96. “Stones fell from heaven. but the people did not believe. 15. and you also will see the same signs. 13. but we received bread and wine in the place of the righteous. The prophet saw the lord on the throne and spoke to him about the reign of God. We dismissed the evil crowd. Our brother did not drink the wine. It uses several second aorist forms.) son came to me and brought the books of the law. £sqon g~r |mart¾an ›n taÀv kard¾aiv aÔtån. ›n ›ke¾n¬ t° ¨mŸrƒ o½ aÔto¿ ‡ggeloi £peson ›k toØ oÔranoØ. We will not eat in the house of sinners. In that day we drank wine and ate bread. is repetitive. In that hour we fled from the face (or presence) of God’s messenger. but I did not wish to listen.) fled into the desert and prayed. 5. 9. 4. {ll! oÔk eÂdete tÌn did}skalon aÔt«v.) did not have the authority to teach them. 4. but you (pl. and can be read by students with a little bit of vocabulary assistance.) found the way of truth in the temple and became a servant of righteousness. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. Your (pl. And the man said. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 33 . nor did they gather together the children into the houses. You (sing. for you (sing. The disciples saw the signs of heaven and fell on their faces.” 10. 2. 3. 12. oÔk ÉyËmeja tÌn j}naton Ðti eÂdomen t~ shmeÀa ka¿ ›fÖgomen {pÌ tån kakån £rgwn ¨mån. 6. The demons took the garments of the angels and threw them into the sea. 8. μljen Ê prof©thv e¼v tÌ ½erÌn ka¿ pros©negke dåra tê jeê. Exercises — English to Greek 1. 3. We saw that the apostle was healing those children. 7. for we were approaching the throne of glory. The eyes of the Lord will see both your (sing.) deeds and your heart. The sisters came to the teacher and offered their gifts. §nŸgkate ‡rton prÌv tªn {delfªn Õmån ka¿ aÔtª £fagen ›n tê oÂkæ Õmån. but now we are fleeing from sin. I myself led the children out of the assembly. 11. {ll! oÔk £pien oÅnon ›n t° ›kklhs¾ƒ. 14.

irreversible.) 102. Note how the stem of the perfect middle/passive often assimilates to the person/number ending. There are a few verbs beginning with this double consonant (y}llw.g. 11:20-21. Significance of the Perfect Tense The perfect tense has been called “the most important.” meaning “not. 573-74). 101. £yegmai (I have been blamed). immoderate. etc. 86-88. inaudible. Forms of the Perfect Active Indicative For more. A good example of assimilation in English is the prefix “in-. illegal.. 34 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . occurring only nine times in the NT and just under 100 times in the LXX.. sometimes an irregular active form. Classical Greek.Lesson 15 97. £rqomai — ›l©luja. 100. so its use by a biblical author should normally be regarded as deliberate. etc. For perfect reduplication of “x. e. pp. but “in” changes to various other forms before other consonants (e. see §63 above. See the detailed discussion in Ernest D.” For adjectives beginning with a vowel and certain consonants. was edging toward it (BDF §343). p. see Smyth §§574-79. of all the Greek tenses” (see Wallace.g. the regular form of this prefix is used (e. all but eight of the LXX occurrences are. §§80. yeÖdomai. This was not the case in the classical period (Smyth §§1940b. 1976). with its rich vocabulary and vast body of texts. 98. 103. g¾nomai — gŸgona. but perfect forms of these words are not used in the NT or LXX. exegetically. The Fourth and Fifth Principal Parts Note that deponent verbs will only have four principal parts. with its simplifying tendencies. What makes it worth including in this lesson’s vocabulary is the predominance of its perfect tense forms: tŸjnhka.. Some grammarians speak of a blurring of the lines between the aorist and the perfect. On the spelling of jn¯skw. Needless to say. The perfect form of deponent verbs sometimes takes the perfect middle/passive form. but Hellenistic Greek.). Vocabulary The verb jn¯skw is of modest significance statistically. Various Forms of Perfect Tense Reduplication I can find no example of perfect reduplication of a verb beginning with “y” in biblical Greek. 2019. etc. offers a few examples: yŸgw (I blame).g. Forms of the Perfect Middle/Passive Indicative For more. 99. incorrect). Burton. Syntax of the Moods and Tenses in New Testament Greek (Grand Rapids: Kregel. It is less common than all the other tenses. 1949).” see xhra¾nw in Mark 3:1. see Smyth §§555-60. LSJ. the compound form {pojn¯skw is far more common in both the LXX and the NT. All of the NT occurrences are perfect forms. Perfect Infinitives Note the nonrecessive accent of the perfect infinitive.

On the form of the pluperfect.” and we are convinced that our God is faithful. 8. 86. These forms bear no resemblance to their respective first principal parts and derive historically from other words altogether. 5. On the syntax of the pluperfect. thus. 271-72). for his soul has gone forth from this world? 11. ›ge¾resjai here means “rise. Often I have fallen in my house. Have you (pl. 7.) brother has died/is dead.) heard the prophet? The people say that he has come from heaven itself. The crowd marveled and said. eÂlhfa. pp. you are not able to preach to the multitudes. God himself has said. for they did not take the garments nor the wine.104. 105. A child came into the assembly and cried out. 583-86. 14. and now we must gather together beautiful stones and prepare another house for our God. 3. “We have seen the angel of the Lord and we have heard his voice. it will still make sense. and now I am persuaded/convinced that he will become a disciple. 9. 15 active and 7 passive. “I will not depart from you. The eyes of the sinner have been healed by the Lord. 6. We are not able to eat. 2. 106. The Pluperfect in Biblical Greek There are 22 pluperfects in the NT. see BDF §347 and Wallace. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 35 . In those days her son was small. get up. Often we would go out/used to go out against other peoples and would kill. Some Common Perfect Tense Forms Note the “functional” perfect forms: ›l©luja. The authorities have spoken and the slaves have been released. but now I have fallen and I can’t get up (raise myself up). but the allusion to a popular TV ad will be obscured. but now the day of peace has come near.” 12. pp. Our sister’s slave has taken the bread. Evil men/persons have destroyed the temple. see BDF §§66. but now he has become a man and he himself has a son. and eÂrhka. Your (sing. Re: #3 — Beginning students will not know that passive forms of the verb ›ge¾rw are frequently intransitive (see BDAG. Shall we pray for him. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. 4. If you (pl.) have not yet known/come to know the love of God and have not seen the signs of heaven. “I have found a dead man in the sea!” 13. Has the teacher of righteousness been raised from the dead? Has the hour of the kingdom come near? 10.” If students treat it as middle (raise myself up) or passive (be raised up).

” A woman who is a sinner would probably be ¨ |martwlËv. 3. oßtov Ê pistÌv ‡ggelov nØn ›l©lujen prÌv ¨m‚v Ðti œãrake kËsmon ¥teron. did}xete ‡llouv.Re: #8 — The sinner in this case is best referred to with the masculine pronoun “he” due to the article with the word “sinner. aÔtÌv gŸgonen majhtªv Ðti ±ggiken ¨ íra toØ jan}tou aÔtoØ. 36 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . ¨meÀv aÔto¿ pepo¾jamen tê jeê Ðti Ê did}skalov t«v dikaiosÖnhv eÂrhken ¨mÀn per¿ t«v jeoØ {g}phv. Exercises — English to Greek 1. 2. e¼ {khkËate tån lËgwn toØ prof©tou ka¿ ›gnãkate tªn {l©jeian. 4.

13:3. and there an angel of God appeared to us. The verb ›kb}llw is especially common in exorcisms. see Smyth §§585-88. An interesting example is {pokr¾nomai. so they will be brought into the house of the teacher. e. {pekr¾nato (LXX 5×. 5.Lesson 16 107. a nearly regular aorist passive. but also in the “temple cleansing” story and other contexts. 597-98. NT 7×).) sister went to the people to preach the truth. The word påv is primarily an interrogative adverb in both direct and indirect questions.g. {pekr¾jh (LXX 200+. The slave answered the man. and her words were written in a book. Vocabulary There are only two completely new words in this vocabulary list. but it also functions in exclamations: “How hard it is to enter the kingdom of God!” (Mark 10:24). “I was sent to you by my master. seven irregular forms involving stem changes. 112. In the temple a place was not found (or. 108. 110. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 37 .” 2. e. NT 100+). The Second Aorist Passive For more. Your (pl. which may use the aorist middle. and 3 Macc 3:9. 114. many intransitive verbs lack this part. 113. but I was not received into your house. respectively: four regularly formed aorist passives. Forms of the Future Passive Indicative For more. see Smyth §§590-96. 109. Formation of the Aorist Passive This reference list includes. There are five instances of it in the LXX: Isa 54:9. Forms of the Aorist Passive Indicative For more. 3. three liquid verbs (whose peculiarities in the future and aorist active are introduced in Lesson 22). four dental/lingual stems.g. and three second aorist passives. The Sixth Principal Part Because the sixth principal part involves only passive forms. which “usually prefer the passive to the middle forms of the aorist” (Smyth §356c and §§810-12). We were led into the desert by a voice from heaven. The Aorist Passive Infinitive There is a future passive infinitive (luj©sesjai) but it does not occur in the NT. 2 Macc 9:27. see Smyth §§589. no place was found) for the children. How will the dead be raised and how will the demons be cast out from this land? 4. four palatal stems. Exceptions would include deponent verbs.. but much more commonly uses the aorist passive. 26. 111.. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. a labial stem.

thus. 2. How will the kingdoms of this world be saved in the last day? 14. 12. The sinners will be led to the throne of righteousness. Our sister was judged by the authorities and was found faithful in her whole house. 7. and their deeds against the law will be known. but behold. and thus you became faithful disciples. Exercises — English to Greek 1. 11. he was able to/could be released again. ka¿ påv {qjhsËmeja e¼v dËxan. 9. ›xebl©jhn d¡ ›k tªn g«n ÕpÌ tån ›xousiån. 3. 4. You were baptized in the lake and you were taught the way. he neither ate nor drank. eÕrŸjh l¾jov kalÌv ›n t° ›r©mæ ka¿ §nŸqjh e¼v tÌ ½erËn. In that hour the eyes of our son were healed.6. but he wanted them to be sent to the children. The evil man was not known by face to the authorities. ›n t° írƒ toØ jan}tou mou Éfj©sontai ‡ggeloi ka¿ lhmfj©somai prÌv tÌn jrËnon toØ jeoØ. and the crowds marveled that they were not destroyed. Did}skein to×v majht~v {pest}lhn. {pekr¾jh Ê prof©thv. 10. and he went into the assembly to glorify God. 13. påv ›gerjhsËmeja ÕpÌ jeoØ ›n t° ›sq}t¬ ¨mŸrƒ. 38 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . Beautiful gifts were presented to the prophet. 8. Bread and wine were prepared for the apostle. Stones were thrown into the boats. the nominative and vocative singular is that a Greek word may not end with the letter t. and we will be gathered together around the throne of God forever and ever. 117. and angiosperm. 11. 7. The stem swmat. The noun a¼ãn occurs in a variety of idioms. The slave fell from the boat into the mouth of the sea. note the following: anemia. but it was the will of the Lord to heal us. Will the people be led by the Spirit? 8. 5.shortens (in the nominative. noctambulist. “Our bodies came near to the point of death. and y. We did not believe the words of the messenger. spermophile (= a ground squirrel!). 118. We do not know the name of that man. The Third Declension See Smyth §§240-78 for a full treatment of this.Lesson 17 115. onomatopoeia. Neuter Nouns in -ma There are eight nouns of this type in the vocabulary. and the kingdom of righteousness will appear. 116. Monosyllabic Nouns of the Third Declension See Smyth §252. See the note on §117 above. Basic Third Declension Endings The reason why the final tau drops from the stem {rqont. and he does not have offspring.” 12. 2. Vocabulary Countless technical words derive from the vocabulary in this lesson. it is necessary to proclaim the will of God in this evil age.) will know that flesh and blood cannot save a person from sin. x. archosaur. The blood of the righteous prophet will be seed. never in the NT. In that night you (pl. 120. In addition to those given in the text. archangel. 10. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. for the truth was not in his mouth but rather wine. 4. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 39 . See Smyth §133. 9. 3. Until the spirit comes from heaven. The women answered. s. accusative. and vocative singular) by dropping the final t. nor will a demon’s words be heard in the assembly. sarcoma. The phrase ¥wv toØ a¼ãnov occurs 33 times in the LXX. The only consonants that may stand at the end of a Greek word are n. the most diverse declension. The phrase e¼v tÌn a¼åna is common in the Gospel of John but never occurs in Revelation. The deeds of the flesh will not be glorified. 6. and his body was not seen again. The faithful ruler of that land is about to die. The dual and plural form e¼v to×v a¼ånav tån a¼ãnwn is common in Revelation but never occurs in John. r. In the name of the man of peace we wanted to raise up a stone beside the road. Night does not exist/There is no night in the kingdom of glory. From the mouth of our teacher these words of life are coming forth. but his wife is going to speak to the rulers in his behalf.

13. 2. eÅpen Ê ‡rqwn Ðti Éfe¾lete b}llein spŸrmata ¥wv ¨ n×x £rqetai. ›jerapeÖjh tÌ såma toØ tŸknou. 40 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . 4. 14. oßtoi o½ ‡njrwpoi ka¿ aßtai a½ gunaÀkev oÔ ginãskousi tÌ jŸlhma toØ jeoØ oÔd¡ tÌ Înoma toØ prof©tou aÔtoØ. Exercises — English to Greek 1. ›gg¾zomen d¡ tê pneÖmati ›n taÀv kard¾aiv ¨mån. Blood was found in the man’s mouth. but his wife said to the rulers that he [had] died in the night and she had not been there. 3. ka¿ nØn Ó©mata t«v zw«v ›xŸrqetai ›k toØ stËmatov aÔt«v. dun}meja ¼deÀn s}rka ka¿ aÆma. We have seen the sign of the Spirit and have come to know the name of God’s holy one.

p. Tense and Time in the Participle The participle is fundamentally timeless. 127. See BDF §101 (p. I am not sinning against the Lord nor am I persecuting the righteous. 128. coincident. 125. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. Syntax of the Participle For more on the syntax of the participle. See Smyth §§2039-41. simple occurrence. “from the chair”). Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 41 . Because of these tendencies some grammarians speak of the “relative time” of the participle.g. see Smyth §§305. I will”) was only partially valid in Classical Greek. 182. or subsequent to that of the leading verb (in any tense) depends on the context” (Smyth §1872). . This is true even though there are certain tendencies in practice. At that time the apostles were going through the land preaching and bringing good news to the people. p. The one who sits on the throne knows the hearts of sinners and reckons sins to them. 123. The rough distinction between jŸlw (“I am willing. etc. see Smyth §§2039-2148. 2. Vocabulary Additional derivatives: ›rg}zomai — ergometer. k}jhmai — ex cathedra (lit. See the chart in a very helpful identifier of these forms. Wallace.). Being a faithful disciple (because I am . Introduction to Participles The description “verbal adjective” should be fixed in the mind since it succinctly identifies the dual characteristics and functions of the participle. Forms of the Present Middle/Passive Participle The morpheme -men. e. 124. the present tense participle generally denotes action coincident with the main verb.Lesson 18 121. . It largely disappears in Koine Greek. 122. I consent”) and boÖlomai (“I want. c). the aorist tense generally denotes antecedent action. “The tenses of the participle express only continuance. The Present Participle of e¼m¾ Needless to say. 126. and completion with permanent result. 612-55. Forms of the Present Active Participle For more on the forms of the present active participle. 52) and BDAG.. 614. pp. 3. the participial forms of e¼m¾ are identical to the endings of the present active participle of lÖw (except for breathing marks and accents). Whether the action expressed by the participle is antecedent. (Smyth §1872a.

wish to send good things to your children. Being persons of the Spirit. 5.) house. the woman cried out to the God who sees and heals his children. [While] sitting on a stone beside your (pl. If you (pl. [since we are] not speaking words of truth. If we say that we have not sinned. therefore. mª logizËmenov Ðti eÅden aÔtÌn Ê jeÌv. 8. The ones who wish to find peace ought to receive into their houses those who are traveling through the land. Your possessions are not your life. Éfe¾lousin o½ kaj©menoi ›n tê oÂkæ ka¿ proseuqËmenoi ka¿ ›rg}zesjai £rga {gaj~ toÀv {delfoÀv ka¿ taÀv {delfaÀv aÔtån. [although] being evil. pisteÖontev ›n tê jeê. 42 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . Angels brought bread to the sisters who were being persecuted by the authorities.). we were reckoning that God is able to raise us up even from the dead. ›l}bete t~ Õp}rqonta Õmån ka¿ ±ljete prÌv tÌn oÅkon Õmån. μljen e¼v tÌ ½erÌn Ê {nªr Ê |mart}nwn kat~ toØ nËmou. will God not send good things to you? 11. 2. The Lord of glory will not draw near to the one who does works of the law but to the one who believes in the God who saves sinners. it is not necessary to have beautiful houses and garments and gifts. 9. 3. we will not be able to draw near to the throne of life. 6. [As she was] dying in the desert.4. mª boulËmenoi {koØsai tån lËgwn toØ prof©tou. you would often open the book of the law. The one who trusts God and does righteousness will be led into heaven. 10. 4. 7. eÔaggelizËmeja toÀv diãkousin ¨m‚v |martwloÀv. 12. 14. Exercises — English to Greek 1. How good it is to hear the words of the prophets who are bringing good news! 13.

Context determines the relationship between the time of the participle’s action and that of the main verb. p. cries out) in the synagogue will know the peace of God. 614. 4. The soul that has cried out (or simply. but simultaneous action is also a possibility (Smyth §1872c). In Koine the functional paradigm for the meaning “see” actually borrowed forms from four different Greek words. After they had greeted the brothers and sisters. Strictly speaking eÅdon is no more the aorist of Êr}w than it is the aorist of blŸpw. 3. 654-55. See the chart in Wallace. 134. In practice. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. pinniped. 130. 132.morpheme. and the absence of the augment.Lesson 19 129. 2. the man went into the desert to pray. aorist participles generally denote action antecedent to that of the main verb. 136. Second Aorist Middle Participles The identifying marks here are the second aorist stem and the morpheme -men-. see the chart entitled “Greek Words for ‘See’ ” in the Miscellaneous Helps section of the Student Resources. the crowd that was drinking wine began to listen to him.morpheme. Genitive Absolute The genitive absolute is grammatically independent. note the -sa. s}bbaton — sabbatical. a hypothetical form not found in the LXX and NT. Presumably there is a logical connection between the genitive absolute and its main clause. 131. pp. Aorist Middle Participles For aorist middle participles. Second Aorist Active Participles Remember that the true present tense verb of which eÅdon is the aorist is eÂdw. Aorist Active Participles For aorist active participles. the apostles departed to another land. The participle is fundamentally timeless. chiropodist. cephalopod. but not logically independent. chiropodist. Taking along his mother. 135. When the teacher sat down on a stone. and qe¾r — chiromancy. The genitive absolute is always an adverbial (circumstantial) participle and often comes at the beginning of its sentence. 133. note the -sa. or it wouldn’t be there. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 43 .morpheme and the absence of the augment. For detailed information about these words and the forms that derive from them. Vocabulary Additional English derivatives: poÖv — octopus. Syntax of the Aorist Participle The syntax of the aorist participle is essentially the same as that of the present. See Smyth §§2070-75 and Wallace. the -men.

” 8. When the prophet came into the synagogue. μljen Ê prof©thv ka¿ ›jer}peusen aÔtËn. 2. This illustrates the constructio ad sensum. {ll! oÔk {kousj©sontai ÕpÌ toØ kur¾ou toØ sabb}tou. £ti {spazomŸnwn ¨mån tªn mhtŸra ka¿ tÌn patŸra Õmån. jeoØ kaj¾santov ›p¿ toØ jrËnou ›n oÔranê.” 9. 12. Exercises — NT Re: #9 — The grammatically singular (but logically plural) subject has a plural verb. 10. the women who were sitting in that place said. 6. 3. The ones who did not consider the love of God said to you (pl. Even those not having feet and hands are able to do deeds of righteousness. the one who was going up to the temple fell at the feet of the teacher. Exercises — English to Greek 1. ¼dän to×v pËdav ka¿ t~v qeÀrav toØ {ndrËv. 4. o½ |martwlo¿ o½ diãxantev to×v dika¾ouv e¼seleÖsontai e¼v tªn sunagwgªn proseÖxasjai. 14. While my mother was still preparing bread. “You must not heal on the Sabbath. 11. The one who preached to you (pl. 7. Having arrived and having gathered the children. the father presented the gifts. paregŸnesje ÕmeÀv ka¿ ¨ {delf© sou. When the Spirit had led the sinners into the church. 44 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . we opened our mouth and proclaimed the good news. See BDF §134.) the word of truth has seen the book of life and has come to know [gained knowledge of] the things that will be. The man who had taken a kingdom and wanted to know about it sent servants to see it.). “We wish to lift up our hands and glorify the Lord. When the Sabbath arrived. We ate and drank with your (sing.) father after he had greeted the slaves and loosened his garment. the messengers arrived. ginãskomen Ðti o½ d¾kaioi l©myontai tªn basile¾an ›n t° ›sq}t¬ ¨mŸrƒ.5. 13.

2. By the nature of the case.) In practice. Having been taught by the teacher. and generally.” As for the accusative singular form of q}riv. In the participial mode. 142. Perfect tense participles denote completed action with a continuing result. q}rin strongly predominates (LXX 117×. (This is the significance of the absence of the augment. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. 138. note the reduplication. 614. See the chart in Wallace. but in that day God will graciously give them eyes to see. p. but simultaneous action is also possible (Smyth §1872c. note the -je. They were sitting in the prison and were wanting to hear the gospel.Lesson 20 137. Aorist Passive Participles For aorist passive participles. 3. one might use the memory device: “The blind man found it hard to floss his teeth.morpheme common to other middle/passive forms. 143. 140. the -men. Perfect Middle/Passive Participles For perfect middle/passive participles. pp. Periphrastic Participles Periphrastic participles are roundabout ways of expressing the action of certain indicative verb tenses. how shall we receive the life prepared for us in heaven? Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 45 . Now the blind are not able to see the things that have been created by God. this action is almost always prior to the action of the main verb. A good NT example of the concessive participle is found in Mark 8:18 — Éfjalmo×v £qontev oÔ blŸpete ka¿ îta £qontev oÔk {koÖete. 141. [If we are] sinning often against the law. NT 51×). and the lack of the k tense indicator. we both know the grace of God and we are making it known to others. hagioscope. For the word tuflËv. 622-45. 614). pp. fulak© — phylactery. p. aorist participles generally denote action antecedent to that of the main verb. Nuances of the Adverbial Participle These nuances are treated at length in the standard grammars. p. 648. note the reduplication and the k tense indicator. See the chart in Wallace. See Smyth §§2054-69 and Wallace.morpheme and the absence of the augment. The form q}rita is rare (LXX 2×. 647-49. 139. Vocabulary Additional derivatives: |gi}zw — hagiology. Perfect Active Participles For perfect active participles. 4. 5. the aorist tense does not denote past time action. NT 2×). I received the gifts that had been consecrated and I brought them through the doors of the temple. Wallace.

jÖrav {neægmŸnhv toÀv {postËloiv. their mother being willing. the woman made known that an evil man had entered her house and fled having taken bread. Seeing the beautiful heavens and the good earth. and their names are written in heaven. I said. “Lord. 10. 9.” 8. not even yet do you believe these signs. 13. 11. The children who have been thrown out of the house will return.) yourselves have heard the words of the ones who have been healed. 4. o½ {pËstoloi μsan did}skontev to×v majht~v Ðti {gaj~ t~ ktisjŸnta ÕpÌ toØ jeoØ. These disciples are sanctified in the Holy Spirit. ¨giasmŸnoi t° q}riti jeoØ. you (pl. [Although] you (pl.6.” 14. but the things written in your heart make known the grace of God. Exercises — English to Greek 1. for the Lord forgave me my sins. gnwr¾sousin ‡lloiv Ðti Ê kÖriov qar¾zetai |martwloÀv. ±ljomen e¼v tªn fulakªn ka¿ §rx}meja khrÖssein tÌ eÔaggŸlion. saying.) prayed. 12. “I will make the gospel known to the people. [Because] we saw the doors of the prison [standing] open. a½ gunaÀkev a½ pepisteukuÀai sun}gousi to×v tuflo×v ka¿ ‡gousin aÔto×v e¼v tÌ ½erËn. [By] crying out in the night. we marveled at the grace of God. You (sing. 2. When you had gone into the synagogue.) do not have books. we have come to believe that the world was created by God. 7. 46 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . we have seen the blood of your children who have been persecuted. Answering my father. 3.

-ev.” See Smyth §133. -ete. staurËw — staurolite.Lesson 21 144. 146. The exceptions would be monosyllabic endings containing a short vowel (e. hallucinogenic. The Declension of p‚v The stem of p‚v is revealed in the genitive singular form: pant-. 148. of yourselves. Accentuation of Contract Verbs Since most person/number verb endings are either long vowels. 149. ourselves. Principal Parts of Contract Verbs The general tendency to lengthen the contract vowel in the formation of the principal parts is treated in Smyth §487. pp. are discussed in §488. etc. of ourselves.g. ¨mån aÔtån. etc.. ¨m‚v aÔtoÖv. 150. 145. Reflexive Pronouns Whereas biblical Greek uses the third person reflexive œautån. Õmån aÔtån. Vocabulary Additional English derivatives: {koloujŸw — anacoluthon. see Smyth §395.g. diphthongs. p‚v — panorama. see Smyth §59. E. -ousi). ¨mÀn aÔtoÀv. the resulting accent of contract verbs usually winds up on the contracted syllable.. e. and other words ending in -genic. 151. 782-84. The exceptions. for the plural of all three persons (“ourselves. It does not include all possible vowel combinations.g. panoply. Introduction to Contract Verbs Smyth gives the principles of contraction in §§49-55. In these cases the accent recedes back to the verb stem.. to or for ourselves. The nominative is modified because a Greek word may not end with the letter “t. For the full conjugation of the verb z}w. For the full range of possibilities. Classical Greek added corresponding forms of the personal pronoun for the first and second person plurals. or two syllables (-omen. -e). lalŸw — echolalia. the complete conjugations and related remarks are given in §§385-99. ›po¾e + on = ›po¾oun. Contraction Chart This chart gives the range of possible contractions for contract verbs.. 147. e.g. Some combinations occur only in noun and adjective formations. coprolalia. genn}w — carcinogenic. The Use of p‚v On the use of p‚v see also Smyth §1174 and BDAG.” or “themselves”). kalŸw. Êr}w — cyclorama.” “yourselves. See Smyth §329. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 47 . the imperfect singular forms: -on.

but the angel of death said. My mother was exhorting my wife and me to beget children. 7. My teacher was speaking to these sinners. 48 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . e¼ {gap†v tÌn kÖrion ›k p}shv t«v kard¾av sou ka¿ e¼ {gap†v seautËn. All the women made for themselves beautiful garments. and we exhort [them] to live not for themselves. but we do not live in his house nor do we walk in his ways.) taught others to fear the Lord. all those who followed him asked for his body. oÚte peripateÀte ›n dikaiosÖn¬ oÚte poieÀte tÌ £rgon toØ oÔranoØ. but I seek to love all those who persecute me. but for the Lord. 10. If I seek to glorify myself. The blind do not see the things created by God. 3. The slave sees from the land a boat on the sea and calls to those working in it. 2. Ê g~r jeÌv kaleÀ ¨m‚v œautê ka¿ {kolouj©somen t° Êdê t«v e¼r©nhv. The children called their mother and asked for bread from her. oÔ foboÖmeja to×v stauroØntav tÌ såma. 8. you (sing. but evil men threw them into the sea. I do not yet consider myself to have fulfilled the entire law. but they did not wish to follow him nor to walk in the way of the Spirit.) were wanting to rule the land. oÔ dox}zw ›mautÌn Ðti ›gŸnnhsa u½Ën.152. p}ntev o½ ‡njrwpoi o½ zåntev ›n t° ›r©mæ ›z©toun plhroØn to×v lËgouv toØ prof©tou. Îy¬ tªn basile¾an t«v dËxhv. but she was not able to prepare it. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. That man was speaking about himself and not about the grace of God. but the eyes of their heart see the kingdom of heaven. Do you (pl.) fear the rulers who crucify the holy prophets and persecute the faithful? 3. 5. Exercises — English to Greek 1. 6. you (sing.) did not listen to him nor did you follow [him]. Making for yourself a throne. 2. but we were still preparing ourselves. 13. Therefore. 4. 11. That man begat my sister and me. After the Lord had been crucified by the authorities and had died. 9. 5. but did you teach yourself to do the same? 12. You (sing. {ll! a¼toØmai tªn kard¾an patrÌv par~ jeoØ.” 15. 14. But we love all our brothers and all our sisters. “In this night I will require your soul from you. I will neither fulfill the word of God nor will I do the work of the Spirit. e¼ oÔ laleÀte tªn {l©jeian oÔd¡ parakaleÀte p}ntav |martwloÖv. 4.

phototropism. Possessive Adjectives See Wallace. 614-20. p. 154. see Smyth §§18-19. 4. God will judge each of us in the last day. 159. 348 and BDF §285. In that day fire will fall from heaven. First Aorist of Liquid Verbs See Smyth §402. photophobia.) books and fled. for he took your (sing. 2. photosynthesis. see Smyth §§400-402. Reciprocal Pronouns Readers of NT Greek may be familiar only with the masculine forms of the reciprocal pronoun. but whither will we go? For we have not kept the commandments of God. 156. Over half of these are found in the Fourth Gospel. The one who sows will cast the seed on the earth. hydrophobia. 157. Introduction to Liquid Verbs On liquid consonants. 5. etc. but we think that the evil one will come and will take it away. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 49 . some second aorist. The LXX has the neuter form ‡llhla (Exod 25:20. The first person singular possessive (›mËv) is the most common possessive adjective. some irregular. The second person singular (sËv) occurs 27 times in the NT. The first person plural possessive (¨mŸterov) occurs only 7 times in the NT. On liquid verbs. 36:12) and the feminine forms {ll©laiv (Exod 26:5) and {ll©lav (Ezek 1:11.. We will find that man and we will judge him according to our law. 160. occurring 76 times in the NT. fåv — photon. and the angel of light will announce the word to all flesh. but we are worshiping the God who made the water and the land and all things in them. Vocabulary Additional English derivatives: pØr — pyre. Forms of Common Liquid Verbs This list is a hodgepodge of forms. pyrosis. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. Future of Liquid Verbs See Smyth §401. We know that we will die. You (pl. hydrozoan. spe¾rw — spore. 6. Lev 25:3). 158.g. Üdwr — hydraulic. 37:17).) are worshiping demons. Note that sperå (future) does not occur in the NT but is found eleven times in the LXX (e. 3. Also the formally ambiguous {ll©lwn is feminine in Amos 4:3. 155. some liquid.Lesson 22 153. so we must exhort each other often. the second person plural (ÕmŸterov) 11 times. Exod 23:10.

Those who seemed to have the fire of the Spirit lifted up [their] hands and prayed to God. Lord. 50 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek .) will speak my words to the crowds and you will send your servants to gather the children into the temple. Exercises — English to Greek 1. but will our work remain? 13. parek}lesen ¨ gunª ¨m‚v {paggŸllousa Ðti Ê jeÌv krineÀ to×v mª peripatoØntav ›n tê fwt¿ met! {ll©lwn. we sowed seeds of peace. and the Lord himself will raise us to live in the light with one another. You (pl. 12. but she remained there and announced the whole will of God. for God sent his holy prophet announcing/to announce these things. ¥kaston ›n tê ¼d¾æ tËpæ. 14. 9. 5. ›thr©samen t~v ›ntol~v toØ jeoØ ka¿ ›spe¾ramen e¼r©nhn ›n t° ¨metŸrƒ g°. 2. 3. 8. Those sinners think that [by] keeping the commandments of human beings they will find favor with God. {ll~ meneÀ t~ bibl¾a t~ ›m~ met! ›moØ. 10.) will throw your bread upon the water and you will worship the son of righteousness in this place. {pŸsteilav to×v so×v doÖlouv ‹rai t~ bibl¾a t~ ›m}.7. tÌ daimËnion baleÀ pØr ›p¿ to×v oÂkouv to×v ÕmetŸrouv ka¿ {pokteneÀ p}ntav to×v mª proskunoØntav aÔtê. 4. The Lord sent my sister whither she did not want to go. You (pl. The work of each [person] will be judged with fire. 11. We will remain in the truth. oÔ dokoØmen Ðti peseÀtai Üdwr {pÌ toØ oÔranoØ. In your name. poreuËmeja oÞn prÌv tªn j}lassan Ðpou eÕr©somen aÔtË.

Lesson 23
161. Vocabulary Most of the words in this vocabulary list are function words for constructions with the subjunctive mood. More English derivatives: {gor}zw — agoraphobia; graf© — countless words beginning or ending with “graph”: graphite, graphology, autograph, paragraph, telegraph, etc. 162. Introduction to the Subjunctive Mood The usual negative with the subjunctive is m©. The rough-and-ready rule for Hellenistic Greek is that oÔ is the negative for the indicative mood; m© the negative for all other moods. The rules for Classical Greek were far more complicated, as a glance at Smyth §§2688-2768 indicates. But even biblical Greek admits of a few exceptions to the rough-and-ready rule. See BDF §370 (4), §430, and Robertson, p. 1172. 163. Forms of the Subjunctive Note the basics: (1) the chief indicator is the long variable vowel; (2) primary endings are used throughout; and (3) the augment is lacking in the aorist. The meaning of the subjunctive is entirely dependent on context; thus no translations are given in the paradigms. 164. Uses of the Subjunctive Refer to the standard grammars for a full treatment of the subjunctive: Smyth §§1795-1813; Wallace, pp. 461-80; BDF §§363-83. Regarding the deliberative subjunctive, note that the answer to a deliberative question is an imperative: “What should we do?” “Do this!” Note that the subjunctive of emphatic negation constitutes an exception to the rough-and-ready rule of negative particles in biblical Greek. Here both negatives are used with a non-indicative mood. 165. Tense and Time in the Subjunctive The same thing that was said about the participle (§126 above) can be repeated here: tense has nothing to do with time in the subjunctive. The tense conveys kind of action or aspect. Thus, the difference between PisteÖwmen (present) and PisteÖswmen (aorist) is something like “Let us continue to believe, persist in believing” vs. simply “Let us believe.” A locus classicus for this distinction is John 20:31, where a textual variant raises precisely this question. 166. The Present Subjunctive of e¼m¾ The third person plural form (îsin) always has the moveable nu in the NT and almost always in the LXX (only two exceptions: Job 39:30; Ezek 14:16). For this form, the moveable nu doesn’t move very much. 167. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. The teacher of righteousness dismissed the crowds in order that when they had departed into the villages they might buy bread for themselves.
Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 51

2. Let us gather the people together into the temple in order that we may be exhorted through the scriptures. 3. Wherever you (pl.) enter into a house, if you find the book of the law there, you will know that the glory of God remains in that place. 4. Therefore, let us judge one another no longer, for when we judge our brothers and sisters, we do not fulfill the will of the Spirit. 5. How shall we live in this world in order that the people might see the light of the gospel? 6. If I do not greet her at the door nor offer [her] water to drink, my wife’s mother will not return again to our house. 7. The one who comes to me I will never cast out, and the one who seeks peace I will never send into the desert. 8. If you (pl.) do not sanctify the Lord in your hearts, how will you worship him forever? 9. Whenever you (pl.) pray, you shall not be like those who love to pray in the roads in order that people might see them. 10. Let us no longer sin against heaven, but let us do what is good in order that we may be children of God’s kingdom. 11. Never again will they buy bread in this village, for all those who ate it are no longer living. 12. But whenever the son of man comes, the writings of the prophets will be fulfilled. 13. When I was with you I used to say, “Let us not fear sin nor death, for we are no longer slaves of the flesh. 14. Shall we drink wine until we are not able to walk nor speak? Exercises — English to Greek 1. Ðtan £ljwmen e¼v tªn kãmhn ›ke¾nhn, zhtoØmen tÌn prof©thn Ãna {koÖswmen p}ntwn tån lËgwn aÔtoØ. 2. mhkŸti {koloujåmen tê {njrãpæ t«v |mart¾av mhd¡ ›rgazãmeja t~ £rga t«v sarkËv. 3. ›~n {no¾x¬ Ê jeÌv tªn jÖran t«v fulak«v, ›xeleusËmeja e¼v tªn ÊdËn, ›~n d¡ m©, {pojanoÖmeja mŸnontev p¾stoi tê lËgæ. 4. {koÖswmen t«v fwn«v toØ pneÖmatov Ðpwv ginãskwmen tÌ jŸlhma toØ jeoØ ka¿ peripatåmen ›n tê fwt¾. 5. oÔ mª dox}s¬ ¨ |g¾a gunª t~ £rga tån luËntwn t~v graf}v. 6. {gor}sw Ðlhn tªn basile¾an Ãna ‡rqw ›p¿ tê jrËnæ;


Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek

Lesson 24
168. Vocabulary Additional English derivatives: {rq© — archangel, archenemy, archetype, archive; glåssa — glossitis, epiglottis, isogloss; paid¾on — pedagogy; prË — prognosis, prolepsis; sof¾a — sophist, sophomore, theosophy. A bit of trivia: The word íste would seem to need a circumflex accent (short ultima, accented long penult), but the word is a composite of âv and te. In such a case the word is accented as if the parts were separate words. Thus ív te (a proclitic followed by an enclitic) becomes íste. See above, §42 (3) and Smyth §§164, 186. 169. Introduction to the Infinitive The description “verbal noun” should be fixed in the mind since it succinctly identifies the dual characteristics and functions of the infinitive. Smyth (§1966b) notes that the term “infinitive” “denotes a verbal form without any limitations (finis) of number and person.” When used with a definite article, the infinitive is regarded as a singular, neuter noun. The form is indeclinable, even though an accompanying article may be in any of the cases (except the vocative). Since both the subject and the direct object of an infinitive will be the accusative case, ambiguity may arise as to which is which. A classic example is found in Phil 1:7. Does Paul have the Philippians in his heart, or do the Philippians have Paul in their heart? 170. Forms of the Infinitive These forms have been given throughout the text when the respective tenses and voices were introduced. Note the standard identifiers, tense suffixes, reduplication, etc. The aorist forms lack the augment, as always outside the indicative. 171. Syntax of the Infinitive For a study of the infinitive, see C. W. Votaw’s The Use of the Infinitive in Biblical Greek (Chicago: C. W. Votaw, 1896). Votaw’s statistics of the use of the infinitive in the NT are summarized in H. E. Dana and Julius R. Mantey, A Manual Grammar of the Greek New Testament, pp. 213-14. The infinitive occurs 2276 times in the NT. Most of these (1957×) are anarthrous (lacking the article). In nearly half of the cases (1104×), the infinitive functions as the (anarthrous) object of a verb. The articular infinitive as the object of a preposition receives some emphasis in §171 of the Primer because its meanings might not be immediately intelligible to the student. This use is found 200 times in the NT, about 9 percent of the 2276 total. See the standard grammars for more on the syntax of the infinitive: BDF §§388-410; Smyth §§1966-2038; Wallace, pp. 587-611. 172. Indirect Discourse See the quote from Callimachus (on the first recto page just inside the front cover) for a fairly simple example of indirect discourse with the infinitive: “Callimachus, the grammarian, used to say that a big book was equal to a big bother.” Since Callimachus would have meant a scroll, the saying may refer to the physical difficulty of handling a lengthy scroll.
Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 53

173. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. You (sing.) say, “It is not lawful to work on the Sabbath nor to heal,” but we wish to open the eyes of the blind. 2. The ruler commanded the beloved slave to receive the beautiful garments as gifts. 3. Before beholding the glory of heaven, it is necessary for a person to walk in truth in this world. 4. It is an evil/bad thing to take a child from the house of his mother. 5. Because the Lord had not loosened the man’s tongue, he was not able to witness concerning the grace of God. 6. He spoke a parable against them with the result that they took up stones to throw at him. 7. As the teacher was dying, his son said that he had the wisdom of his father and would teach in his place. 8. The beginning of wisdom is to fear the Lord and worship him. 9. After hearing the parable, the sinners asked the disciples to depart from their village. 10. If the tongue wishes to rule the whole body, the head ought to command the mouth not to open. 11. We have come to see the beginning of the last days before the angel of death appears. 12. Is it lawful so to cry out in the temple such that peace is destroyed and the people are not able to hear the scriptures? 13. Evil men/persons testified against the apostle in order that he might be judged and thrown out of the synagogue. 14. While you (pl.) were beholding the beloved child, all the holy women arrived, saying, “It is necessary that she be baptized.” 15. You (pl.) knew that the prophet was not faithful; therefore, you said that you would not follow him into the desert but would shun him. Exercises — English to Greek 1. ka¿ ¨ glåssa paid¾ou dÖnatai martur«sai Ðti Éfe¾lomen {gap‚n {ll©louv. 2. prÌ toØ lŸgein aÔtÌn parabolªn tê Îqlæ, Ê {gaphtÌv did}skalov t«v sof¾av ›kŸleusen aÔto×v kaj¾sai par~ tªn j}lassan. 3. ›n t° ‡rq¬ ›boulËmeja jewreÀn tÌ prËswpon toØ jeoØ, nØn d¡ {koÖomen Ðti oÔk £xestin ¼deÀn aÔtËn. 4. di~ tÌ pisteÖein me e¼v tÌn kÖrion, oÔ foboØmai to×v ‡rqontav t«v g«v taÖthv. 5. ±ljete di~ t«v ›r©mou e¼v tÌ ›negkeÀn ‡rton toÀv paid¾oiv, {ll! ›l©lujan prÌv ‡llon tËpon íste mhkŸti tÌn ‡rton eÅnai {gajËn.


Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek

Lesson 25
174. Vocabulary More English derivatives: {sjen©v — asthenia, neurasthenia, myasthenia; basileÖv — basilisk; dÖnamiv — dynamo, dynasty; Îrov — orogeny, orography; pl©rhv — plerocercoid; pËliv — acropolis, cosmopolis, megalopolis, necropolis; tŸlov — telic, teliospore. 175. More Third Declension Noun Types Full information on this, the most complex declension, can be found in Smyth §§240-85. 176. Feminine Nouns in -iv, -ewv See Smyth §268-74 for more on this type. 177. Masculine Nouns in -euv, -ewv See Smyth §275-78 for more on this type. 178. Neuter Nouns in -ov, -ouv See Smyth §263-65 for more on this type. 179. Adjectives of the Third Declension Other adjectives of the third declension in biblical Greek include {sjen©v (sick, weak), ›gkrat©v (self-controlled), eÔgen©v (well born, noble), and eÔseb©v (devout, godly). Only {sjen©v occurs frequently in the NT. Both {sjen©v and eÔseb©v are common in the LXX. 180. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. If the things that have been preached by the disciples are true, the judgment of God is about to fall on our city. 2. Being full of faith and power, your sisters did not fear the king. 3. As the priests were going up to the mountain, evil men entered into the temple to take the book of the law. 4. Those men were from a race of high priests; therefore, they were offering gifts in behalf of the sins of the nation. 5. The work of the scribe is to write the words of God in(to) a book and to teach them to the people. 6. I was weak and in prison, but you (pl.) did not come to see me nor did you pray for me. 7. The one who remains to the end will be saved and will know the love of the Lord. 8. The one who sent me is true; therefore, I will go and declare his truth to the nations. 9. Let us have faith in God so that, whenever the son of man returns, we will be found faithful in the day of judgment. 10. Beholding signs and wonders being performed through the hands of the prophet, the chief priests and the scribes marveled and glorified the king of heaven. 11. [Although] being weak in body and spirit, the blind man still wants to go forth from the city to be healed by the teacher on the mountain. 12. Being, therefore, descendants of God, we must not think that God is stone.
Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 55

13. The end of that righteous slave will be true glory, but the end of this evil priest will be a judgment of fire. 14. The king said that the entire city was full of blood and the angel of judgment would come upon it. Exercises — English to Greek 1. basile×v d¾kaiov jerapeÖsei tÌ £jnov= ¨ g« aÔtoØ £stai pl©rhv e¼r©nhv ¥wv tŸlouv (e¼v tŸlov). 2. dÖnatai prof©thv poi«sai shmeÀa, {ll! £qousin ½ereÀv ka¿ grammateÀv toØto tÌ gŸnov t«v dun}mewv; 3. eÅpon t~ £jnh, Poreuãmeja prÌv tÌ Îrov toØ kur¾ou Ãna eÜrwmen tªn p¾stin. 4. ¨to¾masen Ê jeÌv pËlin tê laê aÔtoØ, ka¿ ›n t° ¨mŸrƒ kr¾sewv feÖxontai ›keÀ p}ntev o½ {sjeneÀv ka¿ menoØsin ›n {g}p¬.


Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek

” 182.g. 485. tenses in the imperative pertain to the kind of action. carpogonium. pp. All imperatives are oriented toward the future. The aorist by no means implies that the action called for is momentary. See the discussion in Wallace. 187. pp. pericarp. Introduction to the Imperative The most common use of the imperative mood is for positive commands. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 57 . l}be is found in the NT. carpel. The second aorist imperative of eÕr¾skw is irregularly accented eÕrŸ. progressive. 723-25. pp. 485-93.” See Smyth §1841. they outnumber prohibitions about five to one in the NT. some will be familiar with the liturgical prayer — kÖrie. Forms of the First Aorist Imperative On the endings of the first aorist imperative.. Tense and Time in the Imperative Mood As in the other nonindicative moods. or repetitive. have mercy!” (Matt 17:15). mesocarp. 184. but this significance stems from lexical and contextual factors rather than the tense per se. It may call for the continuance of an action already begun. agronomy. 485). E. but note that biblical Greek is not necessarily consistent in matters of accent. Vocabulary More English derivatives: {grËv — agrarian. see Smyth §§466 and 684. ›lŸhson. not the time. labŸ in the LXX. “I rejoice when I see the city of Cairo. Wallace lists only a handful in the NT (p. Here. nor aorist imperatives to past time. but ¼dŸ in the LXX. Âde is found in the NT. use the memory device: The man who had crawled across the desert sands said. Smyth §§1835-44. Wallace. as always. parthenocarpy. see Smyth §§466. For the verb ›leŸw. According to Wallace (p. 713-25. I have tried to qualify the distinction slightly by the word “often. Present imperatives do not pertain to present time. Prohibitions The distinction between the present imperative + m© and the aorist subjunctive + m© is really a tendency and cannot be pressed in every case. Forms of the Present Imperative On the endings of the present imperative. exocarp. 36. karpËv — endocarp. see Smyth §424b. but this is not necessarily the case. 183. 186. See the standard grammars for a full treatment of the imperative: BDF §§ 387. 96). 714-25. also Smyth §§1864. An aorist command views the action in its entirety. agribusiness. grammatical arguments are persuasive when corroborated by lexical meanings and larger contextual factors. but this form occurs only in 1 Kgdms (1 Sam) 20:21. The perfect imperative is rare. On the irregular accent of certain second aorist imperatives. It may call for the initiation of the action. Forms of the Second Aorist Imperative On the endings of the second aorist imperative. For the verb qa¾rw. “Lord. see Smyth §§466 and 669. 631.Lesson 26 181. Wallace. and 751. A present tense command views the action as in some way linear. n. 185.

58 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . 4. Do not ask how the dead can be raised. 12.” 3.) heart is full of sin. for he took fruit from the mouths of my little children. mŸne d¡ ›n t° pËlei ka¿ qaÀre ›n t° |g¾ƒ ›kklhs¾ƒ. Exercises — English to Greek 1. 7. Let those women come here and let them be baptized by the teacher.” 2. 10. pray to God. have mercy on us and do not send us into eternal judgment. Krat©somen tªn {lhje¾an. mª {pŸlj¬v e¼v tÌn {grËn.) ears to the words of demons. 2. Repent of evil works and put the words of the Spirit into your (sing. are 62 times (LXX) and 12 times (NT). £ljete ïde. stop drinking) wine in the village until you fall on your (pl.) ears. If your (pl. Let the priests of the land be faithful. 9. “Come again to the city whenever you have gifts to offer me. 3. then come here and tell us. for it is written. “From (or. 6.) house in the country. 13. Do not open your (sing. 8. mª dox}zete to×v {pokte¾nontav ka¿ mª pŸmyhte dåra toØ karpoØ {njrãpoiv £qousi qeÀrav pl©reiv aÃmatov. but ask the Lord to teach you wisdom. Go into the field and ask the slaves who are working there if the end of the work is drawing near. Ask him. James 5:12). 4. It occurs once in the LXX (Ps 103:31) and twice in the NT (1 Cor 16:22.188. “Seize that man. We do not know how the prophet.). stop rejoicing) in the kingdoms of this world. Do not drink (or. Produce the fruit of righteousness and we will have mercy on you (pl. repent. but receive the light of heaven and seize the eternal truth. “Lord. £stw. The sinners cried out. “Go to your (sing.” 5. Do not rejoice (or. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. but rather be filled with the Spirit. tŸkna. by) their fruit you will know them. The statistics of the usual form.) face. believe and rejoice in the power of God. 11. ka¿ ›rwt©sate tÌn did}skalon t«v dikaiosÖnhv påv |martwlo¿ dÖnantai eÕreÀn zwªn a¼ãnion. The woman said.” 14. {kouŸtwsan o½ £qontev îta tÌ eÔaggŸlion toØ jeoØ ka¿ metanohs}twsan lŸgontev.” said the evil king. and let the ruler on the throne be just. went through the sea. and go in peace. not having a boat. 189. Present Imperative of e¼m¾ The variant form of the third person singular is rare.

A similar chart can be found in Bruce M. 195. 192. and BDAG. occurs in Deut Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 59 . “conditional relative clause. and BDAG. 196. The most common of these is Ðtan (123x in the NT). 347. 335-45. The Indefinite Relative Pronoun See Wallace. differing only by accent. I Howard Marshall (London and New York: T&T Clark.” “First spot” in the first clause refers to the first syllable. needless to say. ed. An alternate form for the second person singular. 2002). pp. On the relation of oÅda to ginãskw. 338-39. see Stanley Porter’s Verbal Aspect in the Greek of the New Testament (New York: P. oÅsja. questions who? which? what? Accent last or none. pp. 1b. see Smyth §§334. The Relative Pronoun See the detailed treatment in Wallace. The Indefinite Pronoun and Adjective See the memory device for distinguishing the interrogative and the indefinite pronouns in §191 above.Lesson 27 190. see Wallace. 194. On the specific matter of the attraction of the relative. 193. 1262-65 and Wallace. The simple relative Ðv is used over 80 times in the NT with ›}n or ‡n. etc. 343-45. 725-27) is also informative. The Interrogative Pronoun and Adjective The interrogative and the indefinite pronouns are. See also Smyth §§794-99. Metzger’s Lexical Aids for Students of New Testament Greek. pp. means a certain one. Ðtan) or a simple relative (Ðv).” This name highlights the introductory word. Lang. 86. 1989). for the forms and meanings.” highlights the nature of the clause. exoskeleton. Ðpou. See the relevant entries in Moulton and Geden’s Concordance to the Greek Testament. see Smyth §§334. but the accompanying pronoun may be either an indefinite relative (Ðstiv. The top row of this chart in particular contains several pronouns found in this lesson’s vocabulary. For more on the forms and use of the indefinite pronoun. Ðpou about ten times. The Verb oÅda See BDAG. 693-94. See Smyth §340 for a helpful chart showing the relationship between various correlative pronouns. easy to confuse. 729-30. Conditional Relative Clauses Wallace (pp. Vocabulary More English derivatives: £xw — countless words beginning with exo-: exothermic. whereas my term. For more on the forms and use of the interrogative pronoun. 345-46. p. p. I have made up the following jingle to help keep them straight: “Accent in first spot. pp. These clauses typically have a conditional particle (›}n or ‡n). pp. pp. 191. p. 1266-70 and Wallace. 282-87. pp. 478-79) calls these “indefinite relative clauses. The entry in BDAG (pp. Ðstiv about a dozen times. 56. exotic.

Just as it is written in the book of the law. we walked into the village in order that we might buy from the people as many boats as they had.) going. A certain man entered into the city and asked. Having seen these signs. 8. Ñv ›~n zht©s¬ dËxan oÔ poieÀ (or oÔk ›rg}zetai) tÌ £rgon toØ kur¾ou= ka¿ Ñv ›~n jŸl¬ ti Õp¡r tÌn jeÌn oÔk £qei kard¾an {lhj«. 5. Exercises — English to Greek 1. 197. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. 14.9:2 and 4 Macc 6:27. let him be as a little child and let him do works of righteousness for others. ½ereÖv tiv e¼s«lje tÌ ½erÌn ka¿ eÅpen. we ought to declare the things that we have beheld and heard. 60 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . 4. l}bete t~ dåra Ðsa £qete ka¿ prosenŸgkate aÔt~ tê basileÀ.) are our glory and hope. ¨ gunª ´ khrÖssei Ó©mata t«v ›lp¾dov ›n t° sunagwg° ±gagen tªn jugatŸra sou £xw. A woman who was in the crowd exhorted her daughter to bear witness concerning the faith. 9. 4.) wine and drinks it will be thrown into the prison. you (pl. an alternate form for the third person plural. 3. therefore. Jas 1:19. We are preaching the gospel in this world in order that you (pl. Âsasi. t¾v ginãskei t¾ poi©sei Ê basile×v toÀv doÖloiv oÆv {gap†. Finally. but the corresponding imperative form is identical and would make sense in those contexts. Heb 12:17. But as many things as they say and as many things as they teach. 11.) may know what our hope is. 3Ostiv jŸlei ginãskein (or e¼dŸnai) jeÌn Éfe¾lei peripateÀn ›n t° Êdê t«v {lhje¾av kajäv Ê did}skalov t«v dikaiwsÖnhv ›d¾daxen. The form Âste in Eph 5:5. 7. what are you teaching. oÔd¡ ÕmeÀv oÂdate Ðpou did}skontai. 12. occurs in Acts 26:4. 10. 5. What. 2. whom the faithful prophet raised from the dead. and 3 Macc 3:14 could be an alternate form for the present indicative second person plural. do not believe. Going up from the sea. ¨meÀv oÔk oÂdamen t¾v did}skei t~ tŸkna. for their words are not true. The blind men whom the apostle healed in the temple on the Sabbath were thrown out by the authorities. Where are you (sing. Some men have come into the synagogue speaking evil things. We know that whoever takes your (sing.) from the prison in an hour which you do not know. “Where is the son of the king and what is his name?” 6. These alternate forms were the most common forms in Classical Greek. although Herodotus occasionally used those associated with the Koine. teacher. Whoever wants to find life. and who is following you in the way of truth? 2. will be our hope and our glory in the day of judgment? Behold. knows the power of God. 13. The angel of peace will come and will release you (pl. let him/her draw near to the throne of grace and let him/her cry out to the one who made heaven and earth.) daughter. if someone wishes to be first. Your (sing. 3.

The Declension of polÖv 205. Only taqÖv occurs frequently in the NT (18×). polymath. In the last day the Lord will render to all persons. These should be strongly emphasized. 200. -eia. The Present System of d¾dwmi Recognition of these forms begins with the present system reduplication di-. pp. polyglot. megalomania. Introduction to -mi Verbs The -mi conjugation consists of verbs that usually lack a thematic vowel between the verb stem and the person-number endings. he heard the sound of great joy. Now the elder son was in the field. See Smyth. 201. 199. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. 138-39. The importance of learning d¾dwmi goes beyond the simple form of the verb since it occurs in several compound forms. megabucks. according to their deeds. The Declension of mŸgav For more on these irregular adjectives.” LXX only). see the beginning of the entry in BDAG. presbÖterov — presbyopia. see Smyth §§412-22 and 717-99. pp. mŸgav — megahit. ÉxÖv (“sharp”). 242-43. feminine. 3. These follow the pattern of -uv. Irregular Adjectives 204. and taqÖv (“swift”). For the full conjugation of the aorist system of d¾dwmi.Lesson 28 198. great and small. 206. megawatt. polygon. see Smyth §311. pp. Robertson (pp. 2. All present and imperfect forms will have this reduplication. and as he came near to the house. Other irregular adjectives in biblical Greek include bajÖv (“deep”). glukÖv (“sweet”). see Smyth. d¾dwmi — anecdote. In that year a brother handed over a sister to death. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 61 . Another name for the -mi conjugation is the “nonthematic” conjugation. -u for masculine. praÖv (“gentle”).. The Aorist Active System of d¾dwmi The most helpful clues for recognizing forms of d¾dwmi are given in the next to last paragraph of §202 (p. qrËnov — chronic. hence I require students to learn them. 203. 172). 135-37. and neuter. etc. megadeath. chronicle. polysemy. On the forms of d¾dwmi. For a detailed discussion. 308-9) mentions nine. 202. Principal Parts of d¾dwmi Knowing the principal parts of d¾dwmi is a great aid to recognizing the manifold forms of this verb. polÖv — polydactyly. ¨dÖv (“pleasant. and a daughter handed over a father to prison. Vocabulary More English derivatives: {pod¾dwmi — apodosis.

The slaves of the field said. paredãkate tÌn ponhrÌn ‡ggelon taÀv ›xous¾aiv. 9. That woman so loved her nation that she gave her life in order that she might not hand over the priests to the evil king. and all those who believed cried out. 7. for they will give the book back immediately. ka¿ ¨ g« oÔk {pŸdwken aÔt«v tÌn karpËn. 10.) and stay [for] some time in your village. 5. ka¿ eÔj×v ›bl©jh e¼v fulak©n. didËtwsan toÀv tŸknoiv toÀv mª £qousi polÖ. saying. And much joy arose in that city. Do not give a large book to those who do not want to do much work. The eyes of all [persons] in the synagogue were beholding him. 4. 12. 8. The king commanded the body of the prophet who had been crucified to be given back immediately to his disciples. MhkŸti |mart©swmen e¼v tÌn kÖrion. and we give the same authority to others. met~ poll~ £th ÕpÌ basilŸa kakÌn eÅpon p}ntev o½ presbÖteroi toØ laoØ. Not everyone who gives great gifts to the temple will enter into the kingdom of heaven.” Exercises — English to Greek 1.” 6. ›n tê qrËnæ toØ prof©tou toØ meg}lou ‡ndrev te ka¿ gunaÀkev oÔk ›boÖlonto doØnai dËxan jeê. “Every word from his mouth is true and was given to him by God. and we will see in the coming year if it gives fruit. and the ears of all [persons] were listening. p‚v Ê {paggŸllwn Ó©mata t«v ›lp¾dov |martwloÀv {gaphj©setai ÕpÌ jeoØ ka¿ gnãsetai qar~n poll©n.4. p}nta ›kt¾sjh ÕpÌ toØ kur¾ou= e¼ oÞn Ê laÌv toØ kur¾ou £qousi poll}. 62 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . 11. but some do not want to repent of their sin. 3. 5. I want to come to you (pl. The Spirit gave us authority to become children of God. “This year let us work the land. 14. but rather the one who gives both one’s own heart and belongings to God. And after much time the faithful sisters gathered the elders of the church to pray. throwing it on the ground. 13. for the Lord has opened a great door for the gospel. for the ones who had destroyed the house of the high priest were handed over to the elders of the people. God has given sinners time in order that they might repent. 2.

) As a result. For the full paradigm of the simple verb Ãhmi. see Smyth §777. 211. Thus. and the third person singular ±fien in Mark 1:34.” The word mhde¾v. For the full conjugation of the aorist system of t¾jhmi. Vocabulary Another English derivative: eÆv — hendecasyllabic. we have the imperfect active second person singular. All present and imperfect forms will have this reduplication. (The simple form does not occur at all in biblical Greek. The Present System of t¾jhmi Recognition of these forms begins with the present system reduplication ti-. see the beginning of the entry in BDAG. under Îllumi). see Smyth. The Verbs {pËllumi/{pollÖw and de¾knumi/deiknÖw On the special class of -mi verbs represented by de¾knumi. “[do] nothing in excess. pp. occurring 15 times in the NT compared to five times for ›p¾ plus the accusative. 209. 208. pp. see Smyth §819 (p. occurs in the famous Greek maxim: mhd¡n ‡gan. that is. see Smyth §349. The Verb {f¾hmi This is a compound verb ({pË + Ãhmi).” and “The semantic boundaries of this multivalent verb are quite flexible. 11:16. “having eleven syllables. The simple dative is more common. hence I usually require students to learn them. in Sus 1:53. The NT expression “lay hands on someone” is either ›pit¾jhmi t~v qeÀr}v tini or ›pit¾jhmi t~v qeÀrav ›p¿ tina. 1003) observes that “the middle is generally not different in meaning from the active. 310). but the simple form Ãhmi (“send”) was virtually forgotten in the Hellenistic period. See Smyth. On its forms and compounds. The Aorist Active System of t¾jhmi The most helpful clues for recognizing forms of t¾jhmi are given in this paragraph. see BDAG. 135-37. Principal Parts of t¾jhmi Knowing the principal parts of t¾jhmi is a great aid to recognizing its manifold forms. On {pËllumi. The Number One and Related Words On the meanings of this seemingly simple word. 138-39. 291-93. See BDF §69 (1) and Smyth §450.” This was the Greek equivalent of the Latin via media. 212. 213. rather than the more properly formed {f¾eiv and ‡fien. §f¾eiv. the middle path that avoids extremes. pp. see Smyth §414. in the neuter form.” According to Robertson (p. there are 17 different compound forms of t¾jhmi in the NT.Lesson 29 207. the compound is sometimes augmented as if there were no prefixed preposition. with the dative or with the preposition ›p¾ and the accusative. BDAG (p. On the forms of t¾jhmi. 223. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 63 . 210.

2. 64 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . 2. You (pl. 10. mhde¿v ›pij° t~v qeÀrav aÔtê (or ›p! aÔtËn). aÜth ¨ meg}lh |mart¾a {fej©setai tê basileÀ. ¼do× Ê kÖriov t¾jhsin ‡ggelon ›n t° pËlei toØ aÃmatov. but in his heart he wanted to destroy him/her. therefore. nor into the water. then she said. 12. oÔde¿v g~r £deixen ÕmÀn tªn ÊdÌn t«v dikaiosÖnhv. therefore. t~ lo¾pa tŸkna ›n tê oÂkæ oÔ zåsin ïde. Now your (sing. 5. 3. aÜth ¨ gunª £qei ¥na {delfÌn m¾an {delfªn ka¿ ¦n paid¾on. {ll! ›~n p}lin prosj° taÀv |mart¾aiv aÔtoØ. and the little daughter does not want to show her the way. ›leÖsetai e¼v kr¾sin. 9.) sins are forgiven. “With reference to the remaining thing . the teacher asked. 14. The mother is not able to find the place where her little daughter put the book. Going down from the great city. No one wanted the remaining garments. The righteous scribe died. Exercises — English to Greek 1. rejoice in the Lord and place [it] in your hearts to follow him. but if you speak against the holy writings it will not be forgiven you. Finally (literally. . After he had healed the blind man. Exercises — Practice and Review 1.” 8. 4. “I will leave them. for the one who destroys the words of God will not be shown mercy in the judgment. 11. The angel of the Lord showed the disciples in the boat that not one of them would perish in the sea. ›mŸllete {polŸsjai ›n taÀv |mart¾aiv Õmån. 4.) are not able to add one year to your life. The woman did not want to leave her children in the field. “Are there some in this place who do not have the Spirit? I will lay hands on them. .” 3. we placed them on the stone in the temple in order that they might be given to men in prison. The evil king said that he wanted to offer gifts to the little child. 7. We placed one large stone beside the synagogue and there we come together and eat. The apostle preached in/with power and spirit/the Spirit such that many souls were baptized and were added to the church in one day. you ought to live the remaining years in peace and hope. but none of the remaining scribes beheld where his body was placed by the authorities. but go and show yourself to the priest.” 13. Let no one put the book of the law into the fire.214. 6. the prophet said to him.). my brothers and sisters. “Tell no one. but when the slave said that he would bring them into the village.

triskaidekaphobia.” said the woman. The Article before mŸn and dŸ The article in this construction is functioning as a demonstrative pronoun. Vocabulary More English derivatives: dŸka — Decapolis.” See Smyth §1107. 221. 2. see Smyth §§349-54. A further complication is the fact that there are 20 compounds of this word in the NT (Robertson. Ãsthmi — histamine. triangle. p. Conjugation of Ãsthmi For the full conjugation of Ãsthmi. 222.Lesson 30 215. fhm¾ — phatic.. Second Aorist of ba¾nw and ginãskw ba¾nw in the uncompounded form is rare in the LXX and does not occur in the NT. but the entire law is fulfilled in two words: You (sing.) will love God and you will love others. treÀv — triad. dãdeka — dodecahedron. œpt} — heptad. dodecaphonic. blasphemy. and adverb (“once”) — see the helpful list in Smyth §347. “Ten slaves. 217. p. “went up to the city carrying two great stones into the synagogue. heptateuch. For the declension of numbers one through four and numbers above 200. heptathlon. pentahedron. Immediately perceiving that someone was opening the door. 216. your (pl. For information on the way numbers were written. “Who is there?” 4. see Smyth §§416-17. triathlon. 218. Principal Parts of Ãsthmi The dual aorist system makes this the most complex of the -mi verbs. 310). That prophet loves.” 3. euphemism. ordinal (“first”). Numbers For a list of the numerals — cardinal (“one”). to speak concerning the seven spirits of God. The Verb fhm¾ For the full conjugation of fhm¾. pŸnte — pentad. Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 65 . pentathlon. see Smyth §§783-88. 219. 307) mentions 12 compounds of ba¾nw in the NT.) daughter asked. hendecasyllabic. pentagram. but its force is often so weak that it is best translated as a personal pronoun.. see Smyth §348a. i.e. Robertson (p. standing in the temple. antihistamine. etc. The verb ginãskw is common in the simplex and has five compound forms in the NT (Robertson. 220. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. The ten commandments were given to us in order that we might walk in peace with one another. 308). “those people” becomes “they.

” 9. We found five men standing in the village seeking work. The priest said.5. Your (sing. the teacher set him/her before the crowd and said. St«ji ka¿ katabåmen ¼deÀn tÌn prof©thn. the son followed his mother into the house. st©sousi tÌn nËmon t«v {g}phv.” 12. 13. 66 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . Exercises — English to Greek 1.) into the mountain and say to the disciples who worship there.). “The word of the Lord will raise the dead in the last day. “Know yourself (sing. Some of those standing here will see the four angels of heaven coming down to the earth.” but our beloved race wishes to add. 4. But she did not know that he was drawing near. Go up (sing. 2. 3. How will the kingdom stand. Let them go into the field. When the people went down to the sea. 11. “Know the Lord!” 6. dŸka doØloi §rg}zonto ›n toÀv dus¿n {groÀv mou ka¿ mej! œpt~ írav pros«ljËn moi a¼toÖmenoi Üdwr te ka¿ ‡rton. if three kings want to seize (the) power? 7. Having stood up. “Go down now into the city and do works of righteousness. The Gentiles used to say to one another. seven demons rose up from the water. ›~n o½ dãdeka {pËstoloi parakalŸswsi p}ntav zhteÀn tÌ jŸlhma toØ jeoØ. “This little child recognized the twelve books of the prophets. {pojn¯skei g~r t~ tr¿a tŸkna mou.” 8. but many will flee from the face of the Lord. Ê d¡ ‡rqwn £fh tê doÖlæ. 14. Taking a little child.) sister healed the blind man such that he recognized many people standing in the synagogue. ›pŸgnwmen pŸnte ‡ndrav œståtav par~ tªn j}lassan ka¿ treÀv gunaÀkav kajhmŸnav ›p¿ l¾jon. {ll~ dÖnatai jerapeØsai aÔt}. 10.

“most excellent. see Smyth §§313-24. Luke 1:3. Comparisons in Greek See NT examples in Wallace. see Smyth §§1063-93. 299-301. Forms of Certain Comparative Adjectives On the forms of comparatives and superlatives. 228. pp.Lesson 31 223. For if you (pl. what glory will you receive? Even sinners do this.) love only those who love you. . don’t they? Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 67 . 297-305. monocle. 24:3. see Smyth §§1431-34 and Wallace. although the latter is a form of address to persons. As the text says. 694-96. See Wallace. which is rare in biblical Greek. Wallace notes that there are about 50 contrary-to-fact conditions in the NT. Questions Expecting a “Yes” or “No” Answer The memory device I use to keep these two constructions straight is “m© expects ‘nay.” would be a rough synonym. 2. These are also referred to as second class conditions. From mak}riov we get “macarism. 229.” a fancy term for beatitude. and Smyth §§2303-20. 110-12. On the genitive of comparison. and classical examples in Smyth §§1066-84. See BDF §34 (1). monogamy. see Wallace. The word kr}tistov. Contrary-to-Fact Conditions The most famous contrary-to-fact condition comes from the musical Fiddler on the Roof: “If I were a rich man . 224. see Smyth §§341-46. 225. Vocabulary English derivatives are in short supply for this vocabulary list. Exercises — Practice and Review 1. pp. 226. the form with double tau is more common in the NT (15× to 4×). About three fourths of these have ‡n in the apodosis. monograph. not a general superlative meaning “of the best quality” (e. monolith.g. The form with double sigma predominates in the LXX (48× to 10×)..’” See Smyth §2651. pp. . pp. Acts 23:26. one fourth lack it. From the adjective mËnov come countless words beginning with mono-: monochromatic. 227. Comparative Adjectives On the syntax of comparatives and superlatives. etc. 26:25). The adjective kre¾sswn has the variant form kre¾ttwn. On the substitution of positive for comparative and comparative for superlative.” (with various apodoses dispersed throughout the song). The one who has received the promise of the Holy Spirit is greater than the one who stands before rulers. 230. the superlative of {gajËv is ‡ristov. Adverbs On the origin and forms of adverbs. BDF §427 (2).

The son said. {ll! £qei p¾stin ple¾ona ² o½ grammateÀv. but we have begotten more priests and prophets than they. 12. he would not have departed in order that he might seek a better life. 10.) had given us a better promise and a stronger hope.) say that you have more children than the greatest king. 68 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . 8. we would not have become disciples of the one who preached peace. mª eÅ s× me¾zwn ² Ê {rqiere×v Ê œsthkäv ›nãpion toØ jeoØ. ¨ {delfª ¨mån ›stin mikrot}th pasån tån gunaikån ›n t° kãm¬. but I cannot carry more than one stone. Our city is the smallest of all the cities in the land. It is better to be persecuted for the sake of righteousness than to bear no witness and to receive gifts. 4. 4. are you? 9. I am more evil than all my brothers. 5. e¼ ¨ jug}thr sou μn makar¾a. oÔk £stin qar~ ›n t° pËlei= p¾nwmen oÞn Üdwr m‚llon ² tÌn oÂnon tÌn kre¾ssona. Therefore. will they not? 13. Surely you are not greater than our mother who has twelve children. oÔq¿ a½ ¼squra¿ ›paggel¾ai toØ jeoØ kre¾ttonev tån lËgwn basilŸwv.3. 11. “Again I have sinned against heaven and before you (sing. we would be following you. Therefore. 3. you didn’t throw my books into the lake. If the slave of that man had been happy. They will be gathered together before the Lord and they will find favor. I am not alone. 2. If you (sing. oÔk ˆn ›k}jhto mËnh £mprosjen toØ oÂkou sou kr}zousa ka¿ a¼toumŸnh ple¾ona ‡rton. If you (sing. for my father’s angels are here and they have more power than the authorities of this world.” 6.) were performing more and greater signs than our teacher. You (sing. did you? 5.). Let us worship before the throne of God rather than before the throne of kings. 7. Exercises — English to Greek 1. Where are my books? Children. Blessed are the strong in faith. I can walk with you. My hands are weaker than my feet. 14.

Proper Names In the Synoptic Gospels. the latter occurs only a few times (e. 936). Connectives and Style in Biblical Greek The Greek language was extremely rich in particles and conjunctions. !IhsoØv usually has the article.g. fanerËw — phanerogam. It survives especially in stereotyped expressions. material whose full presentation is normally part of an intermediate Greek grammar course. and frequently in chaps. The Article in Various Constructions The Greek article has the power to substantivize almost anything. mŸsov — Mesopotamia. Wallace. fËbov — all phobia words.” “Moses” in the LXX usually lacks the article. pp. 36-40). e. 759.000 times in the LXX! Skilled writers had a wealth of Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek 69 . 766-67. less so in John. 16:34. More English derivatives: dexiËv — dexterous. acrophobia. and usually not in the epistles and Revelation. says that the use of the article with names “seems quite capricious to us. The aorist optative of g¾nomai and the present optative of e¼m¾ (eÂh) are the most common optative forms in biblical Greek. The standard grammars have detailed treatments of these and other uses: Wallace. mesoderm. The former is almost the exclusive form in the NT. Smyth §§312-1635. over 62. etc. One grammarian calls mª gŸnoito “the coffin of the dead optative” (Robertson. eÂh. mesocarp.Lesson 32 231. 235. 23 there is a contemptuous emphasis. 325-27. 935-40. and Robertson. Greek prose was loathe to have consecutive sentences without some connective word. Even unsophisticated writers seem obliged to use at least a ka¾ or dŸ to link sentences. arachnophobia. See BDF §§260 (2). In Exod 32:1. claustrophobia. Ðmoiov — homoiousian. 232.000 times in the NT. pp. 60× LXX. Thus. phanerozoic. See Smyth §§1814-34. Vocabulary 1Aqri and ‡qriv are forms of the same word. p. 236. p. swthr¾a — creosote. but it is losing ground in Hellenistic Greek to other moods.g. BDF §§384-86. Neither form is very common in the LXX. often with the negative m©. esp. Some Special Uses of the Cases This is a highly abbreviated introduction to the syntax of the cases. 31-206. We find “Moses” with the article and the demonstrative oßtov = “this Moses rascal. phanerophyte. But the dative case has the article on a number of occasions (Exod 12:28. pp. Gal 3:19. 25× LXX. See Robertson. pp. kairËv — kairotic. pp. BDF §§243-202. 325). 12× NT. for examples of the article with prepositional phrases. 480-84. agoraphobia. 50.” 233. dextrorotatory. both coordinating and subordinating.. Heb 3:13). Robertson. 234. perhaps in part because it has a distinctive form for each case. and with the genitive. 326. homeopathic. Optative Mood The optative mood was quite active in Classical Greek. ambidextrous.. A fourth of these are the word gŸnoito. Note the statistics: gŸnoito. with single words or whole sentences. 758-76. 17× NT. ka¾ occurs over 9. There are 67 optatives in the NT (Robertson.

for of such is the kingdom. 666-78. 8. but now the truth of God has been revealed to us. 237. 3. o½ mª |mart}nontev t° glãss¬ kaj©sontai ›n dexi† qeir¿ toØ jeoØ Ðmoioi tê kur¾æ !IhsoØ ka¿ tê doÖlæ aÔtoØ !Iw}nnei. 2. cried out to his wife. Mª gŸnoito toioØta. On the last day of the year. D. healed it. At that time great fear fell on all those in the city. We were not able to see our salvation. Let us be/become faithful unto death. and let us not have fear of those who kill the body.” 4. ¨ fwnª toØ MwusŸwv μljen ›k tån oÔranån ka¿ ›fanŸrwsen ¨mÀn tÌn kairÌn t«v kr¾sewv. “Behold. “May it not be!” 12. ¨mån proseuqomŸnwn. mª gno×v tÌn fËbon toØ kur¾ou. 70 Teacher’s Guide to A Primer of Biblical Greek . 6. Exercises — Practice and Review 1.” 3. Denniston’s The Greek Particles. nor will they see the light of salvation. 11. Genãmeja pisto¿ ka¿ ‡qri jan}tou.) do not have need that someone should teach you. I see the heavens opened and the son of man standing at the right (hand) of God in the midst of the holy angels. And there was a man in the synagogue whose right hand was weak. My disciples ought to be like little children. and we went forth preaching day and night. “We have need of our mother. You (pl. o½ m¡n ›n t° pËlei ›kŸkraxan. 2. 7. 2nd ed. And I said. 13. 9. 4. Smyth §§2769-3003. so we fled to the mountains. [because] he was not able to find his books. Those who do such things will not enter the kingdom of eternal peace. 1954). See the treatments in BDF §§438-57. pp. The women were marveling and asking one another who this blind man might be. o½ d¡ ›n tê {grê eÅpon. We received the hope of salvation and we are/have been walking in the truth from the first day until now. There was a time when we thought God was like a man. 10. 5. and all the people will come to listen. rising up in the midst of the crowd. The [followers] of the apostle laid hands on us. eÅpen Ê ponhrÌv basile×v PaÖlæ ka¿ PŸtræ Ðti oÔk £qei qre¾an swthr¾av a¼wn¾ou. 14. Exercises — English to Greek 1.connective words from which to choose. but the prophet. The strong in faith will teach in the temple for the whole year. for the Lord himself has made known to you all things. the scribe. (Oxford: Clarendon. The granddaddy of all treatments on particles is J. Wallace. And the children feared a great fear and said to one another.

Answers to Student Materials for A PRIMER OF BIBLICAL GREEK .

Quick Quiz Answers (Translation Portions Only) Lesson 2 Do you know that sisters wish to hear and believe? A brother sees that we are not teaching and [we are] not writing. Sister. Lesson 6 From heaven to earth Through the sea With the saints Because of the glory of God After the last hour An evil man is throwing stones into the path of the faithful disciples. Lesson 3 Hearts know truth and glory because they have an hour of life. but the last work of God is to destroy death. Because of the deed of the prophet the glory of God abides around the assembly of the disciples. for the law teaches that the faithful have life. The first deed of human beings is death. The law is holy. God is righteous. are you writing to a church that a kingdom is destroying land and sea? Lesson 4 Sons of God are not saying words of death to masters and slaves. The prophet sends the stones out of the land and to the desert. But the righteous prophet sees the stones in the path and takes the stones from the path. but the evil receive death. Quick Quiz Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. All Rights Reserved. Clayton Croy. Lesson 5 We know that death is bad and life is good. . Children of heaven are not teaching works of law. and God wants the little children to have a good life. and the dead do not see heaven. but works of truth.

We wish to send the bread to our brothers. The multitude eats the bread. But God himself is raising up another lord and is sending this lord to our land to judge it. but we do not wish to eat it. God himself sends peace to us. Love is from God. The man himself is teaching the same law. but the lord of this land says that we do not have the authority to baptize. Are you teaching according to the law of heaven? We are writing words of truth to you and to your children. Clayton Croy. Lesson 8 That slave and this master In this kingdom and in that land Do they have the same boats? The sister herself is judging the people. That peace is a holy house around the people. You are not able to see the kingdom of God. . for the sea is destroying their boats and their souls do not know love. You are a prophet. Quick Quiz Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. and your works are holy. We wish to baptize the people. Do you have the same peace? Lesson 9 Sinners are being saved by the word of life.Lesson 7 I do not speak against the Son of Man. Thus we find life and we see the face of God in our brothers and sisters. All Rights Reserved. The bread of the land is a gift from heaven. but you are entering into it. We wish to save them because we have the love of God in our hearts. Is the Day of the Lord coming? I am being taught by the prophet and I am living according to his laws.

and the evil hearts were being healed. Then you will see the gifts of heaven. The man believed (began to believe?) in the Lord. Books of the law were being written. But in that hour faithful prophets were going down from the temple. You drank wine the whole day. and the servants of God were not dying/did not die in that day. Lesson 14 The multitudes went into the desert to hear the prophet. and we will marvel.” Lesson 12 In the last day we will go to the house of the prophet. it is necessary to open your hearts to the Lord. Clayton Croy. and the word of the Lord was being heard in the church. The apostles baptized them and received them into the church. For the Lord was destroying his heart of sin and was saving the man from death. The people were entering into the temple to see the glory of God. nor do hearts know the hour. And now you want to see a sign? Truly. Therefore. for the temple is holy and life is good. The people were saying. “Is the Son of Man coming again? Truly. And the prophet said to them.Lesson 10 An evil man was going up to the temple to kill the servants of God. neither do eyes see the place. And now we pray that the Lord will bring you peace. Quick Quiz Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. “Do you want to see a sign from heaven? Already you saw and heard the teacher of righteousness in the temple and you did not believe in him. but you did not flee from your sins. The prophets said to the man.” The prophets did not know that the Lord was about to send to the man a heart of love. Demons were being thrown into the sea. the last days were coming upon the earth. but the people there did not want to hear them. we will know that the prophet is a teacher from heaven and we will glorify the Son of God. “You must not take away life in the temple. All Rights Reserved. and the brothers and the sisters prepared for them holy garments. Then he will proclaim the truth of God. . the apostles cried out. You fled from the truth. Lesson 13 The apostles were preaching the word in the evil kingdom. “We will persuade you!” After these things the people turned to the Lord. Will you hear the word and [will you] become disciples of the Lord in that day? If you will receive the truth of God. Lesson 11 Behold. and he will open the book of the law.

They sent him with his belongings to another land. For his flesh is going to abide in the mouth of the earth. Now the evil one has fallen and the righteous have found peace. An evil man killed him. for my husband is evil and he persecutes those who do not glorify him. but the apostle healed him. the ruler reckoned. Thus it has been written in the book of the law. but his spirit and his name will have life forever and ever.” But the slaves. But now his descendants ought to have the throne. were not willing to save the ruler. “I fell from my boat into the sea and I came near to death. But I was saved/rescued by the servants and I was healed by the Lord. “The will of my husband was to rule forever. Hearing these things. Quick Quiz Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. In that night they prepared the body.” Lesson 17 The ruler died and the servants came to take away the dead body of the man. “I want to have the authority in this land. . Then his wife spoke this word. being good and just. the ruler heard the voice of his wife saying. An angel appeared and said. Those who believe in the Lord will see the holy angels in heaven. Lesson 16 Your sister said. And now the woman rules in his place. While sitting on the throne. The multitudes saw the deed and entered into the temple and cried out. Then we will lead into the desert this woman who is sinning against me. “I was taken from the heart of the sea by the power of God and I was led to the assembly. All Rights Reserved. His blood will be on that man. “How were you brought to this place?” I answered and said. Clayton Croy. While saying these things in the temple.Lesson 15 A man had a demon. the faithful disciple saw an angel of God. Lesson 18 The disciple who was praying these things saw an angel of God in the temple. Then I went into the assembly and glorified God. “I will gather together the slaves who work in my house. “The kingdom of God has come and the last hour has come near! We have seen the angel/messenger of the Lord in our land.

So having been sanctified and sent by the Holy Spirit.’” Lesson 20 The ones sanctified by the grace of God went forth into the world to preach the gospel. they know the love of God. who led his people out of the desert. His eyes having been healed. So I exhort you to seek the way of the Son.” Wanting to make known the Gospel. the teacher said. but I glorify the crucified Son of God.’ But the Lord.Lesson 19 Having greeted the brothers and the sisters. sending us to preach his grace to them. You are not able to teach yourselves. the sinners became disciples. the man said. we went into the prison. Therefore. “Having been blind. and I am his servant. “An evil ruler wanted to persecute those who heard and believed the word of truth. He did not receive those who came to him.” Quick Quiz Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. Lesson 21 All those who love the law and do what is just will live. “I do not glorify myself. now I see. ‘I will destroy this ruler under my feet. Those who received the word lifted up their hands to glorify the God of heaven. for we have been begotten by the Holy Spirit. . ‘I will destroy these people under my feet. For the Lord opened a door to sinners. but he cast them out. You will be taught by the God who calls from heaven. having seen their synagogue. My mother greeted the servants who had come to her. he cast stones into it. The God of heaven has seen the things to come and will fulfill all things. The demons that had been cast out by the teacher of righteousness did not return. Clayton Croy. For he said. The ruler said. The hands that have not saluted me and the mouths that have not marveled at me are going to be destroyed. Having taken their bread. Having been released from their sins and having been created anew in righteousness. After they heard the good news in that place and were been baptized. he sent it to another land. Having sat down in the house. Everyone who fears demons ought to become a disciple and fear the Lord. said. Now we know that God is able to heal the blind and forgive sinners. We walk in the truth. we entered into the prison. we entered into the synagogue. The prophet spoke to the people and asked them to follow him. All Rights Reserved.

they will see him and they will drink the word of God like water. The faithful wish to behold the Lord. And if we do the work of God. “We do not have bread to eat!” So their father went into the village in order that he might buy bread. All Rights Reserved. Now I declare to you. who sends bread to the children of earth.” Thus the beloved disciple testified. Then the father said. you have spoken the truth.Lesson 22 We sowed seeds of peace in our land and we exhorted one another to keep the commandments of God. But now we do not wish to hear your voice. with the result that the kingdom is to them like fire. For God will judge them after the dead are raised.” Then the children cried out. Then he spoke a parable. “The Lord will judge you because of your sin and he will not raise you up in the last day. And you must never say that God will not hear us whenever we pray and ask for bread. “Father.” Lesson 24 The beloved disciple came to our village to bring the wisdom of the scriptures. In the village he found bread and he returned to his house. Quick Quiz Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. But you worshiped demons and you sent your children into the fire.” Lesson 23 The children cried out. we are able to do the work of God. For whenever we eat bread. and when he comes. Before speaking he commanded us to sit and to open our hearts to the Lord. We want to eat. “The kingdom of God is like fire and water. All the saints gathered together their children in order to hear the disciple. But the evil wish to be first and to have all authority. For you think that each day is a gift from demons and that living water comes from them. “Let us glorify the God. no longer will we be a kingdom of evil people. Clayton Croy. You will die in your sin and you will not see the light of heaven. .

“Save us. Clayton Croy. Whoever has the Spirit knows this. and as many as love to hear the truth will come to the synagogue to hear her. and the Lord will have mercy on you. saying.” Lesson 27 Our daughter knows the scriptures. Are you able to answer us? Will death take us all? Has the end of our nation and of our people drawn near?” But the prophet said. Our daughter works outside the synagogue teaching children in the village and sinners in the prison.” And when they did these things. Quick Quiz Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. Who then is able to say that. Do not cling to your possessions. Just as the Lord graciously gave eternal life to our daughter. They were not able to see with their eyes nor do work with their hands nor walk with their feet. So they cried out to the priests and to the scribes. Do not ask. Where is the Spirit leading her? Truly. .” Lesson 26 The holy sisters were proclaiming the eternal gospel to those possessing slaves and fields. saying. “You are the true prophet of God. but have you produced the fruit of righteousness? Repent and be baptized. she does not have the authority to teach in the synagogue? If someone has the gift of the Spirit. For we know the Lord who was crucified in our behalf. And they said. “Now go in peace and rejoice in the Lord. So come here and open your ears to hear the word of truth. so he graciously gave to her the authority to teach in the synagogue. the Spirit is leading her to teach in the synagogue. You are full of faith and the Holy Spirit. for we are dying in the streets!” But the king was not able to save them. but the high priest said. and ask the Lord to forgive you.Lesson 25 The people in the city were growing weak. Therefore. ‘Can we buy the love of the Lord?’ For the Lord loves sinners who do not love him and do not have possessions. then the sisters said.” Then they cried out to the prophet on the holy mountain. “This judgment does not bring death to all. All Rights Reserved. “You have prepared the fruit of the field. “We do not have the power to save you. For in this night the angels of God will come from heaven and will heal the city. but send gifts to the people in prison. being a woman. they cried out to the king. let us receive the word. and we rejoice in the hope of eternal life.

and the gentiles have no one to show the way to them. a time of great judgment fell on us. immediately the Son of Man will come and will hand over the kingdom to the Father.” So having left behind children and houses.” And having said these things. Quick Quiz Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. and there was much blood in the land. For the people were not keeping the law. let us lay hands on the apostles and let us send them to the gentiles. But all of you will establish the law of heaven. saying. And when the end of the seven days drew near. Clayton Croy. When we turn to God. All Rights Reserved. the prophet went up to the temple in order that he might glorify the Lord. “Let no one put a stone before the gentiles so that they might not receive the word. the apostles left. For God wants to forgive their sins and to add them to the church. . “Three of you will become teachers and two of you will become priests. Then leaving their boats. they rose up and followed him. Therefore. Lesson 29 The elders in our village said. asking them to become disciples of the way. bearing the gospel of hope. and joy fled from the land. “The gentiles have not yet heard the gospel. When these things happened. the prophet said. But the Lord in heaven will have mercy and will give to us time in order that we may repent from our evil deeds. So immediately the prophet called them.” Then the remaining brothers added the “Amen” to the things being said. The elders were not exercising true judgment. He perceived that they had been working ten hours and had nothing. For there is one God and one Way and one gospel. and the teacher of righteousness was betrayed into the hands of the authorities. And the prophet taught them seven days and seven nights from the holy books of the twelve apostles. and you will eat in the kingdom of God. and they are perishing because of their sins. Lesson 30 The faithful prophet was walking along the sea and saw five men standing beside two boats.Lesson 28 In the years of the evil king the earth did not render its fruit.

Lesson 32 The time of your salvation has drawn near. we would be dying in our sins. Clayton Croy. If the Son comes in the middle of the night or the middle of the day. if you cry out to God and give yourselves to him. For when the gentiles wanted to hear the gospel. For even the angels who stand in the presence of God do not have better promises than those who have faith. for the love of God casts out fear. So do not rejoice in wine and houses. for they are greater than the kings of the earth. it was necessary to preach the word. to have faith is better than having many possessions. and until this day you have been proclaiming good news. . Then the Son will sit at the right [hand] of the Father. in whom you believe. saying. we know that we will be like him. All Rights Reserved. Quick Quiz Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. If this were not true. Fear will fall on those who do not believe in the Lord. Do you not know that faith can cast out demons and raise the dead? Faith will accomplish even more. Truly. and the end of your labors has come. But now the Son of Righteousness is coming and he will reveal all things. we do not have need of power and glory. “Blessed are the strong in faith. for the Son will fulfill our every need. Therefore. Such is our hope. For God alone is able to save us.Lesson 31 The teacher went down to the sea and stood before the multitudes. Therefore. and all authority will be given to the One on the throne. the teacher began to speak. but we will not have fear. May it be thus forever. but rejoice rather in the Lord your God. They opened their ears. hoping to hear eternal wisdom.

All Rights Reserved. for the way of God is not thus. Therefore. but the deeds of the man of sin are evil. 15. 13. .) sister is speaking about these things to the multitudes. You (pl. 5. After these things the sons of glory hear a voice from heaven and believe in the Lord. Does that prophet want to baptize the little children? 2. 9. but I remain in the way of life and I trust God. I am writing the same words to that disciple. 7. The children are in the boat with the disciples. We are sending the faithful brother through the desert to speak the truth to you and to save you from your sins. The gifts of heaven are good. The foremost men/persons in the land are not receiving glory and gifts from the saints. for he is not teaching according to the law of love. 3. They are hearing her voice and are judging her words in their hearts. Clayton Croy.Periodic Exercises — Answer Key Set #1 (emphasizing lessons 1-8) 1. but their evil master is throwing it into the sea. 14. 12. In the last days the evil ones/men find stones in the desert and throw them into the assembly. for death is abiding in the land and is destroying the souls of the righteous. but we know that you are not speaking the truth. Your (sing. 8. The kingdom does not have peace.) sending other slaves to teach those children? Periodic Exercise Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. Are you (pl.) are saying to our sister that you have authority to judge her heart. In this world I do not see faithful deeds. 10. These slaves want to eat bread in the house. In that very hour God raises the dead and sends his angels to receive the saints. 11. 4. the people do not see their faces. 6.

Periodic Exercise Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N.) will come into the church and will receive the bread of life. “Is it necessary to go out into the desert and cry out to God?” But the prophet did not want to answer you. The Lord is already with us in this land. 12. 17.) saw those signs but you did not believe. Therefore.) are able to drink wine with the crowds through the whole day and still you go down to your house and do not fall. but now they are being taught out of the books in the temple. I brought him to the authorities to be judged. they will see both the glory of God and the way of peace. but the men in the boat were being saved by the Lord. 16. You (pl. 3. Therefore. We brought gifts to the throne. the men neither died nor cried out. he gathered his own [people] together and they prayed. 15. but now it is necessary to depart to another place. for the master had begun to glorify sin and evil deeds. The teacher of righteousness is the head of the assembly. The faithful teacher was dying. 7. 10. The slave fled to another land and did not enter again into the kingdom of his master. “Then they will know the law of love and they will become disciples of the Holy One. This evil man was about to kill his son. 8. I lift up my eyes and I see the angels of God.Set #2 (emphasizing lessons 9-14) 1. At that time the sinners were not able to receive the truth. but now our teacher is dying and we must be taught by another. 4. we know that even there he will be with us. You (pl.” 14. The boat was being destroyed by the sea. 6. In that day we received good things from our teacher. and he will proclaim what is good and will prepare us for the kingdom of heaven. for we must not release him. I marvel that you (pl. . garments and beautiful stones. Therefore. they are going through the world to preach to the sinners and to lead them to God. You (sing. but they were not able to find the boat. Truly I say to you (pl. All Rights Reserved. for they wanted to persuade God to save his soul from death. 5. And then with us you will eat the gift of God and will find peace. In that hour the sisters were going down to the sea and the brothers were going up into the house. 2. Then we returned to our houses and prayed for the authorities.).) came to the prophet in that place and said. therefore. If the people open their eyes and turn their hearts to the Lord. The righteous one will come and teach the children. 9. The apostles were casting the demons into the sea and were healing the little children. 13. Clayton Croy. 11. Behold.

14. 2. for they saw the Sabbath approaching. But a righteous prophet was sent by God to save us. The teachers of the law were sitting in the temple considering in their hearts that flesh and blood have not seen the kingdom of heaven. When they had arrived and had gathered the church. 13. nor did you see the other belongings. 16. 6. glorifying the name of the Lord. 5. And the crowds said. 10. 4.” Periodic Exercise Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. but being evil. The woman answered and said to the authorities. but we did not trust his words. 11.) books were not found in the house.) father and mother began to make known that the Holy Spirit had been graciously given to the brothers who had been thrown into prison. the slaves fled to another place. . for we saw signs being done/coming about through his hands. for we were sanctified by the one who died in our behalf. 12. And after they had sat down your (pl. When the evil man came near to the door of the house. for they had been taken by your son and brought into the synagogue. Clayton Croy. Then it is necessary to sit in one’s own house until the mouth of the land opens. Now you have heard our words. Those who die in the Lord have life. We do not want to sin against heaven. Your (pl. All Rights Reserved. “I will make known to you (pl. The faithful women did not want to go down to the sea and prepare the boat. who sits on the throne.” 7.) about the way of life. but not yet do you believe in the God who raises the dead. And so they will be with the Lord forever and ever. In that night I prayed to God and my feet were healed. The rulers have come to know the will of God. and the angels will come and take them to heaven. That man preached another/a different gospel to us. 3. We preached good news to you (pl.) how the dead will be raised.Set #3 (emphasizing lessons 15-20) 1. “This man can raise the dead. Those who do not receive the word of truth and do not become disciples must answer to the God. 15. And now I am convinced that it is not a good thing to walk through a land of stones. 8. for the Spirit has spoken to me about things to come. The demons that had been cast out of our sister returned again to our house. and the created things come up. the apostles proclaimed the gospel of God’s grace. 17. [by]drawing near to the synagogue and hearing the words of the blind prophet. Those who work the land must cast seed. 9. we are not able to flee our sins and pursue righteousness.

) flee from the village because of the fire that destroys your houses. see the prophet. Clayton Croy. Periodic Exercise Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. 8. The priests asked one another if it was lawful for the king to have his own brother’s wife and to beget children by her. 17. The apostle asked. where will you flee when the judgment comes upon all the nations? 6. you will not fall under judgment. The priest exhorted all the little children.) that you do not have because you do not ask. 15. Then we will rejoice with them and will call them brothers. Men and women of the field cannot sit in the house and drink wine. Let the rulers repent of their sin and turn to God. Let us be faithful to our beloved race.) think that the king has authority over all things. Let the one who sits on the mountain come down and proclaim in the city the eternal wisdom that sanctifies all things. If our mother returns and sees how we. The beginning of faith is to be baptized in water. saying. and they began to speak [in] other tongues whenever the Spirit commanded them to bear witness. 10. The disciples preached to the multitudes in parables with the result that they were able to hear the Good News and open their hearts to God. 2. . Go. You (pl. For it is necessary for scribes to hear all the words spoken to them. drinking wine. 13. nor let us take their belongings. for before sowing seeds it is necessary to prepare the ground. For God is full of grace and wants all his children to have peace. you will never believe. Let us buy fruit and bread so that we may not be weak.” 3. she will not have mercy but will crucify us. All Rights Reserved. and he will say to you (pl. 11. have destroyed the house. 16. And all the sisters were filled with the Holy Spirit. “Walk in the light and speak the truth (true things) to one another. for it is necessary to eat good things in order to work in the field. for if you do not see signs. 7. the end of faith is to behold our Lord’s face and to be filled with the Spirit. but I say to you that everyone who keeps the commandments of God has authority over sin and death. If the ears of this scribe are not healed. for those who love the Lord ought to follow the things written in it. If you (pl. “How should we worship the King of Heaven? Should we offer gifts to the high priests? Should we seek power and authority?” 4. 14. he will not be able to do his work. Because the prophet knows all things. The faithful disciples have come in order to bear witness concerning the law.) do not fear the Lord. he knows that you (pl. but let us not seize the land of others. 12. 5.Set #4 (emphasizing lessons 21-26) 1. 9. 18. For in this way.

When I raised myself from the dead. Clayton Croy. . “You will remain under judgment until I come in glory. if you do these things. 20. For the Spirit will no longer abide in your (sing.” Periodic Exercise Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N.19. But I said to them. All Rights Reserved. then each of the priests wanted to be my disciple. Do not seize power for yourself and no longer take the bread of the weak.) house.

just as it is written in the scriptures. The one who sits on the throne in heaven is like a father. seeking a life of joy in another land. but you did not hear us and so you perished. 10. and no one had hope that he would be saved. All Rights Reserved. but let him give the bread back immediately and I will forgive him. “No one is able to see heaven. The little child asked the priest. rising up. God alone knows the time when the Son of Man will come again. 16. for he judges and rules. “The law is dead!” But a scribe answered. Someone who did not have wisdom said. We have come to the end of our work. One goes down to death. And the last goes through the whole earth. In that year the five elders laid hands on our faithful teacher and he was entrusted to the grace of God for his work. In a time of great fear we showed you the way of deliverance. 6. and one goes up to life. Therefore. for such kingdoms are perishing. 3. 4. Clayton Croy. you and your four children. Two hands are better than one hand. and it will be revealed to the seven angels who are standing before the throne. “Isn’t the law more than commandments and works?” 15. Shall we throw away the Greek language in the coming days? May it not be! Periodic Exercise Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. but whoever loves the Lord knows that to be in the presence of God [is] to be in heaven. But whoever goes up to the mountain and prays sows seeds of peace and righteousness. As many as travel in it have neither hope nor joy. 7. let both our son and our daughter work outside in the field until the end of the day. but it has no end. 5. for the prophets of God will sit at the right (hand) of the angels. The priest said to the king. let us cry out to the Spirit in the midst of the assembly/church. 11. 14. 2. 13. for the God of heaven gave us greater and stronger promises. But [he/she] is also like a mother. We do not have need of the promises of any ruler on earth. “Where is heaven. Let no one lay a hand on the prophet of God.” And the priest answered. Who is able to add many souls to the church except the Holy Spirit? Therefore. There are three paths in this world. Do not seek the kingdoms of this world. Whoever goes down into the city and buys gifts for the king does not do the will of God. “If your daughter had been happy. But seek rather the true kingdom in heaven. There was no bread nor water.Set #5 (emphasizing lessons 27-32) 1.” 12. I am not able to recognize the face of the man who took the remaining bread from my house. 17. . she would not have fled from your kingdom. for she loves and gives birth to children. 9. Twelve men were in a boat on the sea for ten days and ten nights. 8.

g}r (gar) 3. yuq© (sue Kay) 12. oÅkov (oy! cos) Lessons 6-7 1. bapt¾zw (Bob Tidzo) 5. £rgon (Ur gone) 9. basile¾a (Bossa Leia) 13. ‡rqw (ark O) 13. ›gã (Eggo) 15. g¾nomai ([a]gain. ›n (“n”) Lessons 8-9 1. dåron (dough. {postŸllw (a pastello) 8. {ll} (Allah) 7. met} (met a) 8. {l©jeia (a lay Thea) 14. gr}fw ([Mardi] Gras foe) 5. sÖn (soon) 4. e¼r©nh (a Ray neigh) 7. ›ge¾rw (a gay row) 6. . Ron) 5. ponhrËv (pawn a Ross) 5. pråtov (pro toss) 4. ploÀon (ploy on) 3. j}lassa (thaw Lhasa) 12. Os) 15. dŸ (de. {delf© (Adele Faye) 11. ÕpË (Hugh. aÔtËv (Ow! Toss) 12. {delfËv (a dell fosse) 13. |martwlËv (Hamor toe loss) Logomania Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. g« ([Enola] Gay) 10. per¾ (parry) 10. oßtov (hoo toss) 11. Clayton Croy. £qw (echo) 3. nekrËv (neck cross) 10. kat} (kata) 9.Answers to Logomania Lessons 1-3 1. tŸknon (tech nun) 6. nËmov (gnaw moss) 11. blŸpw (bleh! Poe) Lessons 4-5 1. jŸlw ([O-]thello) 15. Ðti (hottie) 7. oÞn ([spitt]oon) 10. eÕr¾skw (Hugh Risko) 9. oÔ (ooh) 8. All Rights Reserved. ÊdËv (Ha! DOS) 11. e¼m¾ (Amy) 7.) 4. íra (horo-) 6. doØlov (dew loss) 2. or duh) 14. ‰giov (hog Eos) 8. kËsmov (cos moss) 13. Oh my!) 14. lÖw (Lou O. mŸnw (minnow) 2. e¼v (ace) 6. {pË (a paw) 4. laËv (law. lËgov (law gos[pel]) 15. ‡rtov (our toss) 14. lŸgw (Lego) 2. ‡llov (a loss) 3. fwn© (faux neigh) 9. Pa) 2. Ê (ha!) 12.

{m©n (amain) 8.Lessons 10-11 1. f}gomai (fog! Oh my!) 5. I owe Sue Ney) 4. gun© (gooney) 3. eÅpon (a pawn) 6. dŸqomai ([Art] Deco Mai [Tai]) Lessons 12-13 1. Thane) 4. gnãsomai (no-sew Meye) 13. Lou Thaw) 13. ma) 13. {n©r (on air) 2. Înoma (on a ma) 15. Îyomai (Ops. prosfŸrw (prose Pharaoh) Lessons 16-17 1. bibl¾on (bib Leon) 6. kefal© (Kaye fillet) Lessons 14-15 1. Oh my!) 14. ›keÀ (a “k”) 3. spŸrma (spur. aÆma (Hi. såma (sew. {pŸrqomai (a perk. jŸlhma (Thelema) 14. ÕpŸr (hew pear) 10. nÖx (nukes) 7. shmeÀon (say mayon[naise]) 11. μljon (ale-thon) 3. did}skalov (Did Das call us?) 5. ëfjhn (oaf. ›gen©jhn (eggin’ a Thane) 5. e¼ (eh?) 7. Clayton Croy. deÀ (day) 6. pe¾jw (petho [~peso]) 12. Ó«ma (Ray Ma) Logomania Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. feÖgw ([if] you go) 10. oh my!) 14. ›l©luja (L. l©myomai (lame? So am I!) 15. ‡gw (ago) 2. dikaiosÖnh (Dick. £gnwka (Egg know Kaw) 15. ‡rqwn (our cone) 10. eÂrhka (a Wray caw) 7. eÅdon (a dawn) 2. ±dh (a day) 9. poll}kiv (Paula kiss) 8. oÚpw (ooh! Poe) 4. nØn (noon) 2. ma) 12. {naba¾nw (Ana Baino) 4. p¾ptw (pip toe) 12. p¾nw (pin “No”) 9. {pËstolov (a pasta loss) 11. par} ([Hip. Thane) 6.A. ma!) 9. sun}gw (Sue Naggo) 12. . p}lin (pollen) 5. fŸrw (Pharaoh) 10. a¼ãn (I own) 8. mŸllw (Mello [Yellow]) 7. tËte (taught a) 9. khrÖssw (Kay Russo) 11. hip] hurrah) 15. aÂrw (I row) 3. {no¾gw (annoy Gogh) 8. ›p¾ (a “p”) 13. ±qjhn (ache. All Rights Reserved. ÕpostrŸfw (hoop a stray foe) 14. pneØma (new ma) 11.

›mËv (a moss) 2. pat©r (pot air) 6. sunagwg© (Sue Naggo. gnwr¾zw (know Ridzo) Lessons 22-23 1.) 12. m©thr (may tear) 2. pl©rhv (play race) 8. seautoØ (Se Owtoo) 8.K. basileÖv (Bossy loose) 5. kãmh (comb a) 4. ›rg}zomai (Ur gods. eÅnai (a Nye) 3. {sp}zomai (asp odds. Oh my!) 11. kr¾siv (Chris hiss) 9. qar¾zomai (car ids? Oh my!) 9. {rq© (R. Ãna (henna) 15. íste (host a) 14.Lessons 18-19 1. ën (own) 10. peripatŸw (Perry Pateo) 6. Õp}rqw (Hugh Parko) 13. Clayton Croy. p‚v (poss[e]) 4. paralamb}nw (Par alum Bono) 9. sËv (sauce) 6. {lhj©v (all A Thace) 7. ¥kastov (Heck cost us) Lessons 24-25 1. plhrËw (Play. glåssa (glows a) 11. qe¾r (care) 5. grammateÖv (Gramma Toose) 4. ÕmŸterov (Hugh met Eros) 10. All Rights Reserved. {gaphtËv (a guppy toss) 10. graf© (Gras. œautoØ (How To) 14. jÖra (thorough[fare]) 13. Fay) 5. mhdŸ (made a) 12. {koloujŸw (a call. eÔaggŸlion (ewe on galleon) 10. q}riv ([I]carus) 12. tŸlov (tell us) Logomania Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. fulak© (fool a Kay) 2. Oh my!) 12. Owtoo) 7. Yoko) 7. {ll©lwn (all alone) 14. tuflËv (to floss) 3. ›mautoØ (M. Üdwr (Hugh door) 9. k}jhmai (Kathy Mai) 3. gay?) Lessons 20-21 1. ¨mŸterov (hay met Eros) 11. m© (may) 4. parag¾nomai (Par again! Oh my!) 8. Rahoe!) 5. a¼tŸw (eye Teo) 11. . £xesti (excess tea) 2. paid¾on (pie Dionne) 13. diãkw (D. fåv (foes) 7. mhkŸti (May Ketty) 8. poÖv ([pa]poose) 15. s}bbaton (sob a ton) 14. Îrov (our Ross) 6. spe¾rw (Spay Row) 13. Ðtan (hot on) 3. Lou Theo) 15. {sjen©v (Austin Ace) 15.

›lp¾v (El Pis[tolero]) 15. swthr¾a (so tarry a) 15. Ãsthmi (hissed Amy) 3.Lessons 26-27 1. mŸgav (megas[tar]) 15. qa¾rw (Cairo) 2. metanoŸw (met an Oeo) 14. toioØtov (toy you toss) 5. {f¾hmi (a fee. de¾knumi (Dake knew me) 11. Ðstiv (hos-tess) 12. tŸssarev (Tess arres[t]) 7. jug}thr (Thoo got air) 6. polÖv (paw loose) 2. treÀv (trace) 2. . £tov (a toss) 12. Õp}gw (Hugh Pago) 9. poØ (Pooh) 4. Amy) 13. {pËllumi (appall Lou Mee) 10. Ross) 13. mËnov (Ma nos[talgia]) 14. oÅda (Oy! Da!) 7. d¾dwmi (ditto me) 6. kre¾sswn (Cray-sewn) 13. m‚llon (mall on) 8. loipËv (Loy pas[trami]) Lessons 30-32 1. qar} (kara[te]) 3. Teo) Lessons 28-29 1. Ðv (Hoss) 3. oÔde¾v (oohed ace) 14. parad¾dwmi (pair o’ ditto me) 7. All Rights Reserved. Clayton Croy. kratŸw (craw. me¾zwn (maid zone) 9. {n¾sthmi (honest Amy) 4. eÆv (hays[tack]) 9. dŸka (deck o’) 6. presbÖterov (press “Boot Eros”) 5. ± (eh?) 10. ple¾wn (play on) 11. mhde¾v (made ace) 4. Ðsov (Ha! Sauce) 11. t¾jhmi (tith Amy) 8. dÖo (doo-wah) Logomania Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. {grËv (‘og. O) 10. £xw (X. ïde (hoed a) 5. a¼ãniov (I own Eos) 8. mak}riov (mock Arias) 12.

Where does Carmen remain? Carmen has life with the children of glory in the church. .) sending Carmen from the earth into the heavens? We are not sending Carmen into the heavens. Does Carmen remain behind a stone? No.Where in the World Is Carmen San Diego? (Lesson 7) Where is Carmen San Diego? Do you (pl. Are you (pl. Are evil people throwing Carmen out of the kingdom? No. Is Carmen with the slaves in the holy land? No. Clayton Croy.) see Carmen in the path? We do not see Carmen in the path. Does Carmen have life with the prophets in the desert? No.) believe that Carmen is in the heart of the sea? We do not want to believe that Carmen is in the heart of the sea. Are they sending Carmen through the desert and around the land and to the God of heaven? No. Do you (pl. All Rights Reserved. © 2007 N.

“It is necessary for these children to die. But the priests saw them and cried out. And so the children did not die in that day. But then the teacher of righteousness came and wrote these words on the ground: “The glory of God cannot be destroyed with stones.Greek Story Time (Lesson 14) Evil children threw stones into (or “at”) the temple and took the garments of the priests.” And the teacher returned to his house. and they became disciples of the teacher. for the temple is holy and children ought to enter it in peace. Then the Lord of love began to turn the hearts of the priests to the truth. © 2007 N. . Clayton Croy. All Rights Reserved.

6. and another has not yet come to take his place. Often you (sing. The evil sisters have taken both our books and our wine and we are not able to find them. All Rights Reserved. can you proclaim it to the sinners? 5. “For I have seen the sign and my heart has been healed. for they did not take the beautiful garments.” 7. 3. The authorities have spoken and the slaves have been released. 2. Therefore. .) used to go down to the sea and hear the teacher of righteousness. The child came into the assembly and cried out.” 9. © 2007 N.Additional Exercises — Lesson 15 1. 8. Evil people have destroyed the temple. Clayton Croy. I am confident that the demons of this world have fallen and the Kingdom of God has drawn near. Have you heard the prophet? The people say that he has come from God and has spoken to angels. “Behold. but now the teacher has died. In those days my son was small. “Glory to God. it is necessary to gather stones and prepare a house for our God.” my brother said. I have found a dead man in the road. If you have not yet come to know the love of the Lord. 10. 4. but now he has become a man and he himself has a son.

Crying out and throwing stones. Ê |martwlÌv Ê {koÖwn tÌn lËgon toØ jeoØ eÕr©sei zwªn ›n t° ›sq}t¬ ¨mŸrƒ. . kr}zontev ka¿ b}llontev l¾jouv. Adjectival (attributive) — Used with a Noun.) fled into the desert and prayed. ¨ {postellomŸnh gunª £qei tªn ›xous¾an did}skein to×v nËmouv toØ kur¾ou. Clayton Croy. generally with the article. Adverbial Participles — Predicate position. Adjectival (substantive) — Used as a Noun. The sinner who hears the word of God will find life in the last day. tÌ pneØma tÌ kataba¾non {pÌ toØ jrËnou toØ oÔranoØ khrÖssei tªn {l©jeian. The woman who is being sent has the authority to teach the laws of the Lord. 3. [As] the mouth of the earth was opening. lacking the article. The [ones] who are not working for the kingdom desire the glory of this world. All Rights Reserved. {no¾gontov toØ stËmatov t«v g«v. the evil brothers destroyed our house. e¼serqËmenov e¼v tÌ ½erÌn ka¿ aÂrwn to×v ÉfjalmoÖv mou eÅdon ‡ggelon. The spirit who comes down from the throne of heaven proclaims the truth. 2. you (pl. o½ diãkontev to×v majht~v ›l©lujan e¼v tÌ ½erÌn eÕr¾skein tÌn did}skalon. œwr}kate t~v œtoimazoÖsav ‡rton ka¿ oÅnon toÀv {postËloiv. generally with the article. © 2007 N. o½ ponhro¿ {delfo¿ £lusan tÌn oÅkon ¨mån. The [ones] who persecute the disciples have come into the temple to find the teacher. Have you seen the [women] who are preparing bread and wine for the apostles? o½ mª ›rgazËmenoi t° basile¾ƒ jŸlousi tªn dËxan toØ kËsmou toØtou.Present Tense Participles 1. I saw an angel. ›fÖgete e¿v tªn £rhmon ka¿ proshÖxasje. [As I was] entering into the temple and lifting up my eyes.

The [men/people] who have turned to God are going up to the temple. The child who threw stones into the church will not see the face of God. We believe in the prophet of truth and the ones who sent him. toØ didask}lou paragenomŸnou. Having saved [the] sinners by his death. Adjectival (attributive) — Used with a Noun. Do you know the [women] who entered the synagogue and cried out? pisteÖomen e¼v tÌn prof©thn t«v {lhje¾av ka¿ to×v pŸmyantav aÔtËn. generally with the article. ¨ {delfª ¨ proseuxamŸnh tê kur¾æ gnãsetai tÌ jŸlhma toØ jeoØ. Clayton Croy. the Lord returned to heaven. sãsav to×v |martwlo×v tê jan}tæ aÔtoØ. 3. Ê kÖriov ÕpŸstreyen e¼v oÔranËn. the woman taught them to the people. o½ diãxantev ¨m‚v ‡njrwpoi oÔq eÕr©sontai e¼r©nhn ›n t° kard¾ƒ aÔtån. [After] having written words of love. © 2007 N. gr}yasa Ó©mata t«v {g}phv. The men/persons who persecuted us will not find peace in their heart[s]. o½ ›pistrŸyantev prÌv tÌn jeÌn {naba¾nousin e¼v tÌ ½erËn. . o½ doØloi ±negkan tÌn oÅnon ka¿ tÌn ‡rton. generally with the article. Adjectival (substantive) — Used as a Noun. tÌ tŸknon tÌ balÌn l¾jouv e¼v tªn ›kklhs¾an oÔk Îyetai tÌ prËswpon toØ jeoØ. The teacher having arrived. ginãskete t~v e¼seljoÖsav tªn sunagwgªn ka¿ krax}sav. The sister who prayed to the Lord will know the will of God. the slaves brought the wine and the bread.Aorist Participles 1. lacking the article. 2. Adverbial Participles — Predicate position. All Rights Reserved. ¨ gunª ›d¾daxen aÔt~ tÌn laËn.

the crowd went out of the synagogue.Nuances of the Adverbial Participle (Note: Some of the functional classifications given below might be debated. How will we teach the little children [if] we do not know the law and the prophets? Function CONDITIONAL 4. Ê {pËstolov ›d¾dasken ›n tê ½erê doxazËmenov ÕpÌ ka¿ tån majhtån ka¿ tån {rqËntwn. påv did}xomen t~ mikr~ tŸkna mª ginãskontev tÌn nËmon ka¿ to×v prof©tav.) 1. ›rgazËmenoi di~ t«v nuktÌv Ðlhv ¨toim}sate ‡rtouv taÀv gunaÀkev ka¿ toÀv tŸknoiv. but they represent the intent of the writer. . Function CAUSAL 3. [Because] we are in prison. We have come to the temple [in order to] offer gifts to the Lord of heaven and earth. Function MANNER 8. [Although] he was about to die. Function PURPOSE 6. The apostle was teaching in the temple [and was] being praised by both the disciples and the rulers. Ê Îqlov ›x«ljen ›k t«v sunagwg«v. in awe). Clayton Croy. Function TEMPORAL 2. Function MEANS 7. All Rights Reserved. the faithful slave was not crying out to the authorities to be released. Function CIRCUMSTANTIAL © 2007 N. Ðte ¨ {delfª ¨mån §gŸrjh ›k tån nekrån ›x©ljomen ›k t«v sunagwg«v jaum}zontev. [By] working through the whole night you prepared loaves of bread for the women and the children. ›lhlÖjamen prÌv tÌ ½erÌn prosfŸrontev dåra tê kur¾æ toØ oÔranoØ ka¿ t«v g«v. mŸllwn {pojaneÀn Ê pistÌv doØlov oÔk £krazen taÀv ›xous¾aiv {poluj«nai. we are not able to go and greet our brothers. While the teacher was still saying these things. we went forth from the synagogue marveling (or. £ti taØta lŸgontov toØ didask}lou. Întev ›n fulak° oÔ dun}meja ›ljeÀn ka¿ {sp}zesjai to×v {delfo×v ¨mån. Function CONCESSION 5. When our sister was raised from the dead.

{ll! oÔk £qousin p¾stin oÔd¡ {g}phn. e¼ dŸ tiv £qei p¾stin. but they do not have faith nor love. Who is preaching the word to the sinners? 2. t¾nov e¼s¿n t~ kal~ ploÀa taØta. We know and see who you are — the Holy One of God. swj©setai ›n taÀv ›sq}taiv ¨mŸraiv. God will be glorified in heaven. 6. Ê ‰giov toØ jeoØ. majht©v tiv μn ›n t° pËlei toØ basilŸwv ›ke¾nou. A certain disciple was in the city of that king. t¾v khrÖssei tÌn lËgon toÀv |martwloÀv. 7. t¾nwn lËgwn {koÖeiv {pÌ toØ didask}lou toØ ›n tê ½erê. ›p¿ t¾ Îrov kaj¾zousin o½ jeo¿ tån ›jnån.” 10. tin¡v grammatŸwn £legon. . Certain scribes were saying. To whom are you offering these gifts of bread and wine? 8. t¾ni prosfŸrete taØta t~ dåra ‡rtou te ka¿ oÂnou. 11. All Rights Reserved. I was not able to find any slaves in the field. t¾ |mart}nousin a½ ponhra¿ {delfa¿ kat~ toØ kur¾ou. t¾na ›jer}peusen Ê pistÌv prof©thv. 14. If someone does good works on earth. oÔk ›dun}mhn eÕreÀn tin~v doÖlouv ›n tê {grê. Some are preaching good news. Clayton Croy. 13. Whom did the faithful prophet heal? 3. 4. É jeÌv dox}sjhsetai ›n oÔranê. e tiv poieÀ kal~ £rga ›p¿ g«v. Why are the evil sisters sinning against the Lord? 12. OÔq œtoim}somen t~ bibl¾a. Whose are these beautiful boats? 5. On what mountain do the gods of the gentiles dwell? 9. tin¡v eÔaggel¾zontai. But if someone has faith. “We will not prepare the books. ginãskomen ka¿ blŸpomen t¾v eÅ sÖ.Answers to “Any/who” Exercises 1. What (sort of) words are you hearing from the teacher in the temple? Any/Who Exercise Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. he/she will be saved in the last days.

DËxa jeê. t¾ poieÀte taØta t~ £rga ›n tê sabb}tæ. All Rights Reserved. 16. We did not see anyone in the synagogue nor in the city. Clayton Croy. oÔk eÂdomen tin~ ›n t° sunagwg° oÔd¡ ›n t° pËlei. . crying out. Why are you doing these works on the Sabbath? Any/Who Exercise Answers for A Primer of Biblical Greek © 2007 N. And a certain woman was in the assembly. ka¿ μn tiv gunª ›n t° ›kklhs¾ƒ kr}zousa.15. “Glory to God!” 17.